Home

LS9-16/32 Owner`s Manual

Contents

1. N 12 1516 LR C 12 78 LR MIX CASCADE 0071 16 CASCADE IN H E LEE Sama inel 2 OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUT PATCH I IL 1 Sior ide gt H H H i STEREO CASCADE OUTLR MONO C lt PATCH SLOT2 1 16 gt CASCADE I LL LL S IN I I MATRIX CASCADE OUTI 8 TOOUTPUTPATCH SELECT 4 H 1 H H To OUTPUT PATCH H 274 To OUTPUT PATCH Ed H 1 4 EN OUTPUT PATCH S t CUE CASCADE OUT LR gt gt To OUTPUT PATCH 1 TALKBACK Lot lt r Lieut 1 16132 INPUT NO LLL 2 SELECT ON UE a a eae NC come ie user A FU Li co t edet a hee m umi MBVMASTER CLONE E MIX 1 16
2. 2 4 5 9 0 n m 1m 15 7 o 20 2 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 32 STIN 2 STIN 3 Es Su su sm sm sa sa SE su su E su os cuc cu wx wx cuc cuc cue cue cur cuc cue cur cue cue cue c cu cuc cu cuc Om Cae cose c ee ec oem Coe coe cae cae cae c ce ee ag S S ag E S a mmc S S St St at ucc s Se at EN D es e eS e os e e 22 Se 2 gm ms agas cem sss sg a Ee Ss Su Se D Se EC Se Sx Ss Ss e Ss e Sa Sa Ss Ss Se Su Ge E gt B D E B S gs gs eB eG Sa Ss S2 Se S g8 ams e ae E Be 5 eme ems Se ee Sa Se Se Ss Se Se Se Sa Se Sa Se Se Se
3. T oj eL 0 o 0 e0 Channel modules ST IN channels 12 f LS9 16 32 Owners Manual Differences between the LS9 16 and LS9 32 LS9 s channel structure The names of the LAYER section keys differ between the LS9 16 and LS9 32 LS9 16 LAYER LAYER 1 16 key gt 17 32 key 1 16 17 32 LAYER MASTER key LAYER CUSTOM FADER key MASTER CUSTOM FADER Introduction m LS9 32 LAYER LAYER 1 32 key LAYER 33 64 key 1 32 33 64 inl MASTER CUSTOM FADER LAYER MASTER key LAYER CUSTOM FADER key In conjunction with this difference there are also differences in the numbering of the channel modules on the panel and the channels that are assigned to each fader layer In this owner s manual whenever there is a difference between the LS9 16 model and the LS9 32 model specifica tions that apply only to the 159 32 model are enclosed in curly brackets e g INPUT jac
4. Gea ee eee 22 mem due es eem TS ee Dues 001 001 065 065 001 129 065 193 002 002 066 066 002 130 066 194 003 003 067 067 003 131 067 195 004 004 068 068 004 132 068 196 005 005 069 069 005 133 069 197 006 006 070 070 006 134 070 198 007 007 071 071 007 135 071 199 008 008 072 072 008 136 072 200 009 009 073 073 009 137 073 201 010 010 074 074 010 138 074 202 011 011 075 075 011 139 075 203 012 012 076 076 012 140 076 204 013 013 077 077 013 141 077 205 014 014 078 078 014 142 078 206 015 015 079 079 015 143 079 207 016 016 080 080 016 144 080 208 017 017 081 081 017 145 081 209 018 018 082 082 018 146 082 210 019 019 083 083 019 147 083 211 020 020 084 084 020 148 084 212 021 021 085 085 021 149 085 213 022 022 086 086 022 150 086 214 023 023 087 087 023 151 087 215 024 024 088 088 024 152 088 216 025 025 089 089 025 153 089 217 026 026 090 090 026 154 090 218 027 027 091 091 027 155 091 219 028 028 092 092 028 156 092 220 029 029 093 093 029 157 093 221 030 030 094 094 030 158 094 222 031 031 095 095 031 159 095 223 032 032 096 096 032 160 096 224 033 Scene 033 097 Scene 097 033 Scene 097 scene 034 034 098 098 034 162 098 226 035 035 099 099 035 163 099 227 036 036 100 100 036 164 100 228 037 037 101 10
5. cue cue cue cue Core com coe core case cee come Cosel Comm Come te Cue cee Come S E St St ar 2 67 a ER St 27 St S Ss Ss Ex gx Ez S4 E SZ Ss Sz Sz S2 Ss Si ES S Ov ON ov 1 gt gt e H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H RN STEREO mxr mxo man LAYER section key LAYER 1 16 INPUT CH 1 16 STEREO ST IN 1 2 LAYER 17 32 INPUT CH 17 32 STEREO ST IN 3 4 LAYER MASTER MIX 1 16 STEREO LAYER CUSTOM FADER Any desired channels STEREO Any desired channels 1 2 3 14 15 16 17 24 25 31 32 STEREO STIN 1 STIN 2 STIN 3 STIN 4 EM m Coen iie ns coe Cue S Erie MN LEM cas or or or oe or or os os os D Se Se Ei Se Bel Be B gi E EX Es Ea 55 Ss Se Be Bal Ss S Ss Ss 5 amp s St Ss E Dol Bel Ss amp
6. YAMAHA a PEE as i i e o 0000008 0 8 0 a o 8 ol efo 2 eC omoi y 28 off a oll lll Channel module section p 17 STEREO MASTER section p 18 USB connector side panel to the right of the display p 22 Data entry section p 22 ST IN stereo input section p 17 USER DEFINED KEYS section p 18 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Parts and their function 15 Top panel 16 1889 82 MIX MATRIX SELECT section p 20 SELECTED CHANNEL section p 21 Data entry section El Stereo meter Cue section p 20 p 22 DISPLAY ACCESS section p 19 USB connector side panel to the right of the display p 22 O LAYER section p 19 Display p 20 YAMAHA
7. lt BAL B STIN 1L 4R POST PREEQ EQOUT DYNAIOUT DYNA2OUT PRE FADER POSTON LO MONO Tost PAN MODE 11 METER METER METER METER METER METER LR MONO jo SL PRE HPF GR METER GR METER LEVEL fi pO METER GATE COMP 1 TOLGR i rt HPF Arr jy BAND DUCK H COMPAND SIR Ir EXPAND DE ESSER COMP i tt PRE HPF PREEQ POST EQ mT CUE PREFADER d 222 77777 Ke mo i coco Ee pco SefPOSTEQ POST ON t JMN H 13 15 pTNER oe H E 2 1 STEREO PRE FADER PFL POST ON AFL POST PAN Lam QN gt ON CUEL X PREFADER PFL POST ONJATL POSTPANR gt on CUER 1 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual J 53 Signal flow for input channels 54 INPUT PATCH This assigns input signals to the input channels phase Switches the phase of the input signal HPF High Pass Filter This is a high pass filter that cuts the region below the specified frequency ATT attenuator Attenuates boosts the level of the input signal 4 BAND EQ 4 band equalizer A parametric EQ with fo
8. 25 MISC SETUP screen 206 MIX bus types 14 DUSS izes saci 213 MIX cliannels c trn 13 67 Sending to MATRIX buses 75 Sending to STEREO MONO bus 71 MIX MATRIX SELECT section 20 Ase Ie iT 186 Monitor PUNCH OM ss diio dr reis 145 146 MONITOR 19 MONITOR screen 146 channels 13 67 MUTE field 82 Mute 121 MUTE GROUP 121 123 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Appendices e 283 Index 284 N Network address essen 216 NETWORK 25 216 0 OMNIFOQUT JaGKS 41 itte trie eee ete peter ta 24 1 9 153 OSCILLATOR 153 Output channels erret cte eterne 13 67 95 OVE IMIOW Pte a 9 P in recae ette ien ea rens 21 82
9. Connect microphones or line level devices to INPUT jacks 1 16 1 32 When the 1 59 is in its initial state the signal from each INPUT jack is patched to the following channels For the LS9 16 For the LS9 32 Analog input jacks Input channels Analog input jacks Input channels INPUT jacks 1 16 INPUT channels 1 16 INPUT jacks 1 32 INPUT channels 1 32 NOTE e This patching can be changed as necessary gt p 99 For example if you want to connect a stereo line level device you can assign two INPUT jacks to a ST IN channel so that the left and right channels can be operated in tandem for convenience LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual 41 Connections 42 B Analog output CONNECTIONS Monitor speakers Power amp Monitor speakers foldback Main speakers OMNI OUT jacks 1 8 1 16 can be connected to your main speakers monitor speakers foldback or mon itor speakers for the engineer When the LS9 is in its initial state the signal from the following channels is patched to each OMNI OUT jack This patching can be changed as necessary gt p 95 For the LS9 16 For the LS9 32 Analog output jacks Output channels Analog output jacks Output channels OM
10. 158 W Lu EU 268 Word 14 46 206 WORD CLOCK IN OUT connectors 25 WORD CLOCK popup window 46 206 Index LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Appendices e 285 286 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual M il LS9 16 LS9 32 Block Diagram nho ba x MIX CASCADE OUT
11. parallel Parameter Range Description DELAY L 0 0 1000 0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY R 0 0 1000 0 ms Right channel delay time FB DLY 0 0 1000 0 ms Feedback delay time Feedback gain plus values for FB GAIN 99 to 49996 normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio Delay and early reflections bal DLY ER 0 10096 ance 096 all delay 10096 all early reflections THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz r LPF THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency S Hall L Hall Ran TYPE dom Revers Plate Type of early reflection simulation Spring ROOMSIZE 0 1 20 0 Reflection spacing Early reflections decay characteris LIVENESS 0 10 tics 0 dead 10 live INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins DIFF 0 10 Spread DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density ER NUM 1 19 Number of early reflections SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off Used in conjunction with TEMPO 1 NOTEE to determine left channel DELAY L Used in conjunction with TEMPO NOTER to determine right channel DELAY R Used in conjunction with TEMPO NOTETB to determine FB DLY RH BRGIM Bh 4s B 4 4 4 des Maximum value depends on the tempo setting LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual series Parameter Range Description DELAY L 0 0 1000 0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY R 0 0 1000 0 ms Right channel de
12. CD HA GAIN encoder When an INPUT ST IN channel is selected The encoder will adjust the gain of the internal head amp or an external head amp device AD8HR con nected to a rear panel slot 5 DYNAMICS 2 encoder When an INPUT ST IN channel is selected The encoder will adjust the threshold of Dynamics 2 e g compressor When any other channel is selected The encoder will not do anything The PAD will be internally switched on or off when the HA gain is adjusted between 14 dB and 13 dB Keep in mind that noise may be generated if there is a difference between EQ FREQU ENCY encoder the Hot and Cold output impedance of the external device connected to the INPUT connector when using phantom EQ GAIN encoder power These encoders adjust the Q frequency and gain of the band selected by keys 9 42 6 EQ Q encoder When any other channel is selected The encoder will not do anything 2 PAN encoder When an INPUT ST IN channel is selected When a MIX channel is selected The encoder will adjust the panning of the signal sent to the L R channels or the L C R channels in the case of LCR mode of the STEREO bus If a MIX channel set to stereo is selected the encoder will adjust the output balance of the left and right channels When a MATRIX channel is selected If a monaural MATRIX channel is selected the encoder will not do anything If a stereo MATRIX
13. The SEND button is shown only if the OUT button is on How ever if both the IN button and OUT button are on the parame ters corresponding to SEND will automatically be subject to recall If you want to cancel the restrictions you specified in step 3 so that all parameters will be subject to recall turn the ALL button on When you turn on the ALL button all other buttons for that scene will be turned off Turning on any other but ton will turn off the ALL button Make Focus function settings for other Scenes as described in steps 2 4 Recall a scene for which you ve made Focus settings If buttons other than ALL are turned on for the scene only the parameters whose buttons are on will be recalled If the ALL button is turned on for the scene all parameters will be updated wr gt For scenes other than the scene number currently selected in the scene list check marks show the state of the Focus func tion settings Scenes for which Focus settings are made are indicated by a FOCUS indication in the STATUS field of the SCENE LIST screen The Focus function can be used in conjunction with the Recall Safe function gt p 140 Channels or parameters that are excluded from Recall operations by either Focus or Recall Safe will not be recalled LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Scene memory lt 6 139 Using the Recall Safe function Using the Recall Safe function Recall S
14. m 20 Ges SHIFT LOCK 5 CANCEL D SCENE TITLE field This field lets you enter a title for the scene a maxi mum of sixteen characters Assign a title to the scene as desired For details on entering text refer to Assigning a name p 34 Move the cursor to the STORE button located at the bottom of the SCENE STORE popup window and press the ENTER key The SCENE STORE popup window will close and a dialog box will ask you to confirm the Store operation STORE CONFIRMAT ION Store to SCENE MEMORY 001 CRNCEL 7 To execute the Store operation move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The current mix settings will be stored to the scene number you selected in step 3 If you decide to cancel the Store operation move the cursor to the CANCEL button instead of the OK but ton and press the ENTER key NOTE e f you store to a scene number in which a scene is already stored the previous data will be overwritten You have the option of making settings so that the Store Con firmation dialog box does not appear gt p 194 8 If you want to cancel the scene overwrite store operation move the cursor to the STORE UNDO button and press the ENTER key Immediately after overwrite storing a scene you can use the STORE UNDO button to undo cancel the most recently executed scene store operation Whe
15. 30 Copying pasting 136 e EE 138 Initializing current 45 0 138 Recalling ice eres 131 Sorting and renaming 134 StOFitigi ie tern tensed 129 SCENE MEMORY 19 SCENE PLAYBACK LINK screen 113 SELECTED CH VIEW screen 31 82 Selected chantiel eee 30 SELECTED CHANNEL section 21 81 Adjusting send levels 84 Assigning to mute group 89 Basic 29 Direct output settings 88 Dynamics 5 87 misso 85 HPF EQ settings eee 87 Insert 08 2222221 88 Output 86 86 Recall Safe settings 88 Sending signal to MIX bus 62 Turning a channel on off 89 SELECTED SEND encoder 21 SEND field tfe teris 82 SENDS ON FADER mode 65 78 SETUP cipes iere 19 edes ost ea Qua
16. 27 Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section 29 Selecting functions 2 2 29 Viewing the display eere 30 Constant display 30 Main ar a terte m 31 The on screen user 32 Assigning a name cessere 34 Using the tool buttons eee 35 About the tool 35 Using libraries iodinea 35 Initializing 0 22222222 38 Copying and pasting settings 39 Comparing two sets of settings 39 4 Connections and setup 41 jen mec 41 Installing an option 44 Setup required when starting up 45 Returning the current scene to the initial state 45 Word clock connection and settings 46 HA head amp 47 Sending an input channel signal to the STEREO bus eene 50 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual 5 Input channel operations 03 Signal flow for input channels 53 Specifying the channel name icon 55 HA head amp 57 Sending t
17. 217 32 C Calibration function 223 224 Cascade 209 CH CLEAR 128 CH COPY SGCEIOBD a 126 5 e tanen 124 CH MOVE SCI68n 2e eren enn 127 CHANNEL JOB key 19 Channel 124 Channel module 17 Channel parameters 126 ec 128 MOWING e 127 COMPANDER HARD COMPANDER H 231 COMPANDER SOFT COMPANDER S 231 COMPARE 39 COMPRESSOR 2 2 encre epu neg oett 230 Connections 41 Console 197 Constant display 30 CONTRAST field esses 217 Control changes ci dace 183 Cooling fan vent 25 COPY bUtO i eoe nier tenor ren 39 Cue TUNCHON zusenden 145 148 CUE KEY 149 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual 56 6 149 CUISOM 32 CUSTOM FADER 91 Custom fader 91 D Data entry Sectlon iei iiie rrt ede 22 DE ESSER eoe Reiter Die eec 231 DEF button ettet 3
18. 65 al Ca ik 2 0 E SHIFT LOCK CANCEL 188 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual 3 Enter the password in the NEW PASSWORD field then move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The password can be up to eight characters For details on entering a password refer to Assigning a name gt p 34 Creating a user authentication key Here s how to create a user authentication key and save it on USB memory A user authentication key can be created only by an Administrator or Power User The user level can be specified when the authentication key is created but the custom fader layer user defined key settings and preference settings will be carried over from the user who is currently logged in 1 Connect USB memory to the USB connec tor 2 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section press the SETUP key repeatedly to access the USER SETUP screen CREATE USER KEY button 00 Initial Data R ADMIN SETUP RENT USER STORRGE Administrator 5202893 PREFERENCE USER DEFINED KEYS SAVE LOAD a T C1 USER LEVEL USER LEVEL User Level settings 3 Move the cursor to the CREATE USER KEY button and press the ENTER key Logging in The CREATE USER KEY ind ill i e In order to operate the 1 59 you must log in as Admin istrator Guest or a User User settings for the Administrator and Guest are saved in the consol
19. 7 FADE TIME field This field lets you make Fade function settings for a scene saved in scene memory Use the buttons located in the center to make Fade function settings for the scene selected in the list shown in the left side of the screen For other scenes you can only view the set tings 2 CURRENT field This field lets you make Fade function settings for the scene you re currently operating When you recall a scene the Fade function settings of that scene are shown in this field 3 SETUP popup button This button displays the FADE TIME popup window 2 FADING button This button switches the Fade function on off for each scene 5 Fade time This indicates the fade time the time over which the fader will reach the new value Scene memory LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual J 143 Using the Fade function 2 Make sure that the cursor is located some where other than the constant display area and use the dial or the DEC INC keys to select the scene for which you want to make Fade function settings 3 Move the cursor to the SET popup button and press the ENTER key to access the FADE TIME popup window In this popup window you can select the channels to which Fade will be applied and adjust the fade time FRDE TIME Lo 8 Press SEL of member CHs to enab FRDE TIME function CRNCEL CD Channel display field The channels to which Fade is applied are highlighted 2 FADE TIME kno
20. 1 59 slot you ll be able to remotely control parameters such as the external head amp s phantom power 48 on off gain and HPF from the LS9 For an example of actual connections refer to the owner s manual of the I O card ID Model name 48V master Remotely controlling an external This displays information for the external HA mounted in the rack The ID number is assigned auto head amp matically as 1 to 2 1 to 4 in the order in which devices are connected to the I O card This area also Here s how to control the external head amp subse shows the on off status of the master phantom power quently called external HA from the LS9 via an I O card installed in a slot 3 Virtual racks These are two four racks in which remotely control 1 Connect the LS9 and external HA lable external HA units can be mounted If an external Refer to the owner s manual for the I O card and for HA is mounted its settings gain setting phantom the external head amp power on off HPF on off are shown When you move the cursor to a rack and press the ENTER key the 2 Repeatedly press the RACK 5 8 key to EXTERNAL HA popup window for that rack will access the EXTERNAL HA screen appear The EXTERNAL HA screen includes the following 4 EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT popup but items ton 1 This button accesses the EXTERNAL PORT SELECT popup window where you can specify the 000 In tial 2 input ports
21. Ducking is commonly used for voice over applications which the background music level is reduced automatically when an announcer speaks When the KEY IN source signal level exceeds the specified THRESHOLD the output level is attenuated by a specified amount RANGE Parameter Range Description THRESHOLD dB 54 to 0 55 points This determines the level of trigger signal KEY IN required to activate ducking RANGE dB 70 to 0 71 points This determines the amount of attenuation when ducking is activated ATTACK ms 0 120 121 points This determines how soon the signal is ducked once the ducker has been triggered HOLD ms 44 1kHz 0 02 ms 2 13 sec This determines how long ducking remains active once the trigger signal has fallen 48kHz 0 02 ms 1 96 sec 160 points below the THRESHOLD level This determines how soon the ducker returns to its normal gain once the trigger sig DECAY ms BINE Gms AB SEC nal level drops below the threshold The value is expressed as the duration required 48kHz 5 ms 42 3 sec 160 points for the level to change by 6 dB I O Characteristics Output Level THRESHOLD Input Level THRESHOLD Time Series Analysis Input Level Input Signal Output Signal E HOLD 8 S 5 o o LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual 229 Dynamics Parameters E COMPRESSOR cc ccc cc ccc 0009090
22. INSERT i TOMP To TOLCR 5 d HPF Arr 4BAND DUCK COMPAND INSERT i STR g I T EQ EXPAND DEESSER f PRE HPF PREEQ POSTEQ PRE FADER PRE EQ SSKEVIN CUE PREFADER MW 5 INSERT OUT Keyin Fiter INSERT OUT Keyn 4 E Pool MIX1 3 15 6 E MIX13 160UT 1 1 f 2 CH I 89 16 17 2425 32 POSTEQH6 1 FIXED j MIX2 4 16 z CH 1 8 9 16 17 24 25 32 33 ott Ex 50 57 G4 POST EQS gt i a POST 5 jc MN ee L ToMIX PRE EQ PRE FADER POST ON i LEVEL VARI SON r LEVEL feo OPISPISIUE E Le iN i ru PRE EQ PRE FADER POST ON ga Eo 3i o p i 1 1 STEREO TEN PRAE E tnc ais PRE FADER PFL POST ONJAFL POST PAN L gi o CUEL X PRE FADER PFL POST ONJAFL POST PAN R a RN ON CUER _ _______________________ E CHE ENEUNE ST IN channels 1 lt These channels are used to process stereo signals When the 1 59 is in the default state the outputs of virtual racks 5 8 are assigned to these channels M 0 MIX 57 MATRIX CUE 12 1516 LR CO 12 78 LR
23. TO MATRIX LEVEL 1 8 MATRIX send levels 1 8 This adjusts the send level of the signal sent from the MIX channels STEREO L R channel or MONO C channel to each MATRIX bus 1 8 As the position from which the signal is sent to the MATRIX bus you can choose either pre fader or after the channel on off Signal flow for output channels Specifying the channel name icon If the send destination MATRIX bus is set to stereo you can use the TO MATRIX PAN knob in the screen to adjust the panning between the two MATRIX buses If the send source is the STEREO channel or a stereo MIX channel use the TO MATRIX BALANCE knob to adjust the vol ume balance of the left and right channels sent to the two MATRIX buses INSERT You can patch the desired output input ports to insert an external device such as an effect processor You can switch the insert out and insert in locations METER This meters the level of the output channel You can switch the position at which the level is detected Specifying the channel name icon Here s how to specify the channel name and icon for each output channel 1 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section HOME key The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the display 2 Use the LAYER section to select the fader layer that contains the desired output chan nel In order to select a MATRIX channel MONO channel on the LS9 16 you must assign the channel to the custom fader layer
24. ow ow ov ov ON ON ox ww ov ov ON M 53 55 f e e a e a7 EJ J 3 mxa mxs wb moo moie Ei moca FE x2 mi FE 33 ma 1 Ell Channel module section p 17 STEREO MASTER section p 18 El USER DEFINED KEYS section p 18 ST IN stereo input section p 17 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual E Channel module sectione eooo In this section you can operate the main parameters of the input channels and output channels as well as the monitor output Use the LAYER section gt p 19 to select the channels that are mapped to this section CD SEL key This key selects the channel to be operated When you press this key to make the LED light
25. 1 Use the various controllers of the top panel or the buttons in the display to set the mix parameters as desired The number and title of the currently selected scene are shown in the center of the constant display area Initial Settins Test mode setting STORE RECALL UNDO You can also move the cursor to the scene number in the con stant display area and use the dial or the DECI INC keys to change the scene number This scene number will blink if the most recently stored or recalled scene is different than the currently selected scene LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual J 129 Using scene memories e Simply changing the scene number does not actually execute the store or recall operation To execute the store or recall operation you must use the STORE RECALL buttons in the SCENE MEMORY screen as explained in step 2 and follow ing or in Recalling a scene gt p 131 or use a user defined key gt p 132 to which you ve assigned the scene store recall function 2 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section press the SCENE MEMORY key repeatedly to access the SCENE LIST screen In this screen you can perform operations such as stor ing or recalling a scene DISPLAY ACCESS C SCENE MONITOR MEMORY SETUP CHANNEL JOB 2 RECORDER METER 5 RACK SCENE MEMORY key Check 0 0 1 ADMIN copy CLEAR SCENE LIST tial
26. 34 4 Bio STEREO OUT LR wo our i e 5 METER MONITOR L ee EM E METER MONITOR R MONITOR OUT R UN NEUE gt 5 MONITOR MONO C METER monitor MONITOR OUT MONOC t gurpur pares E CE MA ON RIS DEFINE e MONO C mE n gt MX MONTORDIMMON MONITOR LEVEL STEREO OUT MAX 8ch MONO C MIX OUT1 16 gt MATRIX OUT1 8 gt MONITOR SELECT MONITOR LEVEL Selects the monitor source Adjusts the level of the monitor cue signal This affects METER the output jacks that are assigned to the MONITOR OUT Detects and indicates the level of the monitor signal or cue L R C channels and also the PHONES OUT jack signal ON On off DIMMER Turns the monitor output on off Attenuates the monitor cue signal by a fixed amount PHONES LEVEL Headphone level Adjusts the output level of only the PHONES OUT jack LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual 145 146 Using the Monitor function Using the Monitor function This section explains how to select the desired monitor source and monitor it from the PHONES OUT jack or external monitor speakers 1 Connect your monitor system to the rear panel OMNI OUT jacks 2TR OUT DIGITAL jack or an I O card installed in a slot The monitor signal can be sent to any desired output jack or output channel If you re monitoring through headphones make sure that your headphones are con nected to the
27. Expander threshold EXP RAT 1 1 to 00 1 Expander ratio EXP REL et Expander release time EXP BYP OFF ON Expander bypass LIM THRE 12 0 dB to 0 0 dB Limiter threshold LIM ATK 0 120 ms Limiter attack LIM REL Limiter release time LIM KNEE 0 5 Limiter knee LIM BYP OFF ON Limiter bypass 1 6 0 ms 46 0 s fs 44 1 kHz 5 0 ms 42 3 s fs 48 kHz Il M BAND COMP Two input two output 3 band compressor with individ ual solo and gain reduction metering for each band Effects Parameters Parameter Range Description LOW GAIN 96 0 to 412 0 dB Low band level MID GAIN 96 0 to 412 0 dB Mid band level HI GAIN 96 0 to 412 0 dB High band level L M XOVR 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz Low mid crossover frequency XOVR 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz Mid high crossover frequency SLOPE 6 dB 12 dB Filter slope CEILING 6 0 dB to 0 0 dB OFF Specifies the maximum output LOOKUP 0 0 100 0 ms Lookup delay LOW THRE 54 0 dB to 0 0 dB Low band threshold level MID THRE 54 0 dB to 0 0 dB Mid band threshold level HI THRE 54 0 dB to 0 0 dB High band threshold level RATIO 1 1 to 20 1 Compression ratio ATTACK 0 120 ms Compressor attack time RELEASE Compressor release time KNEE 0 5 Compressor knee BYPASS OFF ON Bypasses the compressor 1 6 0 ms 46 0 s fs 44 1 kHz 5 0 ms 42 3 s fs 48 kHz REV X HALL REV X ROOM REV X PLATE N
28. tone The currently selected song will play repeatedly until you stop playback e fans The currently selected song will play once and then stop 6 If you selected a consecutive playback mode in step 5 move the cursor to the play back selection check field for each song you want to play and press the ENTER key When performing consecutive playback the files with a check mark will be played 7 Move the cursor to the PLAY PAUSE II button and press the ENTER key The song you selected in step 4 will begin playing wr 75 The USB memory recorder can play back audio files whose sampling rate is 44 1 kHz or 48 kHz Even if the sampling rate at which the LS9 is operating differs from the sampling rate of the audio file being played the SRC Sampling Rate Converter function will automatically convert the rate so that the playback will be correct NOTE i e If IET or EL is selected as the playback mode playback will continue until you stop playback 8 To stop playback move the cursor to the STOP button and press the ENTER key LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual USB memory recorder Editing the title list Editing the title list Here s how you can change the order of the audio files shown in the title list and edit the titles or artist names 1 Connect USB memory containing audio 4 it you want to edit a title or file name in the files to the USB connector 2 In the DISPLA
29. 15 80 16 81 17 18 82 83 19 84 20 85 21 86 22 87 23 88 24 89 25 90 26 91 47 92 28 93 29 30 94 95 31 102 33 103 34 104 35 105 36 106 37 107 38 108 39 109 40 110 41 111 42 43 112 113 44 114 45 115 46 116 47 117 48 118 49 119 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual NRPN parameter assignments NRPN parameter assignments Parameter From Ie Parameter Erom W HEX HEX HEX HEX m INPUT 0000 0047 SEND 118A 1191 MIX MATRIX STEREO LR 0060 007D MIX2 SEND 1192 1199 MIX9 SEND 007E 00 5 MIX3 SEND 119A 11 1 MIX10 SEND OODE 0125 INPUT57 64 to MIX4 SEND 11A2 11A9 MIX11 SEND 013E 0185 MIX1 8 P
30. Slope 12 dB Oct Attack 0 msec to 120 msec Frequency 20 Hz to 600 Hz Dynamics 1 Release 5 msec to 42 3 sec Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Gain 18 dB to 0 dB 0 dB to 18 dB Gain 18 dB to 18 dB Knee Hard to 5 soft 4 Band Equal Q 0 10 to 10 0 Key In Self Pre EQ Self Post EQ Mix Out13 16 izer Low Shelving Low Band MIX1 16 MTRX1 8 STIN LR MONO C High Shelving LPF High Band Eeh BIDEN Fader Level 1024 steps 138 dB to 10 dB Type 1 II O On Off fork aii 32 Insert Point Pre EQ Pre Fader Post On Mute Group 8 Groups Direct Out Direct Out Point Pre HPF Pre EQ Mix to Matrix Matrix Send Point Pre Fader Post On Type Gate Ducking Comp Expander Stereo to Matrix evel 1024 steps 138 dB to 10 dB Threshold 54 dB to 0 dB Oscillator ON OS a oe Ratio 1 1 to 0 1 Attack 0 msec to 120 msec Hold 0 02 msec to 1 96 sec Output Port Decay 5 msec to 42 3 sec Release Function Parameter Dynamics 1 Releace 5msec to 42 3 sec Out Port Delay 0 msec to 600 msec Range 70 dB to 0 dB Out Port Phase Normal Reverse Gain 18 dB to 0 dB 0 dB to 18 dB Attenuator 96 to 24 dB Knee Hard to 5 soft I CRUSTNAR echblod Processor Key In Filter HPF LPF BPF Function Parameter Type Comp De Esser Compander H Com GEQ 31 bands x 4 8 systems pander 5 Effects Stereo In Stereo Out multi effector x 4 systems Threshold 54 dB to 0 dB Ratio 1 1 to 1 Dynamics2 Attack 0 msec to 120 msec Release 5
31. Word clock settings LOCK BUT NOT SYNC ED yellow A valid clock is being input but is not synchronized with the selected clock source If an external device is connected to the corresponding connector input out put cannot occur correctly between that device and the LS9 SRC ON green This is a special status that is unique to a digital I O card with SRC Sampling Rate Converter functional ity installed in the slot slots 1 2 it indicates that SRC is enabled for the corresponding channel If this status is displayed normal input output with the LS9 is occurring even if the signal is not synchronized UNLOCK red A valid clock is not being input If an external device is connected to the corresponding connector input output cannot occur correctly between that device and the LS9 UNKNOWN black This indicates that the clock status cannot be detected because no external device is connected or because there is no valid clock input You will be able to select this connector slot but successful synchronization cannot occur until a valid connection is established If the symbol for the port selected in step 3 has turned light blue and the clock frequency is shown in the upper left of the window this indicates that the LS9 is operating correctly with the new clock wr 75 e If you use a digital I O card that contains a sampling rate con verter e g MY8 AE96S input and output can occur nor mal
32. eee ee PANMODE TOST TOMONO LR T MONO C TOLCR LCR STR 19 5 ON Ne te ens o E 97 LS9 16 32 Owners Manual 67 Signal flow for output channels STEREO channel MONO C channel 0909000000000000000000000000000000009 Each of these channels process the signal sent from the input channels to the STEREO bus or MONO C bus and send it to an output port or MATRIX bus If input channels are set to LCR mode the STEREO L R channels and the MONO C channel can be used together as a set of three output channels When the LS9 is in the initial state the STEREO channel is assigned to the 2TR OUT DIGITAL jack M 0 MIX ST MATRIX CUE 12 1516 LR CO 12 78 LR PAN STEREO OUT L Tooureureau To RECORDER IN PATCH STEREO OUT MONO C DIV LEVEL To MATRIX STEREO OUT R C E Fo Of 0 o 6 o g lig PRE FADER POST ON VARI STEREO OUT To OUTPUT PATCH To RECORDER IN PATCH Pe eene emn emo M tap ire Mem oum Mna cma sac dram umo omes A canc Comm a Wee conc pani F
33. p 257 If the selected function has parameters move the cursor to the PARAMETER 1 or 2 field and select parameters 1 and 2 in the same way Move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key to close the USER DEFINED KEY SETUP popup window 7 Assign the desired functions to other user defined keys in the same way 8 To execute an assigned function press the corresponding USER DEFINED 1 12 key on the panel Console lock Console lock You can temporarily prohibit console operations in order to prevent unwanted operation This set ting completely disables operations of the panel and touch screen so that controls cannot be operated by an accidental touch or by an unauthorized third party while the operator is taking a break If a password is set for the currently logged in user that password will be used for the Console Lock function If you power cycle the console while it is locked you will be asked to enter the password if you had been logged in as a user for whom a password is assigned If you had been logged in as the Guest the console will start up normally If you have forgotten the password refer to Initializing the LS9 s internal memory gt p 222 The Guest cannot set a password Even while the console is locked control from an external device via MIDI or LS9 Editor will still operate as usual z 3 Enter the password of the logged in user Locking the console move the c
34. 20 20 20 20 20 20 30 30 30 4 30 30 30 30 30 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 e co co o9 co 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 7 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Pri ttii tt CH1 5 CH10 CH13 CH17 CH19 MIX1 MIX2 Assigning channels to the custom fader layer To assign the desired channels to the custom fader layer proceed as follows 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section press the 2 Move the cursor to the CUSTOM FADER SETUP key repeatedly to access the USER LAYER popup button in the screen and SETUP screen press the ENTER key The CUSTOM FADER LAYER popup window will 000 tial Data Aue T appear allowing you to select the channel that will be assigned to each channel module or ST channel USER STORRGE Administrator o CREATE USER KEY Move the cursor to the desired fader number and press SEL of TARGET CH to assisn Ca for Guest wt x PREFERENCE PREFERENCE USER DEFINED USER DEFINED CUSTOM FADER CUSTOM FADER 1 LAYER LAYER 1 2 E 4 Lj 6 8 CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4 CH 5 CH 6 CH 7 CH 8 E 10 11 12 13 14 19 16 CH 9 CH10 CH11 CH12 CHi4 CHIS CH16 ir 18 19 21 22 23
35. 3 Card type Card type Slot number This area shows the type of I O card installed in the slot On the LS9 32 this area shows the slot number and the type of I O card Use the clock select buttons to select a clock source You can choose one of the following clock sources INT 48 k INT 44 1 k The LS9 s internal clock sampling rate 48 kHz or 44 1 kHz respectively will be the clock source Choose one of these if you want to use the LS9 as the word clock master e WORD CLOCK IN The word clock signal supplied from the rear panel WORD CLOCK IN jack will be used as the clock source In this case the LS9 will operate as a word clock slave SLOT SLOT 1 2 The clock data included in the digital audio input sig nal from a digital I O card in the slot slots 1 2 will be used as the clock source Select this in two chan nel units In this case the LS9 will operate as a word clock slave The status operating state of the clock data being received from each port is indicated by the color of the symbol displayed immediately above Each color has the following significance LOCK light blue This indicates that a clock synchronized with the selected source is being input If an external device is connected to the corresponding connector or slot input output is occurring normally between that device and the LS9 If the sampling frequency is close this status may be displayed even if not synchronized
36. 3 DESTINATION CHs field Indicates the channels selected as the copy destina tion CLEAR DEST button This button clears the channels shown in the DESTI NATION CHs field LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual 5 COPY TARGET field If you ve selected a MIX channel MATRIX channel or STEREO MONO channel as the copy source use the buttons of this field to select the parameters that will be copied You may turn both buttons on if desired If both buttons are on the following parameters will be copied MODULE PARAM button parameters of the copy source channel WITH MIX SEND WITH MATRIX SEND button On off status and send level settings of the send signals sent to the copy source channel COPY button Executes the copy 2 To select the copy source channel press the corresponding SEL key to make it light The corresponding channel is highlighted in the SOURCE CH field of the window When you choose the copy source channel the DES TINATION CHs field is automatically emboldened allowing you to select the copy destination If you want to re select the copy source channel move the cursor to the CLEAR SOURCE button and press the ENTER key NOTE Copy settings can be made only in the order of copy source gt copy destination 3 To select the copy destination channel s press the corresponding SEL key to make it light multiple selections are allowed The corresponding channel s is are hi
37. EQ peaking type gain EQQ 10 0 0 10 EQ peaking type bandwidth HSH 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH 12 0to 12 0 dB High shelving filter gain Us 443 B HIT Bet 4 d 4 d d 8 Effects Parameters Two input two output flange effect Two input two output 16 stage phaser Parameter Range Description Parameter Range Description FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time Feedback gain plus values for Feedback gain plus values for FB GAIN 99 to 99 norma prase rs due FB GAIN 99 to 49996 normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback values for reverse phase feedback OFFSET 0 100 Lowest phase shifted frequency WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform offset SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off PHASE 0 00 354 38 Left and right modulation phase Used in conjunction with TEMPO bie balance NOTE a i to determine FREQ STAGE ux e 8 10 12 Number of phase shift stages LSH F 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz Low shelving filter f z 5 atiis Ed EH Mey SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off LSH G 12 0 to 12 0 dB Low shelving filter gain NOTE z Used in conjunction with TEMPO EQF 100 Hz 8 00 kHz EQ peaking type frequency to determine FREQ EQG 12 0 to 12 0
38. Even if multiple output ports are assigned only one output port is shown 3 Make sure that the cursor is located at the output port for the desired channel and press the ENTER key The OUTPUT PORT SELECT popup window will appear allowing you to select the output port for the output channel This popup window contains the following items OUTPUT PORT SELECT EE Ee Ee Ea Ea LS9 16 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual D Category tab This selects the type of output ports that are shown in the lower part of the popup window Each tab corre sponds to the following output ports OMNI 2TR OUT Shows the OMNI OUT jacks 1 8 1 16 and 2TR OUT DIGITAL jack SLOT 1 2 Shows output channels 1 16 of the slot s 1 2 RACK Shows the inputs of racks 1 8 Use this when you want to send the signal of an output channel to the input of a GEQ or effect e For details on GEQ and effects refer to p 157 REC IN Shows the input of the USB memory recorder Use this when you want to send the signal of an output channel to the input of the USB memory recorder Port select button This selects the output port that is assigned to the cor responding channel 3 Level indicator This indicates the state of the port s signal using the following colors 60 dB or below black 60 dB 18 dB green 18 dB to 0 dB yellow 502 re
39. Edit the settings The second set The first set Buffer memory 6 With the cursor left at the COMPARE but ton repeatedly press the ENTER key to compare the first and second versions of settings Each time you press the ENTER key the current set tings will be exchanged with the settings saved in buffer memory Unlike the Paste operation this opera tion lets you return to the previous settings at any time as long as the buffer memory has not been overwritten The settings held in buffer memory can also be used by the Paste operation e If you operate the tool buttons for a rack in which Flex15GEQ of the two types of GEQ is selected A and B will be individ ually exchanged with the buffer memory LS9 16 32 Owners Manual Chapter 4 Connections and setup This chapter explains how to connect the audio inputs and outputs how to perform the setup necessary when starting the LS9 for the first time and how to check the operation L Analog input connectiOlS Connections and setup y WORD CLOCK Ere ora Blo OX o a E cg oo y gle Sf
40. HIGH Q HIGH MID FREQUENCY LOW MID HOME GAIN LOW 1 Make sure that the desired fader layer is selected in the LAYER section 2 Use the SEL keys of the channel module section STEREO section and ST IN section to select the channel that you want to oper ate The currently selected channel is indicated in the upper left of the screen For stereo channels STEREO channels ST IN chan nels you will alternate between the L channel and R channel each time you press the SEL key If AUTO CHANNEL SELECT is turned on in the PREFER ENCE popup window gt p 194 you can select a channel simply by operating its ON key or fader without having to press its SEL key 3 Turn the encoders of the SELECTED CHAN NEL section to edit the desired parameters The parameter assigned to each encoder will change Before operating the EQ encoders you ll need to use the EQ HIGH EQ HIGH MID EQ LOW MID and EQ LOW keys to select the band you want to control By pressing one of the SELECTED CHANNEL section s encoders inward you can also access a popup window where you can edit detailed settings for the parameter gt p 194 Basic operations in the top panel Selecting functions Use the keys of the DISPLAY ACCESS section when you want to use functions other than mix parameters or when you want to change various settings DISPLAY ACCESS 6 RENE MONITOR SETUP
41. MASTER Analog Digital ap INPUT EQ DYN DYN EQ LEVEL MASTER OUTPUT BATT Analog GAIN PATCH HPF INSERT ATT 1 2 INSERT LEVEL INSERT PAN BUS Adder INSERT x4 DYN BAL ON INSERT PATCH DELAY dBu dBFS Bit H M23 tH tH HH Ht tt tH tH Hh Ht th th tt tH Ht tt Ht Ht tt hh Tt 2 dBu 430 0 IN IN IN Digital Clipping Level Max Output L 430 424 1 s 28 L 24 20 10 2 CASCADEIN CASCADE OUT een 3 OUT OUT OUT 410 20 4 cs E m ERE ru Nominal Output 10 pe 7 Dome gl ag 30 5 bg 0 6 E PHONES Poe zoo a a penus Max Output CR 10 40 v LL I Eg 150mWG8Q 1 Tu 20 50 8 Nominal Output 20 9 1 eee 75mW 8Q 30 60 10 d The position of the level 30 11 TM Du euh em control is 10dB lowered from Max 40 70 _ 40 ie 2 Max Input 42dBu 50 80 17 OMNI OUT1 16 8 50 14 I Default setting 60 90 415 1 J 60 16 2 Nominal Input 62dBu 02 2 70 80 1 10 i Gon 1 32 16 GAIN MIN 90 120 120 G INPUT 1 32 16 GAIN eer 21 100 130 5 100 110 140 3 110 24 120 150 25 120 26 130 160 27 130 140 170 28 a
42. gt p 35 NOTE Store recall operations are performed on individual racks You can t individually store recall two Flex15GEQ units that are mounted in the same rack LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Effect library Use the Effect library to store and recall effect settings 199 items can be recalled from the effect library Library items 1 48 are read only presets and correspond to effect types 1 48 respectively Library items 49 57 are reserved for use by the system Other library item numbers can be freely read and written To access the effect library move the cursor to the LIB toolbutton in the upper part of the screen when an effect is shown in a RACK 5 8 screen and press the ENTER key 000 Ini ti MIX BAL q 100 OUTPUT INPUT REVERB PLATE L 5 STINSL ub E1IN ZOUT 3 5 Thru D LIB button For details on using the library refer to Using libraries gt p 35 E Library items using the or FREEZE effect types can be recalled only into rack 5 or 7 They cannot be recalled into rack 6 or 8 gt You also use MIDI messages program changes to recall effect settings from the library gt p 180 Using an external head amp Using an external head amp If an I O card expected to go on sale in the future that supports the external head amp Yamaha AD8HR remote protocol is installed
43. 1 1 70 PRE FADER POST ON 72 1 To RECORDER IN PATCH XPAND DEESSER pi II lt MATRIX24 8 LEVEL P M MARI greet QUT I PRE HPF PREEQ POSTEQ PREFADER mM POSTON l 2 Rack our P KEVIN CUE LEVEL ON To MATRIX STEREO OUT RC A L B R Keyin Filter PRE FADER POST ON pp STEREO OUT R Hh gt To OUTPUT PATCH RACK8 OUT Keyin PAN LINK ig STEREO TO RECORDER IN PATCH A L B R Soff c rorem nus jurium mmi e ur Soll POST EQ ToMX POsT OW m y Al 1 3 15 III TI e c cuc cm RR a IRSE rne jn i MIX24 16 CHOW III I I AT i ToMX N MaTRIXt 8 IN i POST PAN PATCH FIXED MON INSERT POINT l POSTPANRE NIENTE 1 I TOUT PNGA MATRIX ___ PRE FADER INSERT OUT Sorte f on ORE L1 INSERT OUT 8 lo _INSERT GUT 1 storia a ae 8 l PREEQ EQOUT PREFADER POST ON E PRE EQ PRE FADER POST ON 90 PN METER METER METER METER METER 1 RACK E GR METER LEVEL on T 2 uoce ERE dx Ex INSERT BAND COMP INSE
44. 2 Dynamics graph This graph shows the approximate response of dynam ics processing 3 Level meters These meters show the amount of gain reduction GR and the peak levels before the gate IN and after the gate OUT If the signal has overloaded the OVER segment will light If the corresponding channel is ste reo a ST IN channel a MIX channel MATRIX chan nel that is set to stereo or the STEREO channel level meters for two channels will be displayed 4 DYNAMICS ON OFF button This switches dynamics on off 5 THRESHOLD knob This specifies the threshold level at which dynamics will operate LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual 6 KEY IN SOURCE box You can select a key in signal in this box For details on the procedure refer to step 6 7 Other parameters This area shows other dynamics parameters The parameters shown will depend on the currently selected dynamics type For details on parameters refer to the appendix at the end of this manual gt p 229 You can switch dynamics on off by moving the cursor to one of the knobs in 5 or 7 and pressing the ENTER key KEY IN FILTER field GATE and DUCKING only This field lets you apply a filter to the key in signal This field provides a FILTER box that lets you select the filter type a Q knob which adjusts the Q of the fil ter and a FREQ knob which adjusts the cutoff fre quency or center frequency To change the filter type move th
45. 8 Make settings for Dimmer and Monaural as desired Monitor on off operations selection of the monitor source and dimmer on off operations can also be assigned to user defined keys 196 Monitor Cue I LS9 16 32 Owners Manual 147 Using the Cue function Using the Cue function This section explains how to use the LS9 s Cue function Ahout cue groups The LS9 s cue signals can be categorized into the follow ing three groups D INPUT CUE group The cue signals of input channels make up this group To enable Cue for this group press to turn on the CUE key of a channel module to which an INPUT channel is assigned or the CUE key of a ST IN channel 1 2 SEL SEL c CUE key of a channel module to CUE CUE which an INPUT channel is assigned STIN 1 STIN 2 SEL SEL CUE key of a ST IN channel CUE CUE 2 OUTPUT CUE group The cue signals of output channels make up this group To switch to Cue for this group press to turn on the CUE key of the STEREO MASTER section or the CUE key of a channel module to which a MIX MATRIX MONO channel is assigned STEREO 0 o EL T CUE key of the STEREO channel m o Ul N SEL SEL gt CUE key of a channel module to which a CUE c MIX MATRIX MONO channel is assigned 148 LS9 16 32 Owners Manual Other CUE group T
46. 91 000 533 gt SHIFT LOCK CANCEL FORMAT 4 Enter the volume name move the cursor to the FORMAT button and press the ENTER key A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Format oper ation STORAGE FORMAT Format Storase Device CANCEL 5 To execute the Format operation move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key Formatting will require several tens of seconds Chapter 20 Other functions This chapter explains other functionality of the 59 not covered elsewhere About the SETUP screen In the SETUP screen you can make various settings that apply to the entire LS9 The SETUP screen includes the following three screens Repeatedly press the DISPLAY ACCESS section SETUP key to access the desired screen USER SETUP screen In this screen you can restrict the functionality that is available to each user and make settings that affect the operating environment Here you can also save or load user settings to or from USB memory and create user authentication keys Initial Data 000 R ADMIN SETUP ENT USER STORRGE Administrator 5 OSER Kev wo USER DEFINED CUSTOM FADER Ea Y USER LEVEL For details on functions and operation in the USER SETUP screen refer to chapter 19 gt p 187 SYSTEM SETUP screen In this screen you can make settings related to buses and output ports and settings related to word clock a
47. Do not block the vents This device has ventilation holes at the top and rear to prevent the internal temperature from becoming too high In particular do not place the device on its side or upside down Inadequate ventilation can result in overheating possibly causing damage to the device s or even fire Do not use the device in the vicinity of a TV radio stereo equipment mobile phone or other electric devices Doing so may result in noise both in the device itself and in the TV or radio next to it Before connecting the device to other devices turn off the power for all devices Before turning the power on or off for all devices set all volume levels to minimum e Be sure to connect to a properly grounded power source A ground screw is provided on the rear panel of this device for maximum safety and shock prevention If the mains outlet is not grounded be sure to connect the ground screw to a confirmed ground point before plugging the device into the mains Improper grounding can result in electrical shock Handling caution When turning on the AC power in your audio system always turn on the power amplifier LAST to avoid speaker damage When turning the power off the power amplifier should be turned off FIRST for the same reason Do not insert your fingers or hands in any gaps or openings on the device vents etc e Avoid inserting or dropping foreign objects paper plastic metal etc
48. LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Appendices 225 EQ Library List 226 Title Female Vo 1 Female Vo 2 Chorus amp Harmo Total EQ 1 Total EQ 2 Total EQ 3 Bass Drum 3 Snare Drum 3 Tom tom 2 Piano 3 Piano Low Piano High Fine EQ Cass Narrator LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Parameter LOW L MID H MID HIGH PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING 1 0dB 1 0 1 5 2 0 dB 118Hz 400Hz 2 65 kHz 6 00 kHz 0 18 0 45 0 56 0 14 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 7 0 dB 41 5 dB 1 5 dB 2 5 dB 112Hz 335Hz 2 00 kHz 6 70 kHz 0 16 0 20 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING 2 0 dB 1 0dB 1 5 dB 3 0 dB 90 0Hz 850Hz 2 12 kHz 4 50 kHz 2 8 2 0 0 70 7 0 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 0 5 dB 0 0 dB 3 0 dB 6 5 dB 95 0Hz 950Hz 2 12 kHz 16 0 kHz 7 0 2 2 5 6 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 4 0dB 1 5 dB 42 0 dB 6 0 dB 95 0Hz 750Hz 1 80 kHz 18 0 kHz 7 0 2 8 5 6 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 1 5 0 5 2 0 4 0 dB 67 0 Hz 850Hz 1 90 kHz 15 0 kHz 0 28 0 70 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING 3 5 10 0 dB 3 5 dB 0 0 dB 118 Hz 315 Hz 4 25 kHz 20 0 kHz 2 0 10 0 0 40 0 40 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
49. MIX9 16 ST MONO E S 00 01 ch 1 SAFE PARAMETER Ra a eRe LS9 32 Simply selecting a parameter in step 3 does not enable Recall Safe To turn Recall Safe on off you must also perform the operation of step 4 gt In the CH RECALL SAFE field the color of the highlight will be green if the ALL button was selected in step 3 or blue if buttons other than ALL were selected If you press the CLEAR ALL button Recall Safe will be defeated for all channels for which it is enabled i e the high lighted channels You can also switch Recall Safe on off in the SELECTED CH VIEW screen s SAFE field gt p 88 5 If you want to enable Recall Safe for global parameters turn on the desired buttons in the GLOBAL field These buttons correspond to the following parameters Button name Corresponding parameters INPUT PATCH Input port patching INPUT NAME Input channel name Output port patching OUTPUT NAME Output channel name 1 8 Rack 1 8 settings Using the Recall Safe function Using the Fade function 6 When you ve finished making settings exe cute a Recall operation Only the selected channel s and parameter s will be excluded from Recall operations Channel Link p 124 and the MIX MATRIX bus settings in the SYSTEM SETUP screen p 213 are not subject to Recall Safe the settings of the recalled scene will always be reprod
50. This button links adjacent GEQ units In the case of a 31 band GEQ the GEQ units in adjacent odd num bered even numbered racks will be linked In the case of a Flex I5GEQ the GEQ A and GEQ B within the same rack will be linked NOTE The GEQ LINK button is shown only if linking is possible If you want to link two GEQ units turn on the GEQ LINK button If you ve selected 31 Band GEQ for two adjacent odd numbered even numbered racks or if you ve selected a Flex I5GEQ you can use the LINK button to link the two GEQ units This is convenient when you want to process a stereo source through GEQ units with identical settings When you turn the GEQ LINK button on a popup window like the following will appear The popup window contains the following items GEG LINK Link RACK 1 2 RACK 2 1 RESET BOTH CRNCEL 0 RACK gt button and are the rack number or the rack number and the alpha betical characters A or B The parameters of x will be copied to and then linked 2 RACK y x button The parameters of will be copied to x and then linked 3 RESET BOTH button The parameters of both will be initialized and then linked CANCEL button Cancels the link and closes the popup window To confirm the link move the cursor to a button other than CANCEL and press the ENTER key When you link GEQ units a symbol will appe
51. Wee INSERT POINT ON OSCILLATOR osc To RACKIN PATCH __ FADER INSERT OUT METER Y TOOUTPUTPATCH iL gPREEQ INSERT OUT LEVEL ON INSERT OUT 1 16 1O78 POST ON INSERT OUT Sine Wave 2 4 i 9 INSERTIN L CS Pink Noise EQOUT PREFADER POST INPUT NP METER PATCH Burst Noise HPF H LPF METER METER METER METER METER 6 INPUT GR METER 3 Eam INPUT 15 16 31 32 1 1682 N oi 182970 KEVIN 1 1 6 32 1 V PRI INSERT 4BAND COMP INSERT x INSERT MIX QUT1 16 ToRACKIN PATCH To MONITOR SELECT I CH 1 32 64 Em ATH 2 37 UA To RACKIN PATCH INSERT POINT FADER INSERT OUT To MONITOR SELECT COAXIAL METER ToourrurParch cH PREEQ INSERT OUT PRE HPF PRE EQ PRE FADER gato g LEVEL DIRECT OUT 1 82164 gt OAN PATCH PREEQ POSTEQMI PRENDER PRE FADER FOST ON jr POST ON ToRECORDERINPATCH INSERT OUT 1 32 POSTON INSERT OUT PREHPE PREEQ PREPADEN agp Hoo c ONE RETE TORECORDERIN PATCH __ PRE EQ Kevin 2TR IN DIG ITAL O 2TR IN DIGITAL 4 ZIRINLR l CH PAN m POST PAN L 1 INSERT OUT Self PRE EQ Self POST EQ MIX13 16 OUT 1 2 INSERT IN 1 32 PREEQ EQOUT DYNATOUT 200 PRE FA
52. While accessing internal memory when storing USB memory or a scene 000 EED 5 ST IN level This indicates the on off status and input level of ST IN channels 1 4 This shows a gray knob and black index when on or a dark gray knob and black index when off In SENDS ON FADER mode this shows the on off status and send level of the signal sent from ST IN channels 1 4 to the MIX bus When on the knob will be a color corre sponding to the send destination the same type of color as the keys of the MIX MATRIX SELECT section and the indices will be white When off the knob will be gray and the indices will be black 571 572 3T3 SENDS ON FADER mode the send destination bus is shown blinking at the right of the scene number Main area The contents of the main area will depend on the currently selected function SELECTED CH VIEW screen This screen shows all mix parameters of the currently selected channel To access this screen press the HOME key of the SELECTED CHANNEL section mi tial Data 000 ADMIN y H cH RHGE ATK HOLD DECAY Sm 304m REL GAIN KNEE DIRECT Y MUTE Various function screens These screens allow you to access functions and settings other than channel mix parameters To access each of these screens press the appropriate key of the DISPLAY ACCESS section mi tial Data 000 ADMIN CUE INPUT OUTPUT Pr M
53. key The audio file will be saved to USB memory In the default state the recorded audio file will be saved in the SONGS folder within the YPE folder However you may also specify a folder of a level below the SONGS folder The recorded file will be given a default title and file name You can change this later 9 To audition the recorded content proceed as follows D Move the cursor to the PLAY PAUSE gt II button and press the ENTER key The recorded content will be played back via the input channel you specified in step 3 2 To stop playback move the cursor to the STOP button and press the ENTER key LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual USB memory recorder M 109 Playing back audio files from USB memory Playing back audio files from USB memory Here s how to play back audio files that have been saved on USB memory In addition to files that were recorded on the LS9 console you can also play files that were copied from your computer to USB memory Three types of audio file format can be played MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 WMA Windows Media Audio and AAC MPEG 4 AAC The sampling rate can be either 44 1 kHz or 48 kHz and the bit rate can be between 64 kbps and 320 kbps 1 Connect the USB memory containing the audio files to the USB connector If you want to play back an audio file you must save it in the SONGS folder within the YPE folder or in a folder you ve cre ate
54. the LS9 is in SENDS ON FADER mode the mode in which you can use the faders to control the send levels to the MIX buses or MATRIX buses Press the desired key in the MIX MATRIX SELECT section so that only the LED of that key is lit 6 To switch the on off status of a signal sent Sending the signal from an input channel to a MIX bus 5 If you selected a VARI type MIX bus in step 4 use the SELECTED CHANNEL section SELECTED SEND encoder to adjust the send level from that channel to the MIX bus you selected in step 4 If the send destination MIX bus is set to stereo the function of the SELECTED SEND encoder will change depending on which of the two adjacent keys of the MIX MATRIX SELECT section are lit If the left key is lit Use the SELECTED SEND encoder to adjust the pan or balance for a ST IN channel of the signal that is sent from the INPUT channel to the two MIX buses If the right key is lit Use the SELECTED SEND encoder to adjust the send level shared by the two MIX buses to a VARI type MIX bus move the cursor to the TO MIX LEVEL knob in the screen and press the ENTER key to accsess the MIX SEND popup window If you switch this off the knob will turn grey Input channel operations em 7 To switch the on off status of a signal sent to a FIXED type MIX bus move the cursor to the TO MIX ON OFF button in the screen and press the ENTER key If you switch this off the knob will change to bl
55. x previous TEMPO new TEMPO Example 1 When SYNC ON DELAY 250 ms TEMPO 120 you change NOTE from 8th note to quarter note DELAY new NOTE x 4 x 60 TEMPO 1 4 x 4 x 60 120 0 5 sec 500 ms Thus the DELAY will change from 250 ms to 500 ms Example 2 When SYNC ON DELAY 250 ms NOTE 8th note you change TEMPO from 120 to 121 DELAY original DELAY x previous TEMPO new TEMPO 250 x 120 121 247 9 ms Thus the TEMPO will change from 250 ms to 247 9 ms a Rounded values are used for the calculation results Ranges of the NOTE and TEMPO values The ranges of the NOTE and TEMPO values are limited by the ranges of the DELAY or FREQ values You cannot set NOTE or TEMPO values that would cause DELAY or FREQ to exceed their maximum possible values when synchronized to tempo This lim itation also applies even when SYNC is OFF Special characteristics of the TEMPO parameter The TEMPO parameter has the following characteristics that are unlike other parameters It isa common value shared by all effects You cannot stored it to or recall it from the Effects Library You can store it to and recall it from a Scene This means that the TEMPO value may not necessarily be the same when an effect is recalled as when that effect was stored Here is an example Store the effect TEMPO 120 Change TEMPO to 60 Recall the effect TEMPO 60 Normally when you change the TEMPO the DELAY or FREQ will be re set accordingly
56. 0 0 dB 2 0 dB 3 5 dB 0 0 dB 224 Hz 560 Hz 4 25 kHz 4 00 kHz 4 5 2 8 0 10 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 9 0dB 1 5 dB 2 0 dB 0 0 dB 90 0Hz 212Hz 5 30 kHz 17 0 kHz 4 5 1 25 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 4 5 13 0dB 4 5 dB 2 5 dB 100 Hz 475Hz 2 36 kHz 10 0 kHz 8 0 10 0 9 0 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 5 5 dB 1 5 dB 6 0 dB 0 0 dB 190Hz 400Hz 6 70 kHz 12 5 kHz 10 0 6 3 2 2 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING 5 5 dB 41 5 dB 5 0dB 3 0 dB 190 Hz 400 Hz 6 70 kHz 5 60 kHz 10 0 6 3 2 2 0 10 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 1 5 dB 0 0 dB 1 0dB 3 0 dB 75 0Hz 1 00 kHz 4 00 kHz 12 5 kHz 4 5 1 8 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 4 0dB 1 0dB 2 0 dB 0 0 dB 106 Hz 710Hz 2 50 kHz 10 0 kHz 4 0 7 0 0 63 DYNAMICS Library List 10 11 Title Gate Ducking A Dr BD A Dr SN De Esser Comp Expand Compander H Compander S A Dr BD A Dr BD Type GATE DUCKING GATE GATE DE ESSER COMPRESSOR EXPANDER COMPANDER H COMPANDER S COMPRESSOR COMPANDER H Parameter Value Threshold dB 26 Range dB 56 Attack ms 0 Hold ms 2 56 Decay ms 331 Threshold dB 19 Range dB 22 Attack
57. 021 277 085 022 278 086 023 Scene 279 087 024 280 088 025 281 089 026 282 090 027 283 091 028 284 092 029 285 093 030 286 094 031 287 095 032 288 096 033 289 097 034 290 098 035 291 099 036 292 100 037 293 101 038 294 102 039 295 103 040 296 104 041 297 105 042 298 106 043 299 107 044 300 108 045 000 109 046 110 047 111 048 112 049 113 050 114 051 115 052 116 053 117 054 118 055 No Assign 119 056 120 057 121 058 122 059 123 060 124 061 125 062 126 063 127 064 128 Scene Effect Preset No Assign Preset Bank Ch 4 Program Change 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 050 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 060 061 062 063 064 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Scene Effect Preset No Assign Program Change 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 094 095 096
58. 1 NOTEL to determine left channel DELAY a NOTE R a Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY BJ M d ded des Maximum value depends on the tempo setting LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual J 233 Effects Parameters 234 IE MOD DELAY One input two output basic repeat delay with modulation Parameter Range Description DELAY 0 0 2725 0 ms Delay time Feedback gain plus values for FB GAIN 99 to 49996 normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz A LPF THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off Used in conjunction with TEMPO 1 DLY NOTE to determine DELAY Used in conjunction with TEMPO 2 MOD NOTE to determine FREQ RES BIS Fe h 443 d d Maximum value depends on the tempo setting 2 Rd Be b 440 D d ded d DELAY LCR One input two output 3 tap delay left center right Parameter Range Description DELAY L 0 0 2730 0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY C 0 0 2730 0 ms Center channel delay time DELAY R 0 0 2730 0 ms Right channel de
59. 1 64 INPUT channels 1 32 1 64 5 Assign a channel to the other input in the same way 7 Use the category tabs and the channel select buttons to select the channel that you want to patch to the USB memory The USB memory recorder always records and plays back in recorder input stereo If you want to record in monaural with the same signal If you select a channel to which another signal is for left and right you must assign both of the recorder inputs bed a didt ill ask fi to the same channel already patched a dialog box will ask you to confirm the patch change Move the cursor to the OK button of the dialog box and press the ENTER key You can patch multiple channels to the recorder output 8 When you ve finished making the assign ment move the cursor to the CLOSE button and press the ENTER key You will return to the RECORDER screen 9 Assign a channel to the other output in the same way LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual J 107 Recording to USB memory Recording to USB memory Here s how to record the signal of the desired output channels as an audio file MP3 onto the USB memory inserted in the USB connector located at the right of the display 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section press the RECORDER key repeatedly to access the RECORDER screen D Audio file display field The track number title artist format MP3 WMA and bit rate of during playback
60. 165 About the internal effects About the internal effects The internal effects of the LS9 can be mounted in racks 5 8 For each mounted effect you can choose one of 48 effect types and patch the effect to the output of an output channel or the input of an input channel or insert it into a channel With the default settings the signals from MIX channels 13 16 are input to racks 5 8 and output to ST IN 1 4 NOTE The internal effects cannot be mounted in racks 1 4 Some effect types can be mounted only in rack 5 or 7 To use an internal effect via send return assign the output STEREO type effects of a MIX channel etc to the input of the effect and assign the output of the effect to an input channel INPUTL EFFECTL L RETURN In this case the corresponding MIX bus is used as a mas ter channel for the effect send and the input channel is INPUT R EFFECT R RETURN used as an effect return channel Rack 5 MIX type effects Beer Hi INPUTL L RETURN KD EFFECT EFFECT gt o INPUT R R RETURN Output of the he amp Input of the output channel B input channel 3 DIE If a signal is assigned to only one input of a two input effect it will be processed as mono in stereo out regard less of whether a Stereo effect type or Mix effect type is selected Alternatively you can assign the input and output of the INPUTL EFFECT L RETURN internal effect to th
61. A SCENE 1 LIST UP SCENE A and SCENE Y keys will return to the current scene number After scene 300 wrap around to scene 000 SCENE 1 selects the previous scene number LIST UP scrolls the scene list upward by one Simultaneously press v SCENE 1 LIST DOWN ing SCENE A and SCENE V keys will return to the cur SCENE rent scene number After scene 000 wrap around to scene 300 INC RECALL Recall the scene of the next existing number DEC RECALL Recall the scene of the previous existing number DIRECT RECALL SCENE 000 300 Directly recall the scene of the specified number RECALL UNDO Lit if UNDO is possi execute RECALL UNDO STORE UNDO UNDO is POSS Execute STORE UNDO LATCH ON lit OFF dark Switch TALKBACK on off TALKBACK ON UNLATCH ON lit OFF dark Turn TALKBACK on while pressed TALKBACK When you press this key the previously stored assignment re state will be applied While holding down this key press a 42 SEL key of an output channel to switch the assignment on off and its state will be remembered During this time the SEL LED will be lit if assign is ON or dark if OFF en Switch the OSC on off ON ON lit OFF dark When this turns on the OSC popup window will appear When you press this key the previously stored assignment OSCILLATOR m state will be applied While holding down this key press a SELECTED CH Lit if assignment is SEL key of h itch th ASSIGN
62. About the virtual rack 4 To select the input source for a rack move the cursor to the INPUT button for that rack and press the ENTER key The OUTPUT CH SELECT popup window will appear allowing you to select the input source for the rack OUTPUT CH SELECT CRACK1A CH1 INSERT OUT Q C BA E ES SSE Ee ES ESES Ee Eee E S ES ES ETET ES ES D Channel select tabs These tabs switch the type of channels that are shown in the lower part of the window 2 Channel select buttons Use these buttons to select the input source Use the three tabs to switch between groups of input sources shown in the window 3 CLOSE button Closes the popup window The following input sources can be selected in this popup window Tab name Button name Input source MIX 1 16 MIX channel 1 16 outputs MTRX 1 8 2 channel 1 8 out OUT CH S L R channel STL STR output MONO C channel MONO output CH 1 32 INPUT channel 1 32 INSERT OUT CH 1 32 Insert Outs MIX channel 1 16 Insert MIX 1 16 Outs 2 OUT CH MTRX 1 8 2 1 8 INSERT OUT 5 STEREO L R channel MOD R Insert Out MONO C channel Insert Out E 1 This cannot be selected for 31 Band GEQ or Flex15GEQ o o If you select Insert Out of a channel as the input source for 31 Band GEQ or Flex15GEQ
63. ENTER key The CASCADE OUT PATCH popup window will appear This window contains the following items DE OUT D Port select popup buttons These buttons access an OUTPUT PORT SELECT popup window where you can select the output port for each bus 2 CASCADE LINK PORT field When using the Cascade Link function this specifies the port by which control signals will be transmitted and received between the two LS9 consoles 3 CASCADE COMM LINK field Here you can select the parameters and events that will be linked by the Cascade Link function 210 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual MA ee RU RCM 3 Move the cursor to the port select popup button for the bus whose port you want to assign and press the ENTER key The OUTPUT PORT SELECT popup window will appear OUTPUT PORT SELECT popup window for the LS9 32 510 1 1 AMD uil c acd cM OUTPUT PORT SELECT popup window for the LS9 16 F OUTPUT PORT SELECT CASCADE OUT NO ASSIGN Eu kd ki Ed ee rd Ed Ed This popup window contains the following items CD Port select buttons These buttons select the output port for the selected bus 2 Slot select tabs LS9 32 only These tabs select slots 1 2 4 Use the port select buttons slot select tabs and port select
64. L R and MONO channels at once and control the send level on off sta tus and send point for the signals sent to the MATRIX bus The MATRIX SEND popup window shows the param eters for a maximum of eight channels that include the channel you selected in step 3 M MTRX4 T MT MT T4 M MT ad 4 4 on LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL rd 00 00 00 00 00 00 t MIX 1 1 SEHD FRO D Channel number Channel name This indicates the number and name of the send source channel 2 PRE button This switches the position from which the signal is sent from the send source channel to the currently selected MATRIX bus If this button is on the pre EQ or pre fader signal will be sent if this button is off the signal from immediately after the channel on off will be sent 3 TO MATRIX ON OFF button This is an on off switch for the signal that is sent from the send source channel to the currently selected MATRIX bus 4 TO MATRIX LEVEL knob This adjusts the level of the signal that is sent from the send source channel to the currently selected MATRIX bus LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Output channel operations A 77 If the send destination MATRIX bus is set to stereo the screen will change as follows 5 TO MATRIX PAN TO MATRIX BALANCE knob This knob adjusts the panning or the balance if the send source is a STEREO channel or
65. Note OFF Velocity Pitch Bend 0 32 6 38 98 99 1 31 33 98 Control 102 119 Change o 0 127 x x x Song Pos Song Sel Tune Common System Clock Real Time Commands All Sound Off Reset 11 Cntrls Local ON OFF All Notes OFF Active Sense Reset 1 2 MMC Mode 2 Mode 4 Mode 1 Mode 3 POLY POLY OMNI ON OMNI OFF OMNI ON MONO OMNI OFF MONO MIDI Implementation Chart Date 8 Aug 2006 Version 1 0 Memorized Effect Control Bank Select Data Entry NRPN LSB MSB Assignable Cntrl Recorder Control Effect Control Bulk Dump Request and Parameter Change Request on 59 lt Yes x No LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual 281 Index 282 Numerics 2TRIN DIGLITALjaQk titer ete 25 2TR OUT DIGITAL jack 25 A AC IN 2 25 Adjusting faders 2 2 222 223 Adjusting input output 224 Adtministratoriiii eere eere Enc 187 Analog input 41 Analog output 42 Assigning 34 Block End of Manual BRIGHTNESS field
66. Parameter 2 185 188 191 PASTE DUHOM oiii e eene 39 incite teer rae eae 82 PHONES LEVEL 26 PHONES OUT jakenan 26 Pin Assignment 278 Play DACK 110 POPUP WINDOWS 31 POWER swritch cesses 25 Powet USGI cea 187 ve tds 194 Program 180 RACK 1 4 key 19 RACK 5 8 key eret erani need 19 RACK screen 161 167 Rear panel n 11 23 Recall Safe function 140 RECALL SAFE screen 140 REeCOrdE ix e E 105 RECORDER tie ea itat ned deere 19 RECORDER 106 Recording deer niece 108 SAVE LOAD popup 199 SCENE FADE screen 143 SCENE FOCUS screen 139 SCENE LIST screen 129 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Scene memory aane eco nae 129 137 Constant display area
67. Release ms 331 Threshold dB 9 Ratio 1 1 7 Attack ms 39 35 Chorus COMPRESSOR Out gain dB 2 5 2 Release ms 226 Threshold dB 33 Ratio 1 2 Attack ms 1 36 Click Erase EXPANDER Out gain dB 2 0 Knee 2 Release ms 284 Threshold dB 14 Ratio 1 2 5 Attack ms 1 37 Announcer COMPANDER H 5 Out gain dB 2 5 Width dB 18 Release ms 180 Threshold dB 9 Ratio 1 3 Attack ms 20 38 Limiter1 COMPANDER S Out gain dB 3 0 Width dB 90 Release ms 3 915 Threshold dB 0 Ratio 1 oo 22 Attack ms 0 39 Limiter2 COMPRESSOR Out gain dB 0 0 Knee hard Release ms 319 Threshold dB 18 Ratio 1 3 5 Attack ms 94 40 Total Comp1 COMPRESSOR Out gain dB 2 5 Release ms 447 Threshold dB 16 Ratio 1 6 Attack ms 11 41 Total Comp2 COMPRESSOR Out gain dB 6 0 Knee 1 Release ms 180 Dynamics Parameters Dynamics Parameters Input channels provide DYNAMICS section 1 and DYNAMICS section 2 Output channels provide DYNAMICS section 1 An input channel s DYNAMICS section 1 provides the following four types GATE DUCKING COMPRESSOR and EXPANDER An input channel s DYNAMICS section 2 provides the fol lowing four types COMPRESSOR COMPANDER H Compander Hard COMPANDER S Compander Soft and DE ESSER An output channel s DYNAMICS section 1 provides the following four types COMPRESSOR EXPANDER COMPANDER H Compander Hard
68. SETUP screen 3 Move the cursor to the SAVE LOAD button and press the ENTER key The SAVE LOAD popup window will appear 4 Move the cursor to the file list and use the dial on the panel to select the text file you want to load 5 Move the cursor to the LOAD button and press the ENTER key and a confirmation dialog box will appear 6 Move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key to begin loading the file Using the Help function Assigning the Help function to a user defined key 1 Before you proceed load the Help file from your USB memory 2 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section press the SETUP key repeatedly to access the USER SETUP screen 000 Initial Data R ADMIN STORAGE Administrator 2 22 CREATE USER KEY vw PREFERENCE PREFERENCE USER DEFINED USER DEFINED KEYS KEYS SRUE LORD CUSTOM FADER CUSTOM FADER E LAYER K LAYER C3 USER LEVEL USER LEVEL USER DEFINED KEYS popup button 3 Move the cursor to the USER DEFINED KEYS popup button and press the ENTER key The USER DEFINED KEYS popup window will appear D MIN 7 MUTE MASTER MUTE GROUP 2 MUTE MASTER MUTE GROUP 1 TAP TEMPO CURRENT PAGE 4 Move the cursor to the button for the user defined key whose function you want to assign and press the ENTER key F USER DEFINED KEY SETUP Select Parameters for USER DEFINED KEY 11 FUNCT I ON Other functions 4 CANC
69. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID DATA CATEGORY FUNCTION NAME MODULE NAME DATA EOX 11110000 01000011 0011nnnn 00111110 00010010 00000000 01001100 01101001 01100010 01000001 01110100 01110010 01100010 01110100 Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm Onnnnnnn Onnnnnnn 11110111 4 4 3 Module Name FO 43 3n 3E 12 00 1 p A p mm mm nh ni eh el ih Td ch cl F7 System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel Digital mixer 159 OTHER DATA ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE Scene Library number High Scene Library number Low Element High Element Low Index High Index Low Channel High Channel Low End of exclusive MODULE NAME number size SCENE LIB SCENE 0 300 O response only 16 INPUT EQ LIB 1 199 1 40 response only 16 OUTPUT EQ LIB OUTEQ 1 199 1 3 response only 16 Dynamics LIB 1 199 1 41 response only 16 GEQ LIB 0 199 0 only 16 EFFECT LIB EFFECT 1 199 1 57 response only 16 MIDI Data Format 4 5 EXIST LIBRARY RANGE 4 5 1 Format PARAMETER CHANGE Transmission
70. You can move the cursor up or down to select a new type in steps of twelve If you decide not to change the effect type use the cur sor keys to move the cursor to the CLOSE button and press the ENTER key 3 When you ve selected a new effect type press the ENTER key The EFFECT TYPE popup window will close auto matically and the new effect is now available for use gt You can also switch the effect type by recalling a library set ting NOTE Effect types and FREEZE be used only in rack 5 or 7 Also even if you copy these two effect types you will not be able to paste them to rack 6 or 8 4 To edit the effect parameters move the cur sor to the knobs in the effect parameter field and use the dial or the DEC INC keys For details on the parameters of each effect type refer to the supplementary material at the end of this manual gt p 233 5 Edit the settings in the special parameter field as necessary For some effect types parameters such as the follow ing will appear in the special parameter field e TEMPO This is shown if a tempo type or modulation type effect is selected MIDI CLK MIDI CLK button If you turn this button on the BPM parameter of that effect will be set to match the tempo of the MIDI timing clock being input from the currently enabled MIDI port BPM knob This knob sets the BPM parameter manually You can also
71. and press the ENTER key to make the button go dark NOTE Mute group assignments are saved as part of the scene However the mute on off settings are not saved gt If you assigned a mute group on off function to a user defined key you can switch mute on off by pressing the correspond ing user defined key to make it light or go dark Even if a channel is assigned to a mute group it will not be affected by mute on off operations if its ON key was off to begin with Using the SELECTED CH VIEW screen to specify mute groups In the SELECTED CH VIEW screen you can select a spe cific channel and assign the mute group s to which that channel belongs multiple assignments are allowed In the SELECTED CH VIEW screen you can only assign mute groups To switch muting on off you must either use the MUTE GROUP screen of the CHANNEL JOB screens gt p 121 or assign the mute on off function to a user defined key and operate that key p 196 1 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section HOME key to access the SELECTED CH VIEW screen 2 Use the LAYER section keys and the SEL keys to select the channel whose mute group s you want to specify In the SELECTED CH VIEW screen you can use the MUTE field to specify the mute group s to which the currently selected channel belongs CH 1 Initial Data ch 1 000 R ADMIN SEND To HA MUZE g 5 Lj ANGE ATK HOLD DECAY
72. channel is selected the encoder will adjust the output balance of the left and right channels When a STEREO MONO C channel is selected The encoder will not do anything for MONO C channel For a STEREO channel the encoder will adjust the output balance of the left and right channels gt By simultaneously pressing the EQ encoder and the EQ GAIN encoder you can reset the gain to 0 dB for the band selected by the keys below 9 2 If you have selected a LOW band or HIGH band whose type can be changed you can switch the type by turning the EQ encoder while pressing it when Q is set to the maximum or mini mum value LOW band Switches to LOW shelving if you turn the encoder toward the right while pressing it when Q is at the minimum value e Switches to high pass filter if you turn the encoder toward the left while pressing it when Q is at the maximum value MIX MATRIX STEREO and MONO channels only HIGH band Switches to HIGH shelving if you turn the encoder toward the right while pressing it when Q is at the minimum value Switches to low pass filter if you turn the encoder toward the left while pressing it when Q is at the maximum value For shelving high pass filter and low pass filter as well you can switch the type by turning the encoder while pressing it LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual J 21 Top panel 22 9 EQ HIGH key EQ HIGH MID key 1 EQ LOW MID key 0
73. keys to specify the item s you want to link so that they match the settings of the cascade slave The items you can select are the same as in the CASCADE OUT PATCH popup window p 211 Basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses 7 To close the INPUT PORT SELECT popup window move the cursor to the CLOSE but ton or the x symbol in the upper right and press the ENTER key In this state the bus signals of the cascade slave will be sent via the slot to the buses of the cascade master and the combined signals of both buses will be output from the cascade master If the Cascade Link function is enabled the specified operations or parameter changes performed on either LS9 console will be fol lowed by the other LS9 console This section explains how to change the basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses such as switching between stereo and monaural and selecting the position from which the signal is sent from an input channel The settings you make in the following procedure are saved as part of the scene 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section press the SETUP key repeatedly to access the SYS TEM SETUP screen CH10 Initial Data chido 000 R ADMIN SYSTEM SETUP MASTER BUS SETUP OUTPUT PORT OMNI SLOT1 1 8 1 8 CASCADE IN CASCADE OUT ES E LS9 32 SLOT SETUP D BUS SETUP field 2 MIX button 3 MATRIX button 2 To make MIX bus settings move the cursor to the MIX button of the BUS
74. m C8 mm 1 8 30 230 Co 30 Ce 1 C3 60 C3 60 C3 60 C3 60 C3 60 C3 80 C 3 60 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON CD SEL key 2 Meter LEDs LS9 16 32 Owners Manual 47 Setup required when starting up 4 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section HOME key The HOME key restores the LS9 s panel to its basic state home position When you press this key the SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the dis play showing all the parameters of the channel that is selected by its SEL key Also SENDS ON FADER mode will be defeated and the channel level function will be assigned to the faders HA GAIN DYNAMICS 1 THRESHOLD PAN DYNAMICS 2 THRESHOLD SELECTED SEND HIGH MID FREQUENCY LOW MID HOME GAIN LOW Initial Data 000 HR i ima 10 PAN ST ma 00596 uni EG pan 888 9 THRESH PATIO ATK PrE i TIHSERTJI SAFE ON ON YDIRECT LOW L MID H MIDNIESEN oy UTE Gm 2 e s GAIN knob 48 LS9 16 32 Owners Manual 5 Use either of the following methods to adjust the HA gain of the selected channel Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section Operate the SELECTED CHANNEL section HA GAIN encoder When you do so the GAIN knob in the SELECTED CH VIEW screen will move in tan dem If any other screen is displayed a small popup
75. main parameters linked for the two MATRIX channels or MONO x 2 used as two mon aural channels 9 To close the popup window and return to the SYSTEM SETUP screen move the cur sor to the CLOSE button or the x symbol in the upper right and press the ENTER key Setting the date and time of the internal clock Setting the date and time of the internal clock This section explains how to set the date and time of the clock built into the LS9 and how to view the date and time The date and time you specify here will affect the time stamp used when sav ing a scene 1 Inthe DISPLAY ACCESS section press the SETUP key to access the MISC SETUP screen D Q 000 tial MISC SETUP MIDI DATE TIME MIDI 07 31 2006 SETUP TIME eee NETWORK LINK MODE IP ADDRESS GRTEHR SUBNET CONTROL 7 CHANGE RDD BRIGHTNESS SCREEN SCREEN PANEL LAMP CONSOLE CONTRAST LOCK CPU 01 00 BATTERY OK LS9 32 CD DATE TIME field This indicates the currently specified date and time 2 DATE TIME SET popup button This button accesses the DATE TIME popup window where you can set the date and time 2 Move the cursor to the DATE TIME SET popup button in the DATE TIME field and press the ENTER key The DATE TIME popup window will appear D DATE TIME CD DATE field Specifies the date of the internal clock 2 DATE MODE button Specifies the form
76. module of a conventional analog mixer and allows you to manually adjust all the major parame ters of the currently selected channel Operations in this section will affect the channel that is currently selected by its SEL key You can use the encoders and keys on the panel to control mix parameters such as head amp gain EQ settings the threshold setting of the dynamics processors pan balance settings and send levels to the MIX MATRIX buses For a ST IN channel or STEREO channel either the L or the R channel is selected and the major parameters are linked Sh Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section DISPLAY ACCESS MIX MATRIX DYNAMICS 1 DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE orcs LS9 16 IF IAP YAMAHA SCENE MONITOR 1 2 MEMORY lt 5 e E 4 SETUP CHANNEL DYNAMICS 2 JOB re re DEC ING 5 6 RECORDER METER cr be re 7 8 14 pack SS 10 cs e LAYER 12 e 5 FREQUENCY T6 17 32 13 14 CUE c e e MASTER CUSTOM 15 16 FADER CLEAR ENTER SELECTED CHANNEL section If you want to use the SELECTED CHANNEL section to set the send levels to the MIX MATRIX buses use the keys of the MIX MATRIX SELECT section located at the left of the display LS
77. ms 151 Threshold dB 8 Ratio 1 1 7 Attack ms 11 Out gain dB 0 0 Width dB 10 Release ms 128 Threshold dB 20 Ratio 1 2 Attack ms 2 Out gain dB 5 0 Knee 2 Release ms 749 Threshold dB 24 Ratio 1 2 Attack ms 38 Out gain dB 3 5 Width dB 54 Release ms 842 Threshold dB 12 Ratio 1 2 Attack ms 15 Out gain dB 4 5 Knee 2 Release ms 470 Threshold dB 12 Ratio 1 1 7 Attack ms 6 Out gain dB 4 0 Knee hard Release ms 133 Threshold dB 10 Ratio 1 3 5 Attack ms 9 Out gain dB 3 0 Knee hard Release ms 250 Threshold dB 9 Ratio 1 2 5 Attack ms 17 Out gain dB 1 0 Knee hard Release ms 238 Threshold dB 18 Ratio 1 3 5 Attack ms 7 Out gain dB 6 0 Knee 2 Release ms 174 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Appendices 227 DYNAMICS Library List 228 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 Title E Guitar A Guitar Strings Strings2 Strings3 BrassSection Syn Pad SamplingPerc Sampling BD Sampling SN Type COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR COMPANDER S COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Parameter Value Threshold dB 8 Ratio 1 3 5 Attack ms 7 Out gain dB 2 5 Knee 4
78. ms 93 Hold ms 1 205 Decay ms 6 325 Threshold dB 11 Range dB 53 Attack ms 0 Hold ms 1 93 Decay ms 400 Threshold dB 8 Range dB 23 Attack ms 1 Hold ms 0 63 Decay ms 238 Threshold dB 8 Frequency kHz 2 00 Threshold dB 8 Ratio 1 2 5 Attack ms 30 Out gain dB 0 0 Knee 2 Release ms 250 Threshold dB 23 1 1 7 Attack ms 1 Out gain dB 3 5 Knee 2 Release ms 70 Threshold dB 10 1 3 5 Attack ms 1 Out gain dB 0 0 Width dB 6 Release ms 250 Threshold dB 8 Ratio 1 4 Attack ms 25 Out gain dB 0 0 Width dB 24 Release ms 180 Threshold dB 24 Ratio 1 3 Attack ms 9 Out gain dB 5 5 Knee 2 Release ms 58 Threshold dB 11 1 3 5 Attack ms 1 Out gain dB 1 5 Width dB 7 Release ms 192 20 21 A Dr SN A Dr SN A Dr SN A Dr Tom A Dr OverTop E B Finger E B Slap Syn Bass Piano1 Piano2 Type COMPRESSOR EXPANDER COMPANDER S EXPANDER COMPANDER S COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR Parameter Value Threshold dB 17 Ratio 1 2 5 Attack ms 8 Out gain dB 3 5 Knee 2 Release ms 12 Threshold dB 23 Ratio 1 2 Attack ms 0 Out gain dB 0 5 Knee 2 Release
79. output level faders to the minimum position Otherwise high volume output may damage your hearing or equip ment 6 To adjust the HA gain move the cursor to the GAIN knob of the desired channel in the window and use the dial or the DEC INC keys The input level of the channel is shown by the level meter located immediately to the right of the GAIN knob in the screen PAD will be internally switched on or off when the gain is adjusted between 14 dB and 13 dB Keep in mind that noise may be generated if there is a difference between the Hot and Cold output impedance of the external device connected to the INPUT connector when using phantom power 7 To turn on phantom power move the cursor to the 48V button of the desired channel in the window and press the ENTER key The 48V button will turn on red and phantom power will be supplied to the corresponding INPUT jack NOTE e If you want to use phantom power you must first turn ON the 48V MASTER ON OFF button located in the SYSTEM SETUP screen LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual eo Input channel operations 57 HA head amp settings Sending the signal from an input channel to the STEREO MONO bus 8 To switch the phase of each channel 10 When you ve finished making settings between normal and reverse phase move move the cursor to the CLOSE button or the cursor to the 0 button of the desired the x symbol in the upper right of the win channe
80. the Insert In of that same channel will automatically be selected as the output destination for that rack When you defeat an Insert Out the Insert In will also be defeated automatically For details on Insert Out In refer to Inserting an external device into a channel gt p 101 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual J 159 About the virtual rack 5 Switch the tabs as necessary and select the input source that you want to use When you select an input source in the OUTPUT CH SELECT popup window a dialog box will ask you to confirm the change in patching To confirm the opera tion move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key You have the option of making settings so that the patch change confirmation dialog box does not appear gt p 194 e If you selected 31 Band GEQ you ll be able to select one channel of input otherwise you ll be able to select two chan nels of input 6 Move the cursor to the OUTPUT button for that rack and press the ENTER key The INPUT CH SELECT popup window will appear allowing you to select the output destination for the rack INPUT CH SELECT CRACK1AI CH1 INSERT IN PEs ESEBESES ees Eee ES ES ES ES ES ES ES D Channel select tabs These tabs switch the type of channels that are shown in the lower part of the window 2 Channel select buttons Us
81. the audio file will not play access the SCENE PLAYBACK LINK when scene recall occurs 7 SONGTITLE FILE NAME field This shows the title or file name of the audio file NOTE The audio file to be played must be saved in the SONGS folder within the YPE folder Please note that you won t be able to specify a file that is in the root directory or another folder When you execute playback the path in the TITLE LIST screen will change to YPE SONGS USB memory recorder file name is shown in black if the specified file no longer exists and the song title or file name is shown in yellow if the file can no longer be recognized Initial Data Sound Check 01 2 5 file specified for linking is distinguished by its eight char Background Music 0 1 05 acter file name three character extension If you change the Sound Effect 02 0 05 EOM 2 ns file name after specifying it for linking or if you repeatedly delete and copy the file there may be rare cases in which the linked file can longer be recognized UNDO OFFSET Offset time 9 This shows the time from the recall operation until the corresponding audio file will begin playing s list 9 SONG TITLE FILE NAME buttons D Scene lis These buttons select the item that is shown in the This is the list of scenes to which you can assign SONG TITLE FILE NAME field song audio file T
82. 1 8 Slot 2 input channels 1 8 INPUT channels 49 56 Slot output channels 9 16 MIX channels 9 16 Slot 2 input channels 9 16 INPUT channels 57 64 Slot 1 output channels 1 8 MIX channels 1 8 Slot 1 output channels 9 16 MIX channels 9 16 Slot 2 output channels 1 8 MIX channels 1 8 Slot 2 output channels 9 16 MIX channels 9 16 The LS9 s 2TR IN DIGITAL 2TR OUT DIGITAL jacks are used to transfer two channel digital audio signals to or from an external device e g CD player or CD MD recorder By installing a separately sold digital I O card in a slot you can add more input output jacks to the LS9 or connect a DAW system or speaker processor For details on the types of I O cards that can be used refer to the appendix at the end of this manual gt p 274 Check the Yamaha website for the most recent information on I O cards http www yamahaproaudio com NOTE In order for digital audio signal to be transmitted or received via the 2TR IN DIGITAL 2TR OUT DIGITAL jacks or slots the word clock of both devices must be synchronized p 46 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual IN Connections and setup 43 Installing an option card Installing an option card Before you install I O card in a slot you must check the Yamaha website to verify whether the LS9 supports that card and to verify the number of other Yamaha cards or third party cards that can be used in conjunction with it http www yamahap
83. 2 channel TO STEREO PAN MIX STEREO channel MIX BALANCE MATRIX MONO x 2 channel Not displayed MATRIX STEREO channel MATRIX BALANCE STEREO channel STEREO BALANCE MONO channel Not displayed You can also access the TO STEREO MONO popup window by moving the cursor to the PAN BAL knob and pressing the ENTER key 3 ST MONO button INPUT ST IN MIX channels only This switches the on off status of the signal sent from that channel to the STEREO L R bus and MONO C bus LCR button If an INPUT ST IN or MIX channel is set to LCR mode the LCR button is displayed in location 8 The LCR but ton is an overall on off switch for the signals sent from the channel to the STEREO bus and MONO bus To adjust the pan balance of each channel use the ST button or the LCR button to select the send desti nation bus and operate the SELECTED CHANNEL sec tion PAN encoder Alternatively move the cursor to the PAN BAL knob in the screen and operate the dial or the DEC INC keys a gt If you want to make pan balance settings for eight channels at a time use the PAN popup button in the screen to access the TO STEREO MONO popup window gt p 72 Alternatively you can move the cursor to the PAN BAL knob and press the ENTER key to access it If you ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window gt p 194 you can also access the above popup window by pressin
84. 2 Mode Parameter 1 Parameter 2 NO ASSIGN 0 ON CH 1 CH 32 64 LOW Q INPUT a STINIL STIN4R ONE MIX 1 MIX 16 OUTPUT MATRIX 1 MATRIX 8 STE LOW G REO L MONO C LOW MID Q CH 1 CH 32 64 LOW MID F INPUT STINIL STIN4R TUTTO MIX 1 MIX 16 OUTPUT MATRIX 1 MATRIX 8 INPUT EQ HIGH MID Q CH 1 CH 32 64 STEREO L MONO C HIGH MID F STIN1L STINAR CH 1 CH 32 64 HIGH MID G INPUT STIN1L STINAR TAR CH ON MIX 1 MIX 16 HIGH OUTPUT MATRIX 1 MATRIX 8 STEREO L MONO C HIGH G PHASE INPUT Mm e end LPF ON LOW TYPE INPUT CH 1 CH 32 INSERT MIX 1 MIX 16 OUTPUT MATRIX 1 MATRIX 8 INPUT ATT INPUT plus 2 STEREO L MONO C DIRECTOUT ON CH 1 CH 32 64 INPUT HPF ON CH 1 CH 32 64 cH 32464 FREQ STIN1L STINAR PAN BALANCE INPUT S MIX 1 MIX 16 LOW BALANCE OUTPUT MATRIX 1 MATRIX 8 STEREO L STEREO R LOWF LOW G CH 1 CH 32 64 25 STIN1L STIN4R LOW MID Q CH 1 CH 32 64 LOW MID F TO MONO ON STIN1L STINAR LOW MID G ON CH 1 CH 32 64 LCR STIN1L STIN4R HIGH MID Q MIX 1 MIX 16 CSR MIX 1 MIX 16 OUTPUT EQ HIGH MID F MATRIX 1 MATRIX 8 Moe STEREO L MONO C ON HIGH Q MIX 1 PRE MIX 16 POINT HIGH F HIGH G VIBCSENBI MIX 1 LVL H CH 1 CH 32 64 MIX 16 LVLH STINIL STIN4R LOW TYPE MIX 1 LVL L HIGH TYPE MIX 16 LVLL LOW HPF ON MIX 1 2 PAN MIX 15 16 PAN HIGH LPF ON TO ST ON MIX 1 MIX 16 OUTPUT ATT OUTPUT MATRIX 1 MATRIX 16 MIX TO ST TO MONO ON MIX 1 16 STEREO L MONO C PAN ON MTRX1 POINT ATTACK MTRX8 POINT
85. 300 You can t insert in front of a scene for which the R symbol read only is specified 5 To execute the Insert operation move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The scene stored in the buffer memory will be insert at the scene number you selected in step 3 The numbers of scenes stored in locations preceding that scene will be moved back by one Using the Focus function Using the Focus function Focus is a function that lets you select the parameters that will be updated when you recall each scene so that only specific parameters will be updated when you recall that scene For example it is convenient to use this if you want to recall only the input channel settings of a certain scene As a function that is the converse of Focus there is also a Recall Safe function that lets you select channels and parameters to be excluded from recall operations 140 However while the Focus function is specified for each scene Recall Safe settings are common to all scenes In the DISPLAY ACCESS section press the SCENE MEMORY key repeatedly to access the SCENE FOCUS screen In this screen you can make various settings for the Focus function The screen contains the following items 3 Use the buttons other than ALL to select the parameters that will be subject to recall These buttons correspond to the following parameters multiple selections are allowed Button name Correspond
86. 32 only SEE Adjusts the brightness of the lamp con nected to the rear panel LAMP jack Other functions di LS9 16 32 Owners Manual J 217 Using the Help function Using the Help function You can view Help files provided by Yamaha or display any desired text file created by the user We accept no responsibility for any damages that may result from the use of Help files created by a third party other than Yamaha Loading a Help file from a USB mem ory The help file is not backed up in internal memory Each time you turn on the power you must reload it from your USB memory It is convenient to save your help file on the USB memory that contains your user authentication key 1 Before you proceed save the Help file extension xml provided by Yamaha on your USB memory You can download the most recent version of the Help file from the Yamaha website http www yamahaproaudio com 2 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section press the SETUP key repeatedly to access the USER SETUP screen SAVE LOAD button 000 Initial Data R ADMIN CURRENT USER 5TORAGE Administrator GER M CREATE USER KEY et PREFERENCE PREFERENCE USER DEFINED d es USER DEFINED KEYS SAVE LOAD CUSTOM FADER CUSTOM FADER LAYER LAYER USER LEVEL v USER LEVEL 218 f LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual 3 Move the cursor to the SAVE LOAD button and press the ENTER key The SAVE LOAD popup window will a
87. 5 0 56 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 7 5dB 4 5dB 2 5 0 0 dB 09 E Bass 1 F 35 5 Hz 112 Hz 2 00 kHz 4 00 kHz Q 5 0 4 5 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 3 0 dB 0 0 dB 2 5 dB 0 5 dB 10 E Bass 2 112 Hz 112 Hz 2 24 kHz 4 00 kHz Q 0 10 5 0 6 3 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 3 5 dB 8 5 dB 0 0 dB 0 0 dB 11 Syn Bass 1 F 85 0 Hz 950 Hz 4 00 kHz 12 5 kHz Q 0 10 8 0 4 5 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 2 5 dB 0 0 dB 1 5 dB 0 0 dB 12 Syn Bass 2 F 125Hz 180Hz 1 12 kHz 12 5 kHz Q 1 6 8 0 2 2 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF G 6 0 0 0 2 0 dB 4 0 dB 13 1 F 95 0 Hz 950 Hz 3 15 kHz 7 50 kHz Q 8 0 0 90 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Title Piano 2 Clean Crunch 1 Crunch 2 Dist 1 Dist 2 Stroke 1 Stroke 2 Arpeg 1 Arpeg 2 Brass Sec Male Vocal 1 Male Vocal 2 Parameter LOW L MID H MID HIGH PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 3 5dB 8 5dB 1 5dB 3 0 dB F 224 Hz 600 Hz 3 15 kHz 5 30 kHz Q 5 6 10 0 0 70 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 2 0dB 5 5 dB 0 5 dB 2 5 dB 265 Hz 400 Hz 1 32 kHz 4 50 kHz Q 0 18 10 0 6 3 PEAKING PEAKING PE
88. 6 PLAYBACK OUT field Here you can make settings for the recorder outputs PLAYBACK OUT popup buttons L R These buttons access the INPUT CH SELECT popup window where you can patch channels to the L R out puts of the recorder Output level meter This level meter indicates the level of the signal being output from the recorder OUTPUT CUE button This button cue monitors the signal that is being out put from the recorder Move the cursor to the button and press the ENTER key to turn cue on off 2 To assign channels to the recorder inputs move the cursor to the RECORDER INPUT popup button L or R and press the ENTER key The OUTPUT CH SELECT popup window will appear OUTPUT CH RECORDER IN STEREO L r DIRE mmm pr RES Mal Biel 57 CLOSE LS9 32 D Category tabs These tabs select the type of channels shown in the lower part of the window OUT CH Output channels will be shown CH 1 32 1 32 33 64 Direct outputs of INPUT channels 1 32 1 32 33 64 will be shown Assigning channels to the input output of the recorder 2 Channel select buttons 6 To assign channels to the recorder outputs Select the channels that will be assigned to the USB move the cursor to the PLAYBACK OUT memory recorder s inputs from the following choices popup button L or R and pr
89. C R three channel output using the STEREO MONO channels is also supported E Analog feeling Simply by pressing key you can select the combination of channels fader layer to be operated from the top panel faders You can operate the console while quickly switching between input channels and output channels In addition you can also use a custom fader layer that lets you specify any desired combination of channels Since fader cue operations and on off switching for all channels can be performed from the panel even customers using digital consoles for the first time will find operation famil iar and comfortable The SELECTED CHANNEL section located at the right of the display lets you use the knobs to control the main parameters gain EQ dynamics threshold bus send lev els etc for the particular channel on which you re focus ing This section can be operated just like a module on an analog mixer Mix parameter settings including head amp gain and phantom power for input channels can be stored and recalled as scenes All faders on the panel are motorized moving faders so that when you recall a scene the previous fader locations are reproduced immediately LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Introduction al 9 An overview of the LS9 10 E Effects and graphic EQ that can patched into a desired signal path There are eight virtual racks in which you can mou
90. CHANNEL E Ed RECORDER METER 514 14 pack 3 8 Basic operations on the LS9 G When you press one of the keys in the DISPLAY ACCESS section the corresponding screen will appear in the display If the screen consists of more than one page you can switch between pages by pressing the same key repeatedly For example if you press the SCENE MEM ORY key the SCENE MEMORY screen will appear where you can store or recall scene memories CH10 Check chi 00 1 ADMIN SCENE LIST copy CLEAR COMMENT STATUS Initial Data Initial Settins Test mode setting COMMENT STORE RECALL UNDO If you press the lit DISPLAY ACCESS key while a popup screen is displayed the popup screen will close e If you press and hold down the DISPLAY ACCESS section key the previously displayed screen will appear LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual J 29 Viewing the display Viewing the display Here we explain the various types of information shown in the display w n 000 Data D Selected channel This shows the number name and icon of the channel currently selected by its SEL key for operations For details on assigning a name gt p 34 For details on select ing an icon gt p 55 69 You can also move the cursor to this area and use the dial or the DEC INC keys to change the selected channel 2 Scene memory This shows the number and name of the scene that is
91. Effect settings whose effect type is HQ Pitch or Freeze can be recalled only to racks 5 or 7 They cannot be recalled if any other rack is selected If you select a library item number that cannot be recalled the RECALL button will be disabled 5 Move the cursor to the RECALL button and press the ENTER key The selected data will be loaded into the channel EQ dynamics or rack GEQ effect you selected in step 2 You also have the option of displaying a dialog box that asks you to confirm the recall operation gt p 194 Storing data in a library 1 Access a popup window or screen that con tains tool buttons 2 Select the channel EQ dynamics whose settings you want to store or the rack in which the GEQ effect whose settings you want to store is already mounted 3 Move the cursor to the LIB button in the toolbar and press the ENTER key to access the popup window or screen of the corresponding library Initial Data Monitori 02 Stage01 STORE RECALL STORE button 4 Move the cursor to the list and use the dial or the DEC INC keys to select the store destination library number 5 After you ve selected the store destination move the cursor to the STORE button and press the ENTER key The LIBRARY STORE popup window will appear allowing you to assign a name to the data For details on entering text refer to Assigning a name gt p 34 6
92. Error 268 EXPANDER 230 External head 175 F 143 FADER field ice 82 Pader layl siririn 27 Firmware versionn 14 Focus CION 139 Front partiel 26 Functions that can be assigned to user defined keys 257 G GATE 229 General 272 jo DIE 161 Graphic EQ eerte treten tih 161 31BandGEQ 161 163 5 161 164 e 161 MOUNTING i cir Eden ence et teca 158 Grounding 25 ICI 187 H es 82 GAIN 21 settings 47 Head amp 47 Headphone output 26 Help erre ees 218 HOME 04000 22 27 82 Initializing internal memory 222 INPUT Channel Siz oer bir Frater ent 13 53 Input channels cotone tr 13 53 Head amp 57 Sending to MIX bus 62 Sending to STER
93. HIGH HIGH MID LOW MID and LOW COMP COMPANDER EXPAND compressor com pander expander This is a dynamics processor that can be used as a com pressor compander or expander LEVEL This adjusts the output level of the channel BALANCE STEREO channel only Adjusts the left right volume balance of the STEREO L R channel 68 LS9 16 32 Owners Manual ae Mcd mca Aca ny c haai co oo mr p ar GEN C cec c i a Rc dc o c 8 Y INSERT POINT To RACKIN PATCH po M a INSERT OUT 1 8 PBIPOSTON INSERT OUT MATRIX 191 INSERTINI 8 PREEQ EQOUT PRE FADER POSTON METER METER METER GR METER LEVEL on INSERT yy 48AND ME INSERT do INSERT MATRIX uid To OUTPUT PATCH EQ EXPAND i To MONTOR SELECT PRE FADER OSTON TO RECORDER IN PATCH M PRE FADER INSERT OUTIM POST ON INSERT OUT Self PRE EQ Self POST EQ MIX13 16 OUT MATRIX1 8 POST EQ S o 088g PRE FADER PFL POST J Nae ae mme o emme eme m ee ON on off Turns the output channel on off If this is off the corre sponding channel is muted TO MATRIX ON OFF MATRIX send on off This is an on off switch for the signal sent from the MIX channels STEREO L R channel or MONO C channel to each MATRIX bus 1 8
94. However if the DELAY or FREQ were changed the effect would sound differently when recalled than when it was stored To prevent the effect from changing in this way between store and recall the LS9 does not update the DELAY or FREQ value when an effect is recalled even if the TEMPO is no longer the same as when that effect was stored The NOTE parameter is calculated based on the following values 1 48 1 24 1 16 dad 1 12 3 32 1 8 ddd 1 6 J 3 16 d 1 4 d 3 8 d 1 2 1 3 4 a 1 1 ua 2 1 244 LS9 16 32 Owners Manual Scene Memory Effect Library to Program Change Table Scene Memory Effect Library to Program Change Table E Preset Bank Ch 1 Preset Bank Ch 2
95. If you ve selected DEFINE in the SOURCE SELECT field you can use the ASSIGN field to select multiple sources The following table shows the monitor sources you can select in the ASSIGN field MIX 1 16 buttons MIX channels 1 16 output signals MATRIX 1 8 but tons MATRIX buses 1 8 output signals STEREO L R button STEREO L R channel output signal MONO button MONO channel output signal 2TR L R button 2TR IN DIGITAL jack input signal INPUT 15 16 31 32 INPUT channels 15 16 31 32 input button signal PLAYBACK OUT USB memory recorder playback signal You can select a maximum of eight monitor sources in the ASSIGN field If you select eight monitor sources no further selections will be possible Please turn off the buttons for unneeded sources 4 Move the cursor to one of the port select boxes L R C located below the level meter and press the ENTER key The OUT PORT SELECT popup window will appear allowing you to specify the port from which the L R and C monitor signals will be output OUTPUT PORT SELECT OMNI1 EMEH BIR Bike ERO ic ct 48 Jour LS9 16 5 Move the cursor to the output destination port and press the ENTER key to select it then move the cursor to the CLOSE button and press the ENTER key to close the popup window The following table lists the output ports you can select
96. Initial Data 0 000 R ADMIN SYSTEM SETUP E MASTER BUS SETUP OUTPUT PORT SETUP MIX OMNI SLOTI SLOTZ 1 8 1 6 SLOTZ MIXER SETUP WORD CLOCK SLOT SETUP CASCADE IN CASCADE OUT LS9 32 D SLOT SETUP button 2 Move the cursor to the SLOT SETUP button of the MIXER SETUP field in the lower part of the screen and press the ENTER key The SLOT SETUP popup window will appear allow ing you to make slot related settings This popup win dow contains the following items 1 2 48k 45k 5 OFF OFF OFF OFF D Card type Card type Slot number This area shows the type of I O card installed in the slot On the LS9 32 this area shows the slot number and the type of I O card in each slot 2 FREQ Frequency This indicates the sampling frequency of the signal being input to each channel of an MY8 AE96 or MY8 AE96S digital I O card in sets of two channels 208 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual 8 SRC buttons For digital I O cards that contain a built in SRC Sam pling Rate Converter the SCR can be switched on off in groups of two channels EMPHASIS This area indicates whether emphasis processing is applied to the input signals of a slot in which an AES EBU format digital I O card is installed in units of two channels This indication is displayed as follows Item Description No signal or a signal without emphasis is being input A valid digital audio signal is being input and
97. LEVEL 2 Move the cursor to the PASSWORD CHANGE popup button and press the ENTER key A keyboard window will appear allowing you to enter the password F AUTHOR ZAT ION ER NAME Administ CLEAR TISZESISIS EE EB gu CCS pb ups E b p ke gt s SHIFT LOCK CRNCEL User settings Security LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual J 191 User Level settings 3 Enter the current password move the cur sor to the OK button and press the ENTER key For details on entering a password refer to Assigning a name p 34 When you enter the correct password a keyboard win dow will appear allowing you to enter the new pass word Dp p 00 81 93 0 m io Gy sy a d SD GC SHIFT LOCK CRNCEL 4 Enter the password in the NEW PASSWORD field then move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key Editing a user authentication key If you are logged in as a user you can edit your custom fader layer user defined keys and preference settings and overwrite save them onto your user authentication key If you are logged in as a Power User you can also change the user level 1 Log in as a user and edit the custom fader layer p 91 user defined keys p 196 and preference settings gt p 194 If you are logged in as a Power User you can also change the user level 2 In the DISPLAY ACCESS s
98. LEVEL HPF LPF WIDTH INTERVAL Oscillator type SINE WAVE 1CH PINK NOISE BURST NOISE The following table describes each parameter in detail Parameter Details LEVEL Oscillator output level Frequency of the sine wave produced FREQ by the oscillator High pass filter on off switch cutoff HPF frequency LPF Low pass filter on off switch cutoff fre quency WIDTH Duration of the noise INTERVAL Length of silence between noise bursts Level INTERVAL Pink noise output BURST NOISE button is on 4 Using the buttons in the ASSIGN field select the bus es to which you want to send the oscillator signal You may select more than one The buttons correspond to the following buses MIX 1 16 buttons MIX buses 1 16 MATRIX 1 8 but MATRIX buses 1 8 tons ST L ST R MONO buttons STEREO bus L R MONO bus e If you want to clear all selections move the cursor to the CLEAR ALL button and press the ENTER key LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Talkback Oscillator Cn 153 Using the oscillator 5 To enable the oscillator move the cursor to the OUTPUT button and press the ENTER key to turn it on The oscillator signal will be sent to the bus es you selected in step 4 When you select the button and press the ENTER key once again the oscillator will be turned off You can also assign the oscillator
99. Link function you must specify the port that will transmit and receive control signals and specify the parameters and events that will be linked The following pages explain the required settings for cascade connection and the method of operation separately for the cascade slave and the cascade master gt You can also cascade connect the 159 with digital mixers that have a Mini YGDAI slot such as the Yamaha M7CL or PM5D However this only allows you to cascade the audio signals linking via control signals is not possible You can also use an AD DA card to make cascade connections with an analog mixer There is no limit to the number of units that can be cascade con nected but the signal delay from each cascade slave will increase according to the number of units between it and the cascade mas ter Other functions di LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual J 209 Using cascade connections Operations on the cascade slave 1 Inthe DISPLAY ACCESS section press the SETUP key repeatedly to access the SYS TEM SETUP screen Initial Data 000 RI ADMIN MRSTER BUS SETUP OUTPUT PORT SETUP OMNI SLOT SLOTZ 1 8 1 8 426 CP ZTR OUT SLOT1 SLOTZ S18 Bs MIXER SETUP WORD CLOCK SLOT SETUP CASCADE IN CASCADE OUT 59 32 D CASCADE OUT button 2 In the MIXER SETUP field located at the lower part of the SYSTEM SETUP screen move the cursor to the CASCADE OUT but ton and press the
100. Manual D Effect type field This shows the effect title the name of the type that is used and a graphic The number of input output chan nels 1 IN 2 OUT or 2 IN 2 OUT of this effect is also shown If you move the cursor to the effect type graphic and press the ENTER key the EFFECT TYPE popup window will appear allowing you to select the effect type 2 BYPASS button This button temporarily bypasses the effect 3 EFFECT CUE button This button cue monitors the output of the currently displayed effect This cue function is valid only while this screen is displayed The cue will be cancelled automatically when you switch to a different screen Special parameter field This shows special parameters that are specific to some effect types 5 Input output meters These indicate the level of the signals before and after the effect 6 INPUT L R buttons These buttons display the OUTPUT CH SELECT popup window 7 OUTPUT L R buttons These buttons display the INPUT CH SELECT popup window Effect parameter field This area shows parameters for the currently selected effect type 3 If you want to change the effect type pro ceed as follows 7 Move the cursor to the effect type graphic and press the ENTER key The EFFECT TYPE popup window will appear MONO DELAY STEREO DELAY HOD DELRS CLOSE button 2 Use the dial or the cursor keys to move the cursor and select the new effect type
101. Manual J 59 For channels whose MODE button is set to LCR mode the following button and knob are shown instead of the ST button 3 and MONO button 4 6 LCR button This button is an on off switch for all signals sent from that channel to the STEREO bus and MONO bus If you turn off the button no signals will be sent from that input channel to the STEREO bus or MONO bus 7 CSR knob This knob adjusts the relative level of the signals sent from that channel to the STEREO L R bus and to the MONO bus in a range of 0 100946 Move the cur sor to the knob and use the dial or the DEC INC keys to adjust the setting 7 Use the MODE button to select either ST MONO mode or LCR mode for each chan nel 8 The ST button and MONO button are on off switches for the signal sent from each channel to the STEREO bus and MONO bus 9 it you want to use the STEREO bus make sure that the ON key of the STEREO chan nel is turned on in the top panel STEREO MASTER section and raise the fader of the STEREO channel to an appropriate posi tion 10 If you want to use the MONO bus make sure that the ON key of the MONO channel is turned on and raise the fader of the MONO channel to an appropriate position This operation will differ between the LS9 16 and LS9 32 For the LS9 16 Assign the MONO channel to the custom fader layer press the LAYER CUSTOM FADER key to access the custom fader layer and then operate the
102. Modulation waveform es 5 SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off NOTE 1 to determina FREQ Mi Used in conjunction with TEMPO NOTE i to FREQ 4 GA BGIS BO 145 ded J d d Il REV PAN This is a 1 in 2 out series connected reverb and auto pan effect Parameter Range Description REV TIME 0 3 99 0 s Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Spread DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density Reverb and panned reverb bal REV BAL 0 10096 ance 096 all panned reverb 10096 all reverb THRU 21 2 Hz HPF 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz 4 THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 10096 Modulation depth DIR 1 Panning direction WAVE Sine Tri Square Modulation waveform SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off Used in conjunction with TEMPO 2 NOTE to determine FREQ 1 L amp R LR L amp R Turn L Turn R 2 BT Bebo ddd d 4 4 d d 9 os LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Appendices 239 Effects Parameters 240 DELAY FR One input two output delay and early reflections effects in E DELAY ER One input two output delay and early reflections effects in
103. No Assign Preset Bank Ch 16 Program Change Scene Effect Preset No Assign LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Appendices e 247 Scene Memory Effect Library to Program Change Table 248 E Bank Ch e ss 001 044 087 002 045 088 003 046 089 004 047 090 005 048 091 006 049 092 007 050 093 008 051 094 009 052 095 010 053 096 011 054 097 012 055 098 013 056 099 014 057 100 015 058 101 016 059 102 017 060 103 018 061 104 019 062 105 020 063 106 021 064 107 022 065 108 023 066 109 024 067 110 025 068 111 026 069 112 027 070 113 028 071 114 029 072 115 030 073 116 031 074 117 032 075 118 033 076 119 034 077 120 035 078 121 036 079 122 037 080 123 038 081 124 039 082 125 040 083 126 041 084 127 042 085 128 043 086 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Parameters that can be assigned to control changes Parameters that can be assigned to control changes Mode Parameter 1 Parameter
104. Note On velocity SENSE 0 100 Sensitivity DIR UP DOWN Upward or downward frequency change DECAY Decay speed OFFSET 0 100 Lowest phase shifted frequency offset Feedback gain plus values for FB GAIN 99 to 49996 normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback STAGE 11 A 8 10 12 Number of phase shift stages LSH F 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G 12 0 to 12 0 dB Low shelving filter gain HSH F 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G 12 0to 12 0 dB High shelving filter gain i 6 0 ms 46 0 s fs 44 1 kHz 5 0 ms 42 3 s fs 48 kHz E REV CHORUS One input two output reverb and chorus effects in parallel Parameter Range Description REV TIME 0 3 99 05 Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Spread DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density Reverb and chorus balance 0 0 REV CHO 0 100 all reverb 100 all chorus THRU 21 2 Hz HPF 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz LPF THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed AM DEPTH 0 100 Amplitude modulation depth PM DEPTH 0 100 Pitch modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off NOTE 1 Used in conjunction with TEM
105. Note number Ovvvvvvv Velocity ignored 1 2 NOTE ON 9n Reception These messages are echoed to MIDI OUT if OTHER COMMAND ECHO is ON They are received if Rx CH matches and used to control effects STATUS 1001nnnn 9n Note on message DATA Onnnnnnn nn Note number Ovvvvvvv vv Velocity 1 127 on 0 off 1 3 CONTROL CHANGE Bn Two types of CONTROL CHANGE can be transmitted and received NRPN Non Registered Parameter Numbers and freely assigned TABLE 1CH x 110 messages Select either TABLE or NRPN Reception These messages are echoed to MIDI OUT if CONTROL CHANGE ECHO is ON If TABLE is selected these messages are received when CONTROL CHANGE Rx is ON and Rx CH matches and will control parameters according to the settings of the CONTROL CHANGE EVENT LIST For the parameters that can be assigned refer to Parameters that can be assigned to control changes on page 249 If NRPN is selected these messages are received when CONTROL CHANGE Rx is ON and the Rx CH matches the four messages NRPN control number 62h 63h and DATA ENTRY control number 06h 26h are used to control the specified parameter Transmission If TABLE is selected and if CONTROL CHANGE Tx is ON when you operate a parameter that is assigned in the CONTROL CHANGE EVENT LIST these messages will be transmitted on the Tx CH channel For the parameters that can be assigned refer to Parameters that can be assigned to
106. OMNI 1 8 1 16 OMNI OUT jacks 1 8 1 16 2TR OUT L R 2TR OUT DIGITAL jack L R Output channels 1 16 of an I O card installed in a slot 1 2 SLOT 1 2 1 16 If desired you can specify output ports only for MONITOR OUT L and and monitor through two speakers If you have not specified an output port for MONITOR OUT C selecting the MONO button or LCR button as the monitor source will automatically cause the MONO channel signal to be distrib uted to MONITOR OUT L R Using the Monitor function 6 To output the monitor signal move the cur sor to the OUTPUT button of the MONITOR Screen and press the ENTER key to turn it on The monitor source you selected in step 3 will be sent to the output destination you specified in step 5 The PHONES OUT jack will always output the monitor signal regardless of whether the OUTPUT button is on or off 7 Move the cursor to the MONITOR LEVEL knob in the MONITOR screen and use the dial or the DEC INC keys to adjust the monitor level If PHONES LEVEL LINK is ON you can use both the MONITOR LEVEL knob and the front panel PHONES LEVEL control to adjust the monitor level when monitoring through headphones If PHONES LEVEL LINK is on the MONITOR LEVEL knob will also affect the PHONES OUT jack If you turn on MONITOR ON MASTER FADER that you ve assigned to a user defined key you ll be able to use the mas ter fader to control the monitor
107. Release ms 261 Threshold dB 10 Ratio 1 2 5 Attack ms 5 Out gain dB 1 5 Knee 2 Release ms 238 Threshold dB 11 Ratio 1 2 Attack ms 33 Out gain dB 1 5 Knee 2 Release ms 749 Threshold dB 12 Ratio 1 1 5 Attack ms 93 Out gain dB 1 5 Knee 4 Release ms 1 35 8 Threshold dB 17 Ratio 1 1 5 Attack ms 76 Out gain dB 2 5 Knee 2 Release ms 186 Threshold dB 18 Ratio 1 1 7 Attack ms 18 Out gain dB 4 0 Knee 1 Release ms 226 Threshold dB 13 Ratio 1 2 Attack ms 58 Out gain dB 2 0 Knee 1 Release ms 238 Threshold dB 18 Ratio 1 1 7 Attack ms 8 Out gain dB 2 5 Width dB 18 Release ms 238 Threshold dB 14 Ratio 1 2 Attack ms 2 Out gain dB 3 5 Knee 4 Release ms 35 Threshold dB 18 Ratio 1 4 Attack ms 8 Out gain dB 8 0 Knee hard Release ms 354 At fs 44 1 kHz Title Type Parameter Value Threshold dB 23 Ratio 1 20 Attack ms 15 32 Hip Comp COMPANDER S Out gain dB 0 0 Width dB 15 Release ms 163 Threshold dB 20 Ratio 1 2 5 Attack ms 31 33 Solo 1 COMPRESSOR Out gain dB 2 0 Knee 1 Release ms 342 Threshold dB 8 Ratio 1 2 5 Attack ms 26 34 Solo Vocal2 COMPRESSOR Out gain dB 1 5 Knee 3
108. SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the display Initial Data 000 0 MTRX PRTCH REL GAIN KNEE X INSERT SAFE LOW L MID H MID D SEND popup button 2 Use the LAYER section keys and the chan nel module section SEL keys to select a MIX STEREO L R or MONO channel Sending signals from MIX channels and STEREO MONO channels to MATRIX buses 3 Use the MIX MATRIX SELECT section keys to select the send destination MATRIX bus Only the LED of the corresponding key will blink indicating that it is selected as the send destination Press the same key of the MIX MATRIX SELECT section once again The key will change from lit to blinking and the LEDs of the remaining keys in the MIX MATRIX SELECT section will light This indicates that the LS9 is now in SENDS ON FADER mode allowing you to use the faders to control the send levels to the MIX bus MATRIX bus In SENDS ON FADER mode the faders and ON keys of the channel module section will change their operation as follows Faders The faders will adjust the send level of the signal sent from each channel to the currently selected MATRIX bus When you switch from normal mode to SENDS ON FADER mode the fader positions will move to the value of the send levels to the currently selected MATRIX bus ON keys These keys will function as on off switches for the sig nal sent from each channel to the currently selected MATRI
109. SETUP popup button and press the ENTER key to access the MIDI SETUP popup window 4 As described in Basic MIDI settings p 178 select the ports and MIDI channels that will be used to transmit receive control changes 5 When you ve finished making settings move the cursor to the CLOSE button and press the ENTER key to close the popup window You will return to the MISC SETUP screen 0 BANK SELECT 1 FADER H 2 FRDER H FADER 4 FRDER H Initial Data 000 ADMIN ETUP MIDI DATE TIME uo 07 31 2006 16 10 30 NETWORK D CONTROL CHANGE field pulsas Here you can switch control change transmission reception on off and specify whether control changes will be echoed out This setting is linked with the CONTROL CHANGE field of the MIDI SETUP CONSOLE CONTRRST BRIGHTNESS 1 TEUR popup window SCREEN SCREEN PANEL LAMP ere CONTROL 7 CHANGE LS9 16 32 Owners Manual J 183 Using control changes to control parameters 2 CONTROL CHANGE MODE field Here you can select the control change transmission reception mode This setting is linked with the CON TROL CHANGE MODE field of the MIDI SETUP popup window 3 List This list shows the event fader encoder pattern ON key on off operation etc assigned to each control number NO This indicates the control number You can use control numbers 1 3
110. THRESHOLD MTRX1 ON MTRX8 ON RANGE HOLD H Mix To MTRXT LVL H MIX 1 MIX 16 LVL HOLD L CH 1 CH 32 64 INPUT DYNA1 64 MTRX1 LVL L MTRX8 DECAY RELH STIN1L STINAR LVLL DECAY REL L MTRX1 2 PAN MTRX7 8 PAN RATIO MTRX1 POINT GAIN H MTRX8 POINT GAIN L B MTRX1 ON MTRX8 KNEE WIDTH MTRX1 LVL H STTOMIRK sieeve ivi STEREO L MONO C MTRX1 LVL L MTRX8 LVLL MTRX1 2 PAN MTRX7 8 PAN LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual J 249 Parameters that can be assigned to control changes 250 Mode INPUT DYNA2 Parameter 1 ON ATTACK THRESHOLD RELEASE H RELEASE L RATIO GAIN H GAIN L KNEE WIDTH FILTER FREQ Parameter 2 CH 1 CH 32 64 STIN1L STIN4R OUTPUT DYNA1 ON ATTACK THRESHOLD RELEASE H RELEASE L RATIO GAIN H GAIN L KNEE WIDTH MIX 1 MIX 16 MATRIX 1 MATRIX 8 STEREO L MONO C EFFECT BYPASS MIX BAL PARAM 1 H PARAM 32L RACK5 8 GEQ ONA ONB GAIN A 1 GAIN A 31 GAIN B 1 GAIN B 31 RACK1 8 MUTE MASTER ON MASTER 1 MASTER 8 RECALL SAFE ON CH 1 CH 32 64 STIN1L STIN4R MIX 1 MIX 16 MATRIX 1 MATRIX 8 STEREO L MONO C RACK1 8 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Control change parameter assignments Control change parameter assignments I PRESET cece Mode Parameter 1 Paramete
111. Two input two output dynamically controlled flanger Parameter Range Description Parameter Range Description FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed SOURCE INPUT MIDI input signal or DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth Left channel modulation and SENSE 0 100 Sensitivity PHASE 0 00 354 38 degrees right channel modulation DIR UP DOWN Upward or downward frequency phase difference change TYPE LPF HPF Filter type low pass high pass DECAY Filter frequency change decay band pass speed OFFSET 0 100 Filter frequency offset TYPE LPF HPF BPF Filter type RESO 0 20 Filter resonance OFFSET 0 100 Filter frequency offset LEVEL 0 100 Output level RESO 0 20 Filter resonance SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off LEVEL 0 100 Output Level Used in conjunction with 1 1 6 0 ms 46 0 s fs 44 1 kHz 5 0 ms 42 3 s fs 48 NOTE TEMPO to determine FREQ 2 z One input two output distortion effect Parameter Range Description Parameter Range Description SOURCE INET GA or DST TYPE DL Shea omaron type DST distortion SENSE 0 100 Sensitivity d DIR UP DOWN Upward or downward frequency DRIVE 0 100 Distortion drive i change MASTER 0 100 Master volume DECAY Decay speed TONE 10 to 10 Tone OFFSET 0 100 Delay time offset N GATE 0 20 Noise reduction Feedback gain pl
112. access the SAVE LOAD popup window 3 Move the cursor to the file list use the panel dial to select the file that you want to delete move the cursor to the DELETE but ton and press the ENTER key A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Delete opera tion FILE DELETE 2 Delete Lsetur03 L9n1 CANCEL 4 To execute the Delete operation move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key NOTE You can t delete a protected file Creating a directory 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section press the SETUP key repeatedly to access the USER SETUP screen 2 Move the cursor to the SAVE LOAD button and press the ENTER key to access the SAVE LOAD popup window 3 If you want to move to a different directory move the cursor to the icon of the column of the desired directory and press the ENTER key To move to the next higher level move the cursor to the arrow button in the PATH field and press the ENTER key User settings Security LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual J 203 Using USB memory to save load data 4 Move the cursor to the MAKE DIR button and press the ENTER key A keyboard window will appear allowing you to enter directory name For details on entering text refer to Assigning a name p 34 MRKE DIRECTORY DIRECTORY NAME CLEAR gt 5 80 29 al Lir SHIFT LOC
113. access the key board window For details on entering text refer to Assigning a name p 34 E If the COMMENT field is not displayed use the COMMENT TIME STAMP button located at the lower right of the file list to turn COMMENT on FILE RENAME FILE NAME CLERR DEL 20 00 50 181 91 al nn 50 00 50 1 pr zi SHIFT LOCK CRNCEL RENRHE FILE COMMENT EDIT MENT lorld Tour COPY PASTE CLEAR gt INS DEL B5 a 23 B B3 53 sd 33 Hd eed PS 2 e SHIFT LOCK SPRCE CRNCEL 5 Enter a file name comment move the cur sor to the RENAME button or the SET but ton and press the ENTER key 6 To turn the Protect setting on off move the cursor to the lock symbol for that file and press the ENTER key A lock symbol is displayed for protected files these files cannot be overwritten NOTE You cannot edit the file name or comment of a protected file Copying pasting a file Here s how to copy a desired file into buffer memory and then paste it with a different file name 1 Inthe DISPLAY ACCESS section press the SETUP key repeatedly to access the USER SETUP screen 2 Move the cursor to the SAVE LOAD button and press the ENTER key to access the SAVE LOAD popup window 3 Move the cu
114. amp YAMAHA DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE SO LS9 16 LS9 32 Owner s Manual 2 FCC INFORMATION U S A 1 IMPORTANT NOTICE DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT This product when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual meets FCC requirements Modifi cations not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority granted by the FCC to use the product 2 IMPORTANT When connecting this product to accesso ries and or another product use only high quality shielded cables Cable s supplied with this product MUST be used Follow all installation instructions Failure to follow instruc tions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA 3 NOTE This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations Part 15 for Class B digital devices Compliance with these require ments provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices This equipment generates uses radio frequencies and if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations If this product is found to be the Source of interference which can be determined by turning t
115. and COMPANDER S Compander Soft EH gate attenuates signals below a set THRESHOLD level by a specified amount RANGE Parameter Range Description THRESHOLD dB 54 to 0 55 points This determines the level at which the gate effect is applied RANGE dB eo 69 to 0 71 points This determines the amount of attenuation when the gate closes ATTACK ms 0 120 121 points how fast the gate opens when the signal exceeds the threshold HOLD ms 44 1kHz 0 02 ms 2 13 sec This determines how long the gate stays open once the trigger signal has fallen 48 2 0 02 ms 1 96 sec 160 points below the threshold DECAY ms 44 1kHz 6 ms 46 0 sec This determines how fast the gate closes once the hold time has expired The value 48kHz 5 ms 42 3 sec 160 points is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB I O Characteristics Output Level gt THRESHOLD Input Level gt THRESHOLD Time Series Analysis Output Signal Input Signal E HOLD E ATTACK DECAY S 2 5 T 4 Lx Input Level Time E DUCKING
116. and then select this layer 3 Press a SEL key in the channel module section or ST IN section to select the output channel that you want to operate RATIO ATK REL GAIN KNEE A ML MIL Rd MUTE 1 1 1 D PATCH field 2 Output port select popup button KEY IN MIX channels 13 16 only You can send the output signals of MIX channels 13 16 to the dynamics processors of each channel and use them as key in signals to control the dynamics RACK IN PATCH This patches the output signal of a MIX channel to an input of the rack OUTPUT PATCH This assigns an output port to an output channel MONITOR SELECT This selects the output signal of an output channel as a monitor source 4 Move the cursor to the output port select popup button in the PATCH field of the Screen and press the ENTER key The PATCH NAME popup window will appear allowing you to select an output port and icon for the output channel and to assign a name Output channel operations eo PATCH NAME PORT SELECT CMIX1 OMNI T OMNI 2TR OUT BR Bee Eee com This popup window contains the following items D Output port button This indicates the output port that is assigned to the corresponding channel If more than one output port is assigned one port will be displayed to represent them When you re selecting the icon or edit
117. assign the Tap Tempo function to a user defined key and set the BPM using it p 172 About the internal effects PLAY REC This is shown if FREEZE is selected as the effect type D PLAY button REC button These buttons are used to record sample and play back when using the freeze effect For details on how to use this refer to Using the Freeze effect gt p 173 SOLO This is shown if M BAND DYNA or M BAND COMP is selected as the effect type SOLO CD HIGH MID LOW buttons These buttons pass only the selected frequency band multiple selections are allowed 2 Gain reduction meters These show the amount of gain reduction for each band 6 If you want to monitor only the output sig nal of the currently displayed effect press the EFFECT CUE button to turn it on If the Cue mode is set to MIX CUE mode in which all chan nels whose CUE keys are on will be mixed for monitoring only the output signal of the effect will be monitored when you turn on the EFFECT CUE button The CUE keys that had been turned on until then will be temporarily defeated 7 If you want to bypass the currently dis played effect turn the BYPASS button on 8 If you want to copy the currently displayed effect settings to the effect of another rack or to initialize the settings you can do so using the tool buttons at the top of the screen For details on how to use these bu
118. attenuation applied by the talk back dimmer Meter field This indicates the level of the monitor signal This meter shows the level immediately before the dimmer If you move the cursor to the port select box located below the level meter and press the ENTER key a popup window will appear allowing you to select the port that will output the monitor signal 9 MONO MONITOR button This button allows monaural monitoring If this button is on the signal sent from the PHONES OUT jack and the MONITOR OUT L R channels will be monaural If the normal dimmer and the talkback dimmer are both switched on simultaneously the setting with the greatest amount of attenuation will be applied Use the buttons of the SOURCE SELECT field to select a monitor source In the SOURCE SELECT field you can select only one monitor source However if you ve selected DEFINE you can use the ASSIGN field to specify multiple monitor sources The following table shows the monitor sources you can select in the SOURCE SELECT field ST L R button MONO button 2TR L R button STEREO L R channel output signal MONO channel output signal 2TR IN DIGITAL jack input signal STEREO L R MONO channel LCR output signal IN 15 16 31 32 INPUT channels 15 16 31 32 input button signal PLAYBACK OUT button LCR button USB memory recorder playback signal The signal s selected in the ASSIGN DEFINE button field
119. bus move the cursor to the corresponding knob of the FROM MIX field and press the ENTER key If you switch this off the knob will turn grey To turn it back on press the ENTER key once again When the SELECTED CH VIEW screen for MATRIX channels is displayed the keys of the MIX MATRIX section will operate as keys that select the send destination MIX bus for the input channels 5 Use the top panel SEL keys to switch the send destination MATRIX channel and con trol the send level to a specific MATRIX bus in the same way Here s how you can use the MATRIX SEND popup win dow to adjust the send levels from up to eight channels to a MATRIX bus 1 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section HOME key The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the display Initial Data 000 R ADMIN To MTRX ON OMNI THRESH PATIO ATK REL GAIN KNEE A 0 0 0 0 0 0 D SEND popup button 2 Use the LAYER section keys and the chan nel module section SEL keys to select the send source MIX STEREO L R or MONO channel 3 Use the MIX MATRIX SELECT section keys to select the send destination MATRIX bus Only the LED of the corresponding key will blink indicating that it is selected as the send destination 4 Move the cursor to the SEND popup button in the screen and press the ENTER key to access the MATRIX SEND popup window In the MATRIX SEND popup window you can view eight MIX channels or the STEREO
120. buttons to select an output port move the cursor to the CLOSE button and press the ENTER key The port will be assigned to the bus you selected in step 3 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to assign output ports to other buses NOTE You can t assign two or more buses to the same output port If you select a bus to which a signal route has already been assigned the previous assignment will be cancelled 6 If you want to use the Cascade Link func tion to link parameters and events between two LS9 consoles proceed as follows D Move the cursor to the CASCADE LINK PORT field and use the dial or the DEC INC keys to select the port that will transmit receive control signals for cascade link You can choose from the following items LS9 16 Item Description No port will be used MIDI Rear panel MIDI IN OUT connectors Input output channels 1 8 of a card supporting SLOT 1 serial communication installed in the rear panel SLOT 8 slot LS9 32 Item Description No port will be used MIDI Rear panel MIDI IN OUT connectors Input output channels 1 8 of a card supporting SLOT1 1 Nee DROP serial communication installed in rear panel slot SLOT1 8 1 SLOT2 1 Input output channels 1 8 of a card supporting SLOT2 8 serial communication installed in rear panel slot 2 Control signals for cascade link and MIDI messages cannot share the same port If you s
121. changes control changes and parameter changes 1 messages such as note on off MIDI timing clock will be received ECHO button Selects whether other MIDI messages that are received will be echoed out from the transmit port To specify the port that will transmit or receive each type of MIDI message move the cursor to the transmit Tx or receive Rx port selection box use the dial or the keys to specify the setting and then press the ENTER key You can choose from the following items Item Description NE No port will be used Rear panel MIDI IN Rx OUT Tx MIDI connector SLOT 1 2 1 8 The number of available ports will depend on the card that is installed A card that supports serial trans mission installed in a rear panel slot 1 2 MY16 CII is valid in SLOT 1 2 Basic MIDI settings 4 To specify the channel 1 16 on which MIDI messages will be transmitted or received move the cursor to the channel selection box use the dial or the DEC INC keys to specify the setting and press the ENTER key m When transmitting or receiving parameter changes the chan nel number you specify here is used as the device number a number that identifies the transmitting or receiving unit 5 Turn transmission reception on or off for each MIDI message For details on using program changes refer to Using p
122. channel is selected The encoder will adjust the send level from that chan nel to the currently selected bus For a FIXED type bus the encoder will switch the send on off If the send destination bus is stereo this encoder will specify the panning of the signal sent to the two buses if an odd numbered bus is selected or will specify the i send level if an even numbered bus is selected IT SELECTED CHANNEL section In this section you can operate the most important mix parameters for the currently selected input channel or out put channel The function of the controllers in this section will depend on the type of channel that is selected THRESHOLD When a MIX channel is selected The encoder will adjust the send level from that MIX channel to the currently selected MATRIX bus Parts and their function 2 _ DYNAMICS 2 Q THRESHOLD When a MATRIX channel is selected SELECTED The encoder will adjust the send level from the MIX 9 channels to the currently selected MATRIX bus omg NOTE In SENDS ON FADER mode this encoder will not do any thing regardless of which channel is selected Q 77 2 DYNAMICS 1 encoder When an INPUT ST IN channel is selected The encoder will adjust the threshold of Dynamics 1 e g gate When any other channel is selected The encoder will adjust the threshold of the compres sor etc
123. channels the PATCH field is shown in the 2 area In this field you can view and edit the output port that is patched to the output channel For channels to which two or more output ports are patched only one will be shown as a representative LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual PAN field When an INPUT channel or monaural MIX channel is selected This functions as an on off switch for the signal sent from that channel to the STEREO MONO bus Here you can also view or edit the panning of the signal sent to the STEREO bus When a ST IN channel or a stereo MIX channel is selected This functions as an on off switch for the signal sent from that channel to the STEREO MONO bus This also lets you view or edit the balance of the left right signals sent from that channel to the STEREO bus When a stereo MATRIX channel is selected This shows the balance of the signals sent from the two MATRIX channels When a STEREO channel is selected This shows the balance of the left right signals sent from the STEREO channel 5 DYNA field 6 DYNA2 field input channels only Here you can view or edit the Dynamics 1 2 parameters This also accesses the DYNAMICS 1 DYNAMICS 2 popup windows where you can edit detailed dynamics parameters that cannot be edited in the SELECTED CHANNEL section 7 EQ field Here you can switch the four band EQ on off and view or edit its parameters For input channels you can also switch the HP
124. clock master bo boblel 159 word clock sla word clock slave In either case you must use the following procedure to specify the word clock source that the LS9 will use for operation The following procedure is not necessary if you are using the 159 as the word clock master or if no external devices are digitally connected to the LS9 46 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section press the SETUP key repeatedly to access the SYS TEM SETUP screen In this screen you can make various settings that affect the entire LS9 Initial Data 000 ADMIN OUTPUT PORT SETUP OMNI SLOT1 SLOTZ 1 8 1 8 SLOT SLOT2 9 16 316 MIXER SETUP WORD CLOCK SLOT SETUP CASCADE IN CASCADE OUT i LS9 32 0 WORD CLOCK button 2 Move the cursor to the WORD CLOCK but ton in the MIXER SETUP field and press the ENTER key The WORD CLOCK popup window will appear allowing you to select the clock source on which the LS9 will operate LOCK SRC ON UNLOCK LOCK BUT NOT 5 UNKNOWN INT48k INT44 1k WC IN 2TR IN 1 2 54 56 7 6 9 10 11 12 13 14 15716 122 324 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13214 15 16 59 32 Setup required when starting up 3 Use the buttons in the window to select the p clock source to which the LS9 will synchro HA head amp settings nize Here we explain how to adjust the HA head amp gain switch phant
125. connect inserts and how to use direct outputs Changing the output patching When the LS9 is in the initial state the output ports jacks and internal ports are patched to the following output channels For the LS9 16 Output port jack internal port Output channels OMNI OUT jacks 1 6 MIX channels 1 6 OMNI OUT jacks 7 8 STEREO L R channel Slot output channels 1 8 MIX channels 1 8 Slot output channels 9 16 MIX channels 9 16 Rack inputs 5A L 6A L 7A L 8A L MIX channels 13 16 2TR OUT DIGITAL jack L R STEREO L R channel USB memory recorder input L R STEREO L R channel For the LS9 32 Output port jack internal port Output channels OMNI OUT jacks 1 12 MIX channels 1 12 OMNI OUT jacks 13 14 MATRIX channels 1 2 OMNI OUT jacks 15 16 STEREO L R channel Slot 1 output channels 1 8 MIX channels 1 8 Slot 1 output channels 9 16 MIX channels 9 16 Slot 2 output channels 1 8 MIX channels 1 8 Slot 2 output channels 9 16 MIX channels 9 16 Rack inputs 5A L 6A L 7A L 8A L MIX channels 13 16 2TR OUT DIGITAL jack L R STEREO L R channel USB memory recorder input L R STEREO L R channel However the above patching can be modified as needed If you want to change the output patching you can either select the output port tha
126. control changes on page 249 If NRPN is selected and if CONTROL CHANGE Tx is ON when you operate a specified parameter the four messages NRPN control number 62h 63h and DATA ENTRY control number 06h 26h are transmitted on the Tx CH channel For the parameters that can be assigned refer to Parameters that can be assigned to control changes on page 249 CONTROL CHANGE messages are not used for transmission to LS9 Editor because there is no guarantee that the contents of the assignment tables will match PARAMETER CHANGE messages are always used CONTROL CHANGE numbers 0 and 32 are for selecting banks STATUS 1011nnnn Bn Control change DATA 00 Control number 00 Ovvvvvwwv vw Control Value 0 127 STATUS 1011nnnn Bn Control change DATA 20 Control number 32 Ovvvvvww vv Control Value 0 127 If TABLE is selected STATUS 1011nnnn Bn Control change DATA Onnnnnnn nn Control number 1 5 7 31 33 37 38 95 102 119 Ovvvvvwwv vw Control Value 0 127 Numbers 0 32 and 96 101 cannot be used Control number 6 38 can be used 260 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Equation for converting a Control Value to parameter data paramSteps paramMax paramMin 1 add paramWidth paramSteps mod paramWidth add paramSteps curValue paramSteps add mod 2 1 If the assigned parameter has fewer than 128 steps paramWidth 128 rxValue Control value 2 If the assigned parameter has 128 or more but
127. dB EQ peaking type gain LSH F 21 2 Hz 8 00 2 Low shelving filter frequency EQQ 10 0 0 10 EQ peaking type bandwidth LSHG 12 0 to 12 0 dB Low shelving filter gain HSH F 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH F 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G 12 0to 12 0 dB High shelving filter gain HSH G 12 0 to 12 0 dB High shelving filter gain 2 RF Bet hd daed d Il SYMPHONIC Two input two output symphonic effect HHP B b d 4 4 2 d d Parameter Range Description FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off Nom odes LSH 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSHG 12 0 to 12 0 dB Low shelving filter gain EQF 100 Hz 8 00 kHz EQ peaking type frequency EQG 12 0 to 12 0 dB EQ peaking type gain EQQ 10 0 0 10 EQ peaking type bandwidth HSH F 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH 12 0 to 12 0 dB High shelving filter gain Il AUTOPAN Two input two output autopanner Parameter Range Description FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 10096 Modulation depth DIR 1 Panning direction WAVE Sine Tri Square Modulation waveform SYNC O
128. damage caused by improper use or modifications to the device or data that is lost or destroyed Always turn the power off when the device is not in use The performance of components with moving contacts such as switches volume controls and connectors deteriorates over time Consult qualified Yamaha service personnel about replacing defective components en 1 2 2 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual 5 6 1 Introduction 9 Thank 9 An overview of the 1 9 9 Differences between the LS9 16 LS9 32 11 Number of INPUT 11 Rear pael eats 11 nas 12 13 1 5975 channel structure 13 About the MIX bus types VARI FIXED 14 About word clock ciii inea iain nani uada 14 Conventions in this manual 14 About the firmware 14 2 Parts and their function 15 Ium Q 15 Rear nnl sna 23 Front panel m 26 3 Basic operations on the 159 27 Basic operations in the top panel 27 About the HOME 27 Selecting the fader
129. dynamics turn the DYNAMICS ON OFF button on and use the SELECTED CHANNEL section DYNAMICS 1 DYNAMICS 2 encoders to adjust the threshold parameters Alternatively move the cursor to the DYNA1 DYNA2 field and operate the dial or the DEC INC keys To make detailed dynamics settings move the cursor to the DYNA1 DYNA2 popup button or the DYNAT DYNAQ2 field and press the ENTER key to access the DYNAMICS 1 DYNAMICS 2 popup window For details on the popup window p 117 Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section e If you ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window gt p 194 you can also access the above popup window by pressing the SELECTED CHANNEL section DYNAMICS 1 DYNAMICS 2 encoder e Making HPF EQ settings To operate the HPF EQ of the currently selected channel use the SELECTED CHANNEL section EQ encoders and the EQ field of the SELECTED CH VIEW screen The EQ field of the SELECTED CH VIEW screen con tains the following items D EQ popup button This button accesses the ATT HPF EQ popup window where you can make detailed HPF EQ settings EQ ON OFF button Switches the EQ on off 3 HPF ON OFF button Switches the HPF on off 4 HPF FREQ knob Indicates the cutoff frequency of the HPF 5 OVER indicator This will light when the post EQ signal reaches the over load point 6 Q F G knobs These knobs indicate the Q F center frequenc
130. e E Ee Ge EX Ee 2 me 5 es Se 5 Ss Sef Se Se EX Se Si Se Se ee ei je m 1 les SES 5 4 25 5 s M d 5 20 ae Eso 20 4 e e 14 15 16 34 35 46 47 48 49 56 57 63 64 STEREO ww moel 2 master LAYER section key LAYER 1 32 INPUT CH 1 16 INPUT CH 17 32 STEREO ST IN 1 4 LAYER 33 64 INPUT CH 33 48 INPUT CH 49 64 STEREO ST IN 1 4 LAYER MASTER MIX 1 16 MATRIX 1 8 STEREO LAYER CUSTOM FADER Any desired channe Is STEREO Any desired channels On the LS9 16 MATRIX channels and MONO channels are not assigned to the fader layers that are preset If you want to use the top panel faders and ON keys to control the MATRIX channels or MONO channel you can assign them to the custom fader layer gt p 91 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Using the SELECTED CHANNEL sec tion You can use the encoders and keys of the SELECTED CHANNEL section to directly operate the mix parameters EQ pan dynamics etc of the currently selected channel from the top panel HA GAIN DYNAMICS 1 THRESHOLD PAN O DYNAMICS 2 THRESHOLD SELECTED SEND
131. effect in the virtual rack p 158 3 Use the INPUT L button to open the INPUT CH SELECT popup window and select the insert in of the same channel as the output destination Insert in will be assigned to the L output of the effect If you are inserting in a channel that handles a stereo source use the same procedure to assign the insert out insert in of the other channel to the R input and R output of the effect 4 Press the HOME key to access the SELECTED CH VIEW screen and access the channel into which you want to insert the effect 5 Move the cursor to the INSERT popup but ton and press the ENTER key to access the INSERT popup window Make sure that the desired rack is selected for the input output ports you re using for the insertion For details on Insert Out In refer to Inserting an external device into a channel gt p 101 F INSERT nma murs mr D INS CH 9 110 ehti ehi2 c PRE PRE PRE PRE PRE PRE PRE PRE EQ EQ i Eo CD INSERT ON OFF button The INSERT popup window also lets you change the insert out in position within the channel 6 Make sure that the INSERT ON OFF button is turned on for the channel into which you inserted the effect If this is off turn it on In this state effect insertion is enabled for the corresponding channel About the internal effects 7 Repeatedly press the RACK 5 8 key to access the RACK screen for the
132. emphasis is turned On for that signal A valid digital audio signal is being input and emphasis is turned Off for that signal ON OFF 3 To turn on the SRC that is built into the dig ital I O card move the cursor to the corre sponding SRC button and press the ENTER key The SRC can be turned on off in units of two channels For channels whose SRC is turned on input output can occur correctly even if the input signal is not syn chronized with the LS9 s clock source 4 To close the WORD CLOCK popup window move the cursor to the CLOSE button or the x symbol in the upper right and press the ENTER key You will return to the SYSTEM SETUP screen Using cascade connections Using cascade connections By cascade connecting two or more LS9 consoles or an LS9 with an external mixer such as the Yamaha M7CL you can share the buses For example this is convenient when you want to use an external mixer to increase the number of inputs If you are cascading two LS9 consoles you can use the Cascade Link function to link cue oper ations scene recall store operations and fader layer selections In this case you can operate the two LS9 consoles as if they were a single mixer Here we will explain cascade connections and operation using an example in which two LS9 consoles are cascade connected To cascade two LS9 consoles you will install digital I O cards in their respective slots and conne
133. every locale please check with your Yamaha dealer European models Purchaser User Information specified in EN55103 1 and EN55103 2 Inrush Current 16A Conforms to Environments E1 E2 and E4 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Appendices 279 Attaching the RK1 rackmount kit sold separately Attaching the RK1 rackmount kit sold separately You can attach the optional RK 1 rackmount kit to the LS9 16 or LS9 32 and mount it in a rack or an installed system 1 Make sure that the power is turned off 2 Remove screws A and detach the side pads NOTE Keep the side pad screws together with the pads you removed Side pad At the locations indicated by the arrows tighten the screws to attach the rackmount hard ware The mixer can be attached at either of two angles as shown in the following illustration 4 Attach the hardware to the other side in the same way N CAUTION When attaching the RK1 rackmount kit make sure that the power is turned off You must use the screws that are included with the RK1 280 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual YAMAHA Digital Mixing Console Model LS9 16 32 MIDI Implementation Chart HN 16 16 16 16 l1 3 x x 0 127 x Function Default Changed Basic Channel 1 1 ds HM Default Messages Altered x x Note Number x True voice Note
134. for the channels that are highlighted in the CH RECALL SAFE field 3 GLOBAL field In this field global parameters parameters that affect the entire mix and are not specific to individual chan nels can be excluded from Recall operations SAFE PARAMETER field Here you can switch Recall Safe on off for each chan nel and choose the parameters that will be excluded from Recall operations If you select a channel by pressing its SEL key the Recall Safe settings of that channel will be shown in this field 5 APPLY TO ALL INPUT button APPLY TO ALL OUTPUT button If these buttons are on when you operate the SAFE PARAMETER buttons the changes will apply to all input or output channels This is convenient when you want to make settings for all channels in a single action You can also access this screen from the SAFE field of the SELECTED CH VIEW screen gt p 88 2 To select the channel whose Recall Safe settings you want to edit press the corre sponding SEL key The corresponding channel in the CH RECALL SAFE field will be enclosed by a white border However Recall Safe is not yet enabled at this point At this time the SAFE PARAMETER field will show the Recall Safe settings of the selected channel If the CH RECALL SAFE field s SET BY SEL button is Recall Safe will be enabled when you press the SEL key and the corresponding channel will be highlighted in the CH RECALL SAFE field You
135. for transmission to LS9 Editor because there is no guarantee that the contents of the assignment tables will match PARAMETER CHANGE messages are always used You can choose either MULTI MIDI CH or SINGLE CH If SINGLE is selected You can choose the Rx CH OMNI CH and Tx CH You can choose whether a bank select message will be added A bank of up to 16 can be specified If MULTI is selected The Rx and Tx channels will be the same The assignment table will use the settings for each MIDI channel Bank select messages will not be added You can make settings for up to sixteen MIDI channels STATUS 1100nnnn Cn Program change DATA Onnnnnnn nn Program number 0 127 2 SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGE 2 1 SONG SELECT F3 Select the track number shown in the TITLE LIST screen of the USB memory recorder STATUS 11110011 Song select Song number 05555555 ss Song number 0 127 2 2 TIMING CLOCK F8 Reception This message is used to control effects This message is transmitted twenty four times per quarter note Echoing of this message depends on the OTHER item in the ECHO settings STATUS 11111000 F8 Timing clock 2 3 ACTIVE SENSING FE Reception Once this message has been received MIDI communication will be initialized e g Running Status will be cleared if no message is received for an interval of 400 ms This message is not subject to echoing STATUS 11111110 FE Active sensing 2 4 SYSTEM RESET FF Reception
136. held in buffer memory with the settings of the currently selected channel EQ dynamics or rack GEQ effect NOTE You cannot press the PASTE button or COMPARE button if no set tings have been copied into buffer memory In addition some screens have the following tool buttons SET ALL Turns on all of the parameters in the Screen CLEAR ALL Turns off all of the parameters in the Screen Using libraries Here we will explain the basic procedure for using librar ies You can use libraries to store save or recall load the settings of the currently selected channel EQ dynam ics or rack GEQ effect The following libraries are provided Input EQ library Output EQ library Dynamics library GEQ library Effect library The operating procedure is essentially the same for all libraries Recalling data from a library 1 Access a popup window or screen that con tains tool buttons To access each popup window or screen proceed as follows ATT HPF EQ popup window DYNAMICS 1 2 popup window 125 1 00k 4 25 0 1 5 3 5 7 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Basic operations on the LS9 G 35 Using the tool buttons In the SELECTED CH VIEW screen move the cursor to the knob corresponding to EQ or dynamics 1 2 or to a button that has a W symbol and press the ENTER Key If POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING KNOBS is turned on in the
137. key This key accesses a screen where you can operate and make settings for the Recorder function which records and plays audio files 6 METER key This key accesses a meter screen where you can view the input output levels of all channels in a single view 7 RACK 1 4 key This key accesses a screen where you can edit the graphic EQ assigned to virtual racks 1 4 By pressing the RACK 1 4 key and RACK 5 8 key simultaneously you can access the VIRTUAL RACK screen where you can assign a graphic EQ 31 Band GEQ or Flex 15 GEQ to each vir tual rack RACK 5 8 key This key accesses a screen where you can edit the graphic EQ or internal effect that is assigned to virtual racks 5 8 and make settings for external head amps By pressing the RACK 1 4 key and RACK 5 8 key simultaneously you can access the VIRTUAL RACK screen where you can assign a graphic EQ 31 Band GEQ or Flex 15 GEQ or internal effect to each virtual rack Parts and their function LAYER section 0909000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000009 Here you can select the type of channels that will be operated from the channel module section gt p 17 and ST IN section p 17 LAYER 02 9 1 16 17 32 2 2 9 9 MASTER RADER LS9 16 LAYER 1 16 LAYER 1 32 key 2 LAYER 17 32 LAYER 33 64 key 8 LAYER MASTER key LAYER 0 2 O 1 32 33 64 o Fo MASTER RADER LS9 32 These keys assign fixed pres
138. link group The maximum number of link groups you can create and the maximum number of input channels that can be included in each group is 18 34 However the selection of parameters for which operations of a channel are linked for multiple link groups is shared by all link groups Linking the desired input channels Here s how to link specific parameters of input channels Channel link settings are saved as part of the scene Recall Safe does not affect channel link When you recall a scene the link status saved in that scene will always be reproduced 1 Inthe DISPLAY ACCESS section press the CHANNEL JOB key repeatedly to access the CH LINK screen of the CHANNEL JOB screens Initial Data R ADMIN on ENTER CH1 8 9 16 Hn CH33 40 CH41 48 CH49 56 57 64 LINK PARAMETER DYNA fovea ff mix nux N EG 1 2 UH sEND o SEND PRRRMETER TO 124 LS9 16 32 Owners Manual CD Channel display field When you create a link group the corresponding channels will be highlighted If there are two or more link groups each group is shown in a different color For ST IN channels all parameters of L and R are always linked 2 LINK PARAMETER field Use the buttons in this field to select the parameters that you want to be linked These settings are shared by all link groups 3 SEND PARAMETER field If you have turned on the MIX ON or MIX SEND bu
139. msec to 42 3 sec Gain 18 dB to 0 dB 0 dB to 18 dB Knee Hard to 5 soft Key In Self Pre EQ Self Post EQ Mix Out13 16 Ch1 STINAR 8ch block Fader Level 1024 steps e 138 dB to 10 dB On On Off Mute Group 8 Groups 16 sends Fix Variable can be set each two mixes Mix Send o Mix Send Point Pre EQ Pre Fader Post On S Level 1024 steps 138 dB to 10 dB 5 LCR Pan CSR 096 to 10096 Q lt LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual 277 Pin Assignment Pin Assignment 1 LAMP 159 32 only Signal Name 5 s 1 2 3 4 278 LS9 16 32 Owners Manual 25 LS9 16 25 LS9 32 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 834 e 25 884 Dimensions Unit mm Specifications and descriptions in this owner s manual are for information purposes only Yamaha Corp reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice Since specifications equipment or options may not be the same in
140. native parameter change rx tx LS9 native parameter request 4 PARAMETER CHANGE details 4 1 CURRENT SCENE SETUP BACKUP USER SETUP 4 1 1 Format PARAMETER CHANGE Receive Data will be received when PARAMETER CHANGE Rx is on and the Device number of both Rx CH and SUB STATUS are matched The data will be echoed when PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO is on The corresponding parameter will be changed immediately the data is received Transmission 1 0 300 Scene Number 0 Request Only 2 1 199 Input EQ Library Number 1 40 Request Only 3 1 199 Output EQ Library Number 1 3 Request Only 4 1 199 Dynamics Library Number 1 41 Request Only 5 0 199 GEQ Library Number 0 Request Only Data will be transmitted with the Device Number in Tx CH when PARAMETER CHANGE Tx is on and the parameter is not registered on the CONTROL CHANGE EVENT LIST 6 1 199 Effect Library Number 1 57 Request Only STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message 7 512 575 Input 1 64 ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA 8 576 583 STIN 1L 4R SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel 9 768 783 MIX 1 16 I 10 1024 1031 MATRIX 1 8 LS9 32 only GROUP ID 00111110 3E Digital mixer 11 1280 1282 STEREO L C MODEL ID 00010010 12 159 12 512 519 1 8 DATA cc 13 512 515 EFFECT 1 4 Category 14 512 Current Data DATA eh Element no High 15 768 Current Data wi
141. number The list shows the following items CH BANK Indicates the MIDI channel 1 16 on which pro gram changes are transmitted received In Single mode if the BANK button is on this will be labeled BANK and the numerical value in this column will correspond to the bank number e NO Indicates the program number 1 128 PROGRAM CHANGE EVENT Indicates the type number title of the event assigned to the program number for each MIDI channel bank number By pressing the popup button for an individual event you can access the PROGRAM CHANGE EVENT popup window where you can change the assignment for each program number CLEAR ALL button Pressing this button will clear all event assignments in the list 5 INITIALIZE ALL button Pressing this button will restore all event assignments in the list to their default state 7 Use the buttons of the PROGRAM CHANGE MODE field to select the program change transmission reception mode You can select one of the following two program change transmission reception modes e Multi mode when the MULTI button is on Program changes of all MIDI channels will be trans mitted and received The transmit receive channel specified in the MIDI SETUP popup window will be ignored When a program change is received the event assigned to the corresponding MIDI channel and pro gram number in the list will be executed When you execute the specified event on the LS9 the program change
142. of a channel 127 Initializing the parameters of a channel 128 18 Scene memory 129 About scene 129 Using scene memories 44 129 Storing 129 Recalling a 22 131 Using user defined keys to recall 132 Editing scene memories 134 Sorting and renaming scene memories 134 Scene memory 136 Copying pasting a scene 136 Clearing a 137 Cutting 5 2 138 Inserting a scene 138 Using the Focus function ees 139 Using the Recall Safe function 140 Using the Fade function e 143 14 Monitor Cue 145 About the monitor cue functions 145 Using the Monitor function 146 Using the Cue function esses 148 About cue groups 148 Operating the Cue 1 149 15 Talkhack Oscillator 151 About talkback and oscillator 151 Using talk
143. of all signal processing param eters for that channel except for fader and ON key For the channel parameters included in PROCESSING refer to the appendix p 256 FADER ON Restricts operation of that channel s fader and ON key e SET BY SEL If this button is on you can use the SEL keys of the panel to turn all settings of the corresponding channel on or off 2 CURRENT SCENE field This specifies the operations that can be performed on the current scene memory INPUT PATCH NAME Restricts operations for input channel patching and names OUTPUT PATCH NAME Restricts operations for output channel patching and names User Level settings BUS SETUP Restricts operations for bus setup RACK 1 8 Restricts operations for the racks 1 8 MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MASTER Restricts operations for mute group assignment and mute group master 3 SCENE LIST field This specifies the operations that can be performed on scene memories STORE SORT operations RECALL operations 4 LIBRARY LIST field This specifies the operations that can be performed on libraries STORE CLEAR operations RECALL operations 5 FILE LOAD field This specifies the types of file that can be loaded from USB memory USER SETUP user defined keys and pref erence settings SYSTEM SETUP MONITOR SETUP CURRENT SCENE SCENE LIST LIBRARY LIST 6 MONITOR field This
144. off or to select a desired item move the cursor to the desired button and press the ENTER key of the data entry section By moving the cursor to a button that shows the W symbol and then pressing the Enter key you can open another popup window where you can specify details Buttons 1 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Knobs and faders Knobs in the screen are used to view or edit the values of the corresponding parameters Normally you will move the cursor to a knob and use the dial or DEC INC keys of the data entry section to edit the value The current value is shown in numerical form immediately below the knob Some knobs will move in tandem with the encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL section LOW L MID H MID Knob f f 0 70 0 70 0 70 F s 125 1 00k 4 00k 10 0k 0 0 0 0 0 0 Faders in the screen are mainly used to view or edit the level of the corresponding channels They will move in tandem with the faders of the top panel You can also move the cursor to a fader and use the dial or DEC INC keys of the data entry section to edit the value The current value is shown in numerical form immediately below the fader Fader Bi List window A window like the following will appear when you are selecting an item from a list such as when selecting a function for a user defined key Within the list the constantly highlighted item in the cen ter is the selected item To scroll the list up or dow
145. on off function to a user defined key gt p 196 154 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Chapter 16 Meters This chapter describes the meter screen which displays input output level meters for all channels Using the METER screen By accessing the Meter screen you can view the input output levels of all channels in the screen and switch the metering point the location at which the level is detected of the level meters 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section press the CUSTOM FADER screen METER key ie ACCESSIN Meter screen S O00 Initia Data STI STE ste STA The Meter screen is divided into the METER CH1 32 chi lt R ADMIN CUSTOM FADER POINTINEUT PRE HPF OUPUT POST ON screen METER CH 33 64 screen OUTPUT METER screen and CUSTOM FADER screen ld METER CH1 32 screen 000 Initial Data R ADMIN PRE Her 5 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 STINNI 3 MX 1 MX 3 MT 1 MAIS MONO st2L ch 2 ch 4 2 MA 4 MT 2 MT 4 Mai6 MONI st4L 700 00 09 00 00 00 CO 00 09 00 Br 1 1 Se r LS9 16 00 00 00 00 00 00 22 23 24 25 26 2 CD Metering point select buttons Use these three buttons to select the metering point for the input output channels 00 00 STIN1 STINZ STIN3 STIN4 2 Level meters These show the input output levels or fader values The current fader value is shown in a range of oo 10 When you operate the corres
146. one of the level detection points in that channel 2 Fader This indicates and adjusts the input output level of the channel This is linked with the fader on the top panel 3 Input output level This indicates the current setting of the fader CH ON OFF button This button switches the channel on off This is linked with the ON button of the top panel When you press the CH ON OFF button in the FADER field that channel will be switched on off If you move the cursor to the fader and operate the dial or the DEC INC keys the level of that channel will change If a fader layer that includes the corresponding channel is recalled to the top panel the corresponding ON key and fader will be linked with these operations Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section Assigning a channel to a mute group In the SELECTED CH VIEW screen use the MUTE field to assign a channel to a mute group a group that allows multiple channels to be muted unmuted simultaneously This field includes the following items D MUTE popup button This accesses the MUTE GROUP screen where you can select the channels to be assigned to each mute group 2 MUTE buttons 1 8 These buttons select the mute group s to which this chan nel is assigned 8 MUTE SAFE indicator This will light if the corresponding channel is set to Mute Safe the state in which it will not be affected by Mute operations Mute Safe settings can be made i
147. or PRE FADER immediately before the fader for each MIX bus p 213 e f desired the pan balance setting of the signal sent to a ste reo MIX bus can be linked with the TO ST PAN TO ST BAL knob of the SELECTED CH VIEW screen gt p 213 For a FIXED type MIX bus SEND to MIX ALL PRE ALL POST X seno T SEND Mx 1 h 4 D Channel number Channel name This indicates the number and name of the send source channel TO MIX ON OFF button This is an on off switch for the signal that is sent from the send source channel to the currently selected MIX bus If the send destination MIX bus is set to stereo on off operations are linked for adjacent odd numbered even numbered MIX buses 6 If you selected a VARI type MIX bus in step 4 move the cursor to the TO MIX LEVEL knob in the screen and use the dial or the DEC INC keys to adjust the send level from each channel to the selected MIX bus If the send destination MIX bus is set to stereo move the cursor to the TO MIX PAN TO MIX BALANCE knob and adjust the pan or balance for a ST IN chan nel of the signal sent from each channel to the two MIX buses 7 To switch the send position of a signal sent to a VARI type MIX bus move the cursor to the PRE button in the screen and press the ENTER key If the PRE button is on the pre EQ or pre fader signal will be sent if this button is off the signal from imme diately after th
148. or another folder When you execute playback the path in the TITLE LIST screen will change to YPE SONGS HELP ON lit OFF dark Switch the Help function on off LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Functions that can be assigned to user defined keys Function LS9 EDITOR PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 MASTER L CH1 16 CH17 32 CH33 48 CH49 64 STIN MIX MATRIX ST MONO CUSTOM OVERVIEW FADER LAYER 1 16 CUSTOM FADER LAYER CH17 32 CUS TOM FADER LAYER STIN SELECTED CHANNEL LIBRARY DYNAMICS LIBRARY INPUT EQ LIBRARY OUTPUT EQ LIBRARY EFFECT LIBRARY GEQ LIBRARY PATCH EDITOR INPUT PATCH OUT PUT PATCH INPUT INSERT PATCH OUT PUT INSERT PATCH DIRECT OUT PATCH PATCH LIST RACK EDITOR RACK RACK1 8 METER INPUT METER OUT PUT METER CUSTOM FADER LAYER GROUP LINK MUTE GROUP CHAN NEL LINK SCENE SCENE MEMORY RECALL SAFE FADE TIME LED Explanation Access the LS9 EDITOR screen LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Appendices 259 MIDI Data Format MIDI Data Format This section explains the format of the data that the LS9 is able to understand send and receive 1 CHANNEL MESSAGE 1 1 NOTE OFF 8n Reception These messages are echoed to MIDI OUT if OTHER COMMAND ECHO is ON They are received if Rx CH matches and used to control effects STATUS 1000nnnn 8n Note off message DATA Onnnnnnn nn
149. or the most recently played audio file are displayed 2 REMAIN ELAPSE button This button selects the content that is shown in the TIME FIELD 3 When you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key the field will alter nate between showing REMAIN remaining time dis play and ELAPSE elapsed time display 3 TIME remaining time elapsed time field According to the setting in this shows either the remaining time that can be recorded to USB memory or the elapsed time 2 Transport These buttons perform record play stop operations for the USB memory recorder 5 REC RATE bit depth button This selects the bit depth for recording 6 FREE SIZE field This indicates the amount of free capacity in USB memory in terms of MB and as a percentage 2 Connect USB memory with sufficient free capacity to the USB connector The FREE SIZE field indicates the amount of free capacity When you connect USB memory to the USB connec tor a YPE folder and a SONGS folder within that YPE folder will be created automatically in the root direc tory of the USB memory The files created by recording operations will be saved in the above SONGS folder or in the currently selected folder below that level LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual For playback as well you will only be able to play back audio files that are saved in the SONGS folder or in the currently selected folder below that level USB memory folder st
150. popup window refer to Using dynamics gt p 117 Chapter 12 Grouping and linking This chapter explains the Mute Group function that lets you simultaneously control the muting of multiple channels the Channel Link function that links the parameters of multiple channels and the operations that let you copy or move parameters between channels About mute groups Mute groups allow you to switch muting on off for multiple channels together For example you can use mute groups to cut out multiple non adjacent channels simultaneously LS9 has eight mute groups and they be used with both input channels and output chan nels Both types of channel can exist in the same group Using mute groups Here we will explain how to use mute groups You will use the MUTE GROUP screen of the CHANNEL JOB screens to assign channels to each mute group or switch muting on off You can also use the SELECTED CH VIEW screen to specify the mute group s to which the currently selected channel belongs e Mute group 1 8 on off functions can also be assigned to user defined keys For more about user defined keys refer to User defined keys gt p 196 Using the MUTE GROUP screen to operate mute groups In the MUTE GROUP screen of the CHANNEL JOB screens you can select a specific mute group and specify the channels that belong to that mute group You can also switch each mute group on off 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS s
151. screen will appear in the display 000 Initial Data R RDMIN RTC DYHR1 THRESH PATIO ATK REL GAIN KNEE A INSERT SAFE DIRECT n a zu 125 1 001 k l l T ZA 7 MATRIX field If a MIX STEREO L R or MONO channel is selected this area of the SELECTED CH VIEW screen will show the TO MATRIX field allowing you to switch the on off status and adjust the send level of the signals sent to the MATRIX buses 2 TO MATRIX LEVEL knobs These adjust the send level of the signals sent from the MIX STEREO L R or MONO channel to the MATRIX buses These knobs are the same color as the corresponding keys of the MIX MATRIX SEND sec tion To adjust the send level in this field move the cursor to the knob and use the dial or the DEC INC keys To switch the on off status of a signal sent to a MATRIX bus move the cursor to the corresponding knob and press the ENTER key Use the LAYER section keys and the chan nel module section SEL keys to select the send source MIX STEREO L R or MONO channel order to select a channel on the LS9 16 you must first select the custom fader layer to which you ve assigned that MONO channel and then press the corresponding SEL key LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Output channel operations A 75 Sending signals from MIX channels and STEREO MONO channels to MATRIX buses 3 Use the MIX MATRIX SEL
152. selected using a MIDI Song Select message F3 Record 06 Begins recording Pause 09 Pauses playback or recording Play 02 Play 03 186 LS9 16 32 Owners Manual Chapter 19 User settings Security This chapter explains the User Level settings that allow restrictions on the parameters that can be operated by each user the Console Lock function that temporarily disables operation of the console the Preferences settings that allow the operating environment to be customized and Save Load oper ations using USB memory User Level settings User Level settings allow you to restrict the parameters that be operated by each user or to change the settings of the custom fader layer user defined keys and preference settings for each user Settings for each user can be stored as a user authentication key on USB memory allowing users to be switched easily simply by connecting the memory device to a USB connec tor This is convenient in the following situations Unintended or mistaken operation can be prevented The range of functionality operable by an outside engineer guest engineer can be limited n situations in which multiple operators alternate with each other output settings etc can be locked to prevent unintended operations Preferences of each operator can easily be switched User types and user authentication keys There are three types of user as follows In order to
153. shown to indicate protected files You can press this area to enable or disable the protect setting e FILETYPE ALL indicates a file containing LS9 internal set tings KEY indicates a user authentication key XML indicates a help file BMP indicates a bitmap image file MP3 indicates an MP3 file and DIR indicates a directory COMMENT For LS9 files the comment is displayed here When you move the cursor to this area and press the ENTER key a keyboard window will appear allowing you to enter a comment for the file TIME STAMP This shows the date and time at which the file was last modified A SETUPOS L9R LS9 World Tour CD COPY button This button copies a file into buffer memory a tempo rary holding area p 203 2 PASTE button This button pastes the file from buffer memory gt User settings Security 203 You can use the COMMENT TIME STAMP button located at 3 DELETE button the lower right of the file list to toggle the display between This button deletes the selected file p 203 COMMENT and TIME STAMP LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual 201 Using USB memory to save load data 202 9 SAVE button Saves all of the LS9 s internal settings together gt p 199 LOAD button Loads the selected LS9 settings file p 200 1 CREATE USER KEY button Creates a user authentication key p 192 42 FORMAT butt
154. signals are being input from the SLOT x input port Invalid signals are being input from the SLOT x input port SLOT x Rx Buffer Full Too much data is being received at the SLOT x input port SLOT x Tx Buffer Full Too much data is being sent from the SLOT x output port Some Song Files Are Unidentified Song File Not Found There was a song file that could not be identified It is possible that the song being used for DIRECT PLAY or SCENE PLAY BACK LINK is different than the song that was specified The file assigned to SCENE LINK or to the DIRECT PLAY user defined key does not exist Storage Full The file could not be saved because there is not enough space on the USB memory Storage Not Found The USB memory could not be recognized Storage Not Ready Access is not possible because the USB memory is not ready Sync Error xxx The LS9 is not synchronized with the xxx signal Tap Operation Ignored Tap operation was ignored because the TAP TEMPO button is not displayed in the screen This Operation is Not Allowed This operation has been ignored because the current user does not have permission Too Large Files Loading Failed Loading is not possible because the bitmap file is too large The maximum supported file size is 307 256 bytes Too Many Bands Used Cannot Compare More than 15 bands are used when trying to copy 31band GEQ and then compare with Flex1
155. switches for the signal sent from the input channels to the currently selected MIX bus When you switch from normal mode to SENDS ON FADER mode the ON keys will light or go dark according to the on off status of the signals being sent to the currently selected MIX bus e SEL keys The SEL key of the selected channel will blink and the SEL keys of channels that are not selected will light However the SEL keys of unassigned modules will go dark If you selected a VARI type MIX bus in step 3 use the faders of the channel module section and the encoders of the ST IN sec tion to adjust the send level from the chan nels to the MIX bus you selected in step 3 As necessary switch fader layers to the layer that con tains the desired send source input channels 6 To switch the on off status of a signal sent to a VARI FIXED type MIX bus press the top panel ON key If the send destination MIX bus is set to stereo on off operations will be linked for the signal sent to the two adjacent odd numbered even numbered MIX buses 7 Repeat steps 3 6 to adjust the send level and switch the on off status for other MIX buses in the same way LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual 8 When you ve finished setting the MIX send levels press the key that is currently blink ing in the MIX MATRIX SELECT section The LS9 will return to normal mode You can assign the SENDS ON FADER function to a user defined key This allows you quickl
156. the corresponding channel will be selected for operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section or in the display In the ST IN section the L channel and R channel will be alternately selected as the target of operations each time you press the SEL key 2 CUE key This key selects the channel to be cue monitored When cue is on the LED will be lit 3 Meter LEDs These LEDs indicate the audio signal level of the input channel or output channel Top panel ST IN stereo input section In this section you can operate the main parameters of the stereo ST IN channels 1 4 The function of each control ler is the same as in the Channel Module section with the exception that the L channel or R channel will be alter nately selected as the target of operations each time you press the SEL key and the fact that the encoder rather than the fader is used to adjust the level STIN 1 STIN 2 STIN 1 STIN 2 STIN 3 STIN 4 SEL SEL SEL SEL CUE CUE CUE CUE Coven Cover oO mm E C3 s C32 C23 Ca3 48 8 1 30 C 3 30 C3 30 L 3 30 C 3 60 Co 60 C3 60 C 3 60 ON ON ON O O C STIN 2 STIN 3 STIN 4 2 m z m BT PH STIN3 STIN 4 LS9 16 LS9 32 4 ON key This switches the channel on off The key LED will light for channels that are on In SENDS ON FADE
157. the desired channel 1 Connect your external device to the I O card installed in a slot 1 2 DIGITAL OUT DIGITAL IN DIGITAL OUT DIGITAL IN Digital I O card Effect processor bolalab coesssegoege naa e If you install a digital I O card in a slot and digitally connect external device you must synchronize the word clock of the LS9 and the external device gt p 46 2 Press the HOME key to access the SELECTED CH VIEW screen and use the SEL keys to select the channel into which you want to insert an external device 00 Initial Data R ADMIN HA THRESH pa 2 232 81 00 IGE ATK HOLD DECAY RATIO ATK X 2 531 30 LOW L MID H MID SHELF 0 70 0 70 SHELF Ap r 125 1 00k 4 00k 10 0k D INSERT popup button 3 Move the cursor to the INSERT popup but ton in the screen and press the ENTER key For the INPUT channels insert connections can be made only for channels 1 32 If an INPUT channel 33 64 is selected on the LS9 32 the INSERT popup button is not shown The INSERT popup window will appear In this popup window you can view the insert input output port change the insert position switches the insert on off in groups of eight channels ch 4 ch 5 ch 6 PRE FADER Input output patching EA
158. the encoders in the SELECTED CHAN NEL section 2 Use the LAYER section to select the desired fader layer 3 Press a SEL key in the channel module section ST IN section or STEREO MASTER section to select a channel Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section will affect the channel that is currently selected by its SEL key The number and name of the currently selected channel is shown in the upper left of the dis play CD Initial Data 2 000 ADMIN HA UN MN 7 7 PAN 4 2J eu RUM D Channel number 2 Channel name a gt In the case of ST IN channels or STEREO channels you can switch between L and R by repeatedly pressing the same SEL key In order to select a MATRIX MONO channel on the LS9 16 you must first select the custom fader layer to which you ve assigned that channel and then press the corresponding SEL key You can also move the cursor to the selected channel in the upper left of the display and use the dial or the DECI INC keys to change the selected channel 4 Use the encoders of the SELECTED CHAN Even if a screen other than the SELECTED CH VIEW screen is selected the encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL section always affect the currently selected channel When you operate an encoder a small popup window indicating the value of that parameter will appear in the screen DYNAMICS 1 NEL section and the buttons and knobs in the SE
159. the following operations Program Change transmission and reception When you execute a specific event scene effect library recall on the LS9 a program change message of the cor responding number can be transmitted to an external device Conversely the corresponding event can be exe cuted when a program change message is received from an external device Control Change transmission and reception When you execute a specific event fader encoder or key operation on the LS9 the corresponding control change message can be transmitted to an external device Conversely events can be executed when control change messages are received from an external device This allows you to record fader and key operations on a MIDI sequencer or other external device and play them back later Parameter change SysEx transmission and reception When specific events fader encoder or key operations changes in system settings or user settings are executed on the 1 59 parameter change system exclusive messages can be transmitted to an external device Conversely events can be executed when parameter changes are received from an external device Using this capability LS9 operations can be recorded and played back on a MIDI sequencer or other external device or changes in system settings and user settings can be reflected on another LS9 console As the MIDI port used for transmitting and receiving MIDI messages you can select either the rear pa
160. the input output of the recorder Here s how to patch the desired channels to the input and output of the USB memory recorder You can patch any desired output channel or the direct output of an INPUT channel to the recorder input and you can patch the recorder output to any desired input channel 1 Inthe DISPLAY ACCESS section press the RECORDER key repeatedly to access the RECORDER screen In this screen you can assign signals to the input and output of the USB memory recorder and perform recording and playback operations 002 nusicO1 YAMAHA REHBIN 00 04 15 7 RECORDER INPUT field Here you can make settings for the recorder inputs RECORDER INPUT popup buttons L R These buttons access the OUTPUT CH SELECT popup window where you can patch channels to the L R inputs of the recorder ATT attenuator knob This knob adjusts the amount of attenuation boost for the signal that is input to the recorder You can adjust the value in 0 1 dB steps in a range of 96 to 24 dB The current value is shown immediately below the knob 4 Input level meter This level meter indicates the level of the signal being input to the recorder INPUT CUE button This button cue monitors the signal that is being input to the recorder Move the cursor to the button and press the ENTER key to turn cue on off LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual
161. the popup window of the corre sponding library Initial Data Moni STORE RECALL D CLEAR button Clears erases the data that is selected in the list 3 Move the cursor to the list and use the dial or the DEC INC keys to select the library item number that you want to clear 4 Move the cursor to the CLEAR button and press the ENTER key A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Clear opera tion 5 To execute the Clear operation move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The data you selected in step 3 will be cleared If you decide to cancel the Clear operation move the cursor to the CANCEL button instead of the OK button and press the ENTER key NOTE You can t clear read only data data indicated by an sym bol LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Initializing settings Here s how you can return the EQ dynamics settings of the currently selected channel or the effect settings of a rack to their initial state GEQ settings can be initialized using the FLAT button in the screen 1 Access a popup window or screen that con tains tool buttons 2 Select the channel EQ dynamics or rack effect whose settings you want to initial ize 3 Move the cursor to the DEF button and press the ENTER key A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Initialize operation RETURN TO DEFAULT SETTING Return to Default EQ Setting CRNCEL 4 To execute the Initi
162. the same steps for other input channels LS9 16 D Category tab These tabs select the input ports that are shown in the popup window Each tab corresponds to the following input ports IN 1 16 1 32 Shows INPUT jacks 1 16 1 32 e SLOT 1 2 Shows input channels 1 16 of the slot s 1 2 e RACK Shows the outputs of racks 1 8 Use this when you want to send the output of a GEQ or effect to an input channel e For details on GEQ and effects refer to p 157 e 2TR IN PB OUT Shows the 2TR IN DIGITAL jack and the USB memory recorder s output Use this when you want to send the input signal from the 2TR IN DIGITAL jack or the output signal of the USB memory recorder to an input channel 2 Port select button This selects the input port that is assigned to the chan nel 100 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Inserting an external device into a channel Inserting an external device into a channel If necessary you can insert an internal effect GEQ or an external device such as an effect pro cessor into the signal path of INPUT channels 1 32 or any output channel MIX MATRIX STE REO MONO When doing so the type of input output port used for the insertion and the signal patch location of the insertion can be specified individually for each channel Here we will explain how an external device connected to an I O card in a slot can be inserted into
163. the sanie ey of an output channel to switch t e assignment on off and its state will be remembered During this time the SEL LED will be lit if assign is ON or dark if OFF CUE CLEAR Flash Clear all CUE settings together MONITOR ON ON lit OFF dark Switch MONITOR on off When you press this key the previously stored assignment PETANI state will be applied While holding down this key press a v oe b SEL key of a MIX or MATRIX channel to switch the assign ment on off and its state will be remembered During this time the SEL LED will be lit if assign is ON or dark if OFF STEREO L R Lit if the selected MONITOR SOURCE SELECT IN L R INPUT 15 16 source is on Recall the selected signal to the monitor 31 32 PLAYBACK OUT DEFINE DIMMER ON ON lit OFF dark Switch the monitor dimmer function on off MONO MONITOR ON lit OFF dark Switch MONO MONITOR on off If this is on you can use the master fader to control the MONITOR MAS ON lit OFF dark monitor level and the ON key to switch the monitor out TER FADER put on off EFFECT BYPASS RACK 5 8 ON lit OFF dark Bypass the specified effect Wm n CURRENT PAGE Blink in synchroniza Use the tap tempo function in the displayed screen RACK 5 8 tion to the tempo Use the tap tempo function for the specified effect a MUTE MASTER MUTE GROUP 1 8 ON lit OFF dark Switch MUTE GROUP MASTER on off Q
164. the virtual rack for GEQ and effects there is also a rack for mounting external head amps Yamaha AD8HR For details refer to Using an external head amp gt p 175 LS9 16 32 Owners Manual 157 About the virtual rack 158 Mounting a GEQ or effect in the vir tual rack This section explains how to mount a GEQ or effect in the virtual rack and patch the input output of the rack 1 Inthe DISPLAY ACCESS section press the RACK 1 4 key and RACK 5 8 key simulta neously to access the VIRTUAL RACK screen In the VIRTUAL RACK screen you can mount GEQ or effects and make input output settings e If you press only the RACK 1 4 key or the RACK 5 8 key the setting screen RACK 1 RACK 8 screens for the rack you operated most recently will appear To ensure that you access the desired screen hold down one of the keys and then press the other key The screen contains the following items 5 STIN2L STIN2R STIN3BL STINSR STINGL STIM4R Reverb Hall REVERB HALL Reverb Room REVERB ROOM Reverb Plate REVERB PLATE Mono Delay MONO DELAY 7 GEQ EFFECT field In this field you can mount GEQ or effects in racks 1 8 and edit the input output patching for each rack 2 RACK button This displays the RACK MOUNT popup window where you can select an item to mount in the rack Each of these buttons corresponds to the rack shown at the immediate ri
165. to a user defined key This allows you quickly switch to SENDS ON FADER mode for a specific MATRIX bus or quickly return to the previous state You can also use the HOME key to cancel SENDS ON FADER mode In SENDS ON FADER mode when the send destina tion is a MATRIX bus the STEREO MASTER mod ule will operate differently depending on the selected fader layer Output channel operations eo Fader layer Function 1 16 1 32 17 32 33 64 MATRIX channel SEL key CUE key STEREO channel MASTER ON key fader CUSTOM FADER Adjust the on off status and send level of signals sent to MATRIX buses am f If you switch the fader layer from 1 16 1 32 17 32 33 64 or CUSTOM FADER to MASTER while in SENDS ON FADER mode when the send destination is a MATRIX bus SENDS ON FADER mode will be cancelled You cannot operate the fader or ON key of a channel that is not a send source a channel that does not have a MATRIX SEND parameter or of a channel that is not a send destina tion bus master LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual J 79 80 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Chapter 7 Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section This chapter explains how you can use the SELECTED CHANNEL section and the SELECTED CH VIEW screen to control the parameters of a selected channel About the SELECTED CHANNEL section The SELECTED CHANNEL section located at the right of the display corresponds to a channel
166. to the same link group will blink If you link an INPUT channel to a ST IN channel parameters that do not exist for a ST IN channel will be ignored 5 If you want to add a new channel to an existing link group do so as described in step 4 If the link destination channel is already assigned to another link group its assignment to the previous group will be can celled and it will be added to the newly assigned group 6 To cancel a link proceed as follows D Select the fader layer that contains the channel you want to un link 2 Use one of the following methods to select any channel assigned to the link group If the channel that you want to un link is in the same fader layer as another channel in that link group Hold down any SEL key registered in the link group and select the SEL key of the channel that you want to un link If no other channel in that link group is in the same fader layer as the channel you want to un link Use the cursor keys to move the white frame of the channel display field to any channel registered in the link group then hold down the ENTER key and select the SEL key of the channel you want to un link You temporarily exclude channel from link groups order to adjust parameters that maintain their level balance while linked such as when you want to adjust the level bal ance between channels in a link group Hold down the SEL key of
167. to which the external HA mounted in the STERNAL HA E rack will be connected To select the communication port for the O card move the cursor to the COMM PORT box use the dial or the DEC INC keys to select a port and press the ENTER key 4 To specify the input ports for an external HA move the cursor to the EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT popup button for that rack and press the ENTER key The EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT popup window will appear The popup window includes the following items C COMM PORT box o This box lets you select the communication port for 9 the currently installed I O card s EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT his NOTE select lrort 5 es m s e When installing an MY 16 ES64 or similar EtherSound inter face card in an LS9 32 be sure to install it in SLOT 1 Eu 51222 Eug SLOT 51011 Select the communication port for the I O card installed in the slot slot 1 PORT SELECT buttons SLOT2 LS9 32 only These buttons specify the input ports to which the Select the communication port for the I O card external HA is connected installed in slot 2 NO ASSIGN button This button defeats the port selection LS9 16 32 Owners Manual J 175 Using an external head amp 176 5 Use the PORT SELECT buttons to specify the input ports to which the audio output of the external HA is connected When you ve finished making settings move
168. value by moving the cursor to the knob or fader in the LCD screen then holding down this key and pressing the ENTER key While holding down this key press a SEL key to set the fader of that channel to nominal level You can also push a SET NOMINAL While pressina Lit SELECTED SEND encoder to set the send level to nominal LEVEL 9 level You can also return to nominal level by moving the cursor to the knob or fader in the LCD screen then hold ing down this key and pressing the ENTER key SENDS ON FADER MIX1 16 MATRIX1 8 Blinks in SENDS ON FADER mode Recall the Sends On Fader function to the selected MIX or MATRIX GEQ FADER ASSIGN ON lit OFF dark Turn the GEQ Fader Assign function on off PLAY PAUSE STOP FF Same as the indica Next REW Previous dina LCD Recorder transport functions REC sponding button TRANSPORT Shortcut function for STOP gt REC gt PLAY Recording will be initiated in a single action If this is exe While pressing Lit cuted autre recording the file being recorded will first be RECORDER closed and then recording will continue with a new file Start playback of a specified audio file from the begining only once sona title ordfilename The audio file to be played must be saved in the SONGS DIRECT PLAY af Sin files While pressing Lit folder within the YPE folder Please note that you won t be able to specify a file that is in the root directory
169. value depends on the tempo setting 2 ETF h d daed d s LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Appendices 241 Effects Parameters 242 E MULTI FILTER Two input two output 3 band multi filter 24 dB octave Parameter Range Description TYPE 1 LPF HPF riter high pass low pass FREQ 1 28 0 Hz 16 0 kHz Filter 1 frequency LEVEL 1 0 100 Filter 1 level RESO 1 0 20 Filter 1 resonance TYPE 2 LPF HPF BPF ed eina high pass low pass FREQ 2 28 0 Hz 16 0 kHz Filter 2 frequency LEVEL 2 0 100 Filter 2 level RESO 2 0 20 Filter 2 resonance TYPE 3 LPF HPF high pass low pass FREQ 3 28 0 Hz 16 0 kHz Filter 3 frequency LEVEL 3 0 100 Filter 3 level RESO 3 0 20 Filter 3 resonance E FREEZE One input two output basic sampler Parameter Range REC MODE MANUAL INPUT Description In MANUAL mode recording is started by pressing the REC and PLAY buttons In INPUT mode Record Ready mode is engaged by pressing the REC button and actual recording is triggered by the input signal 1000 to 1000 ms REC DLY Recording delay For plus values recording starts after the trigger is received For minus values record ing starts before the trigger is received MOMENT PLY MODE CONTI INPUT In MOMENT mode the sample plays only while the that the PLAY button is pressed In CONT mode playback continue
170. were entered in the text input box gt buttons Moves the text cursor forward or backward in the text input box INS button Inserts a space blank at the text cursor 34 4 LS9 16 32 Owners Manual Using the tool buttons Using the tool buttons The title bar at the top of some popup windows and screens contains tool buttons that provide additional functions You can use these buttons to recall related libraries or to copy the parame ters of a channel to a different channel Here we will explain how to use the tool buttons About the tool buttons Tool buttons like the following are shown in the ATT HPF EQ DYNAMICS 1 2 GEQ and EFFECT popup windows and screens 7 HPF EQ LIE DEF PASTE COMPARE a CD LIB library button This button recalls the library that is related to the current popup window or screen EQ dynamics GEQ or effect library 2 DEF default button This button restores the currently selected channel EQ dynamics or rack effect to the default state 3 COPY button This button copies the settings of the currently selected channel EQ dynamics or rack GEQ effect The copied settings are held in buffer memory a memory area for temporary storage 2 PASTE button This button pastes the settings held in buffer memory into the currently selected channel EQ dynamics or rack GEQ effect 5 COMPARE button This button exchanges the settings
171. will vary depending on devices When Address UL Ox7F is received all metering data transmission will be immediately stopped disabled Transmission When PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO is on the message will be sent as it is STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 0 15 Device numberzMIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 3E Digital mixer MODEL ID 00010010 12 LS9 DATA 00100001 21 REMOTE LEVEL METER CATEGORY DATA Ommmmmmm mm ADDRESS UL Ommmmmmm mm ADDRESS LU Ommmmmmm mm ADDRESS LL ch CountH cl CountL EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive Appendices LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual J 267 Warning Error Messages 268 Warning Error Messages Message Meaning xxx Parameters Copied Parameter xxx was copied to the copy buffer xxx Parameters Initialized Parameter xxx was initialized xxx Parameters Pasted Parameter xxx was pasted from the copy buffer xxx Parameters Swapped with Copy Buffer Parameter xxx was exchanged with the contents of the copy buffer Assignment is Restricted to Max 8 Sources The Monitor Define function allows a maximum of eight sources to be selected but you attempted to assign more than this Cannot Bookmark This Popup This popup window cannot be bookmarked Cannot Recall to Different Parameter Type You attempted to recall a library of a
172. 0 3906 390 GAIN4 3EC4 3EC7 GAIN31 390C 3911 GAINS 3EC8 3ECB LCR IN MIX ON 3912 3969 GAIN6 3ECC 3ECF CSR 396A 39 1 7 3bEDO 3ED3 DIRECT OUT ON 39C2 3A01 GAIN8 3ED4 3ED7 INPUT1 56 STIN GAIN9 3ED8 3EDB iL RtoSTERO ON EM GAIN10 3EDC 3EDF MUTE MASTER ON 3A5A_ 3A61 GAIN11 3EEO 3EE3 RECALL SAFE ON 3A66 3AEA GAIN12 4 7 INPUT GAIN 1 9 17 25 3BOF 3B12 GAIN13 3EE8 3EEB INPUT GAIN 2 10 18 26 3B1F 3B22 GAIN14 3EEC 3EEF INPUT GAIN 3 11 19 27 3B2F 3B32 GAIN15 3EF3 INPUT GAIN 4 12 20 28 3B3F 3B42 7 8 3EFA 7 INPUT 5 13 21 29 3B4F 3B52 GAIN17 3EF8 3EFB INPUT GAIN 6 14 22 30 3B5F 3B62 GAIN18 3EFC 3EFF INPUT GAIN 7 15 23 31 3B6F 3B72 GAIN19 3F00 3F03 INPUT GAIN 8 16 24 32 3B7F 3B82 GAIN20 3F04 3F07 INPUT 48v 1 9 17 25 3B8F 3B92 GAIN21 3F08 INPUT 487 2 10 18 26 3B9F 3BA2 GAIN22 3FOC 3FOF HA INPUT 48v 3 11 19 27 3BAF 3BB2 GAIN23 3F10 3F13 INPUT 48v 4 12 20 28 3BBF 3BC2 GAIN24 3Fl4 3F17 INPUT 48v 5 13 21 29 3BCF 3BD2 GAIN25 3F18 3F1B INPUT 48v 6 14 22 30 3BDF 3BE2 GAIN26 3F1C INPUT 48v 7 15 23 31 3BEF 3BF2 GAIN27 3F20 3F23 INPUT 48v 8 16 24 32 3BFF 3C02 GAIN28 3F24 3 27 EXTERNAL GAIN1 3B06 3B09 GAIN29 3F28 3F2B EXTERNAL GAIN2 3B16 3 19 GAIN30 3F2C 2 EXTERNAL GAIN3 3B26 3B29 GAIN31 3F30 3F33 EXTERNAL GAIN4 3836 3839 EQ 3F34 3FAE EXTERNAL 5 3B46 3B49 Appendices 255 Mixing paramet
173. 0 dB 2 Initialize A11 Memories 4 10 dB push up to the maximum value INITIALIZE 6 If there are any faders that are not in the positions shown in the screen manually move them to the appropriate position 7 When you have set all faders to the target location move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The process will proceed to the next fader position 7 FADER CALIBRATION button 2 n 4 8 Repeat steps 6 7 adjust the faders for ositions 1 through 4 The FADER CALIBRATION MODE popup window gh amp will appear where you can adjust the faders 9 When you have finished the calibration pro cess and the APPLY button has appeared FADER CALIBRATION MODE DELI move the cursor to the APPLY button and press the ENTER key The calibration settings will be saved in internal mem SEAR WITH SEL SWITCHES ory e If the RESTART button appears when calibration ends cali bration has failed Move the cursor to the RESTART button and press the ENTER key to execute calibration once again 10 Move the cursor to the EXIT button and press the ENTER key The console will start up in normal operating mode This window will also appear if a problem is detected in the fader settings while the LS9 is started up Alternatively you can continue by selecting a different menu instead of using the EXIT button 3 Use the top panel SEL keys to select the fader for wh
174. 00 200 400 800 16 315 63 12 5 4011801 160 3151 6350 125 25 5 10 20 E 9 oooceosoo ec Sool 3111213 Graphic EQ operations D EQ graph This indicates the approximate response of the current 31 Band GEQ settings Faders These faders indicate the amount of boost cut for each band of the 31 Band GEQ The frequency and value for the fader currently selected by the cursor are shown below the fader 3 FADER ASSIGN field Use this field when you want to operate the boost cut amount for each band using the top panel faders GEQ ON OFF button Switches the currently selected GEQ on off 5 FLAT button This returns all bands of the currently selected GEQ to 0 dB 6 INPUT button This button displays the OUTPUT CH SELECT popup window where you can select the input source of the rack 7 OUTPUT button This button displays the INPUT CH SELECT popup window where you can select the output destination of the rack GEQ LINK button This button links adjacent GEQ units The GEQ LINK button is shown only if linking is possible For a 31 Band GEQ this button is displayed if a 31 Band GEQ is mounted in two adjacent odd numbered even numbered racks 3 Atter you ve set the input source and out put destination correctly use the GEQ ON OFF button to turn on the 31 band GEQ To adjust the boost cut of each band move the cursor to the desired fader and operate the dial or the DECT INC key
175. 00009990000999000099990000999 00090 09 The COMP processor attenuates signals above a specified THRESHOLD by a specified RATIO The COMP processor can also be used as a limiter which with a RATIO of 1 reduces the level to the threshold This means that the limiter s output level never actually exceeds the threshold Parameter THRESHOLD dB Range 54 to 0 55 points Description This determines the level of input signal required to trigger the compressor 1 0 1 1 121 1 3 1 1 5 1 1 721 2 0 1 This determines the amount of compression that is the change in output signal RANO 21 301 3 541 iota 0 1 6 01 level relative to change in input signal level 8 0 1 10 1 20 1 22 1 16 points ATTACK ms 0 120 121 points This determines how soon the signal will be compressed once the compressor has been triggered RELEASE ms 44 1kHz 6 ms 46 0 sec 48kHz 5 ms 42 3 sec 160 points This determines how soon the compressor returns to its normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below the threshold The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB OUT GAIN dB 0 0 to 18 0 181 points This sets the compressor s output signal level KNEE Hard 1 5 6 points This determines how compression is applied at the threshold For higher knee set tings compression is applied gradually as the signal exceeds the specified threshold crea
176. 097 098 099 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 Scene Effect Preset No Assign Preset Bank Ch 5 Program Change Scene Effect Preset 001 002 003 No Assign 128 E Preset Bank Ch 6 Program Change Scene Effect Preset 001 002 003 No Assign 128 Preset Bank Ch 7 Program Change Scene Effect Preset 001 002 003 No Assign 128 Preset Bank Ch 8 Program Change Scene Effect Preset 001 002 003 No Assign 128 Preset Bank Ch 9 Program Change Scene Effect Preset 001 001 002 002 003 RACKS 003 128 128 Preset Bank Ch 10 Program Changes Scene Effect Preset 001 001 002 002 003 RACK6 003 128 128 Preset Bank Ch 11 Program Change Scene Effect Preset 001 001 002 002 003 RACK7 003 128 128 Preset Bank Ch 12 Program Change Scene Effect Preset 001 001 002 002 003 RACK8 003 128 128 Scene Memory Effect Library to Program Change Table Preset Bank Ch 18 Program Change Scene Effect Preset No Assign Preset Bank Ch 14 Program Change Scene Effect Preset No Assign Preset Bank Ch 15 Program Change Scene Effect Preset
177. 1 33 95 and 102 119 CONTROL CHANGE EVENT Indicates selects the type of event assigned to each control number When you press the popup button for an event the CONTROL CHANGE EVENT popup window will appear allowing you to change the control number assignment 2 CLEAR ALL button Pressing this button will clear all event assignments in the list 5 INITIALIZE ALL button Pressing this button will restore all event assignments in the list to their default state 7 Use the buttons of the CONTROL CHANGE MODE field to select the control change transmission reception mode You can choose one of the following two modes for control change transmission reception NRPN mode when the NRPN button is on The LS9 s various mix parameters will be transmitted and received on a single MIDI channel as NRPN mes sages If you select this mode the assignments in the list will be ignored TABLE mode when the TABLE button is on The LS9 s various mix parameters will be transmitted and received on a single MIDI channel as control change messages The channel on which control changes are transmitted and received is specified by the MIDI SETUP popup window PORT CH field gt p 178 8 Use the buttons of the CONTROL CHANGE field to turn transmission and reception on off and make settings for echo output Each button has the following function Tx button Switches control change transmission on off Rx button Swi
178. 1 037 165 101 229 038 038 102 102 038 166 102 230 039 039 103 103 039 167 103 231 040 040 104 104 040 168 104 232 041 041 105 105 041 169 105 233 042 042 106 106 042 170 106 234 043 043 107 107 043 171 107 235 044 044 108 108 044 172 108 236 045 045 109 109 045 173 109 237 046 046 110 110 046 174 110 238 047 047 111 111 047 175 111 239 048 048 112 112 048 176 112 240 049 049 113 113 049 177 113 241 050 050 114 114 050 178 114 242 051 051 115 115 051 179 115 243 052 052 116 116 052 180 116 244 053 053 117 117 053 181 117 245 054 054 118 118 054 182 118 246 8 055 055 119 119 055 183 119 247 056 056 120 120 056 184 120 248 5 057 057 121 121 057 185 121 249 amp 058 058 122 122 058 186 122 250 059 059 123 123 059 187 123 251 060 060 124 124 060 188 124 252 061 061 125 125 061 189 125 253 062 062 126 126 062 190 126 254 063 063 127 127 063 191 127 255 064 064 128 128 064 192 128 256 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual J 245 Scene Memory Effect Library to Program Change Table 246 Preset Bank Ch 3 Changet effect Preset Changes 001 257 065 002 258 066 003 259 067 004 260 068 005 261 069 006 262 070 007 263 071 008 264 072 009 265 073 010 266 074 011 267 075 012 268 076 013 269 077 014 270 078 015 271 079 016 272 080 017 273 081 018 274 082 019 275 083 020 276 084
179. 2 EQ LOW key These keys select the band controlled by encoders 6 8 By simultaneously pressing the EQ HIGH key and EQ LOW key you can reset the gain of all four bands to 0 dB 49 HOME key This key returns the state of the LS9 s panel to home posi tion When you press this key the panel will change as fol lows The display will show the SELECTED CH VIEW screen for the currently selected channel The channel level function will be assigned to the fad ers SENDS ON FADER mode will be defeated Data entry This section lets you edit specific parameters in the screen L AH 8 4 Co ENTER C DEC INC keys These keys increment or decrement the value of the parameter at which the cursor is located in the screen in steps of 1 1 Cursor keys These keys move the cursor up down left right in the screen 3 Dial This dial continuously increments or decrements the value of the parameter at which the cursor is located in the screen 2 ENTER key This key is used to switch a button in the screen on off or to confirm a change you make LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual USB connector side panel to the right of the display This connector lets you connect USB memory DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE LS9a lt He _ DEC INC c CD USB connector USB mem
180. 24 44 ST IN 13 53 ST IN section cree 17 ST MONO mode 58 71 STEREO 13 67 STEREO MASTER section 18 Stereo meter Cue section 20 STEREO MONO channels Sending to MATRIX buses 75 SYSTEM SETUP 205 T sits cass rtr cit ta ee nati 151 TALKBACK screen 151 TITLE LIST 110 TOOL DUttOfis siririna mati Sc Ge qe toam n rmi x ud 35 TOP PAM 12 15 27 2 270 U USB connector cease dn aaa ia 22 USB memory Editing 2 2 201 m 204 LOGGING 200 SAWING os 199 USB memory 105 Errem 187 User authentication keys 187 188 192 User defined keys 132 196 257 USER DEFINED KEYS section 18 132 196 User level 2 187 192 USER SETUP screen 187 205 V Virtual 157 VIRTUAL RACK
181. 24 ESRB 2 4 5 6 8 26 o 31 32 MONITORI MONG 1 2 USER LEVEL STIN1 STIN2 STINS STING STINI ES 1 CUSTOM FADER LAYER popup button LS9 32 92 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Assigning channels to the custom fader layer Channel module select field Channels that can be selected in the ST IN Select the channels that will be assigned to the top channel select field panel channel modules 1 16 1 32 ST IN channels 1 4 2 ST IN channel select field Select the channels that will be assigned to the top panel ST IN channels 1 2 1 4 e As an alternative to using the dial or the DEC INC keys you can move the cursor to the field you want to edit and press a SEL key to select a channel 3 Move the cursor to the channel module select field or the ST IN channel select field use the dial or the DEC INC keys to select the channel that you want to assign to that field and press the ENTER key 4 Assign channels to other fields in the same way 5 To recall the custom fader layer you ve cre The field will show the name of the selected channel ated press the LAYER CUSTOM FADER key in the LAYER section CUSTOHDEHOEH ICES The channels you selected in step 3 will be assigned to Move the e the channel module section and ST IN channel section of the panel Custom fader layer settin
182. 3286 MONO C EQ HIGH MID Q 3288 328C HIGH MID FREQ 328E 3292 HIGH MID CAIN 3294 3298 HIGH Q 329A 329E HIGH FREQ 3240 32A4 HIGH GAIN 3246 32AA HPF ON 32AC 32B0 LPF ON 32B2 32B6 INPUT1 56 STIN LOW TYPE 3440 347 1L 4R EQ HIGH TYPE 3480 34BF MIX MATRIX STE LOW TYPE 34CO 34E2 REO LRC EQ HIGH TYPE 34E4 3506 INPUT1 56 STIN MER PE FREQ 3640 367F ON 3680 3684 ATTACK 3686 368A THRESHOLD 368C 3690 CG RELEASE 3692 3696 RATIO 3698 369C GAIN 369E 36A2 KNEE WIDTH 36A4 36A8 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual NRPN parameter assignments LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Parameter Parameter AOI 1 2 36AA 36E9 EXTERNAL GAIN6 3B56 3B59 E MIX3 4 36EA 3729 EXTERNAL GAIN7 3866 3B69 PAN MIX5 6 372A 3769 EXTERNAL GAIN8 3B76 3B79 MIX7 8 376A 37A9 EXTERNAL 48v 1 3B86 3 89 MATRIX1 2 382A 382E EXTERNAL 48v 2 3B96 3 99 MONO C to MATRIX3 4 3830 3834 EXTERNAL 48v 3 3BA6 3BA9 Matrix1 8 PAN MATRIXS 6 3836 383A EXTERNAL 48v 4 3BB6 3BB9 MATRIX7 8 383C 38
183. 40 EXTERNAL 48v 5 3BC6 3BC9 MIX9 16 to STE MIX TO ST 3842 3849 EXTERNAL 48v 6 3BD6 3BD9 REO ON HA EXTERNAL 48v 7 3BE6 3BE9 ON 3852 3857 EXTERNAL 48v 8 3BF6 3BF9 GAINT 3858 385D EXTERNAL HPF1 3 06 3 09 GAIN2 385 3863 EXTERNAL HPF2 3 16 3 19 GAIN3 3864 3869 EXTERNAL HPF3 3C26 3 29 GAIN4 386A 386F EXTERNAL 4 3c36 3 39 GAINS 3870 3875 EXTERNAL HPF5 3 46 3C49 GAIN 3876 387 EXTERNAL HPF6 3 56 3C59 GAIN 387 3881 EXTERNAL HPF7 3 66 3C69 GAIN8 3882 3887 EXTERNAL HPF8 3C76 3C79 GAINS 3888 3880 INPUTI S6 STIN GAIN10 388E 3893 1L 4Rto ON 3086 3CCS GAIN11 3894 3899 MIX to MONO ON 3CC6 3CD5 GAIN12 389A 389F ON 3CD6 3CF5 GAIN13 38A0 38A5 SLOT OUT DELAY TIME HIGH 3006 3D25 GAIN14 38A6 38AB TIME LOW 3D36 3055 GAIN15 38AC 38B1 ON 3D66 3075 GAIN16 38B2 38B7 OMNI OUT DELAY TIME HIGH 3076 3D85 GAIN17 38B8 38BD TIME LOW 3086 3D95 GAIN18 38BE 38C3 ON 3096 3D97 GAIN19 38C4 38C9 DIGITAL OUT DELAY TIME HIGH 3D98 3D99 GAIN20 38CA 38CF TIME LOW 3D9A 3D9B GAIN21 38D0 38D5 m RATIO 3D9C 3DD3 GAIN22 38D6 38DB 1L 4R DYNAMICS1 KNEE WIDTH 3DD4 3EOB GAIN23 38DC 38E1 GAIN 3EOC 43 GAIN24 38E2 38E7 48 STIN HIGH ONLY FULL 3E44 3E7B GAIN25 38E8 38ED 1L 4R DYNAMICS2 FILTER FREQ 3E7C 3EB3 GAIN26 38EE 38F3 ON 3EB4 3EB7 GAIN27 38F4 38F9 GAIN1 3EB8 3EBB GAIN28 38FA 38FF GAIN2 3EBC 3EBF GAIN29 3900 3905 GAIN3 3ECO 3EC3 GAIN3
184. 5GEQ Too Many EQ Bands Used Cannot Paste More than 15 bands are used when trying to copy 31band GEQ and then paste to Flex15GEQ Total Slot Power Capability Exceeded The I O cards installed in the slots exceed the rated power capacity Unsupported File Format The file you attempted to load from the USB memory is of an unsupported format USB Data Framing Error Invalid signals are being input from the USB connector input port USB Data Overrun Invalid signals are being input from the USB connector input port USB Rx Buffer Full Too much data is being received at the USB connector input port USB Tx Buffer Full USB Currently Active for Recorder function Too much data is being transmitted from the USB connector output port Since the USB memory recorder is recording or playing back functions such as Save Load cannot be used USB Currently Active for SAVE or LOAD The recorder cannot oparate since mixer scene memory library data is being saved or loaded in USB memory USB Memory Busy Recorder Stopped Recording playback stopped because time is required for USB memory processing USB Memory Full Recorder Stopped Recorder processing was halted because the USB memory capacity ran out while the USB memory recorder was operating USB Memory Unmounted Recorder Stopped Recorder processing was halted because the USB memory was disconnected while the USB memo
185. 6 STEREO 0071 08 gt Seen Ld STEREO 1 UA 4 A eng gt amp MONITOR T i Ki MONITOR our PEE INSERT OUT gt EFFECTCUE OUTPUT DeLay INPUT 15 16 31 32 gt 9 AN L R MONO C e SNR Seer ie xum l STEREO ou EA MONDI gt PATCH MAX 600ms 2 d DA OMNI OUT 1 8 16 PLAYBACK OUT gt E MONITOR MONO C METER MONITOR MONO C E ul MONITOR OUT MONO C 5 ane MONITOR OUT L R MONO C srenco our PEME cd OIX MATRIX RACKS same as RACKS Race our DIRECT OUT 1 3264 gt ATT TRIM COAXIAL LR gt MX MONITOR DIMM MONITOR LEVEL en l l STEREO OUTLR MONDO ACRE gt OUTPUT LY MEER 3100 03 or O 2TR OUT DIGITAL 1 STEREO our MAX8ch 18 HH maso ARMOR LC Re PATCH _ wAx00ms Z MONO C same as X MONITOR OUT L R MONO C MIX 0011 16 gt MATRIX OUT1 8 gt RACKS IN RACKBOUT A LYBIR RACK8 same as RACK5 RECORDER PURA LLL METER S a DIRECTO our 1 32164 gt RECORDER IN R PLAYBACK OUT to pur patch X OUT 1 16 gt RECORDER METER ape To MONITOR SELECT IN ou 1 bz STEREO OUT LA MONDO IC gt MATRIX OUT 1 8 gt PATCH ci MONITOR OUT L R MONO C gt 2 lS RECORDER CUE RECORDER CUE e GETREIDE ra NEL ae 2 LS9 16 LS9 32 Level Diagram
186. 6 points This determines how expansion is applied at the threshold For higher knee settings expansion is applied gradually as the signal falls below the specified threshold creat ing a more natural sound I O Characteristics KNEE hard OUT GAIN 0 0dB Output Level THRESHOLD Input Level THRESHOLD gt RATIO 230 Time Series Analysis 1 Input Signal Output Signal ATTACK RELEASE le sl Output Level 14 1 X if i i i T wg xi Y Input Level LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Time Time Dynamics Parameters I COMPANDER HARD COMPANDER H COMPANDER SOFT COMPANDER S e eere The hard and soft companders combine the effects of the compressor expander and limiter Output Level THRESHOLD a 1 i PE E gt Input Level WIDTH The companders function differently at the following levels D 0 dB and higher Functions as a limiter 2 Exceeding the threshold Functions as a compressor 3 Below the threshold and width Functions as an expander The hard compander has an expansion ratio of 5 1 while the soft compander has an expansion ratio of 1 5 1 The expander is essentially turned off when the width is set to maximum The compressor has a fixed knee setting of 2 The gain is automatically adjusted acc
187. 7 RACK8 If a is mounted in RACK 1 8 MODULE NAME 0 mm ASCII CODE p CH effect is mounted in RACK 5 8 Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE 1344 STIN 1L 1351 STIN 4R Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Dynamics2 Ommmrmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE DATA Onnnnnnn nh Number High Onnnnnnn nl Number Low ch Channel High Occccccc cl Channel Low 2 EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive S amp lt LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual 263 MIDI Data Format 264 4 3 FUNCTION CALL LIBRARY EDIT 4 3 1 Format PARAMETER CHANGE Receive Data will be received when PARAMETER CHANGE Rx is on and the Device number of both Rx CH and SUB STATUS are matched The data will be echoed when PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO is on The corresponding memory library will be changed immediately the data is received Transmission PARAMETER CHANGE will be sent in reply to Request If PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO is on the message will be sent as it is STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 3E Digital mixer MODEL ID 00010010 12 LS9 DATA 00000000 00 OTHER DATA CATEGORY FUNCTION 01001100 L ASCII CODE NAME 01101001 1 ASCII CODE 01100010 ASCII CODE Offfffff ff ASCII CODE Offfffff ASCII CODE Offff
188. 8 1 16 Input to output 80 Maximum Voltage Gain 1kHz Input Output RL Conditions Min Typ Max Unit INPUT 1 16 lt LS9 16 gt OMNI OUT 1 8 lt LS9 16 gt INPUT 1 32 lt 159 32 gt OMNI OUT 1816 lt LS9 32 R1500 Input GAIN imax dB Phantom Voltage Output Conditions Min Typ Max Unit 46 48 50 V INPUT 1 16 lt LS9 16 gt hot amp cold No load INPUT 1 32 lt 159 32 gt 276 LS9 16 32 Owners Manual Mixer Basic Parameters Mixer Basic Parameters Libraries Output Function Name Number Total Function Parameter Scene Memory Preset 1 User 300 301 Attenuator 96 to 24 dB Input EQ Library Preset 40 User 159 199 Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Output EQ Library Preset 3 User 196 199 Gain 18 dB to 18 dB Dynamics Library Preset 41 User 158 199 0 10 to 10 0 4Band Equalizer Effect Library Preset 57 4 User 142 199 Low Shelving Low Band GEQ Library Preset 1 User 199 200 High Shelving LPF High Band Type l Type II Lj Input Function Insert Insert Point Pre EQ Post EQ Pre Fader Post On Type Comp Expander Compander H Com Function Parameter pander S Phase Normal Reverse Threshold 54 dB to 0 dB Attenuator 96 to 24 dB Ratio 1 1 to 0 1
189. 8 Digital input output connections 43 Dimensio ee secreta ut prn 279 DIRECT field te 82 Direct 103 IDISPIAY e ERR 20 30 DISPLAY ACCESS section 19 29 22 0 222 229 DYNA ftield iei Eie eine 82 DYNAMICS e 117 DYNAMICS 1 21 DYNAMICS 2 21 DYNAMICS Library 227 Dynamics 229 E Effect Type List nere 232 6 166 Editing 170 Mi y4 c 173 0 168 MOUNU 158 admain 167 4422 11 172 Effects and tempo synchronization 244 Effects 44 2 233 Electrical characteristics 275 dom 115 EQ field LEE 82 EQ HIGH HIGH MID LOW MID LOW 22 EQ Library Elster tinent bes 225 EQ QJ FREQUENCY GAIN encoders 21 4 115
190. 8 Jubel Ali Dubai United Arab Emirates Tel 971 4 881 5868 ASIA THE PEOPLE S REPUBLIC OF CHINA Yamaha Music amp Electronics China Co Ltd 2F Yunhedasha 1818 Xinzha lu Jingan qu Shanghai China Tel 021 6247 2211 INDIA Yamaha Music India Pvt Ltd 5F Ambience Corporate Tower Ambience Mall Complex Ambience Island NH 8 Gurgaon 122001 Haryana India Tel 0124 466 5551 INDONESIA PT Yamaha Musik Indonesia Distributor PT Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center Jalan Jend Gatot Subroto Kav 4 Jakarta 12930 Indonesia Tel 021 520 2577 KOREA Yamaha Music Korea Ltd 8F 9F Dongsung Bldg 158 9 Samsung Dong Kangnam Gu Seoul Korea Tel 02 3467 3300 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music Malaysia Sdn Bhd Lot 8 Jalan Perbandaran 47301 Kelana Jaya Petaling Jaya Selangor Malaysia Tel 03 78030900 SINGAPORE Yamaha Music Asia Pte Ltd 03 11 A Z Building 140 Paya Lebor Road Singapore 409015 Tel 6747 4374 TAIWAN Yamaha KHS Music Co Ltd 6 Sec 2 Nan Jing E Rd Taipei Taiwan 104 R O C Tel 02 2511 8688 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co Ltd 4 6 15 and 16th floor Siam Motors Building 891 1 Rama 1 Road Wangmai Pathumwan Bangkok 10330 Thailand Tel 02 215 2622 OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Corporation Asia Pacific Sales amp Marketing Group Nakazawa cho 10 1 Naka ku Hamamatsu Japan 430 8650 Tel 8 1 53 460 2303 OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty Ltd Level 1 99
191. 83C 2841 GAIN21 2842 2847 GAIN22 2848 284D GAIN23 284E 2853 GAIN24 2854 2859 GAIN25 285A 285 GAIN26 2860 2865 GAIN27 2866 286B GAIN28 286C 2871 GAIN29 2872 2877 GAIN30 2878 2870 GAIN31 287E 2883 MONO C 28E4 28E8 Parameter fom We HEX HEX SEND 28EA 2929 MIX2 SEND 292A 2969 MIX3 SEND 296A 29A9 56 STIN MIX4 SEND 29AA 29E9 1L 4R to Mix1 8 MIX5 SEND 29EA 2A29 MIX6 SEND 2A2A 2A69 MIX7 SEND 2A6A 2AA9 MIX8 SEND 2AAA 2AE9 MATRIX1 SEND 2BEA 2BEE MATRIX2 SEND 2BFO 2BF4 MATRIX3 SEND 2BF6 2BFA MONO C to Matrix MATRIX4 SEND 2BFC 2C00 LEVEL MATRIX5 SEND 2C02 2C06 MATRIX6 SEND 2 8 2 0 MATRIX7 SEND 2C0E 2C12 MATRIX8 SEND 2 14 2C18 ON MONO C 2C2A 2C2E MIX1 SEND 2C30 2C6F MIX2 SEND 2C70 2CAF MIX3 SEND 2CBO 2CEF INPUTI S6 STIN l uix4 SEND 2CFO 2D2F 1L 4R to Mix1 8 ON MIX5 SEND 2D30 2D6F MIX6 SEND 2D70 2DAF MIX7 SEND 2DB0 2DEF MIX8 SEND 2DFO 2E2F to Matrix MATRIX SEND 2F30 2 34 MIX9 16 to STE REO ON MIX TO ST 2F36 2F3D INSERT MONO C 2F46 2F4A MIX1 SEND 2 2F8B MIX2 SEND 2F8C 2FCB MIX3 SEND 2FCC 300B INPUTI 56 STIN MIX4 SEND 300C 304B SEND 304 308B 6 SEND 308 30 7 SEND 30CC 310B MIX8 SEND 310C 314B ON 325E 3262 LOW 3264 3268 LOW FREQ 326A 326 LOW GAIN 3270 3274 LOW MID Q 3276 327A LOW MID FREQ 327C 3280 LOW MID GAIN 3282
192. 9 16 32 Owner s Manual J 81 About the SELECTED CH VIEW screen Ahout the SELECTED CH VIEW screen When you press the HOME key the SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the display This screen shows most of the parameters of the channel currently selected by its SEL key You can use the SELECTED CH VIEW screen to check the values when operating the encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL section or when you need to edit more detailed parameters 82 The SELECTED CH VIEW screen contains the following items Initial SEND field When an input channel is selected Here you can switch the on off status of the signals sent from that channel to each MIX bus if the MIX bus is set to the FIXED type and view or edit the send levels When a MIX STEREO or channel is selected Here you can switch the on off status of the signals sent from that channel to each MATRIX bus and view or edit the send levels When a MATRIX channel is selected Here you can switch the on off status of the signals sent from each MIX channel to that MATRIX bus and view or edit the send levels HA field input channels only In this field you can view or edit the input port patched to the input channel the head amp gain the phantom power on off status and the phase setting The input level OVER indicator is also shown here 3 PATCH field output channels only For output
193. ADMIN STORAGE Administrator c CREATE USER KEY e O PREFERENCE v USER NED S USER NEO CUSTOM FADER CUSTOM FADER LAYER LAYER USER LEVEL v USER LEVEL 2 Move the cursor to the SAVE LOAD button and press the ENTER key The SAVE LOAD popup window will appear DELETE MAKE DIR VOLUME NAME LS9_MEMORY PATH v FILE NAME amp TVPE COMMENT LS9 Morld Tour p CRERTE T MEE E CLOSE SAVE button 3 If you want to move to a different directory move the cursor to the icon of the column of the desired directory and press the ENTER key To move to the next higher level move the cursor to the arrow button in the PATH field and press the ENTER key Move the cursor to the SAVE button and press the ENTER key A keyboard window will appear allowing you to enter a file name and comment F FILE SRUE FILE NRHE CLEAR m DEL ISI p pop sp sg ai my ese nb fed al E5 8 ED ell 00 By i SHIFT LOCK CANCEL Enter a file name of up to eight characters and a comment of up to 32 characters then move the cursor to the SAVE button and press the ENTER key When the file has finished being saved the popup win dow showing the save progress indication and the type of data will close User settings Security LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual J 199 Using USB memory to sa
194. AHA SIER uer LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual J 23 Rear panel INPUT jacks 1 16 1 32 INPUT 9 D 9 D 9 D D 9 9621896 20596 MC 2m C 0126 one C QI C 29 These are balanced XLR 3 31 female input jacks for inputting analog input level is 62 dBu 10 dBu Resettable head amps are provided on all jacks and head amp settings can be stored in scene memory 2 OMNI OUT jacks 1 8 1 16 ox ms 4 2162 62 C2 ook RO EM 222 ex C O LS9 32 These are XLR 3 32 male output jacks for outputting ana log audio signals These are used mainly to output MIX MATRIX channel signals The nominal output level is 4 dBu Female XLR plug 2 hot 3 cold lt 1 ground e The nominal output level of OMNI OUT jacks 1 8 1 16 is 4 dBu maximum level is 24 dBu but if necessary this can be changed by an internal switch to 2 dBu maximum level is 18 A fee will be charged for this change For details contact to your Yamaha dealer listed at the end of this manual 24 f LS9 16 32 Owners Manual Male XLR plug audio signals from line level devices or microphones The nominal 3 cold 1 ground TTE 2 hot 8 Slots 1 2 LS9 16 SLOT SLOT 159 32 Separate
195. AKING PEAKING 4 5 dB 0 0 dB 4 0dB 2 0 dB F 140Hz 1 00 kHz 1 90 kHz 5 60 kHz Q 8 0 4 5 0 63 9 0 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 2 5 1 5 qB 2 5 dB 0 0 dB 125 Hz 450 Hz 3 35 kHz 19 0 kHz Q 8 0 0 40 0 16 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF G 5 0 dB 0 0 dB 3 5 dB 0 0 dB 355 Hz 950 Hz 3 35 kHz 12 5 kHz Q 9 0 10 0 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF G 6 0dB 8 5dB 4 5dB 4 0 dB 315 Hz 1 06 kHz 4 25 kHz 12 5 kHz Q 10 0 4 0 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 2 0 dB 0 0 dB 1 0 dB 4 0 dB F 106Hz 1 00 kHz 1 90 kHz 5 30 kHz Q 0 90 4 5 3 5 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 3 5dB 2 0 dB 0 0 dB 2 0 dB 300 Hz 750Hz 2 00 kHz 3 55 kHz Q 9 0 4 5 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING 0 5 dB 0 0 dB 0 0 dB 2 0 dB 224Hz 1 00 kHz 4 00 kHz 6 70 kHz Q 4 5 4 5 0 125 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 0 0 dB 5 5 dB 0 0 dB 4 0 dB 180Hz 355Hz 4 00 kHz 4 25 kHz Q 7 0 4 5 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G 2 0dB 1 0dB 1 5dB 3 0 dB 90 0 Hz 850 Hz 2 12 kHz 4 50 kHz Q 2 8 2 0 0 70 7 0 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING 0 5 dB 0 0 dB 2 0dB 3 5 dB F 190Hz 1 00 kHz 2 00 kHz 6 70 kHz Q 0 11 4 5 0 56 0 11 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 2 0dB 5 0 dB 2 5 dB 4 0 dB F 170Hz 236 Hz 2 65 kHz 6 70 kHz Q 0 11 10 0 5 6
196. AND COMP Multi band compressor REV X Hall REV X Room REV X HALL REV X ROOM REV X Plate REV X PLATE New reverb algorithm that deliv ers dense and rich reverberation smooth decay and provides a spaciousness and depth that enhances the original sound Choose from three types depend ing on your location and needs REV X HALL REV X ROOM and REV X PLATE Effects Parameters Effects Parameters E REVERB HALL REVERB ROOM REVERB STAGE IE GATE REVERB REVERSE GATE REVERB PLATE One input two output early reflections with gate and early One input two output hall room stage and plate reverb reflections with reverse gate simulations all with gates Parameter Range Description parameter Range Description TYPE Type A Type B Type BE early rellection simulation REV TIME 0 3 990 Reverb time ROOMSIZE 0 1 20 0 Reflection spacing ur Early reflections decay characteris INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms B before reverb HIVENESS tics 0 dead 10 live Hiah f b INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HL RATIO 0 1 1 0 igh frequency reverb time 5 d ratio DIFF 0 10 Reflection diffusion left right LO RATIO 0 1 24 Low frequency rever
197. ASCADE IN button and press the ENTER key to access the CASCADE IN PATCH popup window The CASCADE IN PATCH popup window contains the following items D Port select popup buttons These buttons access the INPUT PORT SELECT popup window where you can select the input port whose signal will be added to the bus 2 CASCADE LINK PORT field Here you can select the port that will transmit and receive control signals when using the Cascade Link function to link specific operations and parameter changes between two LS9 consoles 3 CASCADE COMM LINK field Here you can select the parameters and events that will be linked by the Cascade Link function 3 Move the cursor to the port select popup button for the bus whose port you want to assign and press the ENTER key The INPUT PORT SELECT popup window will appear This popup window contains the following items LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual INPUT PORT SELECT popup window for the LS9 32 INPUT PORT SELECT CASCADE INJ NO ASSIGN is ll fee et puc ad uil uo wu M uc INPUT PORT SELECT popup window for the LS9 16 INPUT PORT SELECT TET CASCADE INJ NO ASSIGN MEME xr EJEMEMES This popup window contains the following items D Port select buttons Here you can select the input port whose signal will be added to th
198. ATRIX ON FADER ON Insert On MIX ALL MIX PROCESSING STEREO MONO to STEREO MONO On MIX ON MIX FADER ON TO ylatrix LEVEL US MATRIX SEND FADER ON Fader MIX FADER MIX FADER ON 5 5 Pan Balance MIX ALL MIX FADER ON To Matrix POINT 107 STEREO MONO ALL D PROCESSING Att MIX PROCESSING Cue o EQ MIX PROCESSING Mute Safe Dynamics1 MIX DYNA1 MIX PROCESSING Recall Safe Mute Assign MUTE ASSIGN Fade Time To Mix ON WITH SEND WITH MIX SEND 1 Except for Key In Source To Mix LEVEL WITH MIX SEND WITH MIX SEND 2 STEREO channel only To Matrix On to MATRIX ON MIX FADER ON To Matrix LEVEL MIX to MATRIX SEND MIX FADER ON To Matrix POINT MIX ALL MIX PROCESSING To Stereo Mono MIX ALL MIX PROCESSING Cue Mute Safe Recall Safe Fade Time STORE 1 Except for Key In Source LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Functions that can be assigned to user defined keys Functions that can be assigned to user defined Keys Function PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 LED Explanation NO ASSIGN assignment RECALL Recall the currently selected scene STORE Store to the currently selected scene SCENE 1 selects the next scene number LIST UP scrolls the scene list upward by one Simultaneously pressing
199. Appendices 253 NRPN parameter assignments 254 RACK5 8 EFFECT RACK1 3 GEQ FADER Parameter BYPASS 26B4 26B7 MIX BALANCE 26BC 26BF PARAM1 26C4 26C7 PARAM2 26CC 26CF PARAM3 2604 2607 PARAM4 26DC 26DF 5 26E4 26E7 PARAM6 26EC 26EF PARAM7 26F4 26F7 PARAM8 26FC 26FF PARAM9 2704 2707 PARAM10 270C 270F PARAM11 2714 2717 PARAM12 271 271F PARAM13 2724 2727 14 272 272 15 2734 2737 PARAM16 273C 273F PARAM17 2744 2747 PARAM18 274C 274F PARAM19 2754 2757 PARAM20 275C 275F PARAM21 2764 2767 PARAM22 276C 276F PARAM23 2774 2777 PARAM24 277C 277F PARAM25 2784 2787 PARAM26 278C 278F PARAM27 2794 2797 PARAM28 279C 279F PARAM29 27A4 27A7 PARAM30 27AC 27AF PARAM31 27B4 27B7 PARAM32 27BC 27BF ON 27C4 27C9 GAIN1 27CA 27CF GAIN2 2700 2705 GAIN3 2706 27DB GAIN4 27DC 27E1 GAINS 27E2 27E7 GAIN6 27E8 27ED GAIN7 27EE 27F3 GAIN8 27F4 27F9 GAIN9 27FA 27FF GAIN10 2800 2805 GAIN11 2806 280B GAIN12 280C 2811 GAIN13 2812 2817 GAIN14 2818 2810 GAIN15 281E 2823 GAIN16 2824 2829 GAIN17 282A 282F GAIN18 2830 2835 GAIN19 2836 283B GAIN20 2
200. D Channel block diagram This shows the direct output position only for INPUT channels and the position of the insert connection for the selected channel 2 Channel number This is the channel number 3 Channel name This is the channel name Insert point select box This selects the insert point for the signal Move the cursor to this box and use the dial or the DEC INC keys to switch between PRE EQ immediately before the EQ PRE FADER immediately before the fader or POST ON immediately after the channel on off LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual J 101 Inserting an external device into a channel 5 Output port select popup button 6 Input port select popup button These buttons select the output port and input port that are patched to insert out and insert in The currently selected output port and input port are shown INSERT ON OFF button This button turns the insert on off To switch this on off move the cursor to this button and use the DEC INC keys or the ENTER key Move the cursor to the output port select popup button and press the ENTER key The OUTPUT PORT SELECT popup window will appear allowing you to select the output port that will be patched to insert out OUTPUT PORT SELECT CCH1 INSERT OUT SLOT 1 ed LS9 16 D Category tab These tabs select the output ports that are shown in the popup window Each tab corresponds to the fo
201. DER POST ON medal PANR CUE ON MIX 1 8 9 18 POST METER METER METER METER METER METER LRMONO TOMONO TOST PAN MODE su i 088g PRE FADER PFL POST To MONITOR SELECT t MATRIX1 3 7 LEVEL 5 To MATRI aE call Te m I T I l k MATRIX2 4 8 fe Pu PRE FADER POSTON S ME i i arr Buck Ba pace INSERT INSERT le sm 1 d FNA VARI 32 EXPAND DE ESSER csr LEVEL ON PREEQ POSTEQ PRE FADER PAN 55 PRE EQ SK CUE PRE FADER POST eee E PLAYBACK OUT gt ors INSERT OUT Keyin Fiter INSERT OUT f POST ON p pm EON ER E E 5 B PHEEQ T Meroen ees ee INSERT OUT__ PA Le Mono Self POST EQ SON Pn 3 15 wixis teour OMX mnt MIX2 4 16 CH 1 8 9 16 17 24 25 32 POST EQi16 1 FIXED jo ON it An 1 CH T 89 16 17 24252255 40414849 55574 P05TEQ2 gt z LJ 1 POSTPANL m OS STEREO POST PANR m ON wLEVEL L R MONO C N SLOT IN SLOTIN M Eu SiON pw LEVEL 1 TE REENPRH INSERT PORE FADER INSERT OUT METER METER COPS ER NT cem ToQUIPUTPATCH STEREO S gPREEQ INSERT OUT SLOT 1 16 To xo ON LEVEL INSERT OUT L R MONO C 79 POSTON INSERT OUT SLOT SLOT SLOTII 1 QM PREEQ
202. DIRECT OUT LEVEL knob and use the dial or the DEC INC keys to adjust the level of the direct output As an alternate method of specifying a direct output you can select an INPUT channel as the output source of an output port gt p 98 Chapter 10 USB memory recorder This chapter explains how to use the USB memory recorder Ahout the USB memory recorder The LS9 provides a USB memory recorder function that lets you easily record internal signals to USB memory or play back audio files recorded on USB memory As the file format for recording it uses MP3 MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 For playback it supports as well as WMA Windows Media Audio and MPEG 4 files However DRM Digital Rights Management is not supported By using the USB memory recorder the output from the STEREO bus or a MIX bus can be recorded to USB memory or background music or sound effects saved in USB memory can be played back via an assigned input channel E Signal flow for the USB memory recorder MIX 1 16 RECORDER PLAYBACK MATRIX 1 8 INPUT OUT INPUT 1 32 1 64 STEREO L R USB memory ST IN 1L 1R MONO recorder ST IN 4L 4R INPUT 1 32 1 64 DIRECT OUT NOTE Recording and playback cannot be done simultaneously The signal being recorded cannot be input to an INPUT channel LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual USB memory recorder 105 Assigning channels to the input output of the recorder Assigning channels to
203. Data MonitorO1 HonitorO2 Stase01 STORE RECALL D List This shows the settings that are saved in the library The highlighted line indicates the data that is selected for operations Read only data is indicated by an symbol 2 RECALL button This button recalls the settings selected in the list into the currently selected channel EQ dynamics or rack GEQ effect The right side of the list shows information about the corre sponding data the dynamics type or effect type used etc For the dynamics library a symbol is shown to indicate whether the data can be recalled by dynamics 1 or 2 4 Move the cursor to the list and select the recall source library number by using the dial or the DEC INC keys to move the highlighted line in the list In some cases the data selected as the recall source cannot be recalled into the currently selected channel rack Each library has the following limitations Dynamics library The dynamics library holds three types of data Dynamics 1 and Dynamics 2 for input channels and Dynamics 1 for output channels Recall is not possible if you ve selected a type that is not supported by the corresponding dynamics processor Using the tool buttons e GEQ library The GEQ library holds two types of data 31BandGEQ or Flex I5GEQ Recall is not possible if you ve selected a type that is different than the recall destina tion GEQ Effect library
204. Description Parameter Range Description DELAY L 0 0 1000 0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY L 0 0 1000 0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY R 0 0 1000 0 ms Right channel delay time DELAY R 0 0 1000 0 ms Right channel delay time FB DLY 0 0 1000 0 ms Feedback delay time FB DLY 0 0 1000 0 ms Feedback delay time Feedback gain plus values for Feedback gain plus values for FB GAIN 99 to 49996 normal phase feedback minus FB GAIN 99 to 99 normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback values for reverse phase feedback DELAY HI 0 1 1 0 Delay high frequency feedback DELAY HI 0 1 1 0 Delay high frequency feedback ratio ratio Delay and reverb balance 0 Delay and delayed reverb balance 0 00 1009 all delay 100 all reverb DLY BAL 0 10096 096 all delayed reverb 10096 all delay HPF eee High pass filter cutoff frequency 8 00 kHz THRU 21 2 Hz 7 HPF 8 00 kH High pass filter cutoff frequency 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz Z LPF Low pass filter cutoff frequency THRU 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz LPF THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency REV TIME 0 3 99 0 s Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins REV TIME 0 3 99 0 5 Reverb time REV HI 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins DIFF 0 10 Spread REV HI 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density DIFF 0 10 Spread SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off DENSIT
205. E CANCEL STORE Ifthe title or artist name contains characters that cannot be displayed these characters will be converted into for display The title and the artist name can be edited only for format audio files 5 Edit the title or artist name A maximum of 128 single byte characters 64 double byte characters can be input for both the title and for the artist name For details on entering characters p 34 If the text cannot be shown completely in the input field the text will scroll horizontally Move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key to close the popup window If necessary use the SONG TITLE FILE NAME SORT button ARTIST SORT button and f J buttons in the screen to change the order of the title list Use the following buttons to change the order of the title list SONGTITLE FILE NAME SORT button When you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key the title list will be sorted in numerical alphabetical order by title Each time you press the ENTER key the list will alternate between ascend ing and descending order ARTIST SORT button When you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key the title list will be sorted in numerical gt alphabetical order by artist name Each time you press the ENTER key the list will alternate between ascending and descending order Editing the title list Linking scene rec
206. ECT section keys to select the send destination MATRIX bus wr gt When a MIX STEREO L R or MONO channel is e f PRE is selected as the send position to the MATRIX bus lected th k fth MIX M ATRIX SELECT then you will also be able to select either PRE EQ immedi 5 ected the keys of the sec ately before the attenuator or PRE FADER immediately tion are used to select the send destination MATRIX before the fader for each two adjacent odd numbered even bus numbered MATRIX buses gt p 213 When you press a key to select the send destination e If desired the pan balance setting of the signal sent to a ste MATRIX bus only the LED of the corresponding key reo MATRIX bus can be linked with the TO ST PAN TO ST will blink indicating that it is selected as the send des INE SELECTED CH VIEW 2 p213 tination The cursor will move to the corresponding If you want to monitor the signal that is being sent to a specific MATRIX bus select the fader layer that includes that MATRIX TO MATRIX LEVEL knob in the TO MATRIX field channel and press the corresponding CUE key of the screen If a MIX STEREO L R or MONO channel is selected MIX Controlling the signals sent from MIX STE MATRIX SELECT section keys 9 16 are inactive REO L R or MONO channels to a specific e If the LED of only the specified key is blinking in the MIX MATRIX bu s MATRIX SELECT section and the LEDs of the remaining
207. EL LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual J 219 Using the Help function 5 Use the panel dial or the DEC INC keys to select HELP Move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key to close the USER DEFINED KEY SETUP popup win dow 6 Move the cursor to the CLOSE button and press the ENTER key to close the USER DEFINED KEY popup window Viewing Help 1 Before you proceed load the help file or text file from your USB memory 2 Press the user defined key to which the Help function is assigned the HELP popup window will appear r lt INDEX CONTENTS gt 8 ing the signal fron an input channel to a MIX bus INDEX mode INDEX CONTENTS gt HANNEL VIEW Id in the s nake sur button is turne CONTENTS mode 220 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual 3 Move the cursor to the desired section and use the panel dial to scroll the contents Links in the selected text will be high lighted 4 Select a link underlined portion in the doc ument and press the ENTER key to jump to the link destination By selecting a text link in INDEX mode and pressing the ENTER key you can switch to CON TENTS mode and scroll to the correspond ing section Move the cursor a window link and press the ENTER key a location with an symbol and underlined text you can close the HELP window and open the corresponding window 5 To return from CONTENTS mode to INDEX mode move the cursor to the I
208. EO 50 Sending to STEREO MONO bus 58 INPUT JACKS tte oett ree 24 Input patching 99 Input output characteristics 273 Insert connections con teras 101 INSERT field ette 82 Internal clock 215 IP address ite ette tee trenes 216 Index K Keyboard 34 age 32 L LAMP connector LS9 32 only 25 LAYER 19 27 ECRITIOQG 58 71 Level End of Manual LIB teta 35 LIDFANES 35 120 174 List WINGOW 2 32 ele 189 S9 Editor iei 216 Bolo MMC 11 11 MAC addr6SS te etae 216 MATRIX 213 MATRIX 13 67 METER key eame citrus 19 METER eicit ac etes 155 155 177 MIDI Data 260 MIDI Implementation Chart 281 MIDI IN OUT
209. ER CHANGE When transmission is enabled by receiving Request for Level Meter the corresponding metering data will be sent in every 50 millisecond for 10 seconds If metering information is expected to be continuously sent Request is needed to be sent in at least every 10 seconds Receive The data will be echoed when PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO is ON Transmission When transmission is enabled by receiving Request the corresponding metering data will be sent in constant interval for a given period of time The interval and time will vary depending on devices When rebooted or port setting is changed the transmission will be disabled When PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO is on the message will be sent as it is STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 3E Digital mixer MODEL ID 00010010 12 159 DATA 00100001 21 REMOTE LEVEL METER CATEGORY DATA Ommmmmmm mm ADDRESS UL Ommmmmmm mm ADDRESS LU Ommmmmmm mm ADDRESS LL Oddddddd dd Datal EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 4 9 2 Format PARAMETER REQUEST Receive Data will be received when PARAMETER CHANGE Rx is on and the Device number of both Rx CH and SUB STATUS are matched The data will be echoed when PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO is on the corresponding metering data will be sent via Rx CH in constant interval for a given period of time The interval and time
210. F high pass filter on off and view or adjust its cutoff frequency EQ graph field This shows the response of the EQ HPF 9 INSERT field INPUT channels 1 32 and MIX MATRIX STEREO MONO channels only The signal route for insertion in the channel can be switched on off here DIRECT field INPUT channels only This is an on off switch for the signal that is directly out put from the channel You can also view and edit the out put level here 61 SAFE field Switches the Recall Safe status on off for that channel If only some of the channel parameters are set to Recall Safe the PARTIAL indicator will light 2 FADER field Here you can view and edit the input output level of the channel and switch the channel on off 49 MUTE field Here you can select the mute group to which that channel is assigned SAFE indicator will light if the corresponding channel is set to Mute Safe Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section This section explains how you can use the SELECTED CHANNEL section to control all of the parameters for a specific channel 1 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section HOME key The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the display If you leave this screen displayed you will always be able to view the settings in the screen while operating an encoder of the SELECTED CHANNEL section You can also access the SELECTED CH VIEW screen by pressing any one of
211. FF ON Tempo parameter sync on off wm ETC a LSH 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G 12 0 to 12 0 dB Low shelving filter gain EQF 100 Hz 8 00 kHz EQ peaking type frequency EQ G 12 0 to 12 0 dB EQ peaking type gain EQ Q 10 0 0 10 EQ peaking type bandwidth HSH F 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH 12 0to 412 0 dB High shelving filter gain s 2 Bb 44 d 4 dad d 1 LOR LR L R Turn L Turn R 2 BT Bebo 447 d 4 de d d os LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Appendices 235 Effects Parameters E TREMOLO Two input two output tremolo effect Parameter Range Description DUAL PITCH Two input two output pitch shifter FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 10096 Modulation depth WAVE Sine Tri Square Modulation waveform SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off Mm m todetemine FREQ LSH 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G 12 0 to 12 0 dB Low shelving filter gain EQF 100 Hz 8 00 kHz EQ peaking type frequency EQ G 12 0 to 12 0 dB EQ peaking type gain EQQ 10 0 0 10 EQ peaking type bandwidth HSH F 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH 12 0 to 12 0 dB High shelving filter gain 4 FPR Bd 45 B 4 4 do des on IB HQ PITCH One input two output high quality pitch shif
212. GE GEQ LIB 1 199 0 tx Receive EFFECT LIB 58 199 0 tx Data will be received when PARAMETER CHANGE Rx is on and the Device LibRc SCENE 0 300 5 tx rx number of both Rx CH and SUB STATUS are matched The data will be INPUT EQ LIB 1 199 1 tx rx echoed when PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO is on The corresponding OUTPUTEQLIB 1 199 2 3 4 tx rx parameter will be changed immediately the data is received Dynamics LIB 1 199 1 2 3 4 8 Transmission GEQ LIB 0 199 6 tx rx Data will be transmitted with the Device Number MIDI CH in Tx CH EFFECT LIB 1 199 7 when PARAMETER CHANGE Tx is on LibUnRcl SCENE 0 5 tx STATUS 11110000 System exclusive message INPUT EQ LIB 0 1 ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA OUTPUT EQ LIB 0 2 3 4 tx SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel Dynamics LIB 0 1 2 3 4 8 tx GROUP ID 00111110 3E Digital mixer GEQ LIB 0 6 ON MODEL ID 00010010 12 159 EFFECT LIB 0 7 ex DATA CATEGORY 00000000 00 OTHER DATA LibStrUd SCENE 0 0 FUNCTION NAME 01001100 ASCII CODE VibRclUd SCENE 0 01101001 i ASCII CODE 01100010 b ASCII CODE 1 0 CH1 63 CH64 Offfffff ff ASCIICODE 5 Ep p 512 MATRIX1 519 MATRIX8 Offfffff ff ASCI CODE 4 1024 STEREO L 1026 MONO C Offfffff ff ASCII CODE 5 512 will be used if the recalling or storing data is only one Offfffff ASCII CODE 6 0 RACK1
213. IDI SETUP popup window 4 As described in Basic MIDI settings gt p 178 select the ports and MIDI channels that will be used to transmit receive pro gram changes 5 When you ve finished making settings move the cursor to the CLOSE button and press the ENTER key to close the popup window You will return to the MISC SETUP screen 180 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual 6 Move the cursor to the PROGRAM CHANGE popup button and press the ENTER key to access the PROGRAM CHANGE popup window In the PROGRAM CHANGE popup window you can specify how program changes will be transmitted and received and choose the event scene recall or effect library recall that will be assigned to each program number This page includes the following items CSCENE 001 SCENE 002 SCENE 003 CSCENE 004 5 yCSCENE 005 gt SCENE 006 CSCENE 007 SCENE 008 SCENE 009 PROGRAM CHANGE field Here you can switch program change transmission reception on off and specify whether program changes will be echoed out This setting is linked with the PROGRAM CHANGE field of the MIDI SETUP popup window 2 PROGRAM CHANGE MODE field Here you can select the program change transmit receive mode This setting is linked with the PRO GRAM CHANGE MODE field of the MIDI SETUP page popup window 3 List This list shows the event scene recall effect library recall assigned to each program
214. INED KEY SETUP popup window will appear LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual 4 Select TAP TEMPO in the FUNCTION col umn select CURRENT PAGE in the PARAMETER 1 column move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key To select an item in each column move the cursor to the desired column and use the dial or the DEC INC keys Move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key the Tap Tempo function will be assigned to the user defined key you selected in step 3 and you will return to the USER DEFINED KEY SETUP page USER DEFINED KEY SETUP Select Parameters for USER DEFINED KEY 1 FUNCT ON PRRRMETER 1 TRP TEMPO CURRENT PRGE CANCEL If you specify CURRENT PAGE in the PARAMETER 1 col umn the Tap Tempo function can be used for the currently shown effect rack e If you specify RACK x 5 8 in the PARAMETER 1 col umn the Tap Tempo function can be used only for a specific effect rack For more about user defined keys refer to User defined keys gt p 196 5 Repeatedly press the RACK 5 8 key to access the RACK screen for the rack in which the effect you want to control is mounted 6 Select an effect type that includes a BPM parameter For details on selecting the effect type refer to step 3 of Editing the internal effect parameters gt 170 The BPM parameter is shown in the special parameter field It is included in delay typ
215. ION 99999999 99 In this method you use the SELECTED CHANNEL section SELECTED SEND encoder to adjust the level of the signal sent to the MATRIX bus L Using a popup window 00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 In this method you use the MATRIX SEND popup window to adjust the send levels from eight channels to a MATRIX bus This method lets you control the send level on off setting and send point for the signals sent from a set of eight channels to a specific MATRIX bus Using the top panel faders cccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccce In this method you switch the LS9 to SENDS ON FADER mode and use the top panel faders to adjust the send levels to the MATRIX bus This method lets you simultaneously control the send levels and on off switching for the signals sent from MIX STEREO L R and MONO channels to a specific MATRIX bus Using the SELECTED CHANNEL sec tion In this method you use the SELECTED CHANNEL sec tion SELECTED SEND encoder to adjust the level of the signal sent to the MATRIX bus You can either control the signals sent from a desired MIX STEREO L R or MONO channel to all MATRIX buses or control the signals sent from all MIX channels to a specific MATRIX bus Controlling the signals sent from a MIX STEREO L R or MONO channel to all MATRIX buses 1 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section HOME key The SELECTED CH VIEW
216. ISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN OR MOISTURE 98 6500 ADVARSEL Lithiumbatteri Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig NEDERLAND THE NETHERLANDS h ndtering Udskiftning m kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type Lev r det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren VARNING Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte Anvand samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som reko mmenderas av apparattillverkaren Kassera anv nt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion VAROITUS Paristo voi rajahtaa jos se on virheellisesti asen nettu Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin Havita kaytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti Dit apparaat bevat een lithium batterij voor geheugen back up This apparatus contains a lithium battery for memory back up Raadpleeg uw leverancier over de verwijdering van de batterij op het moment dat u het apparaat ann het einde van de levensduur of gelieve dan contact op te nemen met de vertegenwoordiging van Yamaha in uw land For the removal of the battery at the moment of the disposal at the end of life please consult your retailer or Yamaha representative office in your country e Gooi de batterij niet weg maar lever hem in als Do not throw away the battery Instead hand it in as small chemical waste lithium caution lithium disposal LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual 3 4 PRECAU
217. ITH MATRIX EQ INPUT EQ INPUT EQ PROCESSING To Matrix LEVEL WITH MATRIX SEND SEND Dynamicsl Cue y DYNAMICS1 1 DYNAT PROCESSING Mute Safe i INPUT INPUT INPUT Recall Safe Dynamics2 1 DYNAMICS2 1 DYNA2 TD Fade Time STORE Mute MUTE GROUP Assign o INPUT ALL ASSIGN 1 Except for Key In Source To Mix INPUT INPUT MIX INPUT ON MIX ON 2 ON FADER ON To Mix D INPUT INPUT MIX INPUT E STEREO MONO Channels LEVEL MIX SEND 2 SEND FADER ON tereo To Mix INPUT Parameter RECALL SAFE USER LEVEL pre post INPUT ALL PROCESSING 2 v TEREO MON To Stereo INPUT NAME ICON y OUTPUT NAME Mono 9 INPUT ALL PROCESSING NAME Cue Insert On STEREO MONO ALL STEREO MONO Cue PROCESSING STEREO MONO Mute Safe STEREO ON FADER ON Recall Safe STEREO STEREO MONO Fade Time STORE Fader FADER FADER ON Except for Key In Source STEREO MONO 2 Applies to parameters for which the MIX channel 1 16 individual Send STEREO MONO FADER ON Parameter setting and the item in the table are both enabled STEREO MONO 3 ST IN 1 4 only s O STEREO MONO EQ PROCESSING Burimi m STEREO MONO STEREO MONO E MIX Channels y DYNA1 PROCESSING STEREO MONO P S RECALL SAFE USER LEVEL is ei PROCESSES M tereo A M Mute Assign STEREO MONO ALL MUTE ASSIGN To Mision A STEREO MONO to STEREO MONO LCR MIX ALL MIX PROCESSING M
218. IX CUE cUEMODE MODE PFL TRIM PFL TRIM ACTIVE CUE Viewing the display Popup windows Some windows show lists or details of specific parameters in the screen These are called popup windows Popup window DECAY 304m By operating the knobs and buttons in a popup window you can edit more detailed parameters In some popup windows there are several buttons called tool buttons in the upper part of the window You can use these tool but tons to recall or copy paste library data To close the popup window and return to the previous screen move the cursor to the x symbol or the CLOSE button and press the ENTER key You can also close the popup window and return to the SELECTED CHAN NEL VIEW screen by pressing the HOME key LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Basic operations on the LS9 G 31 Viewing the display 32 The on screen user interface The interface shown in the screen of the LS9 includes the following items Cursor The blinking red and yellow frame displayed in the screen is called the cursor The cursor is used to specify the object of your operations Use the cursor keys of the data entry section to move the cursor up down left right Cursor Buttons Buttons in the screen are used to execute specific func tions to switch parameters on off or to select one of sev eral choices execute a button s function to switch it on
219. Jv 52 19 57 0 810m 5m 4 uis A pode REL GAIN KNEE 2 i A CD MUTE field This shows the mute groups to which the currently selected channel is assigned 2 MUTE popup button When you move the cursor to this popup button and press the ENTER key the MUTE GROUP screen of the CHANNEL JOB screen will appear For details refer to Using the MUTE GROUP screen to operate mute groups p 121 3 Mute group select buttons 1 8 These select the mute group s to which the currently selected channel will be assigned SAFE indicator This will light if the currently selected channel is set to Mute Safe For more about mute safe refer to Using the Mute Safe function To select the mute group s to which this channel will be assigned move the cursor to a mute group select button and press the ENTER key multiple selections are allowed 4 Select the mute group s for other channels in the same way Using mute groups Using the Mute Safe function If necessary specific channels registered to a mute group can be temporarily excluded from mute group operations Mute Safe 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section press the CHANNEL JOB key repeatedly to access the MUTE GROUP screen of the CHANNEL JOB screens Initial Data 000 R ADMIN CD Channel display field When the SAFE button is on channels that are tempo rarily excluded from the mute group are highlighted in this fi
220. K CRNCEL 5 Enter a name for the directory you want to create move the cursor to the MAKE but ton and press the ENTER key If you specified an existing file name a confirmation message will appear Formatting USB memory media Here s how to format USB memory media using the 16 file system USB memory up to 2 Gbytes capac ity is supported 1 Inthe DISPLAY ACCESS section press the SETUP key repeatedly to access the USER SETUP screen Initial Data 000 ADMIN NT USER STORAGE Administrator c 7 CREATE USER KEY D PREFERENCE PREFERENCE USER DEFINED USER DEFINED KEYS KEYS SAVE LOAD CUSTOM FADER E CUSTOM FADER LAYER LAYER USER LEVEL USER LEVEL 204 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual 2 Move the cursor to the SAVE LOAD button and press the ENTER key to access the SAVE LOAD popup window VOLUME NAME LS9_MEMORY PATH 5 M FILE TYPE COMMENT Ga SETUPOS L9R LS9 World Tour CRERTE SRUE LOAD FORMAT COMMENT USER KEY CLOSE FORMAT button 3 Move the cursor to the FORMAT button and press the ENTER key A keyboard window will appear allowing you to enter the volume name that will be applied after formatting For details on entering text refer to Assigning a name p 34 STORAGE FORMAT VOLUME NAME CLEAR DEL 22 a 1693 BY 13 50
221. K screen you can check the status of the talkback and turn it on off CH 1 ch 1 TRLKBRCK Initial Data 000 INPUT TO TRLKBRCK D TALKBACK MATRIX 1 2 STEREO MONO STO STARA D TALKBACK ON button This switches talkback on off 2 INPUT TO TALKBACK field Of the INPUT jacks 1 16 1 32 the input sensitiv ity input level and phantom power on off status of the jack used for talkback is shown here You can adjust the input sensitivity by selecting the GAIN knob in this field Input select popup button This displays the INPUT PORT SELECT popup window where you can select the INPUT jack used for talkback 48V button This is an on off switch for the phantom power 48V supplied to the INPUT jack used for talk back GAIN knob This adjusts the input sensitivity of the INPUT jack used for talkback Input level meter This indicates the input level of the mic connected to the INPUT jack used for talkback 3 ASSIGN field This selects the buses to which the talkback signal will be sent If you want to clear all selections move the cursor to the CLEAR ALL button and press the ENTER key LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Talkback Oscillator Cn 151 Using talkback 2 To assign the input from the INPUT jack to 6 Using the buttons in the ASSIGN field talkback move the cursor to the input select the bus es to which you want to select popup window in the INP
222. LECTED CH VIEW screen to edit the parameters of the selected channel Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section 5 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual J 83 Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section Subsequent operations will differ depending on the parameters you want to adjust Adjusting the send levels from a spe cific channel to the MIX buses MATRIX buses Use the SEND field when you want to send the signal from an INPUT ST IN channel to a MIX bus or from a MIX STEREO or MONO channel to a MATRIX bus D SEND popup button This accesses a popup window where you can make send level settings for eight channels at a time 2 TO MIX LEVEL TO MATRIX LEVEL knobs These knobs indicate the send level of the signal sent from that input channel to each MIX bus or MATRIX bus If the send destination MIX bus MATRIX bus is set to stereo the left knob of the two adjacent knobs will operate as a PAN knob For a ST IN channel a stereo MIX channel or STEREO channel it will operate as the BALANCE knob 3 TO MIX ON OFF button If the send destination MIX bus is a FIXED type the TO MIX LEVEL knob will not appear instead the TO MIX ON OFF button will be shown By moving the cursor to the TO MIX ON OFF button and pressing the ENTER key you can turn the signal sent from that channel to the MIX button on off 84 LS9 16 32 Owners Manual To adjust the send level to a MIX bus MATRIX bus use the keys of the MI
223. LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Chapter 5 Input channel operations This chapter explains operations for input channels INPUT channels and ST IN channels Cn Signal flow for input channels The input channel are the section that processes the signals received from the rear panel input jacks or slot and sends them to the STEREO bus MONO bus and MIX buses There are two types of input channel as follows INPUT channels 1 32 1 64 9 9 These channels are used to process monaural signals When the LS9 is in the default state the input signals from the rear panel INPUT jacks and the input channels of the slot s are assigned to these channels For details refer to p 99 Input channel operations M 0 MIX 57 MATRIX CUE 12 1516 LR C 12 78 LR pu ta i a ys a a a ee a ORTA INSERT POINT To RACKIN PATCH PRE FADER INSERT QUT To OUTPUT PATCH ey E To OUTPUT PATCH PREEQ INSERT OUT PRE HPF PRE EO PRE FADER uallo LEVEL DIRECT 011 3284 TO RECORDER IN PATCH BON INSERT IN PRE EQ EQ OUT DYNATOUT DYNA2OUT PRE FADER POST ON TOMONO TOST PAN MODE METER METER METER METER METER METER TO MONO SIL GR METER GR METER
224. MCHG Fix 512 Control Change Table CTRLCHG Fix 512 Preference Current PREF CUR Fix 512 Preference Admin PREF ADM Fix 512 Preference Guest PREF GST Fix 512 User Defined Keys Current UDEF CUR Fix 512 User Defined Keys Admin UDEF ADM Fix 512 User Defined Keys Guest UDEF GST Fix 512 Custom Fader Layer Current CFAD CUR Fix 512 Custom Fader Layer Admin CFAD ADM Fix 512 Custom Fader Layer Guest CFAD GST Fix 512 User Level Current UKEY CUR Fix 512 User Level Guest UKEY GST Fix 512 3 3 PARAMETER CHANGE Reception This message is echoed if PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO is ON This message is received if PARAMETER CHANGE Rx is ON and Rx CH matches the Device number included in the SUB STATUS When a PARAMETER CHANGE is received the specified parameter will be controlled When a PARAMETER REQUEST is received the current value of the specified parameter will be transmitted as a PARAMETER CHANGE with its Device Number as the Rx CH Transmission If PARAMETER CHANGE Tx is ON and you edit a parameter for which CONTROL CHANGE transmission has not been enabled a PARAMETER CHANGE will be transmitted with the Tx CH as its device number In response to PARAMETER REQUEST a PARAMETER CHANGE will be transmitted with Rx CH as its device number Command function FO 43 1n 3E 12 F7 RARAMETER CHANGE FO 43 3n 3E 12 F7 PARAMETER REQUEST rx tx rx tx LS9
225. NA1 popup button DYNA2 popup button input channels only 2 Use the LAYER section to select the desired fader layer 3 Press a SEL key in the channel module section STEREO MASTER section or ST IN section to select the channel that you want to operate 4 In the screen move the cursor to the DYNA1 DYNA2 popup button or any knob in the DYNA1 DYNA field and press the ENTER key The DYNAMICS 1 DYNAMICS 2 popup window will appear In this popup window you can view and edit all dynamics parameters of the currently selected channel If you ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window gt p 194 you can also access the above popup window by pressing any of the DYNAMICS 1 DYNAMICS 2 encoders while the SELECTED CH VIEW screen is shown LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual EQ and Dynamics 117 Using dynamics 118 The window contains the following items D Dynamics type buttons Use these buttons to select one of the following four types of dynamics Input channels GATE DUCKIN DYNAMICS 1 VEKING COMPRESSOR EXPANDER COMPRESSOR COMPANDER H DYNAMICS 2 COMPANDER S DE ESSER Output channels COMPRESSOR EXPANDER DYNAMICS 1 COMPANDER H COMPANDER S e For details on dynamics types refer to the appendix at the end of this manual gt p 229
226. NDEX button and press the ENTER key 6 As necessary you can also scroll by using the buttons in the tool bar INDEX button Jumps to the table of contents If the cursor is at the table of contents you can use the panel cursor key as an alternative CONTENTS gt button Jumps to the content article If the cursor is at the table of contents you can use the panel cursor key as an alternative button Scrolls to the chapter that precedes the currently dis played location button Returns to the previous link in the link history If the cursor is at the table of contents or within an article you can use the panel DEC key as an alterna tive button Proceeds to the next link in the link history If the cursor is at the table of contents or within an article you can use the panel INC key as an alterna tive 7 To close the window once again press the user defined key to which the Help function is assigned Bi Directly recalling the Help for a specific panel controller 1 While holding down the user defined key to which you ve assigned the Help function press or turn the panel controller whose function you want to learn about Panel controllers other than the faders will not func tion as long as you continue holding down the user defined key to which the Help function is assigned 2 If the corresponding controller has an explanation associa
227. NI OUT jacks 1 6 MIX channels 1 6 OMNI OUT jacks 1 14 MIX channels 1 14 OMNI OUT jacks 7 8 STEREO L R channel OMNI OUT jacks 15 16 STEREO L R channel LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Connections ER Digital input output connections 060000000000000000000000000000000000000 e g CD recorder 0 Power amp Speaker processor Mai k e g Yamaha DME64N Use the 2TR IN DIGITAL 2TR OUT DIGITAL jacks or the mini YGDAI slot to send or receive digital audio signals between the LS9 and external equipment When the LS9 is in the default state the signals of the fol lowing channels are patched to the 2TR IN DIGITAL 2TR OUT DIGITAL jacks and slots This patching can be changed as necessary p 95 99 For the LS9 16 For the LS9 32 Digital input output jacks Input output channels Digital input output jacks Input output channels 2TR IN DIGITAL jack L R No assignment 2TR IN DIGITAL jack L R No assignment 2TR OUT DIGITAL jack L R STEREO L R channel 2TR OUT DIGITAL jack L R STEREO L R channel Slot input channels 1 8 INPUT channels 17 24 Slot 1 input channels 1 8 INPUT channels 33 40 Slot input channels 9 16 INPUT channels 25 32 Slot 1 input channels 9 16 INPUT channels 41 48 Slot output channels 1 8 MIX channels
228. NPUT OUTPUT DCA MATRIX out A086 RACK same as RACK1 RECORDER CUE p AYBACK QUT gt SELECT HELL CUEL 18 SSS SSS RACKS IN ce MM CUER CUER ADBA 1 RACK3 same as RACK1 1 ADER OUTPUTS STEREO OU RACKA IN HH racks out MIX CASCADE OUT 1 16 gt 27 s same as RACK ALBIS STEREO CASCADE OUT LR MONO C ARR 052 586 PHONES RACKS R l CH n a 7 DIRECT OUT 1 32 PHONES LEVEL CUE LOGIC PHONES METER RACK IN METER RACK OUT 164 gt INSER our gt 4 SiBandGEQ MIX OUT 1 16 gt OUTPUT ATT TRIM LEVEL LINK PHONES Ls To PHONES our E a STEREO OUT LRMONO C gt PATCH DELAY METER SLOT OUT SLOTISLOTI ZIRDLR gt l MATRIX OUT 1 8 gt MAX 600ms 5 SLOT INPUT 15 16631 32 15 d PHONESR To PHONES OUT MONITOR OUT L R MONO C gt DELAY METER SLOT OUT PLAYBACK OUT MeTERCK OUT CH INSERT QU 92 M 22 2 som 81071810721 INSERT OUT 1 16 gt 1 STEREO OUT LR 5 4 16 UE STEREO INSERT OU LR a STEREO OUT gt t MONITORL METER MONTORL Si _MONITOR OUT L Te QUIPUT PATCH METER RACKOUTR 1 S DERE A ui
229. ODE is LAST CUE the state of the CUE key is not reproduced Operating the Cue function This section explains how you can use the CUE key of a desired channel to monitor the Cue signal The cue signal is sent to the same output destination as the moni tor signal Be aware that for this reason the cue signal will not be sent to the connected monitor speakers if you turn off the Monitor output However the front panel PHONES OUT jack will always output the cue signal regardless of the Monitor on off setting For details on Monitor function settings refer to Using the Monitor function p 146 1 Inthe DISPLAY ACCESS section press the MONITOR button repeatedly to access the CUE screen In the CUE screen you can check the Cue status and turn Cue on off CUE MODE INPUT OUTPUT Pr MIX CUE PFL TRIM PFL TRIM ACTIVE CUE INPUT D CUE MODE field This specifies the mode of operation when multiple CUE keys within the same group are turned on 2 INPUT field Here you can select one of the following positions from which input channels will be cued PFL Pre Fader Listen button The pre fader signal will be output AFL After Fader Listen button The signal immediately after the ON key will be output POST PAN button The post pan signal will be output PFLTRIM knob If PFL is selected you can adjust the output level of the cue signal in a range of 20 dB to 10 dB NOTE Be aware t
230. ON key and fader of the corresponding channel module For the LS9 32 Press the LAYER MASTER key to access the master fader layer and operate the ON key and fader of channel module 32 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Sending the signal from an input channel to the STEREO MONO bus 11 In the top panel channel module section or ST IN section make sure that the ON key is turned on for the input channel you want to operate and raise the fader encoder to an appropriate position The following steps will differ depending on whether you selected a ST MONO mode channel or an LCR mode channel in step 7 For a channel set to ST MONO mode 12 Use the ST button and MONO button in the TO STEREO MONO popup window as on off switches for the signal sent from the input channel to the STEREO bus and MONO bus 13 Use the SELECTED CHANNEL section PAN encoder to adjust the pan balance of the signal sent from the input channel to the STEREO bus You can obtain the same result by using the TO ST PAN TO ST BAL knob in the TO STEREO MONO popup window For a channel set to LCR mode 12 Use the LCR button in the TO STEREO MONO popup window as an on off switch for the signal sent from the input channel to the STEREO bus and MONO bus For a channel that is set to LCR mode the signal sent to the STEREO bus and MONO bus can be switched on off in a single operation 13 Use the CSR knob in the TO STEREO MONO popup window
231. OUTPUT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 00000000 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 11 12 13 14 15 16 I I LI LI 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 OUTPUT PORT _ TRIM OUTPUT PORT TRIM MODE RESET ALL 0 00 0 00 LS9 32 SLOT OUTPUT TRIM fine adjustment of the output ports button This makes fine adjustments in 0 01 dB steps to the output port gain of the specified slot When you press this button the screen will change as follows SLOT OUTPUT TRIM MODE SLOT1 OUTPUT 1 2 3 4 5 000 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 0 00 0 9 18 11 12 13 14 15 16 LI LI I Li LI 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 51072 OUTPUT SLOT OUTPUT TRIM 6 NV 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 59 32 1 2 3 4 5 6 0000000 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 9 18 11 12 13 14 15 LI LI I 3 Move the cursor to the desired knob in the screen and use the dial or the DEC INC keys to adjust the value If you move the cursor to the RESET ALL button in the screen and press the ENTER key all knobs in that screen will be reset to O dB the factory set default value When you have finished making adjust ments move the cursor to the EXIT button and press the ENTER key The console will start up in normal operating mode Alternatively you can continue by selecting a different menu instead of using the EXIT but
232. P screen USER DEFINED KEYS button Initial Data R ADMIN STORAGE D PREFERENCE USER DEFINED USER DEFINED Kes KEYS VERDER USER LEVEL es CUSTOM ERDER USER LEVEL Using scene memories 2 Move the cursor to the USER DEFINED 5 When you ve finished making settings KEYS button and press the ENTER key to move the cursor to the OK button and press access the USER DEFINED KEYS popup the ENTER key to close the popup win window dow The USER DEFINED KEYS popup window lets you If desired assign scene recall functions to other user assign functions to user defined keys 1 12 defined keys in the same way 6 Press the user defined key to which you CHANGE i i SE CHANGE y assigned a recall function The corresponding scene will be recalled MUTE MASTER MUTE GROUP 2 TRP TEMPO CURRENT PAGE User defined keys popup buttons 3 Move the cursor to the popup button for the user defined key to which you want to assign a function and press the ENTER key The USER DEFINED KEY SETUP popup window will appear USER DEFINED KEY SETUP Select Parameters for USER DEFINED KEY 3 FUNCT ON PRRRMETER 1 RECRLL CRNCEL Scene memory 6 4 Move the cursor to the FUNCTION column and use the dial or the DEC INC keys to select SCENE In this popup window you will proceed as follows depending o
233. PF EQ popup window Input channels provide a high pass filter that is inde pendent of the four band EQ Use the HPF ON OFF button to switch the high pass filter on off and use the HPF FREQ knob to specify the cutoff frequency a gt Output channels do not provide a high pass filter that is inde pendent of the EQ However by turning on the high pass filter button in the popup window you can use the LOW band EQ as a high pass filter For both input channels and output channels you can turn on the low pass filter button and use the HIGH band EQ as a low pass filter Using dynamics Using EQ Using dynamics 7 If you want to initialize EQ settings copy them to another channel use the tool but tons in the ATT HPF EQ popup window For details on how to use these buttons refer to Using the tool buttons p 35 You can also use a dedicated library to save or load EQ set tings at any time gt p 120 You can also take advantage of a wide variety of presets suitable for various instruments or situ ations You can also use the encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the EQ or high pass filter gt p 87 Input channels provide two dynamics processors and output channels provide one dynamics processor 1 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section HOME key The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the display Initia Data ADMIN VHAT RANGE ATK HOLD DECAY D DY
234. PO to determine FREQ HP BOT Be b ddd 4 4 4 d d LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual REV CHORUS One input two output reverb and chorus effects in series Parameter Range Description REV TIME 0 3 99 0 s Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Spread DENSITY 0 10096 Reverb density Reverb and chorused reverb bal REV BAL 0 100 ance 0 all chorused reverb 100 all reverb HPF 4 ls High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 RE Low pass filter cutoff frequency THRU FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed AM DEPTH 0 100 Amplitude modulation depth PM DEPTH 0 100 Pitch modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off NOTE 4 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ s FPR Bh 145 4 d d REV FLANGE One input two output reverb and flanger effects in parallel Parameter Range Description REV TIME 0 3 99 05 Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Spread DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density Reverb and flange balance 0 REWIFEG oe all reverb 100 all flange THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pa
235. PREFADER POST ON E PARS STEREO T STEREO INSERT IN LR MONO C PREEQ EQOUT DYNAOUT PREFADER POST ON SLOT1 SLOT2 sora x 5 PRE FADER PFL POST ON AFL POST 77 CUEL METER METER METER Rack our PRE FADER PFL POST ON AFL POST PAN R aH QN gt ON CUER GR METER BACS STEREO OUT l A LYB R 22222 2 AMO 2 222222 2 2 22222 2 2 1 INSERT TOME INSERT INSERT LRMONO C to oureurearce 1 HHH ATT COMPAND V1 jud 1 9 EQ EXPAND To MONITOR SELECT 1 ge ng ag mendi cdd aue cda erdt due fas eee POST ON To RECORDER IN PATCH racks out STIN 1L 4R BAL m POSTPONE 1 POSTE MA INSERT OUY M PRE FADER INSERT POST ON A L B R PRE EQ EQOUT DYNAIOUT DYNA2OUT PRE FADER POST ON rackaout 1 METER METER METER METER METER METER LR TO MONO TO ST MODE si STR MONO POSTEO 160 ToSTEREDOUTLAGAA I A LyB R METER GR METER LEVEL n l CUE ON zo n mo air METER m GATE TOMP 0 i H 1 BTE 288 OST OME gt E EM STEREO OUT LC roumono o Racks OUT 6 Her ATTI EQ LAND GOMPAND
236. PREFERENCE popup window gt p 194 you can access the popup window by pressing the SELECTED CHANNEL section encoder that corresponds to EQ or dynamics 1 2 RACK screen In the DISPLAY ACCESS section press the RACK 1 4 or RACK 5 8 key Initial Data 000 ADMIN Mix 3 jr Reverb Hall MixiO 3 REVERB HALL MIXI p Reverb Room 12 REVERB ROOM Reverb Plate REVERB PLATE 2 Mono Delay R_MIxi6 2 DELAY _5 4 LS 2 Select the channel EQ dynamics or rack GEQ effect whose settings you want to recall The method of selecting a channel rack will depend on the type of popup window or screen that is currently displayed ATT HPF EQ popup window 1 DYNAMICS 1 2 popup window Press a SEL key on the panel or move the cursor to the selected channel in the constant display area of the screen and use the dial or the DEC INC keys Selected channel Initial Data ch 1 000 RI ADMIN 36 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual RACK screen In the DISPLAY ACCESS section repeatedly press the RACK 1 4 or RACK 5 8 key If you want to change the assignment 31BandGEQ Flex15GEQ or effect to each rack simultaneously press the RACK 1 4 key and RACK 5 8 to access the VIRTUAL RACK screen gt p 158 3 Move the cursor to the LIB button in the toolbar and press the ENTER key to access the popup window of the corre sponding library Initial
237. Queensbridge Street Southbank Victoria 3006 Australia Tel 3 9693 5111 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation Asia Pacific Sales amp Marketing Group Nakazawa cho 10 1 Naka ku Hamamatsu Japan 430 8650 Tel 8 1 53 460 2303 HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation Pro Audio Division Nakazawa cho 10 1 Naka ku Hamamatsu Japan 430 8650 Tel 81 53 460 2441 YAMAHA Yamaha Pro Audio global web site http www yamahaproaudio com Yamaha Manual Library http www yamaha co jp manual C S G Pro Audio Division 2006 2011 Yamaha Corporation 110POTO JO Printed in Japan WH39070
238. R mode this key is an on off switch for the signal that is sent from that channel to the currently selected MIX bus or from a MIX channel to the MATRIX bus 5 Fader Encoder This adjusts the signal level or monitor level of the input channel or output channel In SENDS ON FADER mode this adjusts the send level from that channel to the cur rently selected MIX bus or from a MIX channel to the MATRIX bus LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Parts and their function 17 Top panel STEREO MASTER section In this section you can operate the main parameters of the STEREO channel 1 w CD SEL key This key selects the STEREO channel as the target of operations The L channel and R channel will be alter nately selected as the target of operations each time you press the SEL key 2 CUE key This key cue monitors the STEREO channel When cue is on the LED will be lit 3 ON key This switches the STEREO channel on off When on the key LED will light In SENDS ON FADER mode you can use this as an on off switch for MIX MATRIX channels or as an on off switch for the signal sent from the STEREO channel to the MATRIX buses depending on the LAYER 2 Fader This adjusts the output level of the STEREO channel In SENDS ON FADER mode this adjusts the level of the MIX MATRIX channels or the send level from the STE REO channel to the MATRI
239. RE POST MIX5 SEND TIAA TIBI INPUT to Mix9 16 MIX12 SEND O19E 01 5 MIX6 SEND 1182 1189 LEVEL MIX13 SEND OlFE 0245 MIX7 SEND TIBA 11 1 14 SEND 025 0245 8 SEND 1102 1109 MIX15 SEND 02BE 0305 TIEA TIF MIX16 SEND 031E 0365 HIGH TYPE TIF2 11F9 MATRIX1 SEND O4FE 0513 INPUTS7 64 HPF FREQ TIFA 1201 MATRIX2 SEND 0514 0529 1 2 1202 1209 MATRIX3 SEND 052A 053 INPUT57 64 to MIX3 4 120A 1211 MIX1 16 STEREO MATRIX4 SEND 0540 0555 MIX1 8 PAN MIX5 6 1212 1219 LR to MATRIX LEVEL MATRIX5 SEND 0556 056B MIX7 8 121A 1221 MATRIX6 SEND 056C 0581 INPUT57 64 to an m ve MATRIX7 SEND 0582 0597 STEREO MATRIX8 SEND 0598 05AD 52 123 1241 ON INPUT 05B6 05FD res MIX MATRIX STEREO IR 0616 0633 MONG ON 1242 1249 MIX9 SEND 0634 067B NE a MIXTO SEND 0694 060 KNEE WIDTH 125A 1269 MIX11 SEND O6FA 073 CAN INPUT to Mix9 16 MIX12 SEND 0754 0798 INPUT49_64 HIGH ONLY FULL 127A 1289 d MIUATSISEHD Lam DYNAMICS2 FILTER FREQ 128A 1299 MIX14 SEND 0814 085B er TET MIX15 SEND 0874 08 ION BASE MIX16 SEND 0804 091 DUE MATRIX1 SEND 4 OACO TON CAIN MATRIX2 SEND OACA OADF IOWMIPG META MATRIX3 SEND OAEO OAFS ERES ETT MIX1 16 STEREO MATRIX4 SEND OAF6 OBOB LOW MID GAIN 15F8 1675 LR to MATRIX ON MATRIX5 SEND OBOC 0B21 EQ INPUT MIX HIGH MID Q 1676 16F3 MATRIX6 SEND 0B22 0837 MATRIX STEREO LR THIGH MID FREG a MATRI
240. RE button and press ing the ENTER key Text input box SCENE STORE COPY PASTE CLEAR INS DEL 800 80 95 4 DO co al S pp 2 e CC S 4 When you ve entered the name move the cursor to the STORE button or the ENTER button and press the ENTER key The name you entered will be applied SHIFT LOCK SPACE CANCEL A yellow vertical line called the text cursor is shown to indicate the current location in the box that displays the characters that have been input Use the on screen keyboard to enter text Move the cursor the red frame to the desired charac The basic procedure is the same in the windows that let you assign names to channels or other types of library data If you re entering a channel name the name will be updated immediately without your having to use the ENTER button ter in the keyboard window and press the ENTER key the character will be entered in the text input box and the text cursor yellow vertical line in the box will move to the right 3 Enter the subsequent characters in the same way While entering characters you can use the following buttons in the keyboard window COPY button Copies the entire text string from the text box into buffer memory PASTE button Inserts the text string copied using the COPY button at the location of the text cursor CLEAR button Erases all characters that
241. REO bus and MONO bus You can specify this mode indi vidually for each MIX channel The setting will alter nate between the two modes each time you press the button The currently selected mode is shown by the position of the indicator the green symbol located immedi ately above the button LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Sending signals from MIX channels to the STEREO MONO bus 6 3 ST button MONO button When the MODE button is set to ST MONO mode these buttons act as individual on off switches for the signal sent from that MIX channel to the STEREO bus and MONO bus 5 TO ST PAN TO ST BALANCE knob For monaural MIX channels this acts as the PAN knob that adjusts the left right panning of the signal sent to the STEREO bus For stereo MIX channels this acts as the BALANCE knob that adjusts the volume of the left and right sig nals sent to the STEREO bus Move the cursor to the knob and use the dial or the DEC INC keys to adjust the setting For channels whose MODE button is set to LCR mode the following button and knob are shown instead of the ST button MONO button 6 LCR button This button is an on off switch for all signals sent from that MIX channel to the STEREO bus and MONO bus If you turn off the button no signals will be sent from that output channel to the STEREO bus or MONO bus 7 CSR knob This knob adjusts the proportion between the signal level sent from that MIX ch
242. RT INSERT H 3 camem PRE POST ONJAFL POST PAN L ON CUEL me un POSTON IORECORDERINPATOR RACK JM CMS ERO 1 X PRE FADER PFL POST ON AFL POST PAN R am Sion CUER PREEQ POSTEQM ai INSERT OUT PRE FADER INSERT OUT M POST ON PATCH METER RACKIN METER RACK OUT SERT OUT Gut PRE POST EQIMIXT3 16 OUT aE 3 Loo on mRLO ovo rte om To Por Toe EE ea l CUE ON gt X CH INSERT IN 1 32 SUCH Ree Wi X S 088g PRE FADER PFL POST sp m fiL MERE 3 dq uu U KEYIN CUE KEYIN 1 32164 gt KEYINCUE H Hort Wu i METER RACK IN A METER RACKOUTA MIX INSERT IN 1 16 KEYIN ST IN1L 4R 2 4 SELECT 9 a a a R i METER RACK IN METERJRACKOUTB o EMENERTI MIX QU rakin 10 Flex15GEQ 72 LA packs our STEREO INSERT IN LR MONO C gt cesso sear EFFECT CUE S 1467 S rH 2 EFFECT CUE RACK5 80UTLR gt SELECT 5 7 H H 0 Peu gr EE Vi moe L1 4 nack our s RECORDER IN L R RECORDER CUE ex I
243. S there is always an indication of the remaining number of bands maxi mum 15 that can be controlled for the current Flex15GEQ GEQ ON OFF button Switches the currently selected GEQ on off 5 FLAT button This returns all bands of the currently selected GEQ to 0 dB Use the RACK 1 4 key for RACK 1 4 screens or the RACK 5 8 key for RACK 5 8 screens to select either GEQ unit A or B make the correct input source and out put destination settings and then turn on the Flex15GEQ 4 To adjust the boost cut of each band move the cursor to the desired fader and operate the dial or the DEC INC keys For each of a Flex 15GEQ s two units A and a maximum of fifteen bands can be controlled The remaining number of bands that can be controlled is shown at the right of AVAILABLE BANDS in the FADER ASSIGN field If you have used all fifteen bands you will have to return one of the used bands i e a band for which a fader was raised or lowered to the flat position before you can operate any other band Graphic EQ operations Remaining number of bands AVAILABLE BANDS 5 If you want to use the top panel faders to adjust the boost cut of each band proceed as follows Move the cursor to the button in the FADER ASSIGN field and press the ENTER key For details on how operation and the buttons differ between models refer to step 5 of Using the 31 Band GEQ
244. S in the PREFERENCE popup window gt p 194 you can also access this popup window by pressing the SELECTED CHANNEL section PAN encoder 4 In the STEREO MASTER section of the top panel make sure that the STEREO channel ON key is on and raise the STEREO chan nel fader to 0 dB 5 Make sure that the ST button for each chan nel in the window is on white characters on a pink background The ST button is an on off switch for the signal sent from each channel to the STEREO bus This is the same function as the ST button in the SELECTED CH VIEW screen 6 To adjust the pan INPUT channel or bal ance ST IN channel of the signal sent from the input channel to the STEREO bus move the cursor to the PAN BAL knob of the desired channel in the window and operate the dial or the DEC INC keys 7 In the channel module section or the ST IN section make sure that the ON key of the channel you want to operate is turned on 8 Raise the fader encoder of each channel to obtain an appropriate volume 9 it you want to operate a channel that is not currently shown in the popup window use the SEL key to select that channel and then make settings for it For example if INPUT channels 1 8 are shown in the popup window pressing the INPUT channel 9 SEL key will change the popup window to INPUT channels 9 16 If you press a SEL key of the ST IN section the L R channels of ST IN channels 1 4 will be dis played together
245. S9 s word clock with an external device p 46 Conventions in this manual In this manual switch type controllers on the panel are called keys Of the control knobs on the panel those that turn from a minimum value to a maximum value are called controls while those that turn endlessly are called encoders Whenever there is a difference between the LS9 16 model and the LS9 32 model specifications that apply only to the LS9 32 model are enclosed in curly brackets e g INPUT jacks 1 16 1 32 Controllers located on the panel are enclosed in square brackets e g CUE key in order to distinguish them from the virtual buttons and knobs displayed in the screen For some controllers the name of the section is given before the e g LAYER MASTER key About the firmware version You can view the firmware version number in the MISC SETUP screen gt p 206 You can also download the most recent firmware version from the website http www yamahaproaudio com LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Chapter 2 Parts and their function This chapter explains the LS9 s parts and their functions Top panel The LS9 s top panel is organized into the following sections 188 16 MIX MATRIX SELECT section 20 DISPLAY ACCESS section p 19 LAYER section p 19 Display p 20 E Stereo meter Cue section p 20 SELECTED CHANNEL section p 21
246. SETUP field and press the ENTER key The MIX BUS SETUP popup window will appear TYPE PRE FADER SEND POINT j JED MEN NEN NEEN JEN c D SIGNAL TYPE Signal processing method This selects whether two adjacent odd numbered even numbered MIX buses will be used as stereo channels whose main parameters are linked STE REO or as two monaural channels MONO x 2 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Other functions di 213 Basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses 2 BUS TYPE PRE FADER SEND POINT For two adjacent odd numbered even numbered buses this selects the position from which the signal will be sent from the input channel You can also switch the MIX bus type VARI or FIXED here 3 PAN LINK This specifies whether the panning at which the signal is sent from an input channel to the stereo bus will be linked with the TO ST PAN setting 3 Use the buttons in the SIGNAL TYPE field to specify for each two adjacent odd num bered even numbered MIX buses whether they will function as STEREO main param eters linked for the two MIX channels or MONO x 2 used as two monaural chan nels 4 Use the buttons of the BUS TYPE SEND POINT field to select the position from which the signal of the input channel will be sent In this field you can switch the MIX bus type VARI or FIXED The following items can be selected for each
247. Settir Test mode setting tase 02 COMMENT STORE RECALL UNDO D Scene list This list shows the scenes that are stored in scene memory The row highlighted in blue indicates that this scene number is selected for operations A read only scene is indicated by the R symbol and a write protected scene is indicated by the protect lock sym bol 2 STORE button This stores the current mix settings into the location currently selected in the scene list 3 STORE UNDO button This button cancels Undo or re executes Redo the most recently performed scene Store operation This button is available from immediately after you over write save until the next time you store 130 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual 3 Make sure that the cursor is located some where other than the constant display area and use the dial or the DEC INC keys to select the store destination scene number Note that the scene number channel number or ST IN chan nel input level will change if you operate the dial or the DEC INC keys when the cursor is located in the constant display area 4 Move the cursor to the STORE button and press the ENTER key The SCENE STORE popup window will appear allowing you to assign a title to the scene SCENE STORE YE TITLE 001 SCENE 001 COPY PASTE CLEAR INS DEL BS WN E S 57 95 ppp a e fe Ee sd ed 3 ES
248. T stereo phone jack is unbalanced Tip LEFT Ring RIGHT Sleeve GND 3 There are switches inside the body to preset the maximum output level 4 The position of the level control is 10dB lowered from Max n these specifications 0 dBu 0 775 Vrms All output DA converters are 24 bit 128 times oversampling J Digital Input Characteristics Terminal Format Data Length Level Connector 2TR IN DIGITAL Coaxial IEC 60958 24 bit 0 5 Vpp 75 RCA Pin Jack Digital Output Characteristics Terminal Format Data Length Level Connector 2TR OUT DIGITAL Coaxial 24 bit 0 5 Vpp 75 Q RCA Pin Jack onsumer Use Appendices LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual J 273 Input output characteristics 274 Slot Characteristics The rear panel provides one slot LS9 16 or two slots LS9 32 in which separately sold mini YGDAI cards can be installed The following types of card can be used The number of available cards Card Name Function Input Output LS9 16 LS9 32 MY8 AD24 Analog In 8In 1 2 MY8 AD96 Analog In 8In 1 2 MY8 ADDA96 Analog In Out 8In 80ut 1 2 MY8 AE AES EBU 8In 80ut 1 2 MY8 AE96 AES EBU 8In 80ut 1 2 MY8 AE96S AES EBU 8In 80ut 1 2 MY8 AEB AES EBU 8In 80ut 1 2 MY8 AT ADAT 8In 8 1 2 MY8 DA96 Analog Out 80 1 2 MY8 TD TASCAM 8In 80ut 1 2 4 Analog Out 4 1 2 4 Analog In Aln 1 2 M
249. TIO 0 1 2 4 Low frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Reverb diffusion left right reverb spread DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density Balance of early reflections and E R BAL 0 100 reverb 0 all reverb 100 all early reflections THRU 21 2 Hz HPF 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz LPF THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency E M BAND DYNA Two input two output 3 band dynamics processor with individual solo and gain reduction metering for each band Parameter Range Description LOW GAIN 96 0 to 412 0 dB Low band level MID GAIN 96 0 to 412 0 dB Mid band level GAIN 96 0 to 12 0 dB High band level For positive values the thresh old of the high band is low ered and the threshold of the will occur When set to 0 all three bands are affected the same L M XOVR 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz Low mid crossover frequency M H XOVR 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz Mid high crossover frequency SLOPE 6 dB 12 dB Filter slope CEILING 6 0 dB to 0 0 dB Orr 5 the maximum output CMP THRE 24 0 dB to 0 0 dB Compressor threshold CMP RAT 1 1 to 20 1 Compressor ratio ATK 0 120 ms Compressor attack CMP REL 1 Compressor release time CMP KNEE 0 5 Compressor knee CMP BYP OFF ON Compressor bypass LOOKUP 0 0 100 0 ms Lookup delay EXP THRE 54 0 dB to 24 0
250. TIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference N WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock short circuiting damages fire or other hazards These precautions include but are not limited to Power supply Power cord e 0 If W Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord place heavy voltage is printed on the name plate of the device e Use only the included power cord the following nly use the voltage specified as correct for the device The required you intend to use the device in an area other than in the one you purchased the included power cord may not be compatible Please check Do not expose the device to rain use it near water or in damp or wet conditions or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands ih your Yamaha dealer objects on it or place it in a position where anyone could walk on trip over or roll anything over it Be sure to connect to an appropriate outlet with a protective grounding If you notice any abnormality connection Improper grounding can result in electrical shock e D modify them in any way The device contains
251. TRIX channels the USB memory recorder output signal INPUT channel 15 16 31 32 and the 2TR IN DIGITAL jack input signal 2TR IN DIGITAL jack input signal INPUT channels 15 16 31 32 input signal The Cue function lets you check an individual selected channel by temporarily sending it from the output jacks assigned to the MONITOR OUT channel or from the PHONES OUT jack When you press the top panel CUE key the cue signal of the corresponding channel is sent as the monitor output from the selected output port NOTE The cue signal is sent to the same output destination as the monitor signal Be aware that for this reason the cue signal will no longer be sent to the connected monitor speakers if you turn off the Monitor output However the cue signal will always be sent to the PHONES OUT jack The following diagram shows the monitor cue signal flow Ti PHONES OUT LR gt oa gt gt Rh PHONES CUE LR Sleeve Monitor Cue IE CUEL D pps MEE HONES LEVEL 1 METER CUER CUER A EMILE CUE LOGIC PHONES RN 9 o1 e 2 PHONES Ls To PHONES our gt 1 f 5 41 INPUT 15 16 31 32 i 4 i 3 PHONES R To PHONES OUT PLAYBACK OUT S
252. TUPOS L9R LS9 World Tour CRERTE LORD USER KEY FORMAT TIME STAMP f File list LOAD button 3 Move the cursor to the file list and use the dial on the panel to select the file you want to load The highlighted line in the file list indicates the file that is selected for operations 4 When you move the cursor to the LOAD button and press the ENTER key a dialog box will ask you to confirm the operation FILE LORD Load seturO01 L9R1 CANCEL 5 Move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key loading will begin When the file has finished being loaded the popup window showing the progress indication and the type of data will close Even if you cancel while the settings file is still being loaded the data up to that point will have been loaded The type of file that can be loaded will depend on the User Level setting at the time you load the file Using USB memory to save load data 8 MAKE DIR button Editing the files saved on USB mem This button creates a new directory gt p 203 ory VOLUME NAME This indicates the volume name of the USB memory Here s how you can perform editing operations such as If the USB memory is write protected a protect sym sorting the files and directories on USB memory editing bol is shown in the VOLUME NAME field the file names or comments copying or pasting 6 FREE SIZE This indicates the amount of fr
253. UT 1 16 lt LS9 32 gt Rs 150Q GAIN min Master fader nominal One channel fader nom 84 79 inal Rs 150Q GAINs min All Inputs lt LS9 16 gt OMNI OUT 1 8 lt LS9 16 gt 600 Q Master fader nominal All channel faders nomi 67 dBu nal Rs 150Q GAINs min All Inputs lt 159 32 gt OMNI OUT 1 16 lt LS9 32 gt 600 Master fader nominal All channel faders nomi 64 nal OMNI OUT 1 8 lt LS9 16 gt OMNI OUT 1 16 159 32 600 Residual output noise Stereo Master off 86 PHONES OUT 80 Residual output noise Phones level control min 86 Hum amp Noise are measured with a 6dB octave filter 9 12 7kHz equivalent to a 20kHz filter with infinite dB octave attenuation Dynamic Range Fs 44 1kHz or 48kHz Input Output RL Conditions Min Typ Max Unit INPUT 1 16 lt LS9 16 gt OMNI OUT 1 8 lt LS9 16 gt o INPUT 1 32 lt 159 32 gt OMNI OUT T2315 59 325 600 9 SAI min 108 P 8 OMNI OUT 1 8 lt LS9 16 gt OMNI OUT 1 16 159 325 609441 DA Converter nm Dynamic range is measured with a 6dB octave filter 12 7kHz equivalent to a 20kHz filter with infinite dB octave attenuation LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual 275 Electrical characteristics Crosstalke 1kHz From To Conditions Min Typ Max Unit INPUT n INPUT n 1 or n1 CH 1 16 1 32 Adjacent inputs GAIN min 80 OMNI OUT n OMNI OUT n 1 or n1 OMNI OUT 1
254. UT TO send the talkback signal You may select TALKBACK field and press the ENTER more than one key The buttons correspond to the following buses The INPUT PORT SELECT popup window will appear MIX 1 16 buttons MIX buses 1 16 MATRIX 1 8 buttons MATRIX buses 1 8 INPUT PORT SELECT eae STEREO bus L R MONO bus CTALKBACK IN IN 1 e f you want to clear all selections move the cursor to the CLEAR ALL button and press the ENTER key 7 To enable talkback move the cursor to the TALKBACK ON button and press the CLOSE ENTER key to turn it on The TALKBACK ON button will alternate between on LS9 32 and off each time you press the ENTER key latched operation 3 Of the IN1 16 1 32 buttons move the cur While talkback is on the signal from the INPUT jack sor to the port you want to use for talkback selected as the TALKBACK jack will be output to the and press the ENTER key To cancel the send destination bus selection press the ENTER key once again on the selected port You can select only one port at a time You can also assign the talkback on off function to a user defined key In this case you can choose either latched oper 3 ation or unlatched operation i e talkback will be On only 4 When you ve selected the port move the while you hold down the key
255. VEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL A A A A rf D Channel number Channel name This indicates the number and name of the send source channel 2 PRE button This switches the position from which the signal is sent from the send source channel to the currently selected MIX bus If this button is on the pre EQ or pre fader signal will be sent if this button is off the signal from immediately after the channel on off will be sent 8 TO MIX ON OFF button This is an on off switch for the signal that is sent from the send source channel to the currently selected MIX bus 4 TO MIX LEVEL knob This adjusts the level of the signal that is sent from the send source channel to the currently selected MIX bus 5 ALL PRE button This button selects PRE as the position from which the signals are sent from all input channels to the VARI type MIX bus 6 ALL POST button This button selects POST as the position from which the signals are sent from all input channels to the VARI type MIX bus If the send destination MIX bus is set to stereo the screen will change as follows 7 TO MIX PAN TO MIX BALANCE knob This knob adjusts the pan or balance for a ST IN channel of the signal that is sent from the INPUT channel to the two MIX buses a gt If PRE is selected as the send position to the MIX bus then you will also be able to select either PRE EQ immediately before the attenuator
256. When 1 59 receives Library Exist request command from outside the answer will be sent back with the following Parameter change This packet shows smallest library number range that exists and not read only Top number is requested number or more Example SCENE is stored 5 6 7 10 100 and 101 Request Number 0 Data Valid Top Number 5 End Number 7 Request Number 8 Data Valid Top Number 10 End Number 10 Request Number 11 Data Valid Top Number 100 End Number 101 Request Number 102 Data Invalid Top Number 0 End Number 0 STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0O0001nnnn 1n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 3E Digital mixer MODEL ID 00010010 12 LS9 DATA 00000000 00 OTHER DATA CATEGORY FUNCTION 01001100 L ASCII CODE NAME 01101001 i ASCII CODE 01100010 ASCII CODE 01000101 ASCII CODE 01111000 ASCII CODE 01101001 i ASCII CODE 01110011 s ASCII CODE 01110100 t ASCII CODE MODULE NAME Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Data Status 0 Invalid data 1 Valid Data Request Number High DATA Osssssss nn Onnnnnnn nh Onnnnnnn nl Request Number Low Ottttttt nh Ottttttt nl nh Top Number Hi
257. When this message is received MIDI communication will be initialized e g Running Status will be cleared This message is not subject to echoing STATUS 11111111 FF System reset MIDI Data Format 3 SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE 3 1 MMC MMC STOP gt Reception If the DEVICE NO matches or is 7F receives this message and stops STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01111111 7F Realtime System exclusive Device ID Oddddddd dd Destination 00 7E 7F all call COMMAND 00000110 06 Machine Control Command MCC sub id 00000001 01 Stop MCS EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive MMC PLAY gt Reception If the DEVICE NO matches is 7F receives this message and starts playback STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01111111 7F Realtime System exclusive Device ID Oddddddd dd Destination 00 7E 7F all call COMMAND 00000110 06 Machine Control Command MCC sub id 00000010 02 Play MCS EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive MMC DEFERED PLAY Reception If the DEVICE NO matches or is 7F receives this message and starts playback STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01111111 7F Realtime System exclusive Device ID Oddddddd dd Destination 00 7E 7F all call COMMAND 00000110 06 Machine Control Command MCC sub id 00000011 03 Deferred Play MCS EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive MMC RECORD STROBE Reception If the DEVICE NO matches or is 7F receives this messa
258. When you ve assigned a name to the data move the cursor to the STORE button in the LIBRARY STORE popup window and press the ENTER key A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Store opera tion STORE CONFIRMAT I Oh Store to GEQ LIBRARY 0017 CANCEL 7 To execute the Store operation move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The current settings will be stored in the library num ber you selected in step 4 If you decide to cancel the Store operation move the cursor to the CANCEL but ton instead of the OK button and press the ENTER key Even after you ve stored the settings you can edit the title of the data by moving the cursor to the data name in the list and pressing the ENTER key to access the LIBRARY TITLE EDIT popup window However you can t rename read only data indicated by the R symbol Please be aware that if you store to a location that already contains data the existing data will be overwritten However you can t overwrite read only data e Don t turn off the power while the Store operation is progress The data will not be stored correctly if you do so LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Basic operations on the LS9 fem 37 Using the tool buttons 38 Erasing data from a library 1 Access a popup window or screen that con tains tool buttons 2 Move the cursor to the LIB button in the toolbar and press the ENTER key to access
259. X MATRIX SELECT section to select the send destination bus and use the SELECTED CHAN NEL section SELECTED SEND encoder Alternatively move the cursor to the TO MIX LEVEL TO MATRIX LEVEL knob in the screen and operate the dial or the DEC INC keys If desired you can use the TO MIX ON OFF buttons to switch the signal sent to each bus on off if the MIX bus is the FIXED type At the left side of these buttons is shown the position from which the signal is sent from the current channel For details on changing the send position p 213 gt If you want to make send level settings for eight channels at a time use the SEND popup button in the screen to access the popup window gt p 64 If you ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING KNOBS the PREFERENCE popup window gt p 194 you can also access the above popup window by pressing the SELECTED CHANNEL section SELECTED SEND encoder You can access the SEND popup window by moving the cursor to the To MIX SEND knob of a VARI type and pressing the ENTER key For MIX buses that are set to STEREO the left knob indicates the PAN of the MIX SEND and the right knob indicates the SEND LEVEL Adjusting the send level from the MIX channels to a specific MATRIX bus To adjust the send level from the MIX channels to a spe cific MATRIX bus access the send destination MATRIX channel in the SELECTED CH VIEW screen D SEHD Fro D SEND
260. X bus When you switch from normal mode to SENDS ON FADER mode the ON keys will light or go dark according to the on off status of the signals being sent to the currently selected MATRIX bus e SEL keys The SEL key of the selected channel will blink and the SEL keys of channels that are not selected will light However the SEL keys of unassigned modules will go dark Use the channel module faders to adjust the send levels from the channels to the MATRIX bus you selected in step 3 As necessary switch fader layers to access the layer that contains the desired send source channel 6 To switch the on off status of a signal sent to the MATRIX bus press the top panel ON key If the send destination MATRIX bus is set to stereo on off operations will be linked for the signal sent to the two adjacent odd numbered even numbered MATRIX buses While SENDS ON FADER mode is active with a MATRIX bus as the send destination the faders encoders and ON keys of input channels will be disabled If you want to operate an input channel you must first disable the above SENDS ON FADER mode 7 Repeat steps 3 6 to adjust the send level and switch the on off status for other MATRIX buses in the same way 8 When you ve finished setting the MATRIX send levels press the key that is currently blinking in the MIX MATRIX SELECT sec tion The LS9 will return to normal mode You can assign the SENDS ON FADER function
261. X buses depending on the LAYER e If you turn on MONITOR ON MASTER FADER in the USER DEFINED KEY SETUP screen the ON key and fader will respec tively turn MONITOR on off and control its level LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual USER DEFINED KEYS sectione o o o oo oo Here you can execute the functions that are programmed for the user defined keys USER DEFINED KEYS eC eCo sC 0 0 0 0 0 0 Pen TE User defined keys 1 12 These keys execute the functions that have been pro grammed for each key e g switching scenes turning talkback or the internal oscillator on off Top panel El DISPLAY ACCESS section 00000000000000000000000000000000000000000090 DISPLAY ACCESS o F IL SCENE MONITOR MEMORY 9 2 Feo SETUP CHANNEL JOB 8 5 es 6 RECORDER METER 0 0 CL 9 14 pack 28 D SCENE MEMORY key This key accesses a screen where you can store recall and edit scene memories and make settings for the Focus function and Fade Time function 2 MONITOR key This key accesses a screen where you can make settings for cue monitor oscillator and talkback 3 SETUP key This key accesses a screen where you can set and verify the user level and make basic system settings 2 CHANNEL JOB key This key accesses a screen where you can make settings for Channel Link Mute Group and Recall Safe functions and copy or move settings between channels 5 RECORDER
262. X7 SEND 0838 OB4D HIGH MID GAIN 1772 17 MATRIX8 SEND OB4E 0863 TA o 4 to STEREO uix To ST 0864 6 HIGH FREQ 186E 18EB PHASE INPUT 6 OBB3 GAIN INSERT ON m o HPF ON 19 8 1A65 MIX MATRIX STEREO IR 0 2 0 49 MIX9 SEND OCAA 0 91 LPR ON TAGS TAE MIX10 SEND OCFI on TRAB MIX11 SEND 0DOA 0051 1B44 INPUT to Mix9 16 MIX12 SEND OD6A 0081 INPUT DYNAMICs1 THRESHOLD PRE POST MIX13 SEND ODCA 11 RANGE SEND OE2A OE71 HOLD Le MIXTS SENG GERI DECAY RELEASE 1CC4 1 0 MIX16 SEND OFFA OF31 TEE MIX1 SEND 001 ATTACK Lo RU c 3 neonne c MIX3 SEND TODA 10Fi REO LR DYNAMICSI 25 INPUT57 64 to MIX4 SEND 10E2 10E9 Mix1 8 LEVEL 5 SEND 10F1 GAIN 1 2017 TO OE KNEE WIDTH 2018 2095 Nr SEN TEN EET PAN BALANCE INPUT 2096 20DD MIX8 SEND 1102 1109 wee 20F6 2120 MIX1 SEND 112 _ 1131 0 I nus Aum MIX2 SEND 1132 1139 MIX3 SEND 1141 MINIS 2216 225D INPUT57 64 to MIX4 SEND 1142 1149 MATRIX1 2 2336 234B Mix1 8 ON SEND ETT MIX1 16 STEREO MATRIX3 4 234 2361 MIX6 SEND 1152 1159 ER MATRIXS 6 2362 2377 MIX7 SEND TI5A 1161 MATRIX 2378 238D MIX8 SEND 1162 1169 m ss to STEREO MIx TO ST 238E 2395 BALANCE MIX MATRIX STEREO IR 2396 2383 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual
263. Y 0 100 Reverb density NOTEL Used in conjunction with TEMPO SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off to determine left channel DELAY L 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO NOTEL Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY L NOTER i to determine right channel DELAY Used in conjunction with TEMPO R NOTE R 1 to determine right channel DELAY NOTE EB Used in conjunction with TEMPO R to determine FB DLY Used in conjunction with TEMPO NOTE FB 1 2 to determine FB DLY 1 GET BG Rehd B4 4 3 d Maximum value depends on the tempo setting 4 H b JJ FR 447 5 4 da do dao Maximum value depends on the tempo setting DIST DELAY One input two output distortion and delay effects in series Parameter Range Description INDEED CU E DRIVE 0 100 Distortion drive MASTER 0 100 Master volume TONE 10 to 10 Tone control N GATE 0 20 Noise reduction SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off todetemine DELAY MOD NOT Used in conjunction with TEMPO E to determine FREQ DELAY 0 0 2725 0 ms Delay time Feedback gain plus values for 99103990 naalphase feedback ins back HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth Distortion and delay balance 0 DLY BAL 0 100 all distortion 100 all delayed distortion BP RP RAP RP ded ded deo oo Maximum
264. Y ACCESS section press the RECORDER key repeatedly to access the TITLE LIST screen 00 04 54 002 lt 1 YAMAHA REMAINS 00 04 10 D 1 1 buttons These buttons move the track number of the song selected in the list earlier T or later J in the list 2 SONG TITLE FILE NAME EDIT button This button lets you edit the title or file name of the song selected in the list 3 ARTIST EDIT button This button lets you edit the artist name of the song selected in the list TITLE SORT button This button sorts the list in alphabetical order of the title 5 ARTIST SORT button This button sorts the list in alphabetical order of the artist name 6 SAVE LIST button This button saves the list sorting data to USB memory SONG TITLE FILE NAME buttons These buttons switch the items title or file name that are shown in the SONG TITLE FILE NAME field Use the No button and the change direc tory button in the screen to view a list of the contents of the folder that includes the desired file LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual title list move the cursor to the SONG TITLE FILE NAME EDIT button if you want to edit the artist name move the cursor to the ARTIST EDIT button then press the ENTER key A popup window will appear allowing you to edit the text TITLE EDIT 2I p ppp pu e 5 ey 2 58 SHIFT LOCK SPAC
265. Y16 AE AES EBU 16 16Out 1 2 MY16 AT ADAT 16 16Out 1 2 MY16 TD TASCAM 16 16 1 2 MY16 CII CobraNet 16 16Out 1 2 Only Slot 1 has a serial interface LS9 32 Refer to the Yamaha Pro Audio global website for the most recent information on mini Y GDAI cards http www yamahaproaudio com Control I O Characteristics Terminal Format Level Connector IN MIDI DIN Connector 5 OUT MIDI DIN Connector 5P IN TTL 75Q terminated BNC Connector OUT TTL 75Q BNC Connector NETWORK Ethernet 100Base T 100Base T RJ 45 USB USB 1 1 Host USB 1 USB A Connector Female LAMP LS9 32 only OV 12V XLR 4 31 type 2 1 Bus powered hubs are not supported 2 4pin 12V 3pin GND Supported lamp 5W LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Electrical characteristics Electrical characteristics All faders are nominal when measured Output impedance of signal generator 150 ohms Frequency Response Fs 44 1kHz or 48kHz 20Hz 20kHz referenced to the nominal output level 1kHz Input Output RL Conditions Min Typ Max Unit OMNI OUT 1 8 lt LS9 16 gt INPUT 1 16 lt LS9 16 gt OMNI OUT 1 16 lt LS9 32 gt 600 GAIN max 1 5 0 0 0 5 dB INPUT 1 32 lt LS9 32 gt PHONES OUT 80 GAIN max 3 0 0 0 0 5 Gai
266. a MIX channel set to stereo of the signal sent from this channel to the two MATRIX buses gt e If you ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window gt p 194 you can also access the above popup window by pressing the SELECTED CHANNEL section SELECTED SEND encoder e If PRE is selected as the send position to the MATRIX bus then you will also be able to select either PRE EQ immedi ately before the attenuator or PRE FADER immediately before the fader for each two adjacent odd numbered even numbered MATRIX buses gt p 213 e If desired the pan balance setting of the signal sent to a ste reo MATRIX bus can be linked with the TO ST PAN TO ST BAL knob of the SELECTED CH VIEW screen p 213 5 To adjust the send level from each channel to the selected MATRIX bus move the cur sor to a TO MATRIX LEVEL knob in the screen and operate the dial or the DEC INC keys If the send destination MATRIX bus is set to stereo move the cursor to the TO MATRIX PAN TO MATRIX BAL knob and adjust the pan or balance for a STEREO channel or MIX channels set to stereo of the signal sent from each channel to the two MATRIX buses 6 To switch the send position of a signal sent to the MATRIX bus move the cursor to the PRE button in the screen and press the ENTER key If the PRE button is on the pre EQ or pre fader signal will be sent if this button is off the signal from imme di
267. a will be transmitted with the Device Number in Tx CH when PARAMETER CHANGE Tx is on STATUS 11110000 FO ID No 01000011 43 SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n GROUP ID 00111110 3E MODEL ID 00010010 12 DATA 00000000 00 CATEGORY FUNCTION 01001100 c NAME 01101001 o 01100010 1 01010101 01101110 n 01010011 5 01110100 t 01110010 r MODULE NAME Ommmmmmm mm Ommmmmmm mm System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel Digital mixer Ls9 OTHER DATA ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual DATA Onnnnnnn nh Number High Onnnnnnn nl Number Low ch Channel High cl Channel Low EOX 11110111 r7 End of exclusive 4 6 2 Function Name Function Number tx rx ColUnStr Setup 0 tx User Defined Key 0 tx Program Change 0 tx Control Change 0 tx 4 6 3 Module Name Module Name Mixer Setting MIXERSET Outport Setting OUT_PORT Monitor Setting MONITOR_ MIDI Setting MIDI SET Lib Number LIB NUM Program Change Table PRGMCHG Control Change Table CTRLCHG Preference Current PREF CUR Preference Admin PREF ADM Preference Guest PREF GST User Defined Keys Current UDEF CUR User De
268. ack characters on a blue background To turn it back on press the ENTER key once again 8 Use the top panel SEL keys to select another input channel and adjust the send level to the selected MIX bus in the same way 9 Use the keys of the MIX MATRIX SELECT section to select another MIX bus as the send destination and adjust the send level from the input channel in the same way a e If PRE is selected as the send position to the MIX bus then you will also be able to select either PRE EQ immediately before the attenuator or PRE FADER immediately before the fader for each MIX bus gt 213 If desired the pan balance setting of the signal sent to a ste reo MIX bus can be linked with the TO ST PAN TO ST BAL knob of the SELECTED CH VIEW screen gt p 213 e If you want to monitor the signal that is being sent to a specific MIX bus select the master fader layer and press the CUE key for that MIX channel LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual J Sending ihe signal from an input channel to a MIX bus Using a popup window In this method you use the MIX SEND popup window to adjust the send levels from eight channels to a MIX bus 1 Make sure that an output port is assigned to the MIX bus to which you re sending the signal and that a monitor system or exter nal effect processor etc is connected to the corresponding output port 2 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section HOME key The SELECTED CH VIEW scr
269. ack in which a Flex15GEQ is mounted will show information for two GEQ units A and B D GEQ A GEQ B 8 Rack graphic display area When you mount a Flex15GEQ two monaural 31 Band GEQ units A and B are placed in a single rack However only up to fifteen bands can be adjusted for each unit 2 Move the cursor to a rack in which a Flex15GEQ is mounted and press the ENTER key The RACK screen will appear allowing you to edit the parameters of GEQ A or GEQ B To switch the RACK screen repeatedly press the RACK 1 4 keys RACK 1 4 screens or RACK 5 8 key RACK 5 8 screens EXTERNAL HA screens For a rack in which a FlexI5GEQ is mounted the RACK screen is shown separately as xA and xB x is the rack number Initial Data R ADMIN Lie INPUT OUTPUT INS 3 INS CHS 125 250 500 2K 4K 50 16 0k 100 200 400 800 16 315 63 125 160 315 630 125 25 5 10 20 C 9o9 ooo coococoooo 3 9 10111213 141516 RURILRBLE BRNDS FADER ASSIGN 20 20k D EQ graph This indicates the approximate response of the current Flex 15GEQ settings 2 Faders These faders indicate the amount of boost cut for each band of the Flex 1SGEQ The frequency and value for the fader currently selected by the cursor are shown below the fader 3 FADER ASSIGN field Use this field when you want to operate the boost cut amount for each band using the faders At the right side of AVAILABLE BAND
270. ack that inputs a stereo digital audio sig nal in consumer format IEC 60958 The signal input from this jack can be patched to any input channel MIDI IN OUT connectors These connectors are used to transmit and receive MIDI messages to and from external MIDI devices The MIDI IN connector receives messages from an external device and the MIDI OUT connector transmits messages from the 1 59 These are used mainly for recording LS9 param eter operations or scene library changes on an external device or for remotely operating LS9 parameters 9 LAMP connector LS9 32 only This is an XLR 4 31 connector that supplies power to a separately sold gooseneck lamp e g Yamaha LA1L The brightness of the lamp can be adjusted in the screen Rear panel LS9 16 LS9 32 AC IN connector Connect the included power cable to this connector to sup ply power to the unit 1 POWER switch This switch turns the power on off 2 Grounding screw To ensure safe operation be sure to ground the LS9 securely The included power cable has a three conductor plug so if the AC outlet is grounded the LS9 will be grounded appropriately If the AC outlet is not grounded establish a secure ground connection from this screw Cor rectly grounding the unit is an effective way to eliminate hum and interference noise 3 Cooling fan vent This is the vent for the cooling fan inside the console When placing the console be careful no
271. adjust the send levels to the MIX bus This method lets you simultaneously control the send levels and on off switching for the sig nals sent from all input channels to a specific MIX bus Using the SELECTED CHANNEL sec 000 mam tion Here s how to use the SELECTED CHANNEL section SELECTED SEND encoder to adjust the level of the 26 56 0 signals sent from a specific input channel to each MIX SIUE bus HOLD DECAY 5 2 531 30 1 Make sure that an output port is assigned 5 1 73 NNNM to the MIX bus to which you re sending the 09 mu signal and that a monitor system or exter 2 nal effect processor etc is connected to the corresponding output port Refer to p 95 for details on assigning an output port to a MIX bus or to p 42 for details on connecting exter A LETS nal equipment TO MIX field In this field you can switch the on off status and adjust 2 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section the send level of the signal sent from the input channel HOME key to the MIX bus The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the TO MIX LEVEL knob display This adjusts the send level of the signal sent from the input channel to a VARI type MIX bus To adjust the send level in this field move the cursor to the knob and use the dial or the DEC INC keys 3 TO MIX ON OFF button If the send destination MIX bus is a FIXED type this button is displayed instead of the kn
272. afe is a function that excludes only specific parameters channels from Recall opera tions This differs from the Focus settings p 139 made for individual scenes in that Recall Safe settings are common to all scenes 1 Inthe DISPLAY ACCESS section press the CHANNEL JOB key repeatedly to access the RECALL SAFE screen In this screen you can make settings for the Recall Safe function The window contains the following items DISPLAY ACCESS e CHANNEL JOB key 5 ca ETUP c3 c RECORDER METER Initial Data 000 R ADMIN to select TARGET CH and choose Parameters for RECALL SAFE GLOBAL CH1 6 CH3 16 5 1 2 CH17 24 CH25 32 MIX1 8 9 16 1 5 BACK Ml E4 CH 1 ch 1 SAFE PARAMETER Re eR LS9 16 CH 1 Initial Data ch 1 000 R ADMIN RECALL SAFE ss SEL to select TARGET CH se Parameters for RECALL SAFE GLOBAL i CH9 16 Er STIN CH33 40 CH41 48 CH49 56 4 MIX1 8 MIX9 16 BACK pu Mt 0 80 ch 1 SAFE PARAMETER RR i ee LS9 32 140 LS9 16 32 Owners Manual RECALL SAFE field The channels for which Recall Safe is turned on are highlighted in this field If you turn on the SET BY SEL button you can turn on Recall Safe for a channel simply by pressing the SEL key of that channel 2 CLEAR ALL button This clears all Recall Safe settings
273. ain plus values for normal phase feedback FB minus values for reverse phase feedback Left to right channel feedback LORFBG 99 to 49996 gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback Right to left channel feedback ROLFBG 99 to 99 gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio HPF 4 d High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF a 6 0 ENE Low pass filter cutoff frequency SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off Used in conjunction with TEMPO 1 NOTE to determine DELAY L Used in conjunction with TEMPO NOTER 1 to determine DELAY R Used in conjunction with TEMPO NOTEEBE 171 to determine FB DL Used in conjunction with TEMPO NOTE FBR 71 to determine FB D R RTP Bg IJ fed 41 4 d Maximum value depends on the tempo setting Two input two output chorus effect Parameter Range Description FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed AM DEPTH 0 10096 Amplitude modulation depth PM DEPTH 0 100 Pitch modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off Used in conjunction with TEMPO 1 NOTE to determine FREQ LSH F 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH 12 0 to 12 0 Low shelving filter gain EQF 100 Hz 8 00 kHz EQ peaking type frequency EQG 12 0 to 12 0
274. ake a direct output Initial Data ADMIN Y DYNAT THRESH PANGE ATK HOLD SHELF 0 7 F 125 1 00k 4 00k 10 0k D DIRECT popup button 3 Move the cursor to the DIRECT popup but ton in the screen and press the ENTER key The DIRECT OUT popup window will appear In this popup window you can view the name of each chan nel switch the direct output point and adjust the out put level in groups of eight channels DIRECT OUT x HP 1 INS D Channel block diagram This shows the direct output point for the selected channel Input output patching E 2 Channel number This is the channel number 3 Channel name This is the channel name 5 Direct out point select box This selects the point from which the signal will be directly output Move the cursor to this box and use the dial or the DEC INC keys to switch between PRE HPF immediately before the high pass filter PRE EQ immediately before the EQ or PRE FADER immediately before the fader 5 DIRECT ON OFF button This button turns direct output on off To switch this on off move the cursor to this button and use the DEC INC keys or the ENTER key 6 Port select popup button This button selects the output port that will be patched to direct output The currently selected output port is shown 7 DIRECT OUT LEVEL knob This knob adjusts the level of the direct output LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual J 103 Directly
275. aker simulation Ring Mod RING MOD Ring modulator Mod Filter MOD FILTER Modulated filter Distortion DISTORTION Distortion Amp Simulate AMP SIMULATE Guitar amp simulation Dyna Filter DYNA FILTER Dynamically controlled filter Dyna Flange DYNA FLANGE Dynamically controlled flanger Dyna Phaser DYNA PHASER Dynamically controlled phase shifter Rev Chorus REV CHORUS Reverb and chorus in parallel LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual gt REV CHORUS Description Reverb and chorus in series Rev Flange REV FLANGE Reverb and flanger in parallel Rev Flange REV FLANGE Reverb and flanger in series Rev Sympho REV SYMPHO Reverb and symphonic in parallel gt 5 REV2SYMPHO Reverb and symphonic in series gt gt Reverb auto pan in series Delay4Er DELAY ER 2 and early reflections in par DelayEr DELAY GER Delay and early reflections in series Delay Rev DELAY REV Delay and reverb in parallel DelayRev DELAY REV Delay and reverb in series Dist5Delay DIST DELAY Distortion and delay in series Multi Filter MULTI FILTER 3 parallel filter 24 dB octave Freeze FREEZE Simple sampler Stereo Reverb ST REVERB Stereo reverb M Band Dyna M BAND DYNA Multi band dynamics processor M Band Comp M B
276. alize operation move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The EQ dynamics settings of the channel you selected in step 2 or the effect settings of the rack will be ini tialized If you decide to cancel the Initialize opera tion move the cursor to the CANCEL button instead of the OK button and press the ENTER key Copying and pasting settings Here s how you can copy the EQ dynamics settings of the currently selected channel or the GEQ effect settings of the currently selected rack to buffer memory and then paste them to a different channel or rack Copy paste is limited to the following combinations Between EQ of input channels Between EQ of output channels Between dynamics for which the same type GATE DUCKING COMPRESSOR EXPANDER COM PANDER H COMPANDER S DE ESSER is selected Between effects mounted in a rack 1 Access a popup window or screen that con tains tool buttons 2 Select the channel EQ dynamics or rack GEQ effect whose settings you want to copy 3 Move the cursor to the COPY button and press the ENTER key The current settings will be held in buffer memory 4 Select the paste destination channel or rack 5 Move the cursor to the PASTE button and press the ENTER key The settings of the channel EQ dynamics or the rack GEQ effect you selected in step 2 will be pasted Using the tool buttons Comparing two sets of settings By using the compare butto
277. all with audio file playback SAVE LIST button E When you move the cursor to this button and press the Two byte code or Latin 1 ISO 8859 1 code characters will ENTER key the title list order and playback selec tions will be saved in USB memory You should form this operation if you want the title list to be e 1 l buttons preserved even after you disconnect the USB memory When you move the cursor to these buttons and press or turn off the power the ENTER key the track number of the file cur Since these settings are stored for each folder a confir rently selected in the title list will be moved upward or mation dialog box will ask you whether you want to downward by one save them if you move to a different folder Linking scene recall with audio file playback You can make link settings so that a specific audio file frfom USB memory is played back when you recall a certain scene This is a convenient way to automatically play back a sound effect or background music at a certain point in the performance To link scene recall with audio file playback proceed as follows 1 Connect the USB memory containing the 6 LINK audio file to the USB connector This indicates whether linking from the scene to an audio file is enabled The PLAY indicator is shown if 2 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section press the linking is enabled If the PLAY indicator is off even SCENE MEMORY key repeatedly to though a file is selected
278. ange DATA 01100010 62 NRPNLSB Ovvvvvvw vv Parameter number LSB STATUS 011 Bn Control change DATA 01100011 63 NRPN MSB Ovvvvvvv vv Parameter number MSB STATUS O11nnnn Bn Control change DATA 00000110 06 Data entry MSB Ovvvvvvv vv Parameter data MSB STATUS 011 Bn Control change DATA 00100110 26 Data entry LSB Ovvvvvvv vv Parameter data LSB The STATUS byte of the second and subsequent messages need not be added during transmission Reception must occur correctly whether or not the status byte is omitted 1 4 PROGRAM CHANGE Cn Reception If PROGRAM CHANGE ECHO is ON bank select messages will also be echoed from MIDI OUT If SINGLE CH is selected these messages are received if PROGRAM CHANGE Rx is ON and the Rx CH matches However if OMNI is ON these messages are received regardless of the channel When these messages are received scene memory and effect library are recalled according to the settings of the PROGRAM CHANGE EVENT LIST Transmission If PROGRAM CHANGE Tx is ON these messages are transmitted according to the PROGRAM CHANGE Table settings when scene memory and effect library are recalled If SINGLE CH is selected these messages are transmitted on the Tx CH channel If the recalled scene memory and effect library has been assigned to more than one PROGRAM NUMBER the lowest numbered PROGRAM NUMBER for each MIDI channel will be transmitted PROGRAM CHANGE messages are not used
279. annel to the STEREO L R bus and the level sent to the MONO C bus over a range of 0 100 To adjust the setting move the cur sor to the knob press the ENTER key and use the dial or the DEC INC keys Use the MODE button to select either ST MONO mode or LCR mode for each MIX channel 7 The ST button and MONO button are on off 8 switches for the signal sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO bus and MONO bus If you want to use the STEREO bus make sure that the ON key of the STEREO chan nel is turned on in the top panel STEREO MASTER section and raise the fader of the STEREO channel to an appropriate posi tion Sending signals from MIX channels to the STEREO MONO bus 9 it you want to use the MONO bus make sure that the ON key of the MONO channel is turned on and raise the fader of the MONO channel to an appropriate position This operation will differ between the LS9 16 and LS9 32 For the LS9 16 Assign the MONO channel to the custom fader layer press the LAYER CUSTOM key to access the cus tom fader layer and then operate the ON key and fader of the corresponding channel module For the LS9 32 Press the LAYER MASTER key to access the master fader layer and operate the ON key and fader of channel module 32 10 Select the master fader layer make sure that the ON key of the desired MIX channel is turned on and raise the fader to an appropriate position The following st
280. ar in the GEQ EFFECT field to indicate the linked status UIRTURL RRCK SAFE INS CH 2 SAFE RACK 3 ahs CHS linked status E INS CH 4 Symbol indicating 6 To turn on the GEQ move the cursor to the GEQ ON OFF button and press the ENTER key After you ve turned the GEQ on adjust the bands of the GEQ For details on operating the GEQ refer to Using the 31 Band GEQ below or Using the Flex 1SGEQ p 164 7 Check whether INSERT is turned on for the patched channel For details refer to Inserting an external device into a channel p 101 Using the 31 Band GEQ Here we will explain how to use the 31 Band GEQ 1 As described in steps 1 3 of Mounting a GEQ or effect in the virtual rack p 158 mount a GEQ in a rack A rack in which a 31 Band GEQ is mounted will show the approximate settings Rack image display 2 In the GEQ EFFECT field move the cursor to the rack in which you mounted the GEQ and press the ENTER key The RACK screen will appear allowing you to edit the parameters of the GEQ You can also access the RACK screen by pressing the RACK 1 4 key or RACK 5 8 key By repeatedly pressing the RACK 1 4 key you can access the RACK 1 4 screens and by repeatedly pressing the RACK 5 8 key you can access the RACK 5 8 screens and EXTERNAL HA screen RACK 1 4 gt 315 63 125 250 500 ik 2K 4K 50 160 2 50 1
281. ard window will appear allowing you to enter the password AUTHOR ZAT I ON USER NAME PASSWORD Administrator CLEAR ES 91 10 ES EU 2 se SHIFT LOCK CRNCEL 4 Enter the password move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key For details on entering a password refer to Assigning a name p 34 If the password was incorrect a message of WRONG PASSWORD will appear in the bottom of the screen Logging in as Guest 1 Inthe DISPLAY ACCESS section press the SETUP key repeatedly to access the USER SETUP screen 2 Move the cursor to the log in popup button and press the ENTER key The LOGIN popup window will appear LOGIN Select User to Losin LOGIN GUEST LOGIN ADMINISTRATOR LOAD USER KEY CANCEL 3 Move the cursor to the GUEST LOGIN but ton and press the ENTER key 190 LS9 16 32 Owners Manual Logging in as a User To log in as a User you will use a user authentication key saved on USB memory You may also log in using a user authentication key that was created on a different LS9 console 1 Connect the UsB memory to the USB con nector 2 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section press the SETUP key repeatedly to access the USER SETUP screen 3 Move the cursor to the log in popup button and press the ENTER key The LOGIN popup window will a
282. at in which the date will be dis played 3 TIME field Specifies the time of the internal clock 4 TIME MODE button Specifies the format in which the time will be dis played 3 Move the cursor to the DATE MODE button and press the ENTER key to select the date format You can select from the following formats MM DD YYYY Month Day Year e DD MM YYYY Day Month Year YYYY MM DD Year Month Day 4 Move the cursor to each field of the DATE field and use the dial or the DEC INC keys to specify the date 5 Move the cursor to the TIME MODE button and press the ENTER key to select the time format You can select from the following formats 24Hours hours shown in a range of 0 23 12Hours hours shown from AM 0 11 and PM 0 PM 11 6 Move the cursor to each field of the TIME field and use the dial or the DEC INC keys to specify the time 7 When you have finished making settings move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The date time and display format you specified will be finalized and the popup window will close If you select the CANCEL button or the x symbol instead of the OK button your changes will be discarded and the popup window will close Other functions di LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual J 215 Setting the network address Setting the network address Here s how to set the network address that will be required when you use the L89 s NETWORK connec
283. atch change confirmation dialog box does not appear gt p 194 You can specify multiple output destinations for a rack If you selected 31 Band GEQ you ll be able to select one channel of output otherwise you ll be able to select two chan nels of output 8 To turn Recall Safe on off move the cursor to the SAFE button for that rack and press the ENTER key If Recall Safe is turned on for a rack the contents and parameters of that rack will not change when a scene is recalled For more about Recall Safe refer to Using the Recall Safe function p 140 The type of GEQ or effect mounted in each rack its parame ter settings and the input source output destination settings are saved as part of the scene Graphic EQ operations Graphic EQ operations About the graphic EQ The LS9 lets you mount a GEQ in racks 1 8 and patch it to the insert out in of a channel You can use the top panel faders and ON keys to operate the amount of boost cut for each band The following two types of GEQ are provided e 31 Band GEQ This is a monaural 31 band GEQ Each band is 1 3 octave wide the adjustable boost cut range is 15 dB and the amount of boost cut for each of the thirty one bands can be adjusted If a 31 Band GEQ is mounted in a rack one channel of input and output can be used for that rack INPUT OUTPUT Rack e Flex15GEQ This is a monaural 15 band GEQ Each band is 1 3 octave wide and the adjustabl
284. ate a channel s ON key or fader This can be turned on off sep arately for INPUT input channels and OUT PUT output channels CUE gt SEL LINK Specifies whether channel selection will be linked with cue operations If this button is on pressing the CUE key of a channel will simultaneously select that channel and light its SEL key LAYER gt SEL LINK Specifies whether channel selection will be linked with fader layer selection If this button is on and you press a panel LAYER key to switch the fader layer the last selected channel of that fader layer will be selected and its SEL key will light Preferences POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING KNOBS Specifies whether pressing a knob of the SELECTED CHANNEL section when the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen is shown will cause the popup window for that parameter to appear If this button is on a popup window will appear or close whenever you press a knob LIST ORDER This specifies the order in which scene memories and library items will appear in the screen e NORMAL Show the list in ascending numerical order REVERSE Show the list in ascending numerical order STEREO MONO LINK This specifies whether STEREO channel and MONO channel on off and fader operations will be linked If you turn this button on the STEREO channel on off setting will be copied to the MONO chan nel and subsequently on off opera
285. ately after the channel on off will be sent If the PRE button is on then you will be able to select either PRE EQ immediately before the attenuator or PRE FADER immediately before the fader for each two adjacent numbered even numbered MATRIX buses p 213 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Sending signals from MIX channels and STEREO MONO channels to MATRIX buses 7 To switch the on off status of a signal sent to the MATRIX bus move the cursor to the TO MATRIX ON OFF button in the screen and press the ENTER key If the send destination MATRIX bus is set to stereo operation of the adjacent left right pair of buttons is linked 8 If you want to operate a channel that is not currently shown in the popup window use the SEL key to select that channel and then make settings for it 9 it you want to adjust the send level to another MATRIX bus use the keys of the MIX MATRIX SELECT section to select another MATRIX bus and make settings in the same way 10 When you ve finished making settings move the cursor to the CLOSE button or the x symbol in the upper right of the win dow and press the ENTER key Using the faders SENDS ON FADER mode Here s how to use the top panel faders and ON keys to adjust the send level and turn the signal on off for the sig nals sent from the MIX STEREO L R and MONO channels to a specific MATRIX bus 1 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section HOME key The
286. ates the path of the folder VYPE SONGS in which the audio files are saved This cannot be changed Song list This shows the playable audio files in the SONGS folder A maximum of 300 audio files can be displayed Files other than playable audio files will not be displayed 5 SONG TITLE FILE NAME button When you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER Key the song list will be sorted in alphanu meric order by song tile or file name Each time you press the ENTER key the list will alternate between ascending and descending order 6 TYPE This indicates the type of the audio file The signifi cance of this indication is as follows MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 WMA Windows Media Audio MPEG4 AAC OFFSET Offset time This specifies the time from the recall operation until the corresponding audio file begins to play 5 Operate the dial or the DEC INC keys to scroll the song list so that the file you want to link to the scene is shown in the center with a blue background 114 LS9 16 32 Owners Manual 6 If necessary move the cursor to the OFF SET knob and use the dial or the DEC INC keys to specify an offset time before the audio file will play back You can specify the offset time in a range of 0 99 sec onds in 0 5 second units 7 Move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The popup window will close and you
287. b This knob sets the fade time Move the cursor to this knob and use the dial or the DEC INC keys to adjust the setting 3 SET ALL button If you press this button the Fade effect will be enabled for all faders encoders of that scene CLEAR ALL button If you press this button the Fade effect will be dis abled for all faders encoders of that scene 4 Press the SEL keys of the desired chan nels to select the channels to which the Fade effect will be applied multiple selec tions are allowed The SEL keys of the selected channels will light and those channels will be highlighted in the channel dis play field of the popup window You can cancel a selection by pressing a lit SEL key once again to make it go dark 5 Move the cursor to the FADE TIME knob and use the dial or the DEC INC keys to adjust the fade time The range is 0 0 sec 60 0 sec When you ve finished making settings move the cur sor to the OK button and press the ENTER key to close the FADE TIME popup window The fade time you specify here is used for all channels selected in step 4 144 LS9 16 32 Owners Manual 6 To turn on the Fade function move the cur sor to the FADING button and press the ENTER key The Fade on off setting is made individually for each scene Save the scene if necessary Scenes for which Fade settings are made are shown by a FADING indication in the STATUS field of the SCENE LIST scree
288. b in the SELECTED CH VIEW screen and operating the dial or the DEC INC keys DIRECT LS9 16 32 Owners Manual 71 5 If you want to switch the on off status of the signal sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO MONO bus or switch it between ST MONO mode and LCR mode use either of the following methods to access the TO STEREO MONO popup window Move the cursor to the PAN popup button located in the TO ST field of the SELECTED CH VIEW screen and press the ENTER key Move the cursor to the TO ST PAN knob located in the TO ST field of the SELECTED CH VIEW screen and press the ENTER key In the TO STEREO MONO popup window you can switch between ST MONO mode and LCR mode in sets of eight MIX channels and change the on off sta tus and pan balance settings of the signals sent from those channels to the STEREO MONO bus This popup window shows the parameters for the eight channels that include the MIX channel you selected in step 3 e If you ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window gt p 194 you can also access the above popup window by pressing the SELECTED CHANNEL section PAN encoder This popup window contains the following items D Channel number Channel name This indicates the number and name of the channel you re operating 2 MODE button This button selects either ST MONO mode or LCR mode to specify how the signal is sent to the STE
289. b time reflection spread 5 ratio DENSITY 0 10096 Reflection density DIFF 0 10 Reverb diffusion left right HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio reverb spread ER NUM 1 19 Number of early reflections DENSITY 0 10096 Reverb density FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain Delay between early reflec E R DLY 0 0 100 0 ms reverb d HPF ZH AE High pass filter cutoff frequency Balance of early reflections and reverb y LPF zu Low pass filter cutoff frequency E R BAL 0 100 0 all reverb 100 all early reflections MONO DELAY HPF THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz Fighpass filter cutoff fre _ One input one output basic repeat delay LPF 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff fre quency Parameter Range Description GATELVL OFF 60 to 0 dB Level at which gate kicks in DELAY 0 0 2730 0 ms Delay time ATTACK 0 120 ms Gate opening speed Feedback gain plus values for HOLD 1 Gate open time FB GAIN 99 to 99 normal phase feedback minus P values for reverse phase feedback DECAY Cate Closing speed HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio 1 0 02 ms 2 13 s fs 44 1 kHz 0 02 ms 1 96 s fs 48 kHz THRU 21 2 Hz 2 6 0 ms 46 0 s fs 44 1 kHz 5 0 ms 42 3 s 5 48 kHz HPF 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz B EARLY REF LPF THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off One input two output early reflections U
290. back eere 151 Using the oscillator eeeeeeeeee 153 16 Meters 155 Using the METER screen 155 17 Graphic EQ and effects 197 About the virtual rack 157 Mounting a or effect in the virtual rack 158 Graphic EQ operations cesses 161 About the graphic 161 Inserting a in a 161 Using the 31 Band GEQ 163 Using the Flex15GEQ 164 About the internal effects 166 Using an internal effect via send return 167 Inserting an internal effect into a channel 168 Editing the internal effect parameters 170 Using the Tap Tempo function 172 Using the Freeze 173 Using the graphic EQ and effect libraries 174 GEQ libraly nne E edis 174 Effect library reed tin 174 Using an external head 175 Remotely controlling an external head amp 175 18 MIDI 177 MIDI functionality on the LS9 177 Basic MIDI settings eee 178 Using program changes to
291. bus e VARI PRE EQ The MIX bus will be a VARI type adjustable send level Choose this if you want to use the MIX bus as an external effect send or as a foldback output If the MIX send point of the input channel is set to PRE the signal will be sent from immediately before the EQ attenuator e VARI PRE FADER The MIX bus will be a VARI type Choose this if you want to use the MIX bus as an external effect send or as a foldback output If the MIX send point of the input channel is set to PRE the signal will be sent from immediately before the fader NOTE Even if you select VARI PRE EQ or VARI PRE FADER input channels whose MIX send position is set to POST will send the post fader signal to the MIX bus e FIXED The MIX bus will be a FIXED type send level is fixed at nominal level 0 0 dB Choose this if you want to use the MIX bus as a group output or as a bus output for recording on a multitrack recorder If the bus is set to MONO the signal will be sent from immediately before the pan balance of the input channel if the bus is set to STEREO the signal will be sent from immediately after the pan balance 5 As desired turn the buttons of the PAN LINK field on off For two MIX buses whose SIGNAL TYPE STE REO and BUS TYPE VARI the PAN LINK button is displayed in this position This button specifies whether the panning at which the signal is sent from an input channel to the stereo MIX bus will be linked wit
292. button If this button is on bank select messages can be transmitted and received in Single mode This is disabled for Multi mode transmission reception MULTI button If this button is on program changes will be trans mitted received on multiple MIDI channels Multi mode 6 CONTROL CHANGE field Here you can make settings for control change trans mission reception Tx button Switches control change transmission on off Rx button Switches control change reception on off ECHO button This selects whether incoming control changes are echoed out from the transmission port 7 CONTROL CHANGE MODE field Here you can select the control change transmission reception mode NRPN button If this button is on the LS9 s mix parameters will be transmitted received as NRPN messages on one MIDI channel NRPN mode TABLE button If this button is on the LS9 s mix parameters will be transmitted received as control change mes sages on one MIDI channel TABLE mode PARAMETER CHANGE field Here you can make settings for transmission reception of parameter change system exclusive messages Tx button Switches parameter change transmission on off Rx button Switches parameter change reception on off ECHO button This selects whether incoming parameter changes are echoed out from the transmission port 9 OTHER COMMAND field Here you can specify how MIDI messages other than program
293. by this encoder or knob The volume balance of the signal sent from a ST IN channel to the STEREO bus left and right can be operated by the SELECTED CHANNEL section PAN encoder or by the TO ST BALANCE knob in the screen The signal sent to the MONO bus is not affected by this knob LCR mode 060906000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000090 In this mode the signal from the input channel is sent to three buses at once STEREO L R and MONO C The signals sent from the same input channel to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus can be switched on off together The CSR Center Side Ratio knob in the screen adjusts the proportion of the signal level sent from the input channel to the STEREO L R bus and the level sent to the MONO C bus The level of the signal sent from the input channel to the STEREO L R bus and the MONO C bus will change according to the settings of the SELECTED CHANNEL section PAN encoder or the TO ST PAN knob TO ST BALANCE knob in the screen If you want to use headphones etc to monitor the signal of the STEREO bus or MONO bus you should press the DISPLAY ACCESS section MONITOR key several times to access the MONITOR screen and select LCR as the monitor source gt p 146 58 LS9 16 32 Owners Manual Sending the signal from an input channel to the STEREO MONO bus 1 Make sure that an input source is con nected to the input channel you re operat ing and make h
294. c E E S PATCH 4 RACK RACKI p ATGA mm n METER RAGKOUT ma E ee 3 PLCIMEERRAWWA OTA _ MereR Rack N B AMETERJRACKOUTB MIX OU RACK1 L Flex15GEQ 1 L 14677 Aue HH lt 4 i ARR RACK2 IN I RACK OUT MATRIX QU I RACK same as RACK1 I A LYBIR gt gt 4 1 8 RACKS IN fanis dir La CH INSERT IN 1 32 _s to cHINSERTIN ADR RACKS as RACKT AUR 22 MIX INSERT IN 1 16 gt ToMIX INSERT IN 16 RMONOU Most same as RACK1 EZ NC STEREO SERT gt MATRIX INSERT IN 1 8 To MATRIX INSERT IN 1 2222 RACKS ju gere m NSER our gt METER METER RACK OUT lle pr E UE AEL Se cee EE eee PE EI EEEN EEE 2 RACK OUT A MIX METER RACK IN B METER RACK g NSERTOUL s m HedsEQ ty 1 7 WANK S METER RACK IN R METER RACKOUTR STEREO UH 3 NSERT OUT gt t LRMONO C DP 2 wear eo RACK6 IN RACK6 OUT RACK6 same as RACKS 5 1 8 H jmn RACK7 same as RACKS Raci our RACKS RACK8 OUT Figure 1 ALDER 1 RACKS same as RACKS SoS SSS SS Figure 2 In addition to
295. can select parameters as described in step 3 even after turning Recall Safe on 3 If you want to enable Recall Safe for spe cific parameters of the selected channel make the following settings in the SAFE PARAMETER field e For an input channel Use the buttons in the lower part of the SAFE PARAMETER field except for the ALL button to select the parameters that will be subject to Recall Safe multiple selections are allowed If you want all parameters to be subject to Recall Safe turn on the ALL button this is the default setting Initial Data 000 R ADMIN SEL to ARGET CH choose rara for RECALL SAFE GLOBAL CH1 6 H9 16 BSTINI 2 17 24 5 1 3 4 MIX1 8 MIX9 16 MTRX1 8 ch 1 SAFE PARAMETER RR i ee 000 Initial Data R ADMIN RECALL SAFE ress SEL to TARGET CH and choose raram for RECALL SAFE GLOBAL CH9 16 17 24 CH2 40 CH4 1 45 CH43 56 CHS 9 16 MTRX1 CH 1 ch 1 SAFE PARAMETER Re ee LS9 32 These buttons correspond to the following parameters Button name Corresponding parameters ALL All parameters HA Head amp settings including external HA EQ EQ settings including ATT HPF DYNA 1 Dynamics 1 settings DYNA 2 Dynamics 2 settings MIX ON On off status of signals sent to MIX buses MIX SEND Send levels of signals sent to MIX buses FADER Fader positions CH ON On off status of ON keys NOTE e If
296. ching port between normal phase black and reverse phase If STEAL PATCH is turned on a confirmation dialog orange box will appear if you attempt to change a location 9 ATT knob that is already patched to another location For Adjusts the amount of attenuation boost for the signal details refer to gt p 194 assigned to the output port To change the setting move the cursor to this knob in the screen and use the dial or the DEC INC keys You can adjust the value in 1 0 dB steps in a range of 96 24 dB The current value is shown immediately below the knob If you assign CH 1 32 1 32 33 64 to an output port the selected INPUT channel will be output directly from the corre sponding output port In this case the channel select button in the OUTPUT PORT popup window will indicate DIR CH Xx xx channel number For details on direct output gt Level meter p 103 This meter shows the signal level of the channel assigned to the output port 6 Make settings for delay phase and 3 To assign a channel to an output port move attenuator as necessary the cursor to the channel number field of that port and press the ENTER key The OUTPUT CH SELECT popup window will appear This popup window contains the following items 8 When you ve finished making settings move the cursor to the CLOSE button or to the x symbol in the upper right of the win dow and press the ENTER key to return to th
297. chronization 244 Scene Memory Effect Library to Program Change Table 245 Parameters that can be assigned to control changes eene 249 Control change parameter assignments 251 NRPN parameter assignments 253 Mixing parameter operation applicability 256 Functions that can be assigned to user defined keys 257 MIDI Data 260 Warning Error Messages 268 Troubleshooting eere 270 General 272 Input output characteristics 273 Electrical characteristics 275 Mixer Basic Parameters 277 Pin Assignment eese 278 Dimensions eene nnn 279 Attaching the RK1 rackmount kit sold separately irent 280 MIDI Implementation Chart 281 pd 282 Block Diagram End of Manual Level Diagram eese End of Manual The illustrations and screen displays as shown in this Owner s manual are for instructional
298. ct possibly causing oscillation LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual 8 To adjust the master level of the effect send call up the fader layer that includes the MIX channel you specified as the input source of the rack in step 2 and adjust the corresponding fader Set the level as high as possible without allowing the post effect signal to reach the overload point 9 To adjust the effect return level operate the encoder of the ST IN channel you selected as the output destination of the rack in step 3 Inserting an internal effect into a Here we will explain how to insert an effect into a channel by assigning the input output of the internal effect to the input output of the desired channel except for a ST IN channel 1 As described in Mounting a GEQ or effect in the virtual rack p 158 steps 1 3 mount an effect in a rack A rack in which an effect is mounted will indicate the effect type used by that effect and the bypass on off status 00 Initial Data R ADMIN Reverb Hall REVERB HALL Reverb Room REVERB ROOM Reverb Plate REVERB PLATE Mono Delay MONO DELAY 0 Racks INPUT buttons 3 OUTPUT buttons 2 Use the INPUT L button to open the OUT PUT CH SELECT popup window and select the insert out of a channel as the input Source Insert out will be assigned to the L input of the effect For details on the OUTPUT CH SELECT popup win dow refer to step 4 of Mounting a GEQ or
299. ct the output ports of the sending unit the cascade slave to the input ports of the receiving unit the cascade master The following illustration shows an example in which one sixteen channel digital I O card for each console are installed in the cascade slave LS9 and in the cascade mas ter LS9 and the DIGITAL OUT jacks of the sending unit connected to the DIGITAL IN jacks of the receiving unit Digital audio signal Audio signals of unit A Audio signals of A B Digital I O card Digital I O card LS9 A Cascade slave LS9 B Cascade master Control signals for cascade link In this example up to sixteen buses chosen from MIX buses 1 16 MATRIX buses 1 8 STEREO bus L R MONO C bus and CUE bus L R can be shared and the mixed signals transmitted from the cascade master LS9 If you re cascade connecting two LS9 32 consoles you will be able to share all buses if you install two 16 channel digital I O cards in each LS9 32 console Control signals for the Cascade Link function are trans mitted and received via the MIDI IN OUT connectors In this type of setup performing a cue operation scene recall store operation or fader layer selection on either console will cause the same to occur on the other console When using a cascade connection you must specify the slot s channels on each LS9 console that will send and receive audio signals Similarly in order to use the Cas cade
300. cur rently selected for store recall operations An Read Only indication is shown for read only scenes or write protected scenes If you have modified the parameters from their most recently stored or recalled state an Edited indication is shown Move the cur sor to the scene number use the dial or the DEC INC keys to change the scene number and press the ENTER key to recall the scene Simply changing the scene that is shown here will not execute store recall operation To execute a store or recall operation access the SCENE MEM ORY screen and use the STORE RECALL buttons in the screen gt p 129 or press a user defined key to which you ve assigned the scene store recall operation gt p 132 You can also move the cursor to the scene number in the constant display area and use the dial or the DECI INC keys to change the scene number This scene number will blink if the most recently stored or recalled scene is different than the currently selected scene 3 MIDI The MIDI indicator will appear when MIDI messages are received 30 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual 4 User name status This shows the name of the user who is currently logged in authenticated and permitted to operate the console Other indicators are shown here if oscillator or talkback is or if internal memory or USB memory is being accessed When oscillator is on 000 Hua 000
301. cursor to the DIRECT popup button and press the ENTER key to access the DIRECT OUT popup window For details on the popup window gt p 103 When you ve assigned an output port to direct output in the popup window turn on the DIRECT OUT ON OFF button Setting a channel to Recall Safe In the SELECTED CH VIEW screen use the SAFE field to set the currently selected channel to the Recall Safe sta tus in which that channel will not be affected by Recall operations This field includes the following items 3 8 D SAFE popup button This opens the RECALL SAFE screen where you can make settings related to Recall Safe 2 PARTIAL indicator This indicator will light if only some of the parameters of that channel are set to Recall Safe 8 RECALL SAFE ON OFF button Switches the Recall Safe status on off for the channel To set all parameters of the channel to Recall Safe mode press the RECALL SAFE ON OFF button to turn it on If you want to set only specific parameters of the channel to Recall Safe mode use the SAFE popup button to access the RECALL SAFE screen and select the parameters that you want to be in Recall Safe mode For details on the RECALL SAFE screen gt p 140 Turning a channel on off Use the FADER field to switch the channel on off in the SELECTED CH VIEW screen This field includes the fol lowing items X CLIP indicator This indicator will light if an overload occurs at even
302. d Move the cursor to the desired tab in the upper part of the window and press the ENTER key The type of ports shown in the lower part of the win dow will change according to the tab you selected Move the cursor to the desired port select button and press the ENTER key That port will be selected as the output destination You can select more than one output port Move the cursor to the CLOSE button and press the ENTER key to return to the pre vious screen As an alternative to using the CLOSE button you can return to the previous screen by pressing the SELECTED CHAN NEL section HOME key once 7 necessary perform the same steps for other output channels Selecting the output channel for each output port Here s how to select the output channel that will be the output source for each output port 1 Inthe DISPLAY ACCESS section press the SETUP key repeatedly to access the SYS TEM SETUP screen Initial Data 000 R ADMIN M SETUP BUS SETUP MIX ZTR OUT SETUP WORD CLOCK SLOT SETUP CASCADE IN CASCADE OUT Tun nnn Initial Data 1 000 R ADMIN SYSTEM SETUP MASTER ON BUS SETUP OUTPUT PORT SETUP MIX OMNI SLOT SLOTZ s 1 8 1 8 SLOTI SLOT2 9 16 9 16 SETUP WORD CLOCK SLOT SETUP CASCADE IN CASCADE OUT LS9 32 In the OUTPUT PORT SETUP field in the center of the screen you can select the output port assigned to the output chan
303. d gt p 115 O Could insert be turned on even though it has not been specified correctly p 101 O Is the ON key indicator of the input channel lit O Is the fader of the input channel raised Sound is not output Is the optional I O card installed correctly p 44 O Is the ON key indicator of the STEREO channel lit Is an output port patched to the output channel gt p 95 Could LCR be on and the CSR value be set to 1 0 gt p 58 Sound is not output from headphones or the MONITOR OUT jacks O Is the PHONES knob or LEVEL knob set to an appropriate volume Sound is not loud enough O Is the GAIN of the internal head amp or external head amp set to an appropriate level p 47 57 O Is the fader of the input channel raised Could the EQ gain be set to an extremely low setting gt 115 O Could the GATE COMP threshold or ratio be set to an extreme setting gt p 117 Is the EQ attenuator raised gt p 115 O Is the fader of the output channel raised O Try using the various screens of the METER function to check the levels gt p 155 Sound is distorted Is the word clock set correctly gt p 206 O Is the GAIN of the internal head amp or external head amp set to an appropriate level p 47 57 O Could the fader of the input channel be raised too high O Could the fader of the STEREO channel be raised too high Could the EQ gain be set to an extrem
304. d gt p 34 C Initial Date 000 pa eun 3 POWER USER Specifies whether Power User privileges will be granted to this user STORRGE CREATE mE SER KEY 4 Access permission settings TOES 22 These settings specify the range of operations that the posue quem user can perform For details on each item refer to 193 USER DEFINED USER DEFINED p 193 KEYS KEYS A CUSTOM EBDER CUSTOM LEADER 4 When you have specified the user name En password power user privileges on off and USER LEUEL USER LEVEL user rights move the cursor to the CREATE button and press the ENTER key If you are logged in as the Administrator the user 2 Move the cursor to the log in popup button authentication key will be saved on USB memory and press the ENTER key If you are logged in as a Power User a dialog box will The LOGIN popup window will appear ask you to confirm the store destination USB memory If you want to save the user authentication key on dif ferent USB memory connect the desired USB mem ory and then press OK LOGIN Select User to Losin LOGIN GUEST LOGIN ADMINISTRATOR LOAD USER KEY CANCEL User settings Security LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual J 189 User Level settings 3 Move the cursor to the ADMINISTRATOR LOGIN button and press the ENTER key If no Administrator password has been set you will simply be logged in If a password has been set a key bo
305. d audio file will be played only once regardless of the playback mode setting Chapter 11 EQ and Dynamics This chapter explains the EQ equalizer and dynamics that are provided on each channel of the LS9 Ahout EQ and dynamics Each input channel and output channel of the LS9 provides a four band EQ and dynamics EQ can be used on all input channels and all output channels An attenuator is provided immedi ately before the EQ allowing you to adjust the level of the input signal In addition input channels provide a high pass filter that is independent of the EQ Input channels provide two dynamics processors Dynamics 1 can be used as gate ducking compressor or expander Dynamics 2 can be used as compressor compander hard compander soft or de esser Output channels provide one dynamics processor which can be used as com pressor expander compander hard or compander soft This section explains the four band EQ that is provided on input channels and output channels 1 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section 2 Use the LAYER section to select the desired HOME key fader layer The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the display 3 Press a SEL key in the channel module section STEREO MASTER section or ST IN section to select the channel that you want to operate EQ and Dynamics 0 LL PA SIE RES 4 In the screen move the cursor to the EQ THEESM ngo HOLD DECAY popup button or a
306. d below the SONGS folder Files located in other folders and files of unsupported formats will not be recognized 2 the DISPLAY ACCESS section press the RECORDER key repeatedly to access the TITLE LIST screen 00 04 54 Title list This list shows the playable audio files and the folders that are saved in the selected folder of USB memory The row with the blue background in the center of the list indicates the file folder that is selected for opera tions No track number This number indicates the order of each file for con secutive playback If there is a lower level folder a folder icon CEJ is shown here If an icon E is shown here it indicates that an upper level exists Move the cursor to a displayed number and press the ENTER key to play back that audio file 110 LS9 16 32 Owners Manual 3 Playback selection check field This field lets you select the files that will be played back during consecutive playback When you move the cursor to this field and press the ENTER key the check mark will alternately appear or disappear 2 Status This field shows a symbol to indicate whether the cur rently selected file is playing gt or paused 5 SONG TITLE FILE NAME This field shows the title or file name of the song If the title is too long to be displayed a character is shown at the end 6 ARTIST This field show
307. d de Panam Panam Tel 4 507 269 5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDAM IRELAND Yamaha Music Europe GmbH UK Sherbourne Drive Tilbrook Milton Keynes MK7 8BL England Tel 01908 366700 GERMANY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH SiemensstraBe 22 34 25462 Rellingen Germany Tel 04101 3030 SWITZERLAND LIECHTENSTEIN Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Switzerland in Z rich Seefeldstrasse 94 8008 Z rich Switzerland Tel 044 387 8080 AUSTRIA BULGARIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20 A 1100 Wien Austria Tel 01 60203900 CZECH REPUBLIC HUNGARY ROMANIA SLOVAKIA SLOVENIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria Central Eastern Europe Office Schleiergasse 20 A 1100 Wien Austria Tel 01 602039025 POLAND LITHUANIA LATVIA ESTONIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Sp z Oddzial w Polsce ul 17 Stycznia 56 PL 02 146 Warszawa Poland Tel 022 500 2925 PA29 Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgef hrten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshandlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungslandern erh ltlich Para detalles sobre productos contacte su tienda Yamaha m s cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo MARTA Olimpus Music Ltd The Emporium Level 3 St Louis Street Msida MSD06 Tel 02133 2144 THE NETHERLANDS BELGIUM LUXEMBOURG Yamaha Music Europe Branch Benelux Clarissenhof 5 b 4133 AB Vianen The Netherlands Tel 0347 358 040 FRANCE Yamaha Mu
308. determine Channel 1 delay Used in conjunction with NOTE 2 TEMPO to determine Channel 2 delay 1 JH BIS Beh 445 2 4 4 4 des Maximum value depends on the tempo setting E ROTARY One input two output rotary speaker simulator Parameter Range Description ROTATE STOP START Rotation stop start SPEED SLOW FAST Rotation speed see SLOW and FAST parameters SLOW 0 05 10 00 Hz SLOW rotation speed FAST 0 05 10 00 Hz FAST rotation speed DRIVE 0 100 Overdrive level ACCEL 0 10 Acceleration at speed changes LOW 0 100 Low frequency filter HIGH 0 100 High frequency filter Two input two output ring modulator Parameter Range Description SOURCE OSC SELF Modulation source oscillator or input signal OSC FREQ 0 0 5000 0 Hz Oscillator frequency FM FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Oscillator frequency modulation speed FM DEPTH 0 100 Oscillator frequency modulation depth SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off Used in conjunction with TEMPO 1 FM NOTE to determine FM FREQ Us 433 RT Bet ddd 4d dod d d 8 236 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual I MOD FILTER Two input two output modulation filter DYNA FILTER Two input two output dynamically controlled filter Effects Parameters us ARP ORT Beh IE DISTORTION d d d 4 a mu E DYNA FLANGE
309. different type Cannot Recall Failed to recall a scene memory or library Cannot Select This Channel You attempted to select a channel that cannot be operated due to your user level or some other reason Cannot Store Failed to store a scene memory or library Cannot Undo You pressed the UNDO button when Undo was not available Couldn t Access File File on the USB memory could not be accessed for some reason Couldn t Write File Current User Changed xxx File could not be saved from the USB memory Current user was changed to xxx Directory Not Empty You attempted to delete a directory but failed because there were files remaining in the directory EFFECT CUE Turned Off CUE was defeated because you switched from the RACK screen to a different screen External HA Connection Conflict File Access is Busy External HA data could not be recalled because the state of connections to the external HA differs from when the scene was stored The following operation has not been performed yet because the USB memory is being accessed File Already Exists The USB memory already contains a file directory with the same name as the one you are attempting to save rename or create File Error xx Internal file access error File Protected Help File Not Found Overwriting was not possible because the file on the USB memory is write protected Can t f
310. differing media or protocol to be exchanged within a network to allow communication 38 SUBNET MASK field This defines the number of bits of the IP address used within the network that will be used as the network address that distinguishes the network LINK MODE field Select either 100 5 transmission speed max imum 100 Mbps or 10BASE T transmission speed max 10 Mbps as the specification used for communi cation via the NETWORK connector Move the cursor to the LINK MODE field and use the dial or the DEC INC keys to select a communication protocol for the NETWORK connector as appropriate for the network to which the LS9 is connected NOTE Be aware that if the specification does not match communi cation will not occur correctly Move the cursor to each remaining field in the screen and use the dial or the DEC INC keys to specify each address If you are connecting the LS9 to your computer in a one to one connection we recommend that you make the following initial settings IP address 192 168 0 128 or similar it must not conflict with the IP address of any other device on the network Gateway address 192 168 0 1 or similar it must not conflict with the IP address of any other device on the network Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 or similar Setting the network address Specifying the brightness or contrast of the display LEDs and lamps 5 When you have finished making sett
311. e 29 150 180 30 150 31 160 190 35 _ 160 33 Max DSP Noise Floor 170 200 170 34 180 210 35 bar 36 190 190 DdBu 0 775Vrms OdBFS Full Scale For details of products please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below Pour plus de d tails sur les produits veuillez vous adresser Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd 135 Milner Avenue Scarborough Ontario MIS 3RI Canada Tel 416 298 1311 U S A Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave Buena Park Calif 90620 U S A Tel 714 522 9011 CENTRAL amp SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO Yamaha de M xico S A de C V Calz Javier Rojo G mez 1149 Col Guadalupe del Moral C P 09300 M xico M xico Tel 55 5804 0600 BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda Rua Joaquim Floriano 913 4 andar Itaim Bibi CEP 04534 013 Sao Paulo SP BRAZIL Tel 011 3704 1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Latin America S A Sucursal de Argentina Olga Cossettini 1553 Piso 4 Norte Madero Este C1107CEK Buenos Aires Argentina Tel 011 4119 7000 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Latin America S A Torre Banco General Piso 7 Urbanizaci n Marbella Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia Ciuda
312. e CANCEL button and press the ENTER key the operation will be cancelled ATTENTION CANCEL Viewing the display CAUTION dialog box This dialog box will display a warning if a fatal error has occurred in the operation you attempted to exe cute When you move the cursor to the CLOSE button and press the ENTER key the operation will be forc ibly cancelled and the dialog box will disappear CAUTION X CANCEL LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Basic operations on the LS9 fem 33 On the 1 59 you can assign a name to each input channel and output channel and assign a title to each scene or library data item when you save it To assign a name you will use the keyboard window that is shown in the main area Assigning a name 1 Access the window where you can assign a DEL button name The illustration below shows the SCENE STORE popup window that is used when assigning a name to a Deletes the character to the right of the text cursor BS button Deletes the character to the left of the text cursor scene SHIFT LOCK button Switches between uppercase and lowercase alphabeti cal characters You ll be able to enter uppercase char acters and symbols if this button is on and lowercase characters and numerals if this button is off ENTER button Finalizes the name you entered In the SCENE STORE popup window you can obtain the same result by moving the cursor to the STO
313. e and modulation type effects and can be used to specify the delay time or modulation speed Initial Data DE 000 R RDMIN LIE DEF copy TEMPO MIDI CLK MIX BAL q 100 INPUT OUTPUT MONO DELAY L INSCH9 INS CHO LE 1IN ZOUT3 qe ae INS CHIO LPF 10 OkHz D BPM parameter For details on the parameters of each effect type refer to the supplementary material at the end of this manual gt p 233 7 At the desired tempo repeatedly press the user defined key to which you assigned the Tap Tempo function The average interval BPM at which you press the key will be calculated and that value will be reflected by the BPM parameter The average interval will be input the average of a b and c Ae f A First tap Second tap Third tap Fourth tap e If the average value is outside the range of 20 300 BPM it will be ignored e If you turn on the MIDI CLK button in the special parameter field the BPM parameter value will change according to the tempo of the MIDI timing clock received from the currently enabled MIDI port Using the Freeze effect Here s how to use the FREEZE effect type which pro vides the functionality of a simple sampler When this effect type is selected you can perform operations in the screen to record sample and play back a sound 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section press the RACK 1 4 key and RACK 5 8 key simulta neously to access the VIRTUAL RACK screen 2 Mount an
314. e boost cut range is 15 dB The Flex 15GEQ lets you adjust the boost cut amount for any fifteen of the same bands as the thirty one bands of the 31 Band GEQ Once you ve used up fifteen bands of adjust ment you won t be able to adjust the boost cut amount of another band until you reset a previously adjusted band to the flat setting A rack for which the Flex 15GEQ is selected will have two Flex 15GEQ units shown as and respectively mounted in that rack and will allow two channels of input and output If you mount a Flex I5GEQ in each rack you ll be able to use up to sixteen GEQ units simulta neously INPUT OUTPUT Rack Flext5GEQ Flex15GEQ B Inserting a GEQ in a channel The LS9 s GEQ units can be patched to the insert in out of any channel except the ST IN channels Here s how to insert a GEQ into the selected channel for use 1 As described in steps 1 3 of Mounting a GEQ or effect in the virtual rack p 158 mount a GEQ in a rack The GEQ EFFECT field shows the approximate set tings and input output levels of the GEQ A rack in which a Flex I5GEQ is mounted will show informa tion for two GEQ units A and B Initial Data 000 ADMIN INS CH 1 gt INS CH 2 gt INS CH 3 gt E INS CH 4 gt 4 Bo 4 p Reverb Plate REUERB PLRTE Mono Delay MONO DELAY 2 D Racks 2 INPUT buttons 3 OUTPUT buttons e If youre u
315. e channel on off will be sent f the PRE button is on then you will be able to select either PRE EQ immediately before the attenuator or PRE FADER immediately before the fader for each MIX bus gt p 213 Sending the signal from an input channel to a MIX bus 8 To switch the on off status of a signal sent to a VARI FIXED type MIX bus move the cursor to the TO MIX ON OFF button in the screen and press the ENTER key If the send destination MIX bus is set to stereo opera tion of the adjacent left right pair of buttons is linked 9 If you want to operate a channel that is not currently shown in the popup window use the SEL key to select that channel and then make settings for it 1 if you want to adjust the send level to another MIX bus use the keys of the MIX MATRIX SELECT section to select another MIX bus and make settings in the same 1 When you ve finished making settings move the cursor to the CLOSE button or the x symbol in the upper right of the win dow and press the ENTER key Input channel operations em Using the faders SENDS ON FADER mode Here s how to use the top panel faders encoders to adjust the send level and turn the signal on off for the signals sent from all input channels to a specific MIX bus 1 Make sure that an output port is assigned to the MIX bus to which you re sending the signal and that a monitor system or exter nal effect processor etc i
316. e cursor to the FIL TER BOX and use the dial or the DEC INC keys to select either HPF high pass filter BPF band pass filter or LPF low pass filter then press the ENTER key If you select in the FILTER box no filter will be applied NOTE After changing the type of filter in the FILTER box be sure to press the ENTER key to apply the change 9 KEY IN CUE GATE and DUCKING only This button lets you cue monitor the currently selected key in signal gt e Even if you ve selected MIX CUE mode when all channels whose CUE key is on will be mixed for monitoring as the cue mode turning on the KEY IN CUE button will give priority to monitoring only the corresponding signal All CUE keys that had been turned on at that time will be forcibly defeated KEY IN CUE will automatically be cancelled when you exit the corresponding screen To turn dynamics on off move the cursor to the DYNAMICS ON OFF button and press the ENTER key If you want to make settings in the DYNAMICS 1 DYNAMICS 2 popup window move the cursor to the desired button knob and use the ENTER key the dial or the DEC INC keys You can also adjust the dynamics threshold by using the DYNAMICS 1 DYNAMICS 2 encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL section Using dynamics 6 Select the key in signal as necessary 7 if you want to initialize dynamics settings or You can select one of the following as the key in
317. e insert out in of a desired channel ap R RETURN except for a ST IN channel so that the effect is inserted into that channel Rack 8 Insert out of a Insert in of a desired channel EFFECT m desired channel Except for a ST IN channel The internal effects fall into two categories STEREO type 2 in 2 out effects that process the L R channel input signals independently and MIX type 1 in 2 out effects that mix the two channels to monaural before pro cessing them If signals are assigned to both the L and R inputs of an effect the way in which the L R channels are processed will depend on whether a Stereo effect type or a Mix effect type is selected as follows 166 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Using an internal effect via send return Here we will explain how to use a MIX bus as an effect send bus and a ST IN channel as an effect return channel so that the effect can be used in a send return configura tion e If you want to use a MIX bus as an effect send bus select VARI as the bus type gt p 213 This will allow you to adjust the send level separately for each input channel f you want to use the input to an effect in stereo it is convenient to assign the send source MIX bus to stereo gt p 213 1 As described in Mounting a GEQ or effect in the virtual rack p 158 steps 1 3 mount an effect in a rack A rack in which an effect is mounted will indicate t
318. e itself but in order to log in as a User you must USER 7 1 M M CH OPERATION connect USB memory on which a user authentication key CH1 CH9 16 CH17 24 5 has been saved If you disconnect the USB memory after Riz j logging in your access privileges will forcibly revert to MIX1 8 MIX9 16 MTRX1 8 ST MONO Guest HA 55 FRDER ON SCEHE LIST FILE LORD MONITOR If the power is turned off and then on again the console will gener LIBRARY LIST SYSTEM SETUP ally start up in the log in state in which the power was turned off If a user password has been assigned you will need to enter the password However if you cancel the input you will be forcibly logged in as Guest Similarly you will also be forcibly logged in as Guest if you had been logged in as a user requiring a user authen tication key but USB memory is no longer connected D USER The user name of up to eight characters is shown and 2 can be edited here When you move the cursor to this Logging in as Administrator field and press the ENTER key a keyboard window will appear allowing you to enter a user name 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section press the p 34 SETUP key repeatedly to access the USER SETUP screen 2 PASSWORD Specify a password of up to eight characters Press this Log in popup button to access a keyboard window where you can enter the passwor
319. e output signal from the effect This parameter is provided for all effect types If you re using the effect via send return set this to 100 effect sound only For details on editing the effect parameters refer to Editing the internal effect parameters p 170 To adjust the effect send level of an input channel press the HOME key to access the SELECTED CH VIEW screen and access the input channel that you want to control Initial Data 000 HA f if O ATK REL GAIN KNEE X LON DIRECT LOW L MID H P4 SHELF 0 70 0 2 EF 125 1 00k 4 25 1 00 0 0k Xj XE E E 0 0 oo JN 0 SEND field 2 TO MIX SEND LEVEL knob 7 Move the cursor to the TO MIX SEND LEVEL knob for the desired MIX bus and use the dial or the DEC INC keys to adjust the send level With these settings the signal will be sent from the input channel to the internal effect Adjust the send level of other input channels in the same way By moving the cursor to the knob and pressing the ENTER key you can switch the signal sent from each channel to the corresponding bus on off and access a popup window where you can choose the send point PRE POST p 64 Make sure that the send level from the ST IN channel you selected in step 3 to the corresponding MIX bus is set to O If you raise this send level the output of the effect will be returned to the input of the same effe
320. e previous screen 7 Repeat steps 3 6 to assign channels to other output ports r DIRECT OUT based te LS9 32 D Category tab This selects the type of channel that will be shown in the lower part of the window Each tab corresponds to the following channels OUT CH Output channels MIX channels 1 16 MATRIX channels 1 8 STEREO L R channel and MONO C channel will be shown MONITOR OUT The MONITOR OUT L R C channels will be shown CH 1 32 1 32 33 64 INPUT channels 1 32 1 64 will be shown 2 Channel select button This selects the channel that is assigned to the output port 98 LS9 16 32 Owners Manual Changing the input patching Changing the input patching When the LS9 is in the initial state the following input ports jacks internal ports are patched to each input channel For the LS9 16 Input channels INPUT channels 1 16 Input port jack internal port INPUT jacks 1 16 INPUT channels 17 32 Slot input channels 1 16 ST IN channels 1 4 L R Rack outputs 5 8 L R For the LS9 32 Input channels Input port jack internal port INPUT channels 1 32 INPUT jacks 1 32 INPUT channels 33 48 Slot 1 input channels 1 16 INPUT channels 49 64 Slot 2 input channels 1 16 ST IN channels 1 4 L R Rack out
321. e processed digitally If a digital I O card installed in a slot is digitally con nected to an external device such as a DAW system CD player or HDR hard disk recorder and you want digital audio signals to be transmitted or received between the LS9 and the external device you must synchronize the word clock of the respective devices In order for this to occur one device must be the word clock master transmitting device and the other device must be the slave receiving device and the slave device must synchronize to the master device If you want to set the LS9 as the word clock slave so that it will synchronize to the word clock supplied from an exter nal device you can either use the clock data included in the digital audio signal received from a digital I O card or provide dedicated word clock to the WORD CLOCK IN jack located on the rear panel Digital audio device Clock data Slot o D Oo 000 amp sooo 2 S 0000000005 s HDR or other digital audio device word clock master 555 il conc o 5 eni AAAI 88 159 word clock sla word clock slave Digital audio signal Clock data Slot WORDCLOCK m ill Digital or other EE digital audio device word
322. e selected bus 2 Slot select tabs LS9 32 only These tabs select slots 1 2 4 Use the port select buttons slot select tabs and port select buttons to select an input port move the cursor to the CLOSE button and press the ENTER key The input port will be assigned to the bus you selected in step 3 The signal input from this port will be mixed with the signal of the corresponding bus inside the cas cade master 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to assign input ports to other buses NOTE You can t assign the same input port to two or more buses If you select a bus to which a signal route has already been assigned the previous assignment will be cancelled Using cascade connections Basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses 6 If you want to link specific parameters or events between two LS9 consoles proceed as follows D Move the cursor to the CASCADE LINK PORT field and use the dial or the DEC INC keys to specify the port that will transmit receive control signals for cascade link The items you can select are the same as in the CASCADE OUT PATCH popup window gt p 211 Control signals for cascade link and MIDI messages cannot share the same port If you select a port that is already speci fied for transmission reception of MIDI messages a dialog box will ask whether it is OK to cancel the existing settings Move the cursor to the CASCADE COMM LINK field and use the dial or the DEC INC
323. e sure that the fader layer that contains the desired channel is selected in the LAYER section If the LS9 is correctly operating with the new clock If necessary use the keys of the LAYER section to the symbol located immediately above the correspond switch fader layers ing button will turn light blue Also the frequency of the selected clock source is shown in the upper left of 2 LAYER LAYER window 4 To close the WORD CLOCK popup window T32 33 64 move the cursor the CLOSE button or E 7 the x symbol in the upper right of the win MASTER CUSTOM MASTER CUSTOM dow and press the ENTER key TADER FADER LS9 16 LS9 32 The word clock setting is maintained even if you turn off the power If you ve set the LS9 to synchronize to the word clock 3 Press the SEL key of the channel for the of an external device be aware that an error message will appear and the system will not operate correctly if the exter INPUT jack you want to operate so that the nal device is powered off when you power cycle the LS9 or if LED is lit the connection is disconnected 5 That channel is now selected for operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 2 n NE TEE E L SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL CUE CUE CUE CUE CUE CUE CUE CUE CDove CDove Cover CDove Cover Cover Cae C32 C2 or 1 mE C22 Care 2 um m
324. e these buttons to select the output destination 3 CLOSE button Closes the popup window 160 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual The following output destinations can be selected in this popup window multiple selections are allowed Tab name Button name Output destination eu INPUT channel 1 32 CH 1 32 1 CH 1 32 inputs CH33 64 1 INPUT channel 33 64 LS9 32 CH 33 64 inputs STIN1L 1R STIN 1 ST IN channel 1 4 inputs CH 1 32 INPUT channel 1 32 INSERT OUT 1 32 Insert In MIX 1 16 MIX channel 1 16 Insert In MATRIX channel 1 8 OUT CH Mp Den Insert In INSERT OUT STEYR STEREO L R channel MONO i Insert In MONO C chan nel Insert In 1 This cannot be selected for 31 Band GEQ or Flex15GEQ e f you selected the Insert In of a certain channel as the output destination for 31 Band GEQ or Flex15GEQ the Insert Out of the same channel will automatically be selected as the input source of that rack When you defeat an Insert In the Insert Out will also be defeated automatically 7 Switch the tabs as necessary and select the output destination that you want to use When you select an output destination in the INPUT CH SELECT popup window a dialog box will ask you to confirm the patching change To confirm the opera tion move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key You have the option of making settings so that the p
325. e way in which the sample will play back For details on the parameters refer to the supplementary material at the end of this manual gt p 233 6 To play back the recorded sample move the cursor to the PLAY button and press the ENTER key NOTE Graphic EQ and effects N e If after recording you turn on the REC button again to enter record ready mode the sampled content will be erased LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual J 173 Using the graphic EQ and effect libraries Using the graphic EQ and effect libraries You can use dedicated libraries to store and recall graphic EQ and effect settings 174 GEQ library Use the GEQ library to store and recall GEQ settings This GEQ library can be referenced by all GEQ units used in LS9 However the 31 Band and Flex15GEQ are different types You cannot recall a GEQ library item of a different type 200 items can be recalled from the library Number 000 is read only and the remaining library numbers can be freely read or written To access the GEQ library move the cursor to the LIB toolbutton in the upper part of the screen when a GEQ is shown in the RACK screen and press the ENTER key 000 1 Data LIE INPUT OUTPUT INS CH 1 INS CH 1 315 63 125 250 500 ik 2k 4 50 16 0k 100 200 400 800 16 dum 160 13151 630 1 25 9 oocoeesgco ec aoc CD LIB button For details on using the library refer to Using libraries
326. ead amp settings for phantom power gain and phase to obtain the optimal input signal p 57 2 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section HOME key The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the display D TO ST field 2 TO ST PAN knob for a ST IN channel the TO ST BAL knob 3 Use the LAYER section to select the desired fader layer 4 Press a SEL key in the channel module section or ST IN section to select the input channel for the desired source 5 If you only want to adjust the pan or bal ance for that channel operate the SELECTED CHANNEL section PAN encoder gt p 86 You can obtain the same result by moving the cursor to the PAN BAL knob in the SELECTED CH VIEW screen and operating the dial or the DEC INC keys 6 If you want to switch the on off setting of the signal sent from the input channel to the STEREO MONO bus or if you want to switch between ST MONO mode and LCR mode move the cursor to the TO ST PAN knob or the PAN popup button located in the TO ST field of the SELECTED CH VIEW Screen and press the ENTER key to access the TO STEREO MONO popup win dow In the TO STEREO MONO popup window you can switch between ST MONO mode and LCR mode in sets of eight channels and change the on off status and pan balance settings of the signals sent from those channels to the STEREO MONO bus This popup window shows the parameters for the eight channels that include the channel you s
327. ection press the CHANNEL JOB key repeatedly to access the MUTE GROUP screen of the CHANNEL JOB screens The CHANNEL JOB key accesses various CHAN NEL JOB screens that allow you to perform opera tions on channels The screen will change each time you press the key Grouping and linking M DISPLAY ACCESS SCENE MONITOR MEMORY CHANNEL JOB key SETUP CHANNEL JOB RECORDER METER 1 4 5 8 RACK LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual J 121 Using mute groups The MUTE GROUP screen of the CHANNEL JOB screen contains the following items CH 1 Initial Data ch 1 000 R ADMIN MUTE GROUP Choose MUTE GROUP nuthber s SEL of member CHs and rr CH1 8 CH9 16 CH17 24 CH25 32 STIN CH33 40 CH41 48 49 56 CH57 64 MIX1 8 9 16 MTRX1 5 ST MUTE GROUP 0 Channel display field Channels assigned to the mute group selected by the 1 8 buttons are highlighted in red If the SAFE button is selected channels that are temporarily excluded from all mute groups are highlighted in green 2 CLEAR ALL button When you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key all channels that are currently high lighted in the channel display field will be cleared 3 1 8 buttons These buttons select the mute group that is shown in the channel display field SAFE button Use this button when you want to temporarily e
328. ection press the SETUP key repeatedly to access the USER SETUP screen SAVE KEY popup button Initial Data 000 ROM CURRENT USER Administrator 52 for Guest PREFERENCE PREFERENCE USER DEFINED USER INED id KI h EYS CUSTOM FADER CUSTOM FADER LAYER LAYER USER LEVEL USER LEVEL LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual 3 Move the cursor to the SAVE KEY popup button and press the ENTER key A dialog box will ask whether you really want to over write save the user authentication key 4 To overwrite save move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key If you attempt to log in as a different user after changing the settings but not saving them a message will ask you whether you want to save the user authentication key In this case you can also save the user authentication key by moving the cur sor to the OK button and pressing the ENTER key Changing the user level Here s how to view change the user level of the logged in user For the Administrator There is no such setting for the Administrator himself but the set ting for the Guest account can be changed e For the Guest The setting of the Guest account can be viewed It cannot be changed For a normal User The setting of that User account can be viewed It cannot be changed For a Power User The setting of that User account can be changed 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS secti
329. ed appropriately In actual operation there s no need to recall the default setting scene each time you start up 1 Power on the LS9 When you power on the LS9 you must turn on your equipment in the order of the LS9 power amp or monitor system Use the opposite order when power ing off 2 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section press the SCENE MEMORY key to access the SCENE LIST screen In this screen you can recall or store scene memories 00 1 Check SCENE LIST copy 714 STATUS Initial Data E Initial Settins Test mode setting STORE RECALL D Scene list RECALL button 3 Move the cursor to the scene list and use the dial or the DEC INC keys to make 000 Initial Data appear in the highlighted line in the center of the list looo 8 4 Move the cursor to the RECALL button and press the ENTER key Scene number 000 will be loaded and the mix parameters will return to their initial state Be aware that when scene number 000 is loaded the input patch output patch internal effect GEQ and HA head settings will also return to their initial state However the word clock source selection will not be affected LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Connections and setup e 45 Setup required when starting up Word clock connection and set tings Word clock is the clock data that provides the timing basis for audio signals to b
330. ed in as a user for whom no password is set the console will be unlocked If you are logged in as a user for whom a password is set a keyboard win dow will appear allowing you to enter the password NAME PASSWORD strator CLEAR 2 B 80 51 0 85 95 mn ed e se GE fio E63 E33 2 i Lb on s SHIFT LOCK CRNCEL 2 Enter the password of the logged in user move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The console will be unlocked you will return to the MISC SETUP screen and the controls will be opera ble once again You may disconnect the USB memory device while the con sole is locked Insert the USB memory device before you defeat Console Lock LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Specifying the CONSOLE LOCK screen image If an image file is saved in USB memory the CONSOLE LOCK screen can display that image In the SAVE LOAD popup window specify the image file that you want to display and load it from USB memory For the procedure of loading from USB memory refer to Loading a file from USB memory p 200 The image file is not backed up in internal memory Each time you turn on the power you will need to reload it from USB memory The image file will be converted into 320 x 240 pixels 216 colors for display The image file is limited to 8 16 24 32 bit color un compressed and a maximum of 307 256 bytes U
331. ed the GEQ and press the ENTER key The RACK screen will appear allowing you to edit the parameters of the GEQ or effect wr 75 You can also access the RACK screen by pressing the RACK 1 4 key or RACK 5 8 key By repeatedly pressing the RACK 1 4 key you can access the RACK 1 4 screens and by repeatedly pressing the RACK 5 8 key you can access the RACK 5 8 screens and EXTERNAL HA screen e The RACK screens for the 31 GEQ and the Flex15GEQ plays two GEQ units A and B mounted in a single rack cory OUTPUT RACK 1 RACK 2 315 65 125 250 500 1k 2k 4k 8 0k 16 0 5 100 200 400 800 16 315 63 125 0 80 160 1515 650 125 25 5 10 20 id 9oooceesco ec 345 9 10111213141516 FADER ER 20 039 D GEQ ON OFF button Switches the currently selected GEQ on off 2 FLAT button This returns all bands of the currently selected GEQ to 0 dB 3 INPUT button This button displays the OUTPUT CH SELECT popup window where you can select the input source of the rack The operating procedure is the same as for the INPUT button in the GEQ EFFECT field 4 OUTPUT button This button displays the INPUT CH SELECT popup window where you can select the output destination of the rack The operating procedure is the same as for the OUTPUT button in the GEQ EFFECT field 162 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual are nearly identical However the Flex15GEQ individually dis 5 GEQ LINK button
332. ediately the data is received Transmission PARAMETER CHANGE will be sent in reply to Request If PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO is on the message will be sent as it is STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 3E Digital mixer MODEL ID 00010010 12 LS9 DATA 00000000 00 OTHER DATA CATEGORY FUNCTION 01001100 L ASCII CODE NAME 01101001 i ASCII CODE 01100010 b ASCII CODE 01000001 A ASCII CODE 01110100 t ASCII CODE 01110010 r ASCII CODE 01100010 ASCII CODE 01110100 t ASCII CODE MODULE NAME Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE DATA Onnnnnnn nh Scene Library number High Onnnnnnn nl Scene Library number Low eh Element High el Element Low 01111111 ih Index High Oiiiiiii il Index Low ch Channel High cl Channel Low 0000dddd dd _ Data28 31bit Oddddddd dd Data21 27bit Oddddddd dd Datal4 20bit Oddddddd dd Data7 13bit Oddddddd Data0 6bit EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 4 4 2 Format PARAMETER REQUEST Receive The PARAMETER CHANGE will be sent with Device number Rx CH immediately the data is received STATUS ID No
333. ee Cae nce com dmm STEREO L R MONOQ C INSERT POINT PATCH PRE FADER INSERT OUT ToQUTPUTPATCH STERE iL EPREEQ INSERT OUT INSERT OUT LR MONO C PBI POSTON _ INSERT OUT STEREO 187 INSERT IN L R MONO C P PREEQ EQOUT DYNAOUT PREFADER POST ON METER METER METER METER GR METER Sum T ME STEREO QUT INSERT ay 4BAND COMPANG INSERT do INSERT LRMONO C To OUTPUT PATCH EXPAND To MONITOR SELECT PRE FADER POST ON To RECORDER IN PATCH PREEQ POSTEOM INSERT OUT M PRE FADER INSERT OUTE POST ON PRE EQ INSERT OUT LOO 0UT To STEREO OUT L C R C CUE ON lt oB PRE FADER PFL POST ON AFL GRE DUTES SC d pm MATRIX1 3 7 i LEVEL g ON 6 PRE FADER post on 19 MATRIX lt MATRIX2 4 8 LEVEL cg ON c 7 MATRIX channels 1 8 These channels process the signals sent from MIX channels and STEREO MONO channels to MATRIX buses and send them to the corresponding output ports M 0 ST MATRIX CUE 12 1516 LR C 12 78 LR ATT attenuator Attenuates boosts the level of the signal 4 BAND EQ 4 band equalizer This is a parametric EQ with four bands
334. ee space in the USB File editing 7 PATH 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section press the This shows the name of the current directory You can SETUP key repeatedly to access the USER move the cursor to the arrow button and press the SETUP screen ENTER key to move to the next upper level If the current directory is the top level the arrow button is Initial Data 5 5 000 p3 oun SETUP CURRENT USER STORRGE t if the direct Id d 237 Administratorii PASSWORD 4 save If the directory name would excee CREATE USER KEY Guest PREFERENCE File list This area lists the files that are saved on USB memory The highlighted line indicates the file selected for CUSTOM FADER CUSTOM FADER operations The file list contains the following items If you move LEVEL C USER LEVEL the cursor to the name of an item and press the ENTER key that item name will turn orange and the list will be sorted according to the character strings for 2 Move the cursor to the SAVE LOAD button those items Each time you press the ENTER key and press the ENTER key the sorting order will alternate between ascending and descending order USER DEFINED USER DEFINED KEYS KEYS The SAVE LOAD popup window will appear and the saved files and sub directories will be shown in a list FILE NAME Indicates the file name or directory name and shows an icon indicating its type READ ONLY A lock symbol is
335. eed as follows CD Select the fader layer that contains the link desti nation channel 2 Use one of the following methods to select the link source channel If the link source and link destination channels are in the same fader layer Hold down the link source SEL key and select the SEL key of the link destination channel If the link source and link destination channels are in different fader layers Use the cursor keys to move the white frame of the channel display field to the link source channel then hold down the ENTER key and select the SEL key of the link destination channel At this time the values of the parameters you selected in steps 2 and 3 will be copied from the link source to the link destination channel Subsequent operations of the parameters you selected in steps 2 and 3 will be linked between channels belonging to the same link group The current link status is shown in the channel display field of the window NOTE HA GAIN and fader values which are linked while preserving their level difference will not be copied Link source channel CH 1 Initial Data ch 1 000 R ADMIN CH LINK Hold down after ch 9 16 CH33 40 CH41 48 49 56 CHS LINK PARAMET END PARAMETER TO MIX 3 2 2 5 The Channel Link function When you press the SEL key of a channel belonging to a link group to make it light the SEL keys of all channels belong ing
336. een will appear in the display itial Data 000 MIN ON T HIGH J D SEND popup button 3 Use the LAYER section keys and the SEL keys of the channel module section or ST IN section to select the send source input channel 4 Use the MIX MATRIX SELECT section keys to select the send destination MIX bus D Move the cursor to the SEND popup button in the screen and press the ENTER key to access the MIX SEND popup window In the MIX SEND popup window you can control the send level on off setting and send point for the sig nals sent from a set of eight input channels to the cur rently selected MIX bus a gt e If you ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window gt p 194 you can also access the above popup window by pressing the SELECTED CHANNEL section SELECTED SEND encoder If you want to switch the on off status of the signal sent to a VARI type MIX bus you can move the cursor to the TO MIX LEVEL knob in the screen and press the ENTER key to access the above popup window LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual The MIX SEND popup window shows the parameters for the eight channels that include the channel you selected in step 3 The contents of the window will dif fer depending on whether the send destination MIX bus is VARI type or FIXED type For a VARI type MIX bus 7 SP ch E E LE
337. effect in rack 5 or rack 7 NOTE Effect types FREEZE and can be used only in rack 5 or 7 3 Move the cursor to the rack in which the effect you want to edit is mounted and press the ENTER key The RACK screen will appear allowing you to edit the parameters of the effect You can also access the RACK 5 8 screens by repeat edly pressing the RACK 5 8 key About the internal effects 4 Select FREEZE as the effect type For details on selecting the effect type refer to step 3 of Editing the internal effect parameters gt 170 If the FREEZE effect type is selected a PLAY but ton REC button and progress bar are shown in the special parameter field MIX m 100 INPUT OUTPUT FREEZE L INSCHS9 INS CHS L1IN ZOUT1 a MANUAL CONTI 100 D PLAY button 2 REC button 3 Progress bar As an alternative to switching the effect type you can also recall settings that use the FREEZE effect type from the effect library 5 To begin recording sampling turn on the REC button to make it light and then turn on the PLAY button The signal being input to the effect will be recorded The progress bar shows the current recording location When a fixed time has elapsed the buttons will auto matically turn off You can adjust the parameters in the window to make detailed settings for recording time the way in which recording will begin and th
338. eld 2 SAFE button This lets you select the channels that will be set to Mute Safe status 2 Move the cursor to the SAFE button and press the ENTER key 3 Use the LAYER section keys and the chan nel module section SEL keys to select the channels you want to exclude from mute group operations multiple selections are allowed The SEL key will light and the corresponding chan nel in the channel display field of the screen will be highlighted in green You can cancel the Mute Safe status by pressing a lit SEL key once again to make it go dark Channels that are set to Mute Safe will not be affected when you mute a mute group to which that channel belongs Mute Safe settings are not saved in the scene They will remain valid until you cancel the settings LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Grouping and linking M 123 The Channel Link function The Channel Link function Channel Link is a function that links the operation of parameters such as fader and EQ between input channels The parameters to be linked can be selected from the following choices HA GAIN settings linked while preserving the difference in level EQ settings Dynamics 1 and 2 settings On off status of signals sent to MIX buses Send levels of signals sent to MIX buses Fader operations linked while preserving the difference in level ON key operations Two or more input channels that are linked are called a
339. elect a port that is already speci fied for transmission reception of MIDI messages a dialog box will ask whether it is OK to cancel the existing settings 2 Move the cursor to the CASCADE COMM LINK field and use the dial or the DEC INC keys to select the item you want to link You can choose from the following items e OFF Linking will not occur e CUE The following cue related parameters and events will be linked Cue enable disable Cue mode MIX CUE or LAST CUE Cue point settings for input channels and out put channels Using cascade connections ALL AII linkable parameters and events including cue related parameters will be linked Cue related parameters and events see above Scene recall operations Scene store operations DIMMER MONITOR screen operations Switching the fader layer Panel LED and display brightness MISC SETUP screen operations Master mute group operations 7 To close the OUTPUT PORT SELECT popup window move the cursor to the CLOSE but ton or the x symbol in the upper right and press the ENTER key Other functions di LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual J 211 Using cascade connections 212 Operations on the cascade master 1 9 1 Inthe DISPLAY ACCESS section press the SETUP key repeatedly to access the SYS TEM SETUP screen 2 In the MIXER SETUP field located at the lower part of the SYSTEM SETUP screen move the cursor to the C
340. elect buttons to select the icon you want to use for that channel The selected icon is shown in the icon button in the upper part of the window LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual 7 If desired use the sample name select but tons to select a sample name The selected sample name will be entered in the channel name field in the upper part of the window You add or edit the text after entering the sample name the channel name field If you want to assign channel names that consist of a common name plus a number such as Vocal 1 and Vocal 2 you can simply enter a sample name and then add a number 8 If you want to enter a channel name directly or edit the previously entered sample name move the cursor to the channel name field in the upper part of the window and press the ENTER key The keyboard window will appear in the lower part of the window allowing you to enter or edit the text For details on using the keyboard window refer to p 34 9 Use the SEL keys to select another output channel and specify its icon and channel name in the same way While the PATCH NAME popup window is displayed you can use the SEL keys to switch the channel that you re operating 10 When you ve finished entering information move the cursor to the CLOSE button or the x symbol in the upper right of the win dow and press the ENTER key You will return to the SELECTED CH VIEW screen Sending signals from MIX channels t
341. elected in step 4 Lose e If you ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window gt p 194 you can also access the above popup window by pressing the SELECTED CHANNEL section PAN encoder Input channel operations em This popup window contains the following items D Channel number Channel name This indicates the number and name of the channel you re operating 2 MODE button This button selects either ST MONO mode or LCR mode to as the way in which the signal will be sent to the STEREO bus and MONO bus This mode can be specified individually for each channel The setting will alternate between the two modes each time you press the button The currently selected mode is shown by the position of the indicator the green symbol located immedi ately above the button 3 ST button 2 MONO button When the MODE button is set to ST MONO mode these buttons act as individual on off switches for the signal sent from that channel to the STEREO bus and MONO bus 5 TO ST PAN TO ST BALANCE knob For an INPUT channel this acts as a PAN knob that adjusts the left right panning of the signal sent to the STEREO bus For a ST IN channel this acts as a BALANCE knob that adjusts the volume balance of the left right signals sent to the STEREO bus Move the cursor to the knob and use the dial or the DEC INC keys to adjust the setting LS9 16 32 Owner s
342. ely high setting gt p 115 Sound is output even though it is not patched to an output channel Could you have assigned an input channel to direct out gt 103 O Could you have assigned an output channel as the insert out gt p 101 The volume of a specific channel rises and falls Could GATE COMP be set to ducking gt p 117 Operating a fader does not control the level as you expect O Is SENDS ON FADER selected and INPUT TO MIX FADER and so on active in the panel Only the sound of a specific channel is heard from the MONITOR OUT or PHONES jack O Could a CUE key be on Noise occurs from an externally connected recorder or other device O Is the word clock set correctly p 206 O Could the input signal be unsynchronized O Could oscillator or talkback be turned on gt p 151 153 High frequency range is attenuated O Could emphasis be applied This problem will occur if the input signal status does not match the emphasis data gt p 206 O Could EQ be applied gt p 115 An input signal is being input but there s no monitor output O Is the dimmer applied O Is the MONITOR C assigned even though its output port has not been connected to external device Not enough headroom especially when EQ boost is applied O Use the EQ attenuator function to lower the level gt p 115 Signal is delayed O Check whether the delay setting for each channel i
343. ent USB memory tting editin ite setting g Create new Overwrite save Available Can 1 6 for Cannot edit the user level since Administrator Administrator bue ip the administrator can always Available Available Guest perform all operations Can edit i the user level for Guest Power user Available Available Available Available Available Available Normal user a Available ser user without N A Only settings Power User Available View only Available m other than User privileges Level N A Guest Available View only Available Setting the Administrator pass word With the factory settings the Administrator password is not set meaning that anyone can log in with Administrator privileges and perform all operations If you want to restrict the operations of other users you must specify an Administrator password 1 Inthe DISPLAY ACCESS section press the SETUP key repeatedly to access the USER SETUP screen PASSWORD CHANGE popup button 000 Initial Data R ADMIN RENT USER Administrator uus PREFERENCE PREFERENCE USER eel NED wv USER DET NEO CUSTOM FADER CUSTOM FADER LAYER LAYER USER LEVEL USER LEVEL 2 Move the cursor to the PASSWORD CHANGE popup button and press the ENTER key A keyboard window will appear allowing you to enter a password NEW PASSWORD S
344. ently abbreviated as GEQ and effects into the desired signal route to process the signals You can use two types of GEQ 31 Band GEQ which lets you freely adjust thirty one bands fre quency regions and Flex15GEQ which lets you adjust any fifteen of thirty one bands You can also use 48 different effect types In order to use a GEQ or effect you must mount the GEQ or effect in one of the eight virtual racks provided in the screen and patch the input and output of that rack to the desired signal route In other words the operation is just as though you had installed a signal processor or effect device in an actual rack and used patch cords to connect it Only GEQ can be mounted in racks 1 4 and either GEQ or effects can be mounted in racks 5 8 Figure 1 Up to two channels of input and output can be used for each rack However if the 31 Band GEQ is mounted in a rack there will be only one channel each for input and output Figure 2 shows the signal flow for the virtual racks INSERT IN I c
345. eps will differ depending on whether you selected a ST MONO mode MIX channel or an LCR mode MIX channel in step 6 For a MIX channel set to 5 mode 11 Use the ST button and MONO button in the TO STEREO MONO popup window as on off switches for the signal sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO bus and MONO bus 12 Use the SELECTED CHANNEL section PAN encoder to adjust the pan balance of the signal sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO bus You can obtain the same result by using the TO ST PAN TO ST BALANCE knob in the TO STEREO MONO popup window For a MIX channel set to LCR mode 11 Use the LCR button in the TO STEREO MONO popup window as an on off switch for the signal sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO bus and MONO bus For a MIX channel that is set to LCR mode the signal sent to the STEREO bus and MONO bus can be switched on off in a single operation 12 Use the CSR knob in the TO STEREO MONO popup window to adjust the proportion between the signal level sent from that MIX channel to the STEREO L R bus and the signal level sent to the MONO C bus 13 Use the TO ST PAN knob in the TO STEREO MONO popup window to set the panning of the signal sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO L R bus and the MONO C bus If the CSR knob is set to 0 operating the TO ST PAN knob of a MIX channel will change the signal levels sent to the STEREO L R bus and MONO C bus as shown in the fo
346. er operation applicability 256 Mixing parameter operation applicability This table indicates how the behaviors of each of the input channel and output channel parameters are affected by Stereo Link Recall Safe and User Level settings B input Channels Parameter Ne LINK RECALL SAFE USER LEVEL Il MATRIX Channels HA INPUT HA INPUT INPUT HA Parameter Stereo RECALL SAFE USER LEVEL NAME NAME ICON MATRIX NAME OUTPUT NAME ICON INPUT NAME INPUT NAME MATRIX Insert On MATRIX ALL INPUT PROCESSING LCR 9 INPUT ALL PROCESSING MATRIX On MATRIX InetOn INPUT ALL usd FADER ON nsert On i PROCESSING Fader MATRIX FADER MATRIX Direct Out o INPUT ALL INPUT FADER ON On Level PROCESSING MATRIX Pan Balance MATRIX ALL INPUT FADER ON On INPUT ON INPUTON FADER ON NIE Att o MATRIX EQ Fad INPUT FADER INPUT FADER INPUT PROCESSING ader FADER ON Dynamics1 O i MATRIX DYNA1 MATRIX Pan INPUT ALL INPUT PROCESSING Balance FADER ON EQ MATRIX MATRIX INPUT PROCESSING t 9 INEUT ER INPUTEQ PROCESSING Mute Assign MATRIX ALL MUTE ASSIGN INPUT WITH MATRIX HPF INPUT EQ INPUT EQ PROCESSING To Matrix On WITH MATRIX SEND SEND INPUT W
347. ess the MIX 1 16 ENTER key MIX channels 1 16 The OUTPUT CH SELECT popup window will MTRX 1 8 MATRIX channels 1 8 INPUT CH SELECT e ST L R tPLRYBRCK OUT LI CH i STEREO channel L R eSTL C STEREO channel L mixed with the MONO C channel J e ST R C 2 channel R mixed with the MONO C CLOSE MONO LS9 32 MONO channel CH1 32 1 64 Direct output of an INPUT channel 1 32 1 64 Category tabs These tabs select the type of channels shown in the 3 Use the category tabs and the port select lower part of the window buttons to select the channel that you want CH 1 32 1 32 33 64 to patch to the USB memory recorder input INPUT channels 1 32 1 32 33 64 will be 1 0 If you select a channel to which another port is already shown patched a dialog box will ask you to confirm the patch e STIN change Move the cursor to the OK button of the 9 dialog box and press the ENTER key L R channels of ST IN channels 1 4 will be shown gt NOTE e 2 Channel select buttons s You cannot assign multiple channels to a single input Select the channels that will be patched to the USB memory recorder s outputs from the following 2 choices T 4 When you ve finished making the assign ment move the cursor to the CLOSE button and press the ENTER key You will return to the RECORDER screen STIN 1L 1R STIN 4L 4R L R channels of ST IN channels 1 4 CH 1 32
348. et combinations of channels to the channel module section and the ST IN section The combination of channels corresponding to each key is as follows For the LS9 16 LAYER key module 1 16 ST IN 1 2 LAYER 1 16 key CH 1 16 ST IN 1 2 LAYER 17 32 key CH 17 32 ST IN 3 4 LAYER MASTER key MIX 1 16 For the LS9 32 LAYER key module 1 16 17 24 25 31 32 ST IN 1 4 LAYER 1 32 key CH 1 16 CH 17 24 CH 25 31 CH 32 ST IN 1 4 LAYER 33 64 key CH 33 48 CH 49 56 CH 57 63 CH 64 ST IN 1 4 LAYER MASTER key MIX 1 16 MATRIX 1 8 MONO 4 LAYER CUSTOM FADER key This key assigns the channels selected by you the user to the channel module section and the ST IN section For the channel assignment procedure gt p 91 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual J 19 Top panel MIX MATRIX SELECT 5 In this section you can select the MIX channel or MATRIX channel that will be the object of operations MIX MATRIX C MIX MATRIX 1 16 keys These keys select the MIX channel or if the selected channel is a MIX STEREO MONO channel the MATRIX channel whose send level will be adjusted by the SELECTED CHANNEL section The LED of the key corresponding to the currently selected channel will light or blink in the case of a MATRIX channel In SENDS ON FADER mode these keys select a MIX bus or MATRIX button as the send destination In this case the LED of
349. ettings executing the specified event on the LS9 will cause the corresponding program change or bank select program change message to be transmitted to the external device When an external device transmits a program change or bank select program change message on the appropriate channel the event assigned to that pro gram number of the corresponding MIDI channel or bank number will be executed gt You can use the CLEAR ALL button to erase all assignments to program numbers The INITIALIZE ALL button will return all program number assignments to their default state Assignments to program numbers are maintained as settings for the entire system rather than for individual scenes In Single mode if the same event is assigned to more than one program number on a Tx channel only the lowest pro gram number will be transmitted If the BANK button is on only the program number of the lowest bank number will be transmitted In Multi mode if the same event is assigned to more than one MIDI channel and more than one program number only the lowest program number on each MIDI channel will be trans mitted Using control changes to control parameters Using control changes to control parameters You can use MIDI control change messages to control specified events fader encoder opera tions ON key on off operations etc on the LS9 This capability can be used to record fader and key operation
350. evice number that specifies the transmitting or receiving device The transmit Tx channel and receive Rx channel specified in the MIDI SETUP page are used as the device number Please be aware that if the device number included in the transmitted parameter change does not match the device number of the receiving LS9 console the message will be ignored If parameter change and control change transmission recep tion are turned on at the same time a large amount of data will flood the MIDI port and cause overflows or other prob lems so you should avoid this 5 Use the Tx button and Rx button of the PARAMETER CHANGE field to turn on parameter change transmission reception In this state when you operate specific parameters on the LS9 the corresponding parameter change mes sages will be transmitted If valid parameter change messages are transmitted from an external device the parameters assigned to those parameter changes will be controlled MIDI LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual J 185 Using MMC MIDI Machine Control to operate the USB memory recorder Using MMC MIDI Machine Control to operate the USB memory recorder You can use MMC MIDI Machine Control messages to operate the LS9 s USB memory recorder from an external device MMC is only received not transmitted For details on the MMC messages that can be received refer to MIDI Data Format in the appendix 1 Connect the LS9 to your externa
351. ewly developed two input two output reverb algorithm Delivers dense and rich reverberation smooth decay and provides a spaciousness and depth that enhances the origi nal sound Choose from three types depending on your location and needs REV X HALL REV X ROOM and REV X PLATE Parameter Range Description REV TIME 0 28 27 94 s Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 120 0 ms HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 LO RATIO 0 1 2 4 Initial delay before reverb begins High frequency reverb time ratio Low frequency reverb time ratio Frequency point for LO RATIO set LO FREQ 22 0 Hz 18 0 kHz ting DIFF 0 10 Reverb diffusion left right reverb spread 2 0 28 Size of room DECAY 0 53 Gate closing speed HPF es High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF Low pass filter cutoff frequency 18 0 kHz THRU 1 These values are for when the effect type is REV X HALL and the ROOM SIZE 28 The range will differ depending on the effect type and ROOM SIZE setting Appendices LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual J 243 Effects and tempo synchronization Effects and tempo synchronization Some of the LS9 s effects allow you to synchronize the effect with the tempo There are two such types of effect delay type effects and modulation type effects For delay type effects the delay time will change according to the tempo For modulation type effects the frequency of the modulation signal will change according to t
352. f the LAYER section and the SEL keys of the channel module section to select the channel for the INPUT jack you want to control 4 Move the cursor to the HA popup button or GAIN knob in the SELECTED CH VIEW Screen and press the ENTER key The HA PATCH popup window will appear allowing you to adjust the HA gain switch phantom power on off and switch the phase in groups of eight channels This popup window shows the parameters for the eight channels that include the channel you selected in step 2 Setup required when starting up D 48V button 2 GAIN knob 3 phase button e If you ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window gt p 194 you can also access this popup window by pressing the SELECTED CHANNEL section HA GAIN encoder 5 To adjust the HA gain move the cursor to the GAIN knob of the desired channel in the window and use the dial or the DEC INC keys The input level of the channel is shown by the level meter located immediately to the right of the GAIN knob in the screen The PAD will be internally switched on or off when the gain is adjusted between 14 dB and 13 dB Keep in mind that noise may be generated if there is a difference between the Hot and Cold output impedance of the external device connected to the INPUT connector when using phantom power 6 To turn on phantom power for each chan nel move the cursor to the 48V b
353. fault setting Initial Data 1 000 R ADMIN RECALL SAFE CH RECALL SAFE GLOBAL CH9 16 17 24 CH33 40 CH41 48 43 56 MIX1 8 MIX9 16 MTRX1 SAFE PARAMETER Jon im LS9 16 32 Owners Manual 141 Using the Recall Safe function These buttons correspond to the following parameters 4 To enable Recall Safe for the selected chan nel turn on the SAFE button in the SAFE PARAMETER field Channels for which Recall Safe is enabled will be highlighted in the CH RECALL SAFE field SAFE button Button name Corresponding parameters ALL All parameters except for WITH MIX SEND EQ EQ settings including ATT DYNA 1 Dynamics 1 settings MTRX ON On off status of signals sent to MATRIX buses MTRX SEND Send levels of signals sent to MATRIX buses FADER Fader positions CH ON On off status of ON keys WITH MIX On off status and send level of signals sent SEND from input channels to MIX buses e If the ALL button is on all buttons will be turned off except for the WITH MIX SEND button located in the lower part of the SAFE PARAMETER field You can switch the WITH MIX SEND button on off while the ALL button is left on If a MATRIX channel is selected With the exception of the types of button that are dis played this is the same as for a MIX channel In addition you can use the WITH MATRIX SEND butto
354. fer as follows VARI This type allows the send level of the signal sent from the input channels to the MIX bus to be varied The point at which the signal is sent from the input channel to a VARI type MIX bus can be chosen from before the EQ attenuator before the fader or after the channel on off e FIXED With this type the send level of the signal sent from the input channels to the MIX bus is fixed The signal from an input channel is sent to a FIXED type MIX bus from before Pan if the MIX bus is monaural or after Pan if the MIX bus is stereo This type is used mainly when you want to distribute signals to an external device with the same mix as the STEREO MONO buses This type is used mainly for sending the signal to a moni tor system or external effect About word clock Word clock refers to the clock that provides the basis of timing for digital audio signal process ing Normally one device transmits a reference word clock signal and the other devices receive this word clock signal and synchronize to it In order to transmit or receive digital audio signals to or from an external device via the LS9 s 2TR IN DIGITAL 2TR OUT DIGITAL jacks or via a digital I O card installed in a slot the word clock must be synchronized between the devices Be aware that if the word clock is not synchro nized the signal will not be sent correctly or there may be unpleasant noise For details on syn chronizing the L
355. fff ASCII CODE Offfffff ff ASCII CODE Offfffff ff ASCII CODE MODULE NAME Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE DATA 05555555 sh number source start High 05555555 sl number source start Low eh number source end High el number end Low Oddddddd dh number destination start High Oddddddd dl number destination to start Low EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 4 3 2 Function Name FUNCTION NAME Source Source Destination start end start Copy LibCpy Valid Paste LibPst Valid Clear LibClr Valid Cut LibCut Valid Insert Liblns Valid Edit Undo LibEdtUd 4 3 3 Module Name MODULE NAME function SCENE LIB SCENE Copy Paste Clear Cut Insert EditUndo INPUT EQ LIB Only Copy OUTPUT EQ LIB OUTEQ Only Copy Dynamics LIB DYNA Only Copy GEQ LIB GEQ Only Copy EFFECT LIB EFFECT Only Copy LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual 4 4 FUNCTION CALL LIBRARY ATTRIBUTE 4 4 1 Format PARAMETER CHANGE Receive Data will be received when PARAMETER CHANGE Rx is on and the Device number of both Rx CH and SUB STATUS are matched The data will be echoed when PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO is on The corresponding memory library title will be changed imm
356. fined Keys Admin UDEF ADM User Defined Keys Guest UDEF GST Custom Fader Layer Current CFAD CUR Custom Fader Layer Admin CFAD ADM Custom Fader Layer Guest CFAD GST User Level Current CUR User Level Guest UKEY GST 4 7 FUNCTION CALL MODULE 4 7 1 Format PARAMETER CHANGE Receive Data will be received when PARAMETER CHANGE Rx is on and the Device number of both Rx CH and SUB STATUS are matched The data will be echoed when PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO is on The corresponding effect will function immediately the data is received depending on the effect type STATUS 11110000 System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n 0 15 Device numberzMIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 3E Digital mixer MODEL ID 00010010 12 LS9 DATA 00000000 00 OTHER DATA CATEGORY FUNCTION 01001101 M NAME 01101111 01100100 d 01000110 01111000 x 01010100 T 01110010 r 01100111 g MODULE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE DATA ee Effect number 0 RACK5 3 RACK8 Oppppppp pp Release 0 Press 1 EOX 11110111 F7 End ofexclusive 4 7 2 Module Name MODULE NAME Freeze Play button FRZPLAY Freeze Record button FRZREC chan
357. front panel PHONES OUT jack In the DISPLAY ACCESS section press the MONITOR key repeatedly to access the MONITOR screen In the MONITOR screen you can check the current monitor settings and turn monitoring on off The screen contains the following items e o OO 0 MONITOR SOURCE SELECT ST L R EIE Ln e MATRIX 1 2 STEREO MONO 2 INPUT L R MONO LAR 31 32 D OUTPUT button Turns the monitor output on off 2 SOURCE SELECT field Use the buttons in this field to select the monitor source 3 ASSIGN field If you selected DEFINE in the SOURCE SELECT field use this field to specify the monitor source You can select up to eight monitor sources simultaneously If you want to clear all selections move the cursor to the CLEAR ALL button and press the ENTER key 2 PHONES LEVEL LINK button If this is on the MONITOR LEVEL knob will adjust the level of the signal sent to the PHONES OUT jack LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual 5 MONITOR LEVEL knob Adjusts the output level of the monitor signal 6 DIMMER field The Dimmer function which temporarily attenuates the monitor signal can be switched on off here Use the knob in this field to adjust the amount of attenua tion 7 TALKBACK DIMMER field If Talkback is enabled this will indicate the on off sta tus of the Talkback Dimmer function which automati cally attenuates the monitor signal Here you can also specify the amount of
358. g settings move the cursor to the CLOSE button or the x symbol in the upper right of the win dow and press the ENTER key LS9 16 32 Owners Manual 61 Sending the signal from an input channel to a MIX bus Sending the signal from an input channel to a MIX bus Here we will explain how to send the signal of an input channel to MIX buses 1 16 MIX buses are used mainly to send signals to on stage foldback speakers or to external effect processors Signals can be sent from an input channel to a MIX bus in the following three ways E Using the SELECTED CHANNEL In this method you use the SELECTED CHANNEL section SELECTED SEND encoder to adjust the level of the signal sent to the MIX bus This method lets you control the signals sent from a specific input channel to all MIX buses L Using a popup window 090000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 In this method you use the MIX SEND popup window to adjust the send levels from eight channels to a MIX bus This method lets you control the send level on off setting and send point for the signals sent from a set of eight channels to a specific MIX bus L Using the top panel In this method you switch the 1 59 to SENDS ON FADER mode and use the top panel faders to
359. g the SELECTED CHANNEL section PAN encoder Making dynamics settings To operate the dynamics of the currently selected channel use the SELECTED CHANNEL section DYNAMICS 1 DYNAMICS 2 encoder and the DYNA1 DYNA2 field of the SELECTED CH VIEW screen The DYNA 2 field of the SELECTED CH VIEW screen and the DYNAMICS 2 encoder of the SELECTED CHANNEL section are valid only if an input channel is selected The DYNA1 DYNA72 field of the SELECTED CH VIEW screen contains the following items D DYNA1 DYNA2 popup buttons These buttons access the DYNAMICS 1 DYNAMICS 2 popup window where you can make detailed settings for dynamics THRESH knob This indicates the setting of the threshold parameter of a gate or compressor To adjust the value use the SELECTED CHANNEL section DYNAMICS 1 DYNAMICS 2 encoder Alternatively move the cursor to the knob and operate the dial or the DEC INC keys 3 DYNAMICS ON OFF button These buttons turn dynamics processors 1 2 on off 2 OVER indicator This will light if the output level of the dynamics reaches the overload point 5 Level meter This displays a bar graph indication of the signal level being input to the dynamics on green off gray and the amount of gain reduction orange The threshold setting is shown as a vertical line 6 Parameter knobs These knobs indicate the values of parameters other than threshold To operate the
360. ge and if stopped starts recording STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01111111 7F Realtime System exclusive Device ID Oddddddd dd Destination 00 7E 7F all call COMMAND 00000110 06 Machine Control Command MCC sub id 00000110 06 Record strobe EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive MMC PAUSE gt Reception If the DEVICE NO matches or is 7F receives this message and if playing pauses STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01111111 7F Realtime System exclusive Device ID Oddddddd dd Destination 00 7E 7F all call COMMAND 00000110 06 Machine Control Command MCC sub id 00001001 09 Pause MCS EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive Appendices LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual 261 MIDI Data Format 262 3 2 BULK DUMP Command rx tx Function FO 43 On cc cc 12 mm mm dd rx tx BULK DUMP dd ee F7 DATA FO 43 2n 12 mm mm dd dd F7 rx BULK DUMP REQUEST The LS9 uses the following data types for a bulk dump Module Name mm Data Number dd SCENE LIB SCENE 1 14 15 INPUT EQ LIB 2 7 8 OUTPUT EQ LIB OUTEQ__ 3 9 10 11 Dynamics LIB DYNA 4 7 8 9 10 11 GEQ LIB GEQ 5y 12 EFFECT LIB EFFECT 6 13 Mixer Setup MIXERSET Fix 512 Outport Setup OUT_PORT Fix 512 Monitor Setup MONITOR_ Fix 512 MIDI Setup MIDI_SET Fix 512 Lib Number LIB NUM Fix 512 Program Change Table PRG
361. ge messages will be transmitted to external devices Similarly if the corresponding con trol change messages are sent from an external device on the appropriate channel the parameters assigned to those control numbers will change You can use the CLEAR ALL button to erase all assignments to control numbers The INITIALIZE ALL button will return all control number assignments to their default state Assignments to control numbers are maintained as settings for the entire system rather than for individual scenes Using parameter changes to control parameters Using parameter changes to control parameters On the 1 59 you can use a type of system exclusive messages called parameter changes to control specific events fader encoder operations ON key on off operations etc as an alterna tive to using control changes or NRPN messages For details on the parameter changes that can be transmitted and received refer to MIDI Data Format in the appendix 1 Connect the LS9 to your external device 2 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section press the SETUP key repeatedly to access the MISC SETUP screen 3 Move the cursor to the MIDI SETUP popup button and press the ENTER key to access the MIDI SETUP popup window 4 As described in Basic MIDI settings gt p 178 select the ports and MIDI channels device numbers that will be used to trans mit receive parameter changes NOTE Parameter changes include a d
362. ged To select the key in signal make your selection in the DYNAMICS 1 DYNAMICS 2 popup window D Move the cursor to the KEY IN SOURCE box and use the dial or the DEC INC keys to select the desired key in signal The newly selected key in signal will blink 2 Press the ENTER key to confirm your selec tion of key in signal If you move the cursor out of the KEY IN SOURCE box while the key in signal is blinking in the box your change will be dis carded and the key in signal setting will revert to the previous choice To confirm your new choice of key in signal press the ENTER key without moving the cursor copy them to another channel use the tool buttons in the DYNAMICS 1 DYNAMICS 2 popup window For details on how to use these buttons refer to Using the tool buttons p 35 You can also use a dedicated library to save or load dynamics settings at any time gt 120 You can also take advantage of a wide variety of presets suitable for various instruments or situations LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual EQ and Dynamics 119 Using the EQ Dynamics libraries Using the EQ Dynamics libraries EQ or dynamics settings can be stored in or recalled from dedicated libraries 120 EQ library The EQ library consists of an input EQ library that lets you store and recall EQ settings for input channels and an output EQ library that lets you store and recall EQ settings for output cha
363. gh Top Number Low End Number High nl End Number Low 11110111 F7 End of exclusive EOX LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Appendices 265 266 MIDI Data Format 4 5 2 Format PARAMETER Receive REQUEST The PARAMETER CHANGE will be sent with Device number Rx CH immediately the data is received STATUS 11110000 FO ID No 01000011 43 SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n GROUP ID 00111110 3E MODEL ID 00010010 12 DATA 00000000 00 CATEGORY FUNCTION 01001100 L NAME 01101001 i 01100010 b 01000101 E 01111000 x 01101001 i 01110011 01110100 t MODULE NAME Ommmmmmm mm Ommmmmmm mm Ommmmmmm mm Ommmmmmm mm DATA Onnnnnnn nh Onnnnnnn nl EOX 11110111 F7 4 5 3 Module Name MODULE NAME System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel Digital mixer 159 OTHER DATA ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE Request Number High Request Number Low End of exclusive number SCENE LIB SCENE INPUT EQ LIB INIQ OUTPUT EQ LIB OUTEQ Dynamics LIB GEQ LIB GEQ d EFFECT LIB EFFECT 1 300 41 199 4 199 42 199 1 199 58 199 4 6 FUNCTION CALL COLLECTION STORE 4 6 1 Format PARAMETER Transmission CHANGE Dat
364. gh intensity lamp that contains a small amount of mercury Disposal of this material may be regulated due to environmental considerations For disposal information in the United States refer to the Electronic Industries Alliance web site www eiae org This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual mercury CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR BACK NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL The above warning is located on the rear or side of the unit Explanation of Graphical Symbols The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the product s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance servicing instructions in the literature accompanying the product IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1 Readthese instructions 11 Only use attachments accessories specified by the 2 Keep these instructions manufacturer 3 Heed all warnings 12 Use only with the cart stand 4 Follow all instructions tripod bracket or table 5 Donotuse t
365. ghlighted in the DESTINATION CHs field of the window The chan nels that can be selected as the copy destination will depend on the channel you selected in step 2 If you want to re select all of the copy destination channels move the cursor to the CLEAR DEST button and press the ENTER key 4 if you selected a MIX MATRIX STEREO MONO channel as the copy source use the buttons of the COPY TARGET field to select the parameters you want to copy 5 To execute the Copy operation move the cursor to the COPY button and press the ENTER key The copy will be executed and the settings will over write the parameters of the copy destination chan nel s After the copy has been executed the SOURCE CH field and DESTINATION CHs field will return to an unset state Moving the parameters of a chan The settings of a specific input channel can be moved to a different input channel When you execute a Move opera tion the numbering of the channels between the move source and move destination will move forward or back ward by one Move 1 2 3 4 Move by one You can move settings between the following combina tions of channels Between INPUT channels Between ST IN channels 1 Inthe DISPLAY ACCESS section press the CHANNEL JOB key repeatedly to access the CH MOVE screen of the CHANNEL JOB Screens Initial Data ADMIN nd DESTINATION with SEL on D SOURCE CH field This indica
366. ght 3 SAFE button This button switches Recall Safe on off for the rack Each of these buttons corresponds to the rack shown at the immediate right LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual 4 INPUT button This button displays the OUTPUT CH SELECT popup window where you can select the input source for the rack 5 Virtual rack This area shows eight virtual racks in which GEQ or effects can be mounted Racks 1 4 are only for GEQ and either GEQ or effects can be mounted in racks 5 8 However depending on the type of internal effect some can be mounted only in rack 5 or 7 When you move the cursor to a virtual rack and press the ENTER key the result will depend on whether a GEQ or effect is already mounted If a GEQ effect is already mounted in that rack The RACK 1 RACK 8 screen will appear allow ing you to edit the parameters of the GEQ or effect If the rack is vacant The RACK MOUNTER popup window will appear allowing you to select the GEQ or effect that will be mounted in the rack 6 OUTPUT button This button displays the INPUT CH SELECT popup window where you can select the output destination of the rack 2 To mount a GEQ or effect in the rack move the cursor to the RACK button for that rack and press the ENTER key The RACK MOUNTER popup window will appear F RRCK MODULE SELECT BLRNK 31BandcEG 4 D Rack number This indicates the number
367. gs are remembered for each user When a user logs in their previous settings will be repro Channels that can be selected in the chan duced nel module select field INPUT channels 1 32 1 64 ST IN channels 1 4 STEREO channel MONO channels MIX channels 1 16 MATRIX channels 1 8 MONITOR LEVEL The following channels can be selected for each field Custom fader layer If you select a ST IN channel 1 4 or the STEREO channel in the channel module select field the L R channels will be assigned together In this case the channel module will operate as follows The fader and ON key will operate the L and channels together The L and R channels will be selected alter nately each time you press the SEL key The meter LEDs will indicate the signal level of the L or R channel whichever level is greater If you select one of a pair of MIX MATRIX channels set to stereo in the channel module select field the channel module will operate as follows The fader and ON key will operate the two MIX MATRIX channels together Pressing the SEL key will select only the MIX MATRIX channel that you assigned The meter LEDs will indicate the signal level of the L or R channel whichever level is greater LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual J 93 94 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Chapter 9 Input output patching This chapter explains how to edit the input patching and output patching how to
368. gt p 196 cursor to the CLOSE button and press the You can also use Talkback Dimmer to lower the monitor level ENTER key to close the popup window of the non talkback signals when talkback is on gt p 146 5 Connect your mic to the rear panel INPUT jack move the cursor to the TALKBACK GAIN knob and use the dial or the DEC INC keys to adjust the input sensitivity of the mic The input level meter in the INPUT TO TALKBACK field shows the input level of the mic connected to the INPUT jack If you want phantom power 48V to be supplied to the INPUT jack turn on the 48V button in the INPUT TO TALKBACK field m p e If you want to use phantom power you must first turn ON the 48V MASTER ON OFF button located in the SYSTEM SETUP screen The PAD will be internally switched on or off when the HA gain is adjusted between 14 dB and 13 dB Keep in mind that noise may be generated if there is a difference between the Hot and Cold output impedance of the external device connected to the INPUT connector when using phantom power 152 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Using the oscillator Using the oscillator Here s how you can send a sine wave or pink noise from the internal oscillator to the desired bus 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section press the MONITOR button repeatedly to access the OSCILLATOR screen In the OSCILLATOR screen you can check the set tings of the oscillator and turn it on off CH 1 Ini
369. h the TO ST PAN setting 214 LS9 16 32 Owners Manual e If the PAN LINK button is on The PAN knob that appears in the location of the TO MIX SEND LEVEL knob of the input channel s SELECTED CH VIEW screen when the send destina tion MIX bus is stereo will be linked with the TO ST PAN BAL knob If the PAN LINK button is off The PAN BALANCE knob displayed in the position of the TO MIX SEND LEVEL knob in the input chan nel SELECTED CH VIEW screen can be operated independently of the TO ST PAN BAL knob NOTE The PAN LINK button is not displayed for MIX buses whose SIGNAL is set to 2 or MIX buses whose BUS TYPE is set to FIXED 6 To close the popup window and return to the SYSTEM SETUP screen move the cur sor to the CLOSE button or the x symbol in the upper right and press the ENTER key 7 To make basic settings for MATRIX buses move the cursor to the MATRIX button of the BUS SETUP field and press the ENTER key The MATRIX BUS SETUP popup window will appear 7 7 D SIGNAL TYPE Signal processing method This selects whether two adjacent odd numbered even numbered MATRIX buses will be used as stereo channels whose main parameters are linked STE REO or as two monaural channels MONO x 2 8 Use the buttons in the SIGNAL TYPE field to specify for each two adjacent odd num bered even numbered MATRIX buses whether they will function as STEREO
370. han 128 events on a single MIDI channel When bank select and then program change messages in that order are received on the Rx channel the event assigned to that bank number and program num ber in the list will be executed When you execute a specific event on the LS9 bank select program change messages for the bank num ber and program number assigned to that event will be transmitted on the Tx channel If the same event is assigned more than once in the list the lowest num bered bank number and program number will be trans mitted zw fj The settings of the OMNI and BANK buttons are ignored in Multi mode If the BANK button is and only a program change on an applicable MIDI channel is received the last selected bank number will be used gt e f the BANK button is on the OMNI button can also be turned on at the same time In this case bank select program change messages of all MIDI channels will be received 8 Use the buttons of the PROGRAM CHANGE field to turn transmission and reception on 8 off and make settings for echo output This field includes the following items MIDI Tx button Switches program change transmission on off Rx button Switches program change reception on off ECHO button This selects whether incoming program changes are echoed out from the transmission port LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual J 181 Using program changes to recall scenes and librar
371. hat if you turn the POST PAN button on you can no longer use input CUE to monitor the signal sent to the MONO bus from an input channel that is set to LCR mode Using the Cue function 3 OUTPUT field Here you can select one of the following choices as the position from which output channels will be cued PFL Pre Fader Listen button The pre fader signal will be output AFL After Fader Listen button The signal immediately after the ON key will be output PFL TRIM knob If PFL is selected you can adjust the output level of the cue signal in a range of 20 dB to 10 dB 2 Meter field CUE meter This indicates the level of the cue signal ACTIVE CUE indicator This indicates the currently active CUE group CLEAR CUE button Clears all Cue selections 2 Use the buttons of the CUE MODE section to specify what will happen when multiple CUE keys within the same CUE group are turned on Use the following two buttons to choose the Cue mode MIX CUE button channels within the same group whose CUE key is on will be mixed for monitoring MIX CUE mode LAST CUE button Only the channel whose CUE key was last turned on will be monitored LAST CUE mode CUE keys belonging to different CUE groups cannot be turned on simultaneously The CUE group to which the last pressed CUE key belongs will be turned on allowing only the signals of that group to be monitored Mo
372. he effect type used by that effect and the bypass on off status Initial Data 000 ADMIN INS CH3 E Reverb Hall REVERB HALL Reverb Room REVERB ROOM Reverb Plate REVERB PLATE Mono Delay MONO DELAY D Racks 2 INPUT buttons 3 OUTPUT buttons 2 Use the INPUT L button to open the OUT PUT CH SELECT popup window and select a MIX channel as the input source for the rack The output of the MIX channel you re using as the effect send will be assigned to the L input of the effect For details on the OUTPUT CH SELECT popup win dow refer to step 4 of Mounting a GEQ or effect in the virtual rack p 158 If you re using a stereo source assign the L R signals of the stereo MIX channels to the L R inputs of the rack About the internal effects 3 Use the OUTPUT L button to open the INPUT CH SELECT popup window and select the L input of the desired ST IN chan nel as the output destination for the rack The L input of the ST IN channel used as the effect return channel will be assigned to the L output of the effect For details on the INPUT CH SELECT popup window refer to step 6 of Mounting a GEQ or effect in the virtual rack p 158 If you re using the output of the effect in stereo assign the R input of the same ST IN channel to the R output of the rack in the same way You can select more than one output destination for the effect 4 Move the cursor t
373. he line with the blue background in JPN button the middle of the list is the scene that s selected for If this button is on the song title will be displayed operation using Shift JIS code double byte character code to 2 No scene number support Japanese 3 TITLE scene title 4 Protect NOTE These respectively indicate the scene number title Other items in the SCENE PLAYBACK LINK screen are the and protect status same as in the SCENE LIST screen gt p 134 5 Song list This is the list of songs audio files that can be linked 3 Operate the dial or the DEC INC keys so The line with the blue background in the middle of the that the Scene to which you want to assign list is the file that s selected for operation a song is displayed in the middle LS9 16 32 Owners Manual J 113 Linking scene recall with audio file playback 4 Move the cursor to the blue background area in the middle of the list SONG TITLE FILE NAME field and press the ENTER key The SONG SELECT popup window will appear allowing you to select an audio file F J PATH SONG TITLE CANCEL D SONG TITLE FILE NAME buttons These buttons select the item song title or file name that is shown in the song list 2 JPN button If this button is on the song title will be displayed using Shift JIS code double byte character code to support Japanese 3 PATH field This indic
374. he signal from an input channel to the STEREO MONO bus 58 Sending the signal from an input channel to a MIX bus 62 Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section 62 Using a popup 64 Using the faders SENDS ON FADER mode 65 6 Output channel operations 67 Signal flow for output channels 67 Specifying the channel name icon 69 Sending signals from MIX channels to the STEREO MONO DUS 71 Sending signals from MIX channels and STEREO MONO channels to MATRIX 75 Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section 75 Using a popup 77 Using the faders SENDS ON FADER mode 78 7 Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section 81 About the SELECTED CHANNEL section 81 About the SELECTED CH VIEW screen 82 Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section 83 8 Custom fader layer 91 About the custom fader 91 Assigning channels to the custom fader layer 92 9 Input output patching 95 Changing the output patching 95 Changing the input 99 Inserting an external device into a channel 101 Directl
375. he tempo Parameters related to tempo synchronization The following five parameters are related to tempo synchronization 1 SYNC 2 NOTE 3 TEMPO 4 DELAY 5 FREQ SYNG This is the on off switch for tempo synchronization NOTE and TEMPO These are the basic parameters for tempo synchronization DELAY and FREQ DELAY is the delay time and FREQ is the frequency of the modulation signal These directly affect the way in which the effect sound will change DELAY is relevant only for delay type effects and FREQ is relevant only for modulation type effects How the parameters are related Tempo synchronization uses TEMPO and NOTE to calculate a value that will be the basis for the tempo and continues making adjustments so that this tempo basis stays essentially the same as the DELAY or FREQ This means that when TEMPO NOTE and DELAY or FREQ are synchronized and you change any of these values the other parameters will be re set in order to maintain the correct relationship The parameters that are re set and the calculation method a used are as follows If you turn SYNC on NOTE will be set If you edit NOTE DELAY or FREQ will be set In this case the DELAY or FREQ value is calculated as follows DELAY or FREQ NOTE x 4 x 60 TEMPO If you edit TEMPO DELAY or FREQ will be set In this case the DELAY or FREQ value is calculated as follows DELAY or FREQ original DELAY or FREQ
376. he unit DFF and ON please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference Utilize power outlets that are on different branch circuit breaker or fuse circuits or install AC line filter s In the case of radio or TV interference relocate reorient the antenna If the antenna lead in is 300 ohm ribbon lead change the lead in to co axial type cable If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results please contact the local retailer authorized to dis tribute this type of product If you can not locate the appro priate retailer please contact Yamaha Corporation of America Electronic Service Division 6600 Orangethorpe Ave Buena Park CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products dis tributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiar ies This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA class B COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE Responsible Party Yamaha Corporation of America Address 6600 Orangethorpe Ave Buena Park Calif 90620 714 522 9011 DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE LS9 16 LS9 32 Telephone Type of Equipment Model Name This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this dev
377. hese are the Cue signals operated using buttons dis played in the screen This group is enabled if you turn on a CUE button in a RACK screen to which you ve assigned an effect the CUE button of the RECORDER screen or the KEY IN CUE button of the DYNAMICS 1 2 popup window This group will automatically be disabled when you exit the corresponding screen lt CUE button in the screen It is not possible to simultaneously turn on Cue between different groups Normally the group to which the most recently pressed CUE key or a CUE KEY IN CUE but ton in the screen belongs will take priority and the CUE keys of the previously selected group will be defeated However if you switch the Cue signal group in a specific order the state of the CUE keys of the previously selected group will be restored when the current Cue sig nal is defeated The following illustration shows the priority order of the CUE keys After you have switched groups from lower to upper levels if you then defeat Cue for the upper group the previous CUE key status of the group immediately below will be restored Other CUE group INPUT CUE group OUTPUT CUE group For example if you switch groups in the order of OUT PUT CUE group gt INPUT CUE group gt Other CUE group you can then successively defeat the CUE keys CUE KEY IN CUE buttons to successively restore the CUE key status of the previously selected group How ever if the CUE M
378. his apparatus near water specified by the manufacturer 6 Clean only with dry cloth or sold with the apparatus When e 7 Do not block any ventilation openings Install in a cart is used use caution when accordance with the manufacturer s instructions moving the cart apparatus 8 Donotinstall near any heat sources such as radiators combination to avoid injury from heat registers stoves or other apparatus including tip over amplifiers that produce heat 13 Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when 9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or unused for long periods of time grounding type plug A polarized plug has two blades 14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel with one wider than the other A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet 10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs convenience receptacles and the point where they exit from the apparatus Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way such as power supply cord or plug is damaged liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture does not operate normally or has been dropped WARNING TO REDUCE THE R
379. ice must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation See user manual instructions if interference to radio recep tion is suspected This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA FCC DoC IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM Connecting the Plug and Cord WARNING THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED IMPORTANT The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code GREEN AND YELLOW EARTH BLUE NEUTRAL BROWN LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows The wire which is coloured GREEN and YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the letter E or by the safety earth symbol or colored GREEN or GREEN and YELLOW The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED 3 wires This product contains a battery that contains perchlorate material Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA Perchlorate This product contains a hi
380. ice or an outlet always hold e Before moving th the plug itself and not the cord Pulling by the cord can damage it When setting up rtation can result in e device remove a injury o connec g or moving the device do not hold the display r damage to the device itself ed cables he product make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible If some trouble or malfunction occurs immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect t power switch is t minimum level When you are not us urned off electricity sure to unplug th PA_en_1 1 2 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual e power cord from he plug is still f rom the outlet Even when the owing to the product at the ing the product for a long time make he wall AC outlet Do not place the device in a location where it may come into contact with corrosive gases or salt air Doing so may result in malfunction e Avoid setting all equalizer controls and faders to their maximum Depending on the condition of the connected devices doing so may cause feedback and may damage the speakers Do not expose the device to excessive dust or vibrations or extreme cold or heat such as in direct sunlight near a heater or in a car during the day to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components Do not place the device in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over
381. ich you want to perform calibra tion Fader calibration is performed semi automatically for the faders you specify using their SEL keys Each fader selected by its SEL key is shown in red in the popup window Other functions di LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual J 223 Adjusting the input output gain Calibration function Adjusting the input output gain Calibration function If necessary you can make fine adjustments to the input output gain 1 While holding down the SCENE MEMORY key of the DISPLAY ACCESS section turn on the power After the opening screen the following startup menu screen will appear INITIALIZE ALL MEMORIES MODE SELECT INITIALIZE CD INPUT PORT TRIM button 2 OUTPUT PORT TRIM button 3 SLOT OUTPUT TRIM button 2 In the MODE SELECT field move the cursor to one of the following buttons to select the target you want to adjust and press the ENTER key INPUT PORT TRIM fine adjustment of the ana log input gain button This makes fine adjustments in 0 1 dB steps to the gain of the specified analog input port When you press this button the screen will change as follows INPUT PORT TRIM MODE 1 0 0 224 LS9 16 32 Owners Manual OUTPUT PORT TRIM fine adjustment of the output ports button This makes fine adjustments in 0 01 dB steps to the gain of the specified output port When you press this button the screen will change as follows MODE SELECT OMNI
382. ill be defeated The HOME key will blink if the display is showing any screen other than the SELECTED CH VIEW screen or if SENDS ON FADER mode is active In such cases you will find it convenient to press the HOME key to restore the panel to home position the HOME key will change to steadily lit and then proceed with operations MASTER CUSTOM MASTER CUSTOM FADER FADER LS9 16 LS9 32 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Basic operations on the LS9 27 28 Basic operations in the top panel The combination of channels corresponding to each key is as follows 8 9 10 11 12 13 4 15 16 STEREO STIN1 STIN 2 se sa jw fw
383. ill indicate OK if operation is normal or LOW or NO if the voltage is low The LOW or NO indication will appear if the battery runs down If this occurs immediately save your data on a USB memory and contact your Yamaha dealer 6 CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS field Here you can adjust the contrast and brightness of the dis play the brightness of the top panel LEDs and the bright ness of the lamp connected to the LAMP connector gt p 217 For details on the function and operations for each screen refer to the second half of this chapter or to the corre sponding other chapter Word clock settings Word clock refers to the clock that provides the basis of timing for digital audio signal processing If you connect external equipment such as a DAW system or HDR Hard Disk Recorder to a dig ital I O card installed in a rear panel slot this equipment must be synchronized to the same word clock in order for digital audio signals to be sent and received If digital audio signals are trans ferred in an unsynchronized state the data will not be transmitted or received correctly and noise may be present in the signal even if the sampling rates are the same Specifically you must first decide which device will transmit the reference word clock for the entire system the word clock master and then set the remaining devices the word clock slaves so that they synchronize to the word clock master If you wish to use the LS9 as a word cl
384. ind HELP file Illegal Address The IP address or Gateway address setting is invalid Illegal MAC Address Cannot Use Network Communication via the Network connector is not possible because the MAC address setting has been damaged for some reason Please contact your Yamaha dealer Illegal Storage Format KEY IN CUE Turned Off The USB memory could not be accessed because its format is invalid or unsupported KEY IN CUE was defeated because you switched from the DYNAMICS 1 2 popup window to a differ ent screen Loading Aborted Loading from USB memory was aborted Low Battery The backup battery voltage is low Maximum Number of Audio Files Exceeded The number of songs that can be managed by the USB memory recorder has been exceeded Memory Error All Memories were Initialized All data has been initialized because the data in internal backup memory has been lost due to failure of the backup battery or some other reason Please contact your Yamaha dealer MIDI Data Framing Error An inappropriate signal is being input to the MIDI input port MIDI Data Overrun An inappropriate signal is being input to the MIDI input port MIDI Rx Buffer Full Too much data is being received at the MIDI input port MIDI Tx Buffer Full To much data is being transmitted from the MIDI output port No Access From Recorder In the RECORDER screen it is not possible to mo
385. indicators at the top of this field will light 2 Port select box Use the dial or the DEC INC keys to select the MIDI message transmit Tx port and receive Rx port If you select the same port as used by another function such as cascade link or HA remote a confir mation dialog box will appear If you select OK the port setting for the other function will be disabled 178 LS9 16 32 Owners Manual 3 Channel select box Use the dial or the DEC INC keys to select the MIDI message transmit Tx channel and receive Rx channel PROGRAM CHANGE field Here you can make settings for program change trans mission and reception Tx button Switches program change transmission on off Rx button Switches program change reception on off ECHO button This selects whether incoming program changes are echoed out from the transmission port For details on how to assign the scene or effect for each pro gram number refer to Using program changes to recall scenes and library items gt p 180 5 PROGRAM CHANGE MODE field Here you can select the program change transmit receive mode SINGLE button If this button is on program changes will be trans mitted and received on a single MIDI channel OMNI button If this button is on program changes of all MIDI channels will be received in Single mode Multi mode transmission reception and Single mode transmission are disabled BANK
386. ing parameters RACK Rack settings Head amp settings IN PATCH Input port patching SCENE 002 OUT PATCH Output port patching 002 ADMIN IN Input channel parameters SCENE FOCUS OUT Output channel parameters PASTE CLEAR Sane On off status and send level settings for sig SEND nals sent from input channels to MIX buses in our f in Pour paci four d in Jour Seno packi four Lin CURRENT SETTING BE DID Dore D FOCUS field This field lets you make Focus function settings for a scene saved in scene memory Using the buttons arrayed in the center select the parameters that will be updated when you recall the scene selected in the list in the left side of the screen For other scenes you can only check the on off status of each parameter 2 CURRENT field This field lets you make Focus function settings for the scene you re currently operating If you select a parameter in this field and then store the scene your selections will be used the next time you recall that scene When you recall a scene the Focus function settings of that scene are shown in this field Make sure that the cursor is located some where other than the constant display area and use the dial or the DEC INC keys to select the scene for which you want to make Focus function settings shown only if the OUT button is on
387. ing the TO ST PAN knob will change the signal levels sent to the STEREO L R bus and MONO C bus as shown in the following illustration STEREO R bus NA N Signal sent to the gt C bus 2 5 N d x Signal sent to the E i STEREO L bus ix Signal sent to the PAN knob If a ST IN channel is selected operating the TO ST BALANCE knob will change the signal levels sent from the ST IN L R channels to the STEREO L R bus and MONO C bus as shown in the following the C bus illustration Ps E E Tw oe t N Signal sent from the i ST IN L channel to E i the STEREO L bus Nod E 2 Signal sent from the o ST IN L channel to the MONO C bus 5 o 5 TO ST BALANCE knob 8 c POETS J 2 i N Signal sent from the g i ST IN R channel to 9 N the STEREO R bus 5 o i T N i a i Signal sent from the ay ST IN channel to TO ST BALANCE knob 15 If you want to operate a channel that is not currently shown in the popup window use the SEL key to select that channel and then make settings for it For example if INPUT channels 1 8 are shown in the popup window pressing the INPUT channel 9 SEL key will change the popup window to INPUT channels 9 16 16 When you ve finished makin
388. ing the channel name moving the cursor to this button and pressing the ENTER key will take you back to the output port selection screen LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual J 69 Specifying the channel name icon 2 Icon button This shows the icon that is selected for the correspond ing channel When you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key a screen where you can select an icon and a sample name will appear 3 Channel name input box This indicates the name that is assigned to the corre sponding channel When you move the cursor to this field and press the ENTER key a keyboard window will appear allowing you to enter a name Tabs These tabs switch the items that are shown in the win dow 5 To select an icon for this channel move the cursor to the icon button and press the ENTER key The window display will change as follows F PATCH NAME PATCH OMNI T Bass r B Dr Sbkick Foot D Icon select buttons These buttons select the icon that is used for this chan nel 2 Sample name select buttons These buttons select sample names that are related to the currently selected icon When you press a button its sample name will be entered in the channel name field 8 Icon background color select buttons These buttons let you choose one of eight colors as the background color for the icon 6 Use the icon select buttons and the icon background color s
389. ing will start When you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key during recording Recording will pause Recording to USB memory 4 FF button When you move the cursor to this button and press and immediately release the ENTER key You will move to the beginning of the next song in the title list When you move the cursor to this button and press and hold the ENTER key for two seconds or longer The song will be fast forwarded In either of the above cases operating this button dur ing playback will cause playback to resume from the current location when you release the ENTER key REC 06 button When you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key while stopped The recorder will be in record ready mode and the PLAY PAUSE gt 11 button will blink You can also assign the function of each button to a user defined key 196 While stopped move the cursor to the REC 6 button and press the ENTER key the PLAY PAUSE gt button will blink and the recorder will be in record ready mode 7 To begin recording move the cursor to the PLAY PAUSE gt 11 button in the lower part of the screen and press the ENTER key During recording the REC button and the PLAY PAUSE gt II button will light The TIME field will indicate the elapsed time 8 To stop recording move the cursor to the STOP button and press the ENTER
390. ings move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The changes will be finalized and the popup window will close If you select the CANCEL button or the x symbol instead of the OK button your changes will be dis carded and the popup window will close Specifying the brightness or contrast of the display LEDs Here you can specify the contrast and brightness of the display the brightness of the top panel LEDs and the brightness of the lamp connected to the rear panel LAMP connector 1 Inthe DISPLAY ACCESS section press the 2 Move the cursor to a knob of the CON SETUP key to access the MISC SETUP TRAST BRIGHTNESS field and use the dial Screen or the DEC INC keys to set the following parameters In an 1 De LE E E E 000 m CONTRAST field ETUP SCREEN knob DATE TIME ifi i pd Specifies the contrast of the display backlight 16 10 30 NETWORK LINK MDDE You can also adjust the contrast by holding down the HOME key and turning the dial CONSOLE CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS BRIGHTNESS field LOCK 01 00 e 3 l4 SCREEN knob Specifies the brightness of the display LS9 32 backlight PANEL knob Adjusts the brightness of the top panel CONTRAST field LEDs If a Yamaha AD8HR is connected to an I O card that provides a REMOTE BRIGHTNESS field connector the brightness of the AD8HR s LEDs will also change LAMP knob LS9
391. into any gaps or openings on the device vents etc If this happens turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet Then have the device inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel Do not apply oil grease or contact cleaner to the faders Doing so may cause problems with electrical contact or fader motion Do not use the device or headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level since this can cause permanent hearing loss If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears consult a physician Do not rest your weight on the device or place heavy objects on it and avoid use excessive force on the buttons switches or connectors Backup battery e This device has a built in backup battery When you unplug the power cord from the AC outlet the current scene data and library data is retained However if the backup battery fully discharges this data will be lost When the backup battery is running low the LCD display indicates Low Battery when you starting up the system the Battery field also indicates LOW or NO in the MISC SETUP screen In this case immediately save the data to a USB memory then have qualified Yamaha service personnel replace the backup battery XLR type connectors are wired as follows IEC60268 standard pin 1 ground pin 2 hot 4 and pin 3 cold Yamaha cannot be held responsible for
392. itial state these are assigned to the OMNI OUT jacks or the output channels of the slot s MATRIX channels 1 8 These channels process the signals that are sent from MIX channels STEREO channels and MONO channel to the MATRIX buses and send them from the output ports Using the STEREO and MONO buses different combina tions of signals and mix balances can be sent out from the console STEREO channel MONO channel These channels process the signals that are sent from the input channels or MIX channels and send them to the cor responding output port These channels are used as the main stereo output and monaural output The STEREO channel and MONO channel can be used either to output independent signals or for three channel L C R playback When the LS9 is in the initial state the STEREO channel is assigned to OMNI OUT jacks 15 16 31 32 and to the 2TR OUT DIGITAL jack Signal assignments to the output channels output patch ing can be changed as desired LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual J 13 About the MIX bus types VARI FIXED About word clock Conventions in this manual About the firmware version 14 About the MIX bus types VARI FIXED The sixteen MIX buses provided on the LS9 can be assigned either as VARI or FIXED types in pairs of adjacent odd numbered even numbered buses gt p 213 They can also be switched between monaural stereo for the same pairs of buses VARI type and FIXED type buses dif
393. keys are lit the LS9 is in SENDS ON FADER mode Press the desired key of the MIX MATRIX SELECT section so that only 1 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section the LED of that key is blinking H OM E key The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the display 4 Use the SELECTED CHANNEL section He SELECTED SEND encoder to adjust the 2 Use the LAYER section keys and the SEL bus you selected in step 3 select the send destination MATRIX chan If the send destination MATRIX bus is set to stereo nel the function of the SELECTED SEND encoder will The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will change as fol change depending on which of the two adjacent keys lows of the MIX MATRIX SELECT section are lit If the left key is lit Use the SELECTED SEND encoder to adjust the or balance for a STEREO channel of the signal 000 tial that is sent from that channel to the two MATRIX x MILK AMN RATIO ATK REL GAIN KNEE buses B lt lt X If the right key is lit D 0 NN Use the SELECTED SEND encoder to adjust the send level shared by the two MATRIX buses 1 5 SAFE To switch the on off status of a signal sent to a MATRIX bus move the cursor to the TO MATRIX LEVEL knob in the screen and press the ENTER key If you switch this off the knob will turn grey To turn 00 00 0 0 0 0 it back on press the ENTER key once again 6 Use the t
394. ks 1 16 1 32 When the specifications are common to both models the manual refers simply to the LS9 The LS9 s channel structure The LS9 provides the following input channels and output channels Input 5 This section processes input signals and sends them to various buses STEREO MONO MIX The LS9 has the following two types of input channel INPUT channels 1 32 1 64 These channels process monaural signals In the initial state the input signals from the rear panel INPUT jacks and the input channels of the slot s are assigned to these channels ST IN channels 1 4 These channels process stereo signals In the initial state the outputs of virtual racks 5 8 are assigned to these chan nels Signal assignments to the input channels input patching can be changed as desired ill Output channels This section mixes the signals sent from input channels etc and sends them to the corresponding output ports or output buses There are three types of output channel as follows MIX channels 1 16 These channels process the signals sent from input chan nels to the MIX buses and send them from the output ports These are used mainly to send signals to the monitor system or to external effects The signals of MIX channels 1 16 can also be sent to the STEREO bus MONO bus or MATRIX buses When the LS9 is in the in
395. l device 2 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section press the SETUP key repeatedly to access the MISC SETUP screen within the SETUP screens 3 Move the cursor to the MIDI SETUP popup button and press the ENTER key to access the MIDI SETUP popup window 4 As described in Basic MIDI settings p 178 select the port and MIDI channel device number that will be used to receive MMC messages MMC messages include a device number that specifies the receiving device The receive Rx channel specified in the MIDI SETUP page is used as the device number Please be aware that if the device number included in the transmitted MMC message does not match the device num ber of the receiving LS9 console the message will be ignored 5 Prepare the USB memory recorder for use For details on using the USB memory recorder see p 105 In this state an external device will be able to control operations such as play record stop and pause on the LS9 s USB memory recorder The following MMC commands are supported Command MMC Content Stop 01 Stop playback or recording Begins playback of the selected file The file to be played can be selected beforehand in the TITLE LIST screen or the desired track number can be selected using a MIDI Song Select message F3 Begins playback of the selected file The file to be played can be selected beforehand in the TITLE LIST screen or the desired track number can be
396. l in the window and press the dow and press the ENTER key ENTER key The button will change from black to red and the phase of the corresponding channel will be reversed 9 If you want to operate the HA of a channel that is not currently shown in the popup window use the SEL key to select that channel and then make settings for it For example if INPUT channels 1 8 are shown in the popup window pressing the INPUT channel 9 SEL key will change the popup window to INPUT channels 9 16 Sending the signal from an input channel to the STEREO MONO hus Here we will explain how to send the signal of an input channel to the STEREO bus or MONO bus The STEREO bus MONO bus are used to output signals to the main speakers Signals can be sent to the STEREO bus or MONO bus in either ST MONO mode or LCR mode and you can choose either of these two modes for each channel These two modes differ as follows m ST MONO mode 000900000000000000000000000000000000000000000000090 In this mode signals are sent independently from the input channel to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus The signals sent from the same input channel to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus can be switched on off independently The panning of the signal sent from an INPUT channel to the STEREO bus L R can be operated by the SELECTED CHANNEL section PAN encoder or by the TO ST PAN knob in the screen The signal sent to the MONO bus is not affected
397. l respectively be lit COMMENT TIME STAMP field This indicates the comment or the date and time at which the scene was last stored as the year month date and hours minutes seconds 9 COMMENT TIME STAMP tabs These tabs switch the items comment or time stamp that are shown in the COOMENT TIME STAMP field 2 To select a scene number make sure that the cursor is located somewhere other than the constant display area and use the dial or the DECT INC keys The line highlighted in blue in the scene list indicates the scene currently selected for operations You can also assign user defined keys to execute functions such as incrementing or decrementing the scene number or scrolling the scene list up or down gt p 196 3 If you want the scenes to be listed in a dif ferent order move the cursor to the NO or TITLE buttons located above the scene list or to TIME STAMP located above the STATUS TIME STAMP field and press the ENTER key c ns cene ae NO Sorted in order of scene number TITLE Sorted in numeric alphabetical order of title 3 COMMENT TIME STAMP Sorted in order of comment or date of creation By leaving the cursor at the same button and pressing the ENTER key again you can change the direction ascending or descending in which the list is sorted If you want to edit the title of a scene move the curso
398. lay time FB DLY 0 0 1000 0 ms Feedback delay time Feedback gain plus values for GAIN 99 to 99 normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio Delay and early reflected delay DLY BAL 0 100 balance 0 all early reflected delay 100 all delay THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz LPF THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency S Hall L Hall Ran TYPE dom Revers Plate Type of early reflection simulation Spring ROOMSIZE 0 1 20 0 Reflection spacing Early reflections decay characteris LIVENESS 0 10 tics 0 dead 10 live INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins DIFF 0 10 Spread DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density ER NUM 1 19 Number of early reflections SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off Used in conjunction with TEMPO 1 NOTE E to determine left channel DELAY L Used in conjunction with TEMPO NOTER to determine right channel DELAY R Used conjunction with TEMPO 1 to determine FB DLY s BP AP ROP Reb S Bed ded d Maximum value depends on the tempo setting Effects Parameters Il DELAY REV DELAY REV One input two output delay and reverb effects in parallel One input two output delay and reverb effects in series Parameter Range
399. lay time FB DLY 0 0 2730 0 ms Feedback delay time LEVEL L 100 to 100 Left channel delay level LEVEL C 100 to 100 Center channel delay level LEVEL R 100 to 100 Right channel delay level Feedback gain plus values for GAIN 99 to 49996 normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz LPF THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off Used in conjunction with TEMPO 1 MOTEL to determine DELAY L Used in conjunction with TEMPO NOTES to determine DELAY C Used in conjunction with TEMPO NOTER to determine DELAY R x Used in conjunction with TEMPO MONETE 1 to determine FB DLY us PP Bed Red d deos Maximum value depends on the tempo setting LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Two input two output stereo delay with crossed feedback loop Parameter Range Description DELAY L 0 0 1350 0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY R 0 0 1350 0 ms Right channel delay time FB DLY L 0 0 1350 0 ms Left channel feedback delay time FB DLYR 0 0 1350 0 ms Right channel feedback delay time Left channel feedback gain plus FB GL 299 to 99 values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback Right channel feedback g
400. less than 16 384 steps paramWidth 16384 2 1 When High and Low data is received rxValue Control value High 128 Control value Low 2 2 When only Low data is received rxValue curValue amp 16256 Control value Low 2 3 When only High data is received rxValue Control value High 128 curValue amp 127 3 If the assigned parameter has 16 384 or more but less than 2 097 152 steps paramWidth 2097152 3 1 When High Middle and Low data is received rxValue Control value High 16384 Control value Middle 128 Control value Low 3 2 When only Low data is received rxValue curValue amp 2097024 Control value Low 3 3 When only Middle data is received rxValue curValue amp 2080895 Control value Middle 128 3 4 When only High data is received rxValue curValue amp 16383 Control value High 16384 3 5 When only Middle and Low data is received rxValue curValue amp 2080768 Control value Middle 128 Control value Low 3 6 When only High and Low data is received rxValue curValue amp 16256 Control value High 16384 Control value Low 3 7 When only High and Middle data is received rxValue curValue amp 127 Control value High 16384 Control value Middle 128 if rxValue paramWidth rxValue paramWidth param rxValue mod 2 add If NRPN is selected STATUS 011 Bn Control ch
401. lightly the ON key will light indicating that this band is being modified If you press a lit ON key to make it go dark the corresponding band will immediately return to the flat state 3 When you ve finished making settings turn off the button s of the FADER ASSIGN field The top panel faders and ON keys will return to their previous function a gt e If a button in the FADER ASSIGN field is on switching the display to another screen or rack will forcibly defeat the top panel fader assignments However if you once again display the same rack the group of bands you had previously been controlling will automatically be assigned to the faders FADER ASSIGN on off settings apply to all GEQ units together LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual 6 If you want to copy the currently displayed 31 Band GEQ settings to the GEQ of another rack or to initialize the settings you can do so using the tool buttons at the top of the screen For details on how to use these buttons refer to Using the tool buttons p 35 wj e Ifa 31 Band GEQ is using 15 or fewer bands its settings can also be copied to a Flex15GEQ gt GEQ settings can be saved loaded at any time using the ded icated library gt p 174 Using the Flex15GEQ Here we will explain how to use the Flex I5GEQ 1 As described in Mounting a GEQ or effect in the virtual rack gt p 158 steps 1 3 mount a GEQ in a rack A r
402. llowing output ports e SLOT 1 2 Shows output channels 1 16 of the slot s 1 2 e RACK Shows the inputs of racks 1 8 Use these when you want to insert a GEQ or effect into that channel 2 Port select button This selects the output port that is assigned to insert out Use the category tabs and the port select buttons to select the insert out port Move the cursor to the CLOSE button and press the ENTER key to return to the pre vious screen After moving the cursor to the insert out patch select box in step 4 you can also select the output port by using the dial or the DEC INC keys instead of pressing the ENTER LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual 7 Move the cursor to the input port select popup button and press the ENTER key The INPUT PORT SELECT popup window will appear allowing you to select the input port that will be patched to insert in INPUT PORT SELECT tcHt INSERT IN SLOT 1 kcu Ed ee rd d Ez LS9 16 D Category tab These tabs select the input ports that are shown in the popup window Each tab corresponds to the following input ports e SLOT 1 2 Shows input channels 1 16 of the slot s 1 2 RACK Shows the outputs of racks 1 8 Use these when you want to insert a GEQ or effect into the chan nel 2 Port select button This selects the input port that is assigned to insert in 8 Use the category tabs and the port select buttons t
403. llowing illustration In this case the TO ST PAN knob will operate as a conventional PAN knob and no signal is sent to the MONO C bus Signal sent to the amp STEREO L bus Signal level Signal sent to the STEREO R bus TO ST PAN knob If a MIX channel set to stereo is selected operating the TO ST BALANCE knob will change the signal levels sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO L R bus and MONO C bus as shown in the following illustration In this case the PAN encoder will oper ate as a conventional BALANCE knob and no signal is sent to the MONO C bus Output channel operations Signal sent from the odd numbered MIX channel to the STE REO L bus Signal level TO ST BALANCE knob Signal sent from the even numbered MIX channel to the STE REO R bus Signal level L C R TO ST BALANCE knob LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual J 73 Sending signals from MIX channels to the STEREO MONO bus 74 If the CSR knob is set to 10046 operating the TO ST PAN knob will change the signal levels sent to the STEREO L R bus and MONO C bus as shown in the following illustration STEREO R bus 7 x _ d N _ Signal sent to the MONO bus gt N Signal sent to the S 1 STEREO L bus f Signal sent to the PAN knob If a stereo MIX channel is selected ope
404. lt PEAK HOLD ON ON lit OFF dark Turn the meter PEAK HOLD function on off METER STEREO MONO C MONO C lit STE SEL REO dark Switch the top panel STEREO L R METER function LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual 257 Functions that can be assigned to user defined keys 258 Function PARAMETER 1 PAGE BOOKMARK PARAMETER 2 LED When storing a page Flash When showing a memorized page Blink Explanation Memorize the currently selected screen hold down the key for two seconds or longer or display the last memo rized screen press and release the key within two sec PAGE CHANGE When not showing a onds Popup windows can also be memorized In the case memorized page Lit rack the number of that rack is also memorized Not memorized Dark CLOSE POPUP Flash Close the displayed popup window CH SELECT INC DEC Flash Increment Decrement the channel selection SET 48V SET SET PRE SEND SET TO STEREO a Hold down this key and press SEL to switch it on off Dur SET BY SEL While pressing Lit ing this ti the SEL LED will be lit if dark if off SET TO MONO ing this time the SEL will be lit if on or dark if off SET TO LCR SET INSERT ON SET DIRECT OUT Hold down this key and press the SELECTED CH encoder SET DEFAULT to return to the default value You can also return to the VALUE While pressing Lit default
405. ly sold mini YGDAI I O cards be installed in these slots to provide additional input output ports The LS9 16 has one slot and the LS9 32 has two slots Each slot can input output a maximum of 16 channels of sig nals IN DIGITAL 2 14 WORD CLOCK OUT WORD CLOCK o 2 NETWORK connector This connector allows the LS9 to be connected to a Win dows computer via a CAT3 transfer rate maximum 10 Mbps or CATS transfer rate maximum 100 Mbps com patible Ethernet cable This is used mainly for controlling mix parameters or editing scene memories and libraries from the dedicated 1 59 Editor application program The DME N Network Driver required for connection to the NET WORK connector the Studio Manager required for running LS9 Editor and the LS9 Editor itself can downloaded from the Yamaha website listed below http www yamahaproaudio com 5 WORD CLOCK IN OUT connectors These are BNC connectors used to transmit and receive word clock signals to and from an external device The WORD CLOCK IN connector is internally terminated by a 75 ohm resistor 6 2TR OUT DIGITAL jack This is a coaxial jack that outputs the digital audio signal of a specified channel in consumer format IEC 60958 This is used mainly to output STEREO MONO channel signals 7 2TR IN DIGITAL jack This is a coaxial j
406. ly with the LS9 even when unsynchronized In this case turn on the SRC button for the slot channel that is receiving the signal gt p 208 If the symbol for the selected clock does not turn light blue make sure that the external device is correctly connected and that the external device is set to transmit clock data Noise may occur at the output jacks when the word clock set ting is changed In order to protect your speaker system be sure to turn down the power amp volume before changing the word clock setting If you attempt to select a channel whose SRC is on as the word clock source a message will appear warning you that the sampling rate converter will be disabled To close the WORD CLOCK popup window move the cursor to the CLOSE button or the x symbol in the upper right and press the ENTER key You will return to the SYSTEM SETUP screen Other functions di LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual J 207 Switching a digital I O card s SRC on off Switching a digital 1 0 card s SRC on off If a digital I O card with SRC Sampling Rate Converter functionality such as the MY8 AE96S is installed in the slot slot 1 2 you can use the SLOT SETUP popup window to turn the card s SRC on off In this window you can also check the operating status of the I O card s installed in the slot s 1 Inthe DISPLAY ACCESS section press the SETUP key repeatedly to access the SYS TEM SETUP screen CH10
407. mber in the constant display area using the dial ing the ENTER key A confirmation dialog box will appear if RECALL CONFIRMATION is turned ON in the PREFER ENCE popup window The same function as the RECALL button or RECALL UNDO button can also be assigned to a user defined key In addition you can recall a scene by using MIDI messages program changes gt p 180 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual or the DECV INC keys to select a scene number and press Using user defined keys to recall You can use the user defined keys to directly recall a selected scene with a single keystroke or to step through the scenes To do this you must first assign a scene recall operation to a user defined key The following recall operations can be assigned to a user defined key INC RECALL Recalls the scene of the number that follows the cur rently loaded scene DEC RECALL Recalls the scene of the number that precedes the cur rently loaded scene e If no scene is stored in the number that precedes or follows the currently loaded scene the closest scene number in which a scene is stored will be recalled DIRECT RECALL Allows you to directly specify a certain scene number and recall that scene To assign one of these functions to a user defined key so that a scene can be recalled in a single keystroke proceed as follows 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section press the SETUP key repeatedly to access the USER SETU
408. n 2 Make sure that the cursor is located some where other than the constant display area and use the dial or the DEC INC keys to select the recall source scene number 3 Move the cursor to the RECALL button and press the ENTER key A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Recall opera tion RECALL CONFIRMATION Recall 001 from the SCENE MEMORY CANCEL LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Scene memory lt 6 131 Using scene memories 132 4 To execute the Recall operation move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The scene you selected in step 2 will be recalled If you decide not to execute the Recall operation move the cursor to the CANCEL button instead of the OK button and press the ENTER key You have the option of making settings so that the Recall Confirmation dialog box does not appear gt p 194 5 If you decide to cancel the scene recall operation move the cursor to the RECALL UNDO button and press the ENTER key A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Undo opera tion To execute the operation move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key After execut ing the Undo you can use the RECALL UNDO button once again to Redo re execute the recall operation gt You can use the same procedure to recall scene in other SCENE MEMORY screens as well Alternatively you can recall a scene by moving the cursor to the scene nu
409. n 7 Make Fade function settings for other Scenes as described in steps 2 6 8 Recall a scene for which the Fade function is turned on The faders will begin to move immediately after Recall occurs and will reach the values of the recalled scene over the course of the specified fade time The Fade function settings be applied individually even if faders are linked by Channel Link gt If you stop a moving fader while you hold down the corre sponding SEL key the fade effect will stop at that point e If you recall the same scene while faders are moving all channel faders will move immediately to their target positions Chapter 14 Monitor Cue This chapter explains the LS9 s monitor cue functions About the monitor cue functions The Monitor function lets you audition various signals through your nearfield monitors or head phones The LS9 s front panel has a PHONES OUT jack for monitoring and this jack always lets you monitor the signal that is selected as the monitoring source By assigning the MONITOR OUT L R C channels to the desired output jacks you can also monitor the same signal through external speakers You can select the following signals as the monitor source e STEREO channel output signal USB memory recorder output signal MONO channel output signal Any combination of up to eight signals from the STE STEREO MONO channel output signal REO MONO MIX and MA
410. n use the dial or the DEC INC keys List window MIDI CONTROL CHANGE 411 E Select Control Chanse Parameters MODE PRRRMETER1 PRRRMETER2 FRDER H INPUT CANCEL Keyboard window The keyboard window shown below will appear when you assign a name or comment to a scene or library or when you assign a name to a channel To enter characters move the cursor to the desired character in the window and press the ENTER key For the procedure p 34 Keyboard window SCENE STORE SCENE TITLE 001 Opening COPY PASTE CLEAR INS DEL a A a BY 033 ai iw e e e S cube SEU 2j x SHIFT LOCK CANCEL E Dialog box When you need to confirm the operation you just per formed or when a problem has occurred a dialog box will appear asking you to confirm the operation or displaying a warning CONFIRMATION dialog box This dialog box will appear when confirmation is required Move the cursor to the OK button to execute the operation or to the CANCEL button to cancel it and press the ENTER key STORE CONFIRMATION Store to SCENE MEMORY 001 CANCEL ATTENTION dialog box This dialog box will display a warning when a prob lem has occurred with the operation you are attempt ing to execute If you move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key the operation will be executed in a way that circumvents the problem If you move the cursor to th
411. n you execute the STORE UNDO button a dialog box will ask you to confirm the Undo operation If you want to execute the Undo move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key After executing the Undo you can use the STORE UNDO button once again to Redo re execute the store operation NOTE The STORE UNDO button is available only immediately after overwrite storing Undo will no longer be possible if you sub sequently perform a scene store recall operation a gt You can use the same procedure to store a scene in other SCENE MEMORY screens as well The same function as the STORE button or STORE UNDO button can also be assigned to a user defined key gt p 132 Using scene memories To recall a scene that was stored in scene memory use the SCENE MEMORY screen 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section press the SCENE MEMORY key repeatedly to access the SCENE LIST screen CH10 Check chi 001 ADMIN SCENE LIST copy CLEAR TITLE E M COMMENT Initial Data 001 Check Initial Settins Test mode setting D Scene list This list shows the scenes that are stored in scene memory The row highlighted in blue indicates that this scene number is selected for operations 2 RECALL button This recalls the scene that is currently selected in the scene list 3 RECALL UNDO button This button cancels Undo or re executes Redo the most recently performed scene Recall operatio
412. n Error Fs 44 1kHz or 48kHz 1kHz Input Output RL Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Input level 62dBu GAIN max Output level 20 00 20 INPUT 1 16 lt 159 16 gt OMNI QUT 1 8 159 16 coo o 40484 INPUT 1 32 lt 159 32 gt OMNI OUT 1 16 lt LS9 32 gt Input level 10dBu GAIN min Output level 0 0 20 4 0dBu Typ OMNI OUT 1 8 lt LS9 16 gt OMNI OUT 1 16 159 32 600 Q Full scale output Output level 24 0dBu 0 5 0 0 0 5 Internal Oscillator SUBE ER level PHONES OUT BFs Phones level control max Output 0 5 0 0 0 5 level OdBu Typ Total Harmonic Distortion Fs 44 1kHz or 48kHz Input Output RL Conditions Min Typ Max Unit INPUT 1 16 lt 159 16 gt OMNI OUT 1 8 lt 159 16 gt 6009 4dBu 20Hz 20kHz GAIN max 0 1 INPUT 1 32 lt LS9 32 gt OMNI OUT 1 16 lt LS9 32 gt 4dBu 20Hz 20kHz GAIN min 0 05 OMNI OUT 1 8 lt LS9 16 gt OMNI OUT 1 16 lt 159 32 gt 600 Full scale output 1kHz 0 02 o Internal Oscillator Il scal rm h ES PHONES OUT Bem output Hz Phones level control 02 Total Harmonic Distortion is measured with a 18dB octave filter 80kHz Hum amp Noise Fs 44 1kHz or 48kHz EIN Equivalent Input Noise Input Output RL Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Rs 150Q GAIN max 128 Master fader nominal One channel fader nom EIN INPUT 1 16 lt LS9 16 gt OMNI OUT 1 8 lt 159 16 gt 6009 inal 62 INPUT 1 32 lt LS9 32 gt OMNI O
413. n in the toolbar you can exchange the settings held in the buffer memory with the settings of the currently selected channel EQ dynamics or rack GEQ effect This is convenient when you want to temporarily save an interim result of your editing and then compare it with subsequent edits 1 Access a popup window or screen that con tains tool buttons 2 Select a channel EQ dynamics or rack GEQ effect 3 Move the cursor to the COPY button and press the ENTER key to save the current settings in the buffer memory This will be the first version of your settings 4 Edit the settings of the currently selected channel EQ dynamics or rack GEQ effect This will be the second version of your settings Please note that if you copy other settings before you execute the Compare operation the buffer memory will be overwritten After saving the first version of your settings in buffer memory you can also initialize the channel rack and create the second version of your settings from scratch LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Basic operations on the LS9 39 Using the tool buttons 5 When you want to compare the first and second versions of your settings move the cursor to the COMPARE button and press the ENTER key You will return to the first version of your settings At this time the second version of your settings will be saved in buffer memory COPY The first set
414. n the MUTE GROUP screen To assign the channel to a mute group turn on the desired mute button 1 8 multiple selections are allowed To check the channels that are assigned to each mute group move the cursor to the MUTE popup button and press the ENTER key to access the MUTE GROUP screen For details on the MUTE GROUP screen gt p 121 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section 5 89 90 LS9 16 32 Owners Manual Chapter 8 Custom fader layer This chapter explains how to assign the desired channels to the custom fader layer About the custom fader layer The channel module section and ST IN channel section on the top panel of the LS9 consists of four layers called fader layers Fader layer 1 16 1 32 Custom fader layer Fader layer 17 32 33 64 Master fader layer Custom fader layer When you switch between these fader layers you are changing the channels that will be controlled by the faders encoders ON keys and SEL keys of the channel module section and ST IN channel section Use the keys of the LAYER section to switch fader layers LAYER LAYER c E Fader layer 1 16 Fader layer 17 32 Fader layer 1 32 Fader layer 33 64 1 16 17 32 1 32 33 64 cC c cC c Master fader layer Custom fader layer Master fader layer Custom fader layer MASTER CUSTOM MASTER CUSTOM FADER FADER LS9 16 LS9 32 LS9 16 32 O
415. n the function you want to assign To assign INC RECALL or DEC RECALL Move the cursor to the PARAMETER 1 column and use the dial or the DEC INC keys to select INC RECALL or DEC RECALL To assign DIRECT RECALL Move the cursor to the PARAMETER 1 column use the dial or the DEC INC keys to choose DIRECT RECALL and then choose SCENE xxx xxx is the scene number in the PARAMETER 2 column LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual J 133 Editing scene memories Fditing scene memories This section explains how to sort the scenes stored in scene memory edit their titles and copy paste them Sorting and renaming scene memo ries You can use a dedicated window to sort the saved scene memories in alphabetical order of their titles or in order of the date on which they were created You can also edit their titles 1 Inthe DISPLAY ACCESS section press the SCENE MEMORY key repeatedly to access the SCENE LIST screen The SCENE MEMORY screen consists of four screens but the left half scene list store recall buttons and the tool but tons are the same in all screens 10 i ADMIN L TITLE v COMMENT RECALL UNDO Scene list This lists the scenes that are stored in scene memory The line highlighted in blue indicates the scene cur rently selected for operations e You can also change the default
416. n to enable Recall Safe for the on off status and send level of the signals sent from output channels to Initial Data 000 R ADMIN ect TARGET CH for RECALL SAFE GLOBAL 5 1 2 RRCK geen BOB CH 1 ch 1 vis SAFE PARAMETER Re es Ee LS9 16 1 5 MIX9 16 MTR SAFE button Initial Data MATRIX buses Initial Data 000 R ADMIN TARGET CH for RECALL SAFE GLOBAL CH17 24 C a 31z ate AR RRCK MIX1 8 MIX9 16 1 8 5 0 Aelg MT 1 SAFE PARAMETER 77 lt a These buttons correspond to the following parameters 3 E3 amp 3 CJ Caii dose Button name Corresponding parameters ALL All parameters except for WITH MATRIX SEND EQ EQ settings including ATT DYNA 1 Dynamics 1 settings FADER Fader positions CH ON On off status of ON keys WITH MATRIX nels to MATRIX buses f you turn on the ALL button all buttons will be turned off except for the WITH MATRIX SEND button located in the SAFE PARAMETER field You can switch the WITH MATRIX SEND button on off while the ALL button is left on LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual ADMIN RECALL Si 9 Pres TARGET CH and arame r RECALL SAFE GLOBAL STIN CH33 40 CH41 48 CH49 56 CH57 64 CH1 8 CH9 16 CH17 24 CH2 CT 7 ES WT RACK MIX1 8
417. nal Delay Less than 2 5 ms INPUT to OMNI OUT Fs 48kHz 159 16 480 220 x 500 mm Dimensions LS9 32 884 220 500 mm 2 159 16 12 0 kg Net Weight 9 LS9 32 19 4 kg Pawar Requirements LS9 16 95 W 110 240 V 50 60 Hz q LS9 32 170 W 110 240 V 50 60 Hz Operating 10 C to 35 C Temperature Range Storage 20 C to 60 C Included Accessories Owner s Manual AC Power Cord Dust Cover only LS9 32 Optional Accessories mini YGDAI cards Gooseneck Light LA1L for LS9 32 Rack Mount Kit RK1 AC Power Cord Length 250 cm Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Frequency Range 39 69 50 88 kHz Sampling Frequency Jitter of PLL Digital Input Fs 44 1 kHz or 48 kHz 10 External Clock The jitter of input ns clock is less than Ins Digital Input Fs 39 69 50 88 kHz 20 Word Clock INT 44 1 kHz 44 1 Frequency kHz Sampling Frequency Word Clock INT 48 kHz 48 Internal Clock Accuracy Word Clock INT 44 1 kHz or 48 kHz 50 ppm Jitter Word Clock INT 44 1 kHz or 48 kHz 5 ns Travel Stroke Resolution 1 024 steps 10 to 138 e dB for all faders 100 mm Fader Position Error x15 Moving Time From end to the other end Under normal software control 3 sec 272 LS9 16 32 Owners Manual Input output characteristics Input output characteristics 1 Analog Input Characteristics Actual Load For Use With Input 5 ctual Loa or Use Wi Input Terminals GAIN Impedance Nomi
418. nal Sensitivity Peters Connector clip 62 dB 82 dBu 62 dBu 42 dBu INPUT 1 16 lt LS9 16 gt 50 6000 amp 61 6 uV 0 616 mV 6 16 mV XLR 3 31 type INPUT 1 32 lt LS9 32 gt 10 4 6000 Lines 10 dBu 410 dBu 30 Balanced 2 245 mV 2 45 V 24 5 V 1 Sensitivity is the lowest level that will produce an output of 4 dBu 1 23 V or the nominal output level when the unit is set to maximum gain all fad ers and level controls are maximum position 2 XLR 3 31 type connectors are balanced 1 GND 2 HOT 3 COLD In these specifications 0 dBu 0 775 Vrms All input AD converters are 24 bit linear 128 times oversampling 448V DC phantom power is supplied to INPUT XLR type connectors via each individual software controlled switch Analog Output Characteristics MIS ES co Output Level 5 ctual Source or Use Wi ain Switc Output Terminals Impedance Nominal NO Max clip 24 dB 4 dBu 24 dBu 5 default 1 23 12 3 3 OMNI OUT 1 8 lt 159 16 gt 70 1 23 V XLR 3 32 OMNI OUT 1 16 lt LS9 32 gt 18 dB 2 dBu 418 dBu Balanced 616 mV 6 16 V 8 Q Phones 75 mW 4 150 mW Stereo Phone PHONES OUT 15Q Jack TRS 40 Phones 65 mw 4 150 mw Unbalanced 2 1 XLR 3 32 type connectors are balanced 1 GND 2 HOT 3 COLD 2 PHONES OU
419. nd cas cade connections Initial Data 000 R ADMIN SLOT SETUP CASCADE IN CASCADE OUT 59 32 D BUS SETUP field Here you can make basic settings for MIX MATRIX buses p 213 OUTPUT PORT field In this field you can assign an output channel to each out put port For details refer to chapter 9 Selecting the out put channel for each output port p 97 3 MIXER SETUP field Here you can make word clock settings p 206 slot settings p 208 and cascade settings gt p 209 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Other functions di 205 About the SETUP screen Word clock settings MISC SETUP screen In this screen you can make various other settings CH 1 Initial Data ch 1 000 R ADMIN MISC SETUP MIDI DATE TIME 07 31 2006 TIME NETWORK LINK MD CONSOLE CONTRAST LOCK BRIGHTNESS SCREEN SCREEN PANEL LAMP BATTERY Et LS9 32 CPU 1 00 CD MIDI field Here you can make various MIDI related settings For details refer to chapter 18 p 177 2 DATE TIME field Here you can specify the date and time p 215 3 NETWORK field Here you can make various network related settings gt p 216 CONSOLE LOCK field This enables or disables Console Lock For details refer to chapter 19 Console lock p 197 5 CPU BATTERY field The firmware version and the state of the internal memory backup battery are shown here This w
420. nel O RACKS 2 RACK7 O RACKS 2 RACK7 This will not work when the Effect Type is different 4 8 FUNCTION CALL CHANNEL 4 8 1 Pair ON OFF Trigger Format PARAMETER CHANGE Receive Data will be received when PARAMETER CHANGE Rx is on and the Device number of both Rx CH and SUB STATUS are matched The data will be echoed when PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO is on STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n 0 15 Device number2MIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 3E Digital mixer MODEL ID 00010010 12 LS9 DATA 00000000 00 OTHERDATA CATEGORY FUNCTION 01000011 C NAME 01101000 h 01101100 1 01010000 P 01101001 i 01110010 r 01000011 c 01110000 p MODULE NAME Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE DATA Osssssss sh Source Channel Number H 1 Osssssss sl Source Channel Number L 1 Oddddddd dh Destination Channel Number H 1 Oddddddd di Destination Channel Number L 1 EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 4 8 2 Module Name MODULE NAME Pair On with Copy PAIRONCP Pair On with Reset Both PAIRONRS Pair Off PAIROFF 1 0 CH1 63 CH64 256 MIX 1 271 MIX 16 512 MATRIX 1 519 8 MIDI Data Format 4 9 LEVEL METER DATA 4 9 1 Format PARAMET
421. nel MIDI IN OUT connectors or an I O card installed in the slot 1 2 If you select an I O card you can also select a port number All of the above functionality will be common to the selected port MMC MIDI Machine Control messages can be received to control the transport of the USB memory recorder LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual MIDI 177 Basic MIDI settings Basic MIDI settings Here s how to select the type of MIDI messages the LS9 will transmit and receive the MIDI port that will be used and the MIDI channel 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section press the SETUP key repeatedly to access the MISC SETUP screen within the SETUP screens MIDI SETUP popup button Initial Data 000 R ADMIN DATE 07 31 2006 TIME 16 10 30 NETWORK LINK MODE DATE TIME SET CONSOLE CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS LOCK CPU 01 00 SCREEN SCREEN PANEL LAMP 2 Move the cursor to the MIDI SETUP popup button and press the ENTER key to access the MIDI SETUP popup window F MIDI E pem Eg 8 In the MIDI SETUP page you can select the type of MIDI messages that will be transmitted and received and choose the port that will be used This page includes the following items 0 PORT CH field Here you can select the port and MIDI channel that will be used to transmit and receive MIDI messages If MIDI messages are being transmitted or received the SIGNAL
422. nel from the following choices OMNI 1 8 1 8 9 16 Select the output channels assigned to OMNI OUT jacks 1 8 1 16 SLOT 1 2 1 8 9 16 Select the output channels assigned to output chan nels 1 16 of the slot s 1 2 2TR OUT Select the output channel assigned to the 2TR OUT DIGITAL jack 2 In the OUTPUT PORT SETUP field move the cursor to the button for the output ports that you want to set and press the ENTER key The OUTPUT PORT popup window will appear allowing you to make output port settings Changing the output patching INITIALIZE _x J DERE 0 2 ssec mI EEN ERE ENELENT PNE f f CD INITIALIZE button This initializes the settings for the displayed output ports When you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key a dialog box will ask you to confirm the Initialize operation 2 VO card type If the output channel of a slot is selected for opera tions this area indicates the type of I O card installed in that slot 3 DELAY SCALE field Use the following buttons to select the units for the delay time displayed below the delay time setting knob 6 METER The delay time is displayed as a distance in meters calculated as the speed of sound at an air tempera ture of 20 68 F 343 59 m s x delay time seconds e FEET The delay time is displayed as a distance in fee
423. ng type In this case the HIGH band Q knob will not be shown 1 Low pass filter button If this button is on the HIGH band EQ will operate as a low pass filter In this case the HIGH band Q knob will not be shown and the GAIN knob will operate as a switch that turns the low pass filter on off ATT HI EQ 2 0 LOW MID CT 0 e E 10 0 2 High pass filter button output channels only If this button is on the LOW band EQ will operate as a high pass filter In this case the LOW band Q knob will not be shown and the GAIN knob will operate as a switch that turns the high pass filter on off To turn the EQ on off move the cursor to the EQ ON OFF button and press the ENTER key If you want to make settings in the ATT HPF EQ popup window move the cursor to the desired button knob and use the ENTER key the dial or the DEC INC keys You can also adjust the Q center frequency and boost cut amount using the EQ EQ FREQUENCY and EQ GAIN encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL section In this case use the EQ HIGH EQ HIGH MID EQ LOW and EQ LOW keys to select the band that you want to adjust You can also switch EQ bands for editing by moving the cursor onto a parameter of the desired band 6 If you want to use the high pass filter on an input channel operate the HPF FREQ knob or HPF ON OFF button in the ATT H
424. nitor Cue I 3 Use the buttons and knobs of the INPUT field and OUTPUT field to specify the out put position and output level for each CUE group LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual J 149 Using the Cue function 4 Press the CUE key of a desired channel to turn it on The Cue signal of the corresponding channel will be sent to the monitor signal output destination You can also watch the Cue meter of the meter field to check the output level of the cue signal The ACTIVE CUE indicator located below the Cue meter indicates the CUE group INPUT or OUTPUT that is currently turned on CUE meter ACTIVE CUE indicator If you want Cue operations and channel select operations to be linked open the PREFERENCE popup window of the USER SETUP screen and turn CUE gt SEL LINK on gt p 194 5 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS section MONI TOR button to access the MONITOR screen and use the MONITOR LEVEL knob in the screen to adjust the level of the cue signal If PHONES LEVEL LINK is ON you can use both the MONITOR LEVEL knob and the front panel PHONES LEVEL control to adjust the monitor level when monitoring through headphones 6 To defeat Cue press the CUE CLEAR key or the currently on CUE key once again If you want to clear all Cue selections move the cursor to the CUE CLEAR button in the CUE screen and press the ENTER key All Cue selections will be cleared if yo
425. nnel ON key STEREO channel fader 5 In the channel module section or the ST IN section make sure that the ON key of the currently selected channel is turned on 6 Raise the fader of the currently selected channel or the encoder for a ST IN chan nel to obtain an appropriate volume In this state you should hear sound from the speaker system patched to the STEREO channel If you don t hear sound watch the stereo meter located at the right of the display to see whether the LR meter is moving amp o2 1 oo a n Om TODO N e If the LR meter is moving It is possible that the output jack connected to your speaker system is not correctly patched to the STE REO channel Check the output port patching gt p 95 e If the LR meter is not moving It is possible that the channel s ON key is off or that the ST button is turned off in the SELECTED CH VIEW screen Check the setting of the ON key or ST button You can also use headphones connected to the front panel PHONES OUT jack to monitor the signal that is being output from the STEREO channel gt p 146 7 To adjust the pan balance of the signal that is sent from the input channel to the STE REO bus turn the SELECTED CHANNEL section PAN encoder When you turn the PAN encoder the PAN BAL knob in the SELECTED CH VIEW screen will also move in tandem with it You can obtain the same result by moving the curs
426. nnel to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus can be switched on off together Output channel operations eo The CSR Center Side Ratio knob in the screen adjusts the proportion of the signal level sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO L R bus and the level sent to the MONO C bus The level of the signal sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO L R bus and the MONO C bus will change according to the settings of the SELECTED CHANNEL section PAN encoder or the TO ST PAN knob TO ST BAL knob in the screen If you want to use headphones etc to monitor the signal of the STEREO bus or MONO bus you should press the DISPLAY ACCESS section MONITOR key several times to access the MONITOR 2 4 screen and select LCR as the monitor source gt p 146 before you continue with the following procedure 1 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section D TO ST field HOME key 2 TO ST PAN knob for a stereo MIX channel The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the the TO ST BAL knob display 2 Inthe LAYER section press the LAYER MASTER key to select the master fader layer Data 5 RDMIN P 3 Press a SEL key in the channel module REL GAIN KNEE section to select the send source MIX chan nel if you only want to adjust the pan or bal ance of the MIX channel operate the SELECTED CHANNEL section PAN encoder gt p 86 You can obtain the same result by moving the cursor to the PAN BAL kno
427. nnels To access each library move the cursor to the LIB tool button in the ATT HPF EQ popup window and press the ENTER key _ ___ button TYPE ome OX X src g n SH LOW MID IHIGH MIDI HIGH 0 70 0 70 0 70 4 NM E GS 10 0k G 0 06 4 5 G 0 0 For details on library operations refer to Using libraries p 35 For both the input EQ library and the output EQ library you can recall 199 settings from each library Input EQ provides 40 read only presets and output EQ provides 3 read only presets For details on how to access the ATT HPF EQ popup window refer to Using EQ p 115 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Dynamics library You can use the dynamics library to store and recall dynamics settings of the LS9 s dynamics processors use this library However the types that can be selected will differ between dynamics 1 and dynamics 2 for input channels and dynamics 1 for output channels You can t recall a type that cannot be used To access the dynamics library move the cursor to the LIB tool button in the DYNAMICS 1 DYNAMICS 2 popup window and press the ENTER key LIB button HOLD DECAY For details on library operations refer to Using libraries gt p 35 You can recall 199 settings from this library The library contains 41 read only presets For details on how to access the DYNAMICS 1 DYNAMICS 2
428. no user serviceable parts If it should appear to be malfunctioning discontinue use immediately and have it Do not put burning items such as candles on the unit A burning item may fall over and cause a fire When one of the following problems occur immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the electric plug from the outlet Then have the 0 not open the device or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel device inspected by Yamaha service person The power cord or plug becon t emits unusual smells or smoke Some object has been droppe There is a sudden loss of sou e f this device should be dropped or d power switch disconnect the electric plug by qualified Yamaha service device inspected N CAUTION amaged fro nel nes frayed or damaged d into the instrument nd during use of the device immediately turn off the m the outlet and have the personnel Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others or damage to the device or other property These precautions include but are not limited to the following Power supply Power cord e Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the device is not to be used e When transportin for extended periods of time or during electrical storms Improper transpo e When removing the electric plug from the dev
429. nse curve will be highlighted 2 Level meter This meter indicates the peak level before the EQ and after the EQ If the signal has overloaded before or after the EQ the OVER segment will light If the cor responding channel is stereo a ST IN channel a MIX channel MATRIX channel that is set to stereo or the STEREO channel level meters for two channels will be displayed 5 ATT knob This knob specifies the amount of attenuation gain before entering the EQ in a range of 96 dB 24 dB Use this to compensate for level changes caused by the EQ 6 HPF FREQ knob HPF ON OFF button input channels only This knob and button let you adjust the cutoff fre quency of the high pass filter placed immediately after the attenuation and before the EQ and switch it on off The cutoff frequency can be adjusted in a range of 20 600 Hz EQ ON OFF button This switches the EQ on off LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual LOW shelving button If this button is on the LOW band EQ will switch to a shelving type In this case the LOW band Q knob will not be shown Q FREQ GAIN knobs For each of the LOW LOW MID HIGH MID and HIGH bands these knobs adjust the Q steepness FREQ center frequency and GAIN amount of boost cut You can move the cursor to one of the knobs in 9 and press the ENTER key to switch the EQ on off HIGH shelving button If this button is on the HIGH band EQ will switch to a shelvi
430. nt effects or graphic EQ and then patch them into the desired signal route Graphic EQ can be mounted in racks 1 4 and effects or graphic EQ can be mounted in racks 5 8 You can simultaneously use up to four high quality multi effects which include reverb delay multi band compres sor and various modulation type effects These can be used via an internal bus or inserted into a desired channel For the graphic EQ you can select either 31 band graphic EQ or Flex 15 GEQ These can be inserted into the desired channel or output The Flex 15 GEQ allows you to adjust the gain for any fifteen of the thirty one bands Since two Flex 15 GEQ units can be mounted in a single virtual rack a total of up to sixteen graphic EQ units can be used simultaneously Arecorder function that s useful for sound checks or recording mixes A recorder function is provided allowing you to use USB memory to record the output of the STEREO bus or a MIX bus or assign an audio file in USB memory to a desired input channel or monitor output and play it back Supported file formats are MP3 MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 for recording and MP3 WMA Windows Media Audio and MPEG 4 AAC Advanced Audio Coding for play back However DRM Digital Rights Management is not supported This function is convenient when you want to record the mix output of a specific bus or if you want to play back a song from the speakers during the sound check E Cascade c
431. numbered even numbered MIX buses For details refer to gt p 213 TO MIX LEVEL 1 16 MIX send level 1 16 This adjusts the send level of the signal sent from the input channel to VARI type MIX buses 1 16 The signal sent to VARI type MIX buses can be taken from pre EQ pre fader or post channel on off as desired The signal sent to FIXED type MIX buses is taken pre pan if the MIX bus is monaural or post pan if the MIX bus is stereo INSERT INPUT channels 1 32 only This lets you patch the desired output input ports in order to insert an effect processor or other external device gt p 101 The insert out insert in position can be switched pre EQ pre fader or post channel on off DIRECT OUT INPUT channels only This lets you patch the desired output port in order to out put the input signal directly p 103 The direct out sig nal can be taken from pre HPF pre EQ or pre fader METER This meters the level of the input channel You can switch the position at which the level is detected Specifying the channel name icon Specifying the channel name icon On the 159 the name and icon shown in the screen can be specified for each input channel Here we will explain how to specify the channel name and icon 1 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section 4 Move the cursor to the input port select HOME key popup button in the HA field of the screen The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the and p
432. ny knob in the EQ field and press the ENTER key TIO ATK REL GAIN KNEE The ATT HPF EQ popup window will appear In the popup window you can view and edit all EQ parameters of the currently selected chan I BIRECT nel Tite H MiD If you ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window p 194 you can access the above popup window by pressing either of the EQ EQ FREQUENCY or EQ GAIN encoders while the SELECTED CH VIEW screen is shown D EQ popup button LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual 115 Using EQ 116 The window contains the following items 1 TYPE I Il buttons These buttons select the EQ type If the TYPE I button is on the EQ will use the same algorithm as previous Yamaha digital mixers if the TYPE II button is on a newly developed algorithm will be used Using TYPE II will reduce interference between bands 2 FLAT button This button resets the GAIN parameter of all bands to the initial value 0 0 dB When you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key a dialog box will ask you to confirm the operation 3 EQ graph This graph shows the approximate response of the EQ parameters A pointer is shown at the peak of each band Operating the Q FREQ or GAIN knobs of each band will change the response curve accordingly If EQ or high pass filter is on the respo
433. o a rack in which an effect is mounted in the GEQ EFFECT field and press the ENTER key The RACK screen will appear allowing you to edit the parameters of the effect You can also access the RACK 5 8 screens by repeat edly pressing the RACK 5 8 key The EXTERNAL HA screen that appears when you operate the RACK 5 8 key is used when you re using an external head amp gt p 175 000 INPUT L MIX1S REUERB PLRTE E1IN ZOUT 3 HPF Thru OFF 1 BAL knob This knob adjusts the balance between the original sound and effect sound included in the output signal from the effect 2 Input output meters These indicate the level of the signals before and after the effect 3 INPUT L R buttons These buttons display the OUTPUT CH SELECT popup window The operating procedure is the same as for the INPUT button in the GEQ EFFECT field OUTPUT L R buttons These buttons display the INPUT CH SELECT popup window The operating procedure is the same as for the OUTPUT button in the GEQ EFFECT field LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Graphic EQ and effects 4 167 About the internal effects 5 To change the mix balance of the original sound and effect sound move the cursor to the MIX BAL knob and use the dial or the keys The MIX BAL knob adjusts the balance between the original sound and effect sound included in th
434. o one of the buttons in the MODE SELECT field and press the ENTER key INITIALIZE ALL MEMORIES button The entire memory including scene memories and libraries will be returned to their factory set condition INITIALIZE CURRENT MEMORIES button The contents of memory except for scene memories and libraries will be returned to its factory set condi tion 3 To execute the Initialize operation move the cursor to the INITIALIZE button located in the dialog box at the left side of the screen and press the ENTER key A dialog box will ask you to confirm the operation 222 LS9 16 32 Owners Manual Adjusting the faders Calibration function Adjusting the faders Calibration function Depending on the environment in which you use the console discrepancies may occur in the motion of the motor faders You can use the Calibration function to correct these discrepancies 1 While holding down the SCENE MEMORY 4 Move the cursor to the START button and key of the DISPLAY ACCESS section turn press the ENTER key on the power A dialog box will ask you to confirm the operation After the opening screen the following startup menu screen will appear Move the cursor to the OK button of the dialog box and press the ENTER key INITIALIZE ALL MEMORIES MODE SELECT Each of the specified faders will move to the target positions in the following sequence 1 push down to the minimum value 2 20 dB 3 O
435. o select the insert in port 9 Move the cursor to the CLOSE button and press the ENTER key to return to the pre vious screen 10 Move the cursor to the insert point select box and use the dial or the DEC INC keys to select the insert point You can select PRE EQ immediately before the EQ PRE FADER immediately before the fader or POST ON immediately after the channel on off 11 Move the cursor to the INSERT ON OFF but ton and press the DEC INC keys or the ENTER key to turn it ON This enables the insertion you specified Directly outputting an INPUT channel Directly outputting an INPUT channel The signal of an INPUT channel can be output directly from the desired OMNI OUT jack or from the output channel of a desired slot For example by sending signals to an external digital recorder via a digital I O card installed in a slot you can make a live recording without affecting the LS9 s internal mixing 1 Connect your external device to an OMNI OUT jack or to an I O card installed in a slot 1 2 DIGITAL OUT DIGITAL IN Digital recorder Digital I O card e If you install a digital I O card in a slot and digitally connect external device you must synchronize the word clock of the LS9 and the external device gt p 46 2 Press the HOME key to access the SELECTED CH VIEW screen and use the SEL keys to select the INPUT channel from which you want to t
436. o that channel 5 GAIN knob This indicates the amount of gain for the head amp assigned to that channel Move the cursor to the knob and use the dial or the DEC INC keys to adjust the setting The level meter located immediately to the right of the knob shows the input level of the corre sponding port Input output patching EA e The PAD will be internally switched on or off when the HA gain is adjusted between 14 dB and 13 dB Keep in mind that noise may be generated if there is a difference between the Hot and Cold output impedance of the external device connected to the INPUT connector when using phantom power 6 phase button This button switches the head amp assigned to that channel between normal phase black and reverse phase orange LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual J 99 Changing the input patching 3 Move the cursor to the port select popup 4 Use the category tabs and the port select button for the desired channel and press buttons to select the input source port the ENTER key The INPUT PORT SELECT popup window will 5 Move the cursor to the CLOSE button and appear allowing you to select the input port for the press the ENTER key to return to the pre input channel vious screen This popup window contains the following items As an alternative to using the CLOSE button you can return to the previous screen by pressing the SELECTED CHAN NEL section HOME key once 6 If necessary perform
437. o the STEREO MONO bus Sending signals from MIX channels to the STEREO MONO bus This section explains how to send the signal of a MIX channel to the STEREO bus or MONO bus Signals can be sent to the STEREO bus or MONO bus in either ST MONO mode or LCR mode and you can choose either of these two modes for each MIX channel These two modes differ as follows E ST MONO 99999 This mode sends the signal from the MIX channel to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus independently The signals sent from the same MIX channel to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus can be switched on off individually The panning of the signal sent from a monaural MIX channel to the STEREO bus L R can be operated by the SELECTED CHANNEL section PAN encoder or by the TO ST PAN knob in the screen The signal sent to the MONO bus is not affected by this encoder or knob The volume balance of the signals sent from two stereo assigned MIX channels to the STEREO bus left and right can be operated by the SELECTED CHANNEL section PAN encoder or by the TO ST BAL knob in the screen The signal sent to the MONO bus is not affected by this knob E LCR mode 09090000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000090 This mode sends the signal of the MIX channel to a total of three buses STEREO L R and MONO C together The signals sent from the same MIX cha
438. ob 2 This button is an on off switch for the signal sent from the input channel to a FIXED type MIX bus To turn the signal on off move the cursor to the button and press the ENTER key 62 LS9 16 32 Owners Manual 4 PRE POST indicator This indicates the send position of the signal sent from the input channel to a VARI type MIX bus The signal is being sent from the pre EQ or pre fader position if this indicates PRE or from immediately after the channel on off if the PRE indication is not shown This indicator is only for display You cannot use this field to change the send position of the signal 3 Use the LAYER section keys and the SEL keys of the channel module section or ST IN section to select the input channel that you want to operate 4 Use the MIX MATRIX SELECT section keys to select the send destination MIX bus The LED of the corresponding key will light indicat ing that it is selected as the send destination e If the send destination MIX bus is the VARI type The TO MIX field in the screen shows the knob in the same color as the corresponding key of the MIX MATRIX SEND section e If the send destination MIX bus is the FIXED type The TO MIX field will show the TO MIX ON OFF button instead of the TO MIX LEVEL knob In this case you can t adjust the send level e If the LED of only a specific key in the MIX MATRIX SELECT section is blinking and the LEDs of the remaining keys are lit
439. ocedure to initialize the internal memory N CAUTION The entire contents of memory will be lost if you initialize the internal memory Proceed with the following operation only if you are very sure you want to do this 1 While holding down the SCENE MEMORY 4 Move the cursor to the OK button of the key of the DISPLAY ACCESS section turn dialog box and press the ENTER key on the power Initialization will begin After the opening screen the following startup menu NOTE screen will appear Do not press any key until initialization has been completed When initialization has been completed move the cursor to the EXIT button and press the ENTER key The console will start up in normal operating mode INITIRLIZE RLL MEMORIES MODE SELECT NOTE Initialize A11 Memories e If the backup battery voltage is low or if an error occurs in the internal memory a warning dialog box will appear and then INITIALIZE the initialization menu will appear If the warning dialog box appears and you select the EXIT button to start up in normal operating mode Yamaha cannot guarantee that the unit will operate correctly wr gt Instead of using the EXIT button you can also select differ ent button of the MODE SELECT field CD MODE SELECT field 2 INITIALIZE ALL MEMORIES button 3 INITIALIZE CURRENT MEMORIES button 2 According to the desired type of initializa tion move the cursor t
440. ock slave that is synchronized to the word clock supplied from an external device you must specify the appropriate clock source the port through which the word clock is obtained The following steps show how to select the clock source that the LS9 will use 1 Inthe DISPLAY ACCESS section press the SETUP key repeatedly to access the SYS TEM SETUP screen 000 Data EM SETUP E STER BUS SETUP MIX OMNI SLOTI SLOTZ 1 8 i28 tee OUTPUT PORT SETUP SLOT2 9 16 MIXER SETUP SLOT SETUP CASCADE IN CASCADE OUT LS9 32 206 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual MIXER SETUP field 2 WORD CLOCK button 2 Move the cursor to the WORD CLOCK but ton of the MIXER SETUP field in the lower part of the screen and press the ENTER key The WORD CLOCK popup window will appear allowing you to make word clock settings This popup window contains the following items 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 SLOT2 M Y 16 RE WS SA0 11 12 13 14 15 16 D Clock frequency This indicates the frequency of the currently selected clock source This field will indicate UNLOCKED while synchronization is lost such as immediately after switching the master clock 2 Clock select buttons These buttons select the master clock source You can choose from the internal clock the word clock signal supplied from the WORD CLOCK IN connector or the word clock data included in the input signal from an I O card in a slot
441. of the corresponding MIDI channel and program number in the list will be transmitted e Single mode when the SINGLE button is on Only program changes of the transmit Tx and receive Rx channels specified in the MIDI SETUP popup window will be transmitted and received When a program change on the Rx channel is received the event assigned to that program number of the corresponding channel in the list will be executed When you execute a specific event on the LS9 the program change of the corresponding program number will be transmitted on the Tx channel shown in the list If an event is assigned to more than one program number on the same channel the lowest numbered program number will be transmitted Using program changes to recall scenes and library items If you turn on the OMNI button BANK button in Sin gle mode operation will change as follows When the OMNI button is on Program changes of all MIDI channels will be received However regardless of the MIDI channel that is received the event assigned to the corre sponding program number of the Rx channel will be executed Turning on the OMNI button will not change the operation for program change transmission When the BANK button is on The CH indication in the list will change to BANK bank number and bank select control change 0 32 program change messages can be trans mitted and received This is convenient when you want to control more t
442. of the move source channel will be moved to the move destination The settings of all channels between the move source and move destina tion will be moved by one channel in the direction of the move source When the Move has been executed the SOURCE CH field and DESTINATION CH field will return to an un set state LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Grouping and linking RO 127 Copying moving or initializing a channel 128 Initializing the parameters of a channel If desired you can restore the parameters of any channel to an initialized state This operation can be performed on any channel s 1 Inthe DISPLAY ACCESS section press the CHANNEL JOB key repeatedly to access the CH CLEAR screen of the CHANNEL JOB screens Initial Data 000 ADMIN CH41 48 CH49 11 9 16 D TARGET field In this field select the channel s that you want to ini tialize 2 CLEAR TARGET button This button clears the channels shown in the TARGET CHs field 3 CLEAR button Executes the initialization 2 To select the channel s to be initialized press the corresponding SEL key to make it light multiple selections are allowed The corresponding channel s is are highlighted in the TARGET CHs field of the window If you want to de select all channels move the cursor to the CLEAR TARGET button and press the ENTER Key 3 To execute the Initialize operation move the cursor to the CLEAR b
443. of the selected rack 2 Virtual rack This is the virtual rack in which you can mount a GEQ or effect 3 MODULE SELECT buttons Use these buttons to select the GEQ or effect that will be mounted in the rack Each button has the following function BLANK button Removes the GEQ or effect currently mounted in the rack the rack will be empty e 31 Band GEQ button Mounts a 31 Band GEQ in the rack Flex15GEQ button Mounts a Flex15GEQ in the rack EFFECT button Mounts an effect in the rack This button will not operate for racks 1 4 Input output patching will be cleared if you change the item that is mounted or remove the mounted item 2 CANCEL button Cancels the changes you made in the RACK MOUNTER popup window and closes the window OK button Applies the changes you made in the RACK MOUNTER popup window and closes the window NOTE Be aware that if you remove a GEQ or effect that was mounted in a rack and close the window all parameter set tings for that GEQ or effect will be discarded If you have not yet closed the window you can recover the settings by mount ing the same GEQ or effect once again a gt You can also display the RACK MOUNTER popup window by moving the cursor to a vacant rack in the GEQ EFFECT field and pressing the ENTER key 3 Use the MODULE SELECT buttons to select the item you want to mount move the cur sor to the OK button and press the ENTER key
444. old level at which the de esser effect applies FREQUENCY 1kHz 12 5kHz 45 points Cutoff frequency of the HPF used to detect the high frequencies Appendices LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual J 231 Effect Type List 232 Effect Type List Title Reverb Hall Reverb Room Type REVERB HALL REVERB ROOM Description Concert hall reverberation simula tion with gate Room reverberation simulation with gate Reverb Stage REVERB STAGE Reverb designed for vocals with gate Reverb Plate REVERB PLATE Plate reverb simulation with gate Early Ref EARLY REF Early reflections without the sub sequent reverb Gate Reverb GATE REVERB Gated early reflections Reverse Gate REVERSE GATE Gated reverse early reflections Mono Delay MONO DELAY Simple mono delay Stereo Delay STEREO DELAY Simple stereo delay Simple repeat delay with modula Mod Delay MOD DELAY tion Delay LCR DELAY LCR 3 tap left center right delay Echo ECHO E a crossed left Chorus CHORUS Chorus Flange FLANGE Flanger Proprietary Yamaha effect that Symphonic icher and more com chorus Phaser PHASER 16 stage stereo phase shifter Auto Pan AUTO PAN Auto panner Tremolo TREMOLO Tremolo HQ Pitch HQ PITCH Me pite saiten producing Dual Pitch DUAL PITCH Stereo pitch shifter Rotary ROTARY Rotary spe
445. om power on off and switch the phase for each input channel to which you ve connected a mic or instrument If you want the clock source to be the clock data included in a digital audio signal from a slot Turn on a valid 2 channel button for the corresponding slot When setting HA related parameters on the LS9 you can If you want the clock source to be the clock either use the SELECTED CHANNEL section or the data included in the digital audio signal from SELES TEP the display to make SPI the 2TR IN DIGITAL jack tings for a single channel at a time or use the popup win Turn on the 2TR IN button dow to make settings for eight channels at a time Making HA settings for one channel at a Connections and setup e If a conventional CD player or similar device is connected to tim e the 2TR IN DIGITAL jack use that device as the clock master In some cases noise may occur when synchronization is lost Select the channel that you want to set and use the SELECTED CHANNEL section or the SELECTED CH If you want the word clock data from the VIEW screen of the display to make HA settings WORD CLOCK IN jack to be the clock source Turn on the WC IN button 1 Make sure that a mic or instrument is con If you want the LS9 s internal clock to be the nected to the INPUT jack gt p 41 clock source 2 Turn on the INT48k sampling frequency 48 kHz or INT44 1k sampling frequency 44 1 kHz button Mak
446. on Formats the USB memory media gt p 204 49 COMMENT TIME STAMP button Toggles the item shown at the far right of the file list between COMMENT and TIME STAMP 3 Perform the desired editing operation For details on the procedure refer to the explanations that follow Sorting files and editing file names comments 1 Inthe DISPLAY ACCESS section press the SETUP key repeatedly to access the USER SETUP screen 2 Move the cursor to the SAVE LOAD button and press the ENTER key to access the SAVE LOAD popup window 3 To sort the files move the cursor to the FILE NAME lock symbol FILE TYPE COMMENT or TIME STAMP field at the top of the file list and press the ENTER key The list will be sorted as follows according to the col umn title you selected FILE FILE NAME Sort the list in alphanumerical order of file name 2 Lock symbol Sort the list according to Write Protect on off status 3 FILE TYPE Sort the list according to file type COMMENT Sort the list in alphanumeric order of the comment 5 TIME STAMP Sort the list in order of date of creation By pressing the ENTER key again you can change the direction ascending or descending in which the list is sorted LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual 4 If you want to edit the file name or com ment move the cursor to the FILE NAME field or COMMENT field of each file and press the ENTER key to
447. on press the SETUP key repeatedly to access the USER SETUP screen Initial Data 000 RI ADMIN CURRENT STORAGE Administrator 52 M CREATE USER KEY an PREFERENCE E USER SRUE LORD CUSTOM FADER LRYER Em 7 PREFERENCE USER CUSTOM FADER LAYER USER LEVEL v USER LEVEL USER LEVEL popup button 2 Move the cursor to the USER LEVEL popup button and press the ENTER key to access the USER LEVEL popup window e If you are logged in as Administrator you can move the cursor to the for Guest USER LEVEL popup button and press the ENTER key to access the USER LEVEL popup window where you can view or change the guest s user level CURREHT SCEHE PROCESSING FRDER ON SCENE LIST FILE LOAD MONITOR LIBRARY LIST SYSTEM SETUP This page includes the following items D CH OPERATION field Here you can specify for each channel the operations that will be permitted for input channels and output channels The settings will apply to the currently selected channel Use the panel SEL keys to select the channel for which you want to make settings Channels that have the same settings are shown with the same color in the channel display field The selected channel is shown with a frame around it e HA Restricts operation of the HA Head Amp patched to that channel PROCESSING Restricts operation
448. on delay time WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off wm ETE s HP BOHJT B b d 4 daed d Parameter Range Description SCHED REV TIME 0 3 99 0 s Reverb time Parameter Range Description INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins REV TIME 0 3 99 0 5 Reverb time HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins DIFF 0 10 Spread HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density DIFF 0 10 Spread Reverb and flanged reverb bal DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density REV BAL 0 10096 ae 096 all flanged reverb Reverb and symphonic reverb bal 10096 all reverb REV BAL 0 100 ance 0 all symphonic reverb HPF T are High pass filter cutoff frequency 2 Mos LE High pass filter cutoff frequency 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz 8 00 kHz LPF THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 0 2 16 0 kHz Low pass filter cutoff frequency FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed THRU DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth Feedback gain plus values for MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time GAIN 99 to 49996 normal phase feedback minus WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform values for reverse phase feedback SYNE OFFION 7 Toft WAVE Sine Tri
449. onaural and four ST IN channels stereo i o ero 1 0000008 1 2 0 000001 MS mt LIII p oj eL 0 L 0 eL e0 Channel modules ST IN channels The LS9 16 provides thirty two channel modules and four ST IN channels By switching fader layers you can operate up to sixty four INPUT channels monaural The four ST IN channels stereo can be operated from either layer 1 32 or 33 64 sr 2 1 i i 88 HIE 58 DODDDDS 0 1 481 o ogoogo e USER DEFINED KEYS
450. onnections in the digital A second LS9 console or a digital mixer such as the Yamaha M7CL or PM5D connected via a digital I O card installed in a slot can be cascade connected in the digital domain Of the MIX buses MATRIX buses STEREO L R bus buses CUE L R bus the desired buses can be merged and all mixed bus signals can be cascaded individually LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Security functions that can be specified at user level or system level User levels can be distinguished into three levels admin Istrator guest user and the functionality available to each non administrator user can be restricted Passwords can be specified for the administrator and users prevent ing important settings from being changed accidentally Information specific to each user user level system set tings and user defined key settings can be stored on USB memory as a user authentication key By loading your own user authentication key from USB memory you can instantly set up the ideal operating environment for your self Bi 1 0 card expansion The rear panel provides one slot LS9 16 or two slots LS9 32 in which separately sold mini YGDAI cards can be installed AD cards DA cards or digital I O cards can be installed in these slots to add inputs and outputs port Differences between the LS9 16 and LS9 32 Differences between the 189 16 and 189 82 The LS9 i
451. ons to select a sample name The selected sample name will be entered in the channel name field in the upper part of the window You can add or edit the text after entering the sample name in the channel name field If you want to assign channel names that consist of a common name plus a number such as Vocal 1 Vocal 2 you can simply enter a sample name and then add a number 8 If you want to enter a channel name directly or edit the previously entered sample name move the cursor to the channel name field in the upper part of the window and press the ENTER key The keyboard window will appear in the lower part of the window allowing you to enter or edit the text For details on using the keyboard window refer to p 34 56 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual HA head amp settings Here s how to make HA Head Amp settings such as phantom power on off gain and phase for each input channel 1 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section HOME key The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the display 7 SAFE 7 DIRECT CON 7 D HA popup button 2 GAIN knob 2 Use the LAYER section to select the desired fader layer 3 Press a SEL key in the channel module section or ST IN section to select the input channel that you want to operate 4 If you only want to adjust the HA gain for that channel operate the SELECTED CHANNEL section HA GAIN encoder You can obtain the same re
452. op panel SEL keys to select FROM MIX field another channel and adjust the send level If a MATRIX channel is selected this area of the to the selected MATRIX bus in the same SELECTED CH VIEW screen will show the FROM way MIX field allowing you to switch the on off status and adjust the send level of the signals sent from each MIX 7 Use the keys of the MIX MATRIX SELECT channel to the MATRIX bus section to select another MATRIX bus as 2 FROM MIX LEVEL knobs the send destination and adjust the send These knobs indicate and control the send level of the level in the same way signals sent from MIX channels 1 16 to the currently selected MATRIX bus order to select a MATRIX channel on the LS9 16 you must first select the custom fader layer to which you ve assigned that MATRIX channel and then press the corresponding SEL key 76 LS9 16 32 Owners Manual Sending signals from MIX channels and STEREO MONO channels to MATRIX buses 3 To adjust the send level from a MIX channel to the selected MATRIX bus move the cur sor to the corresponding knob of the FROM MIX field and operate the SELECTED SEND encoder You can obtain the same result by operating the dial or the DEC INC keys If the send destination MATRIX bus is set to stereo the send level to the two adjacent odd numbered even numbered MATRIX buses will be linked 4 To switch the on off status of a signal sent from a MIX channel to the selected MATRIX
453. operate the LS9 you must log in as some type of user Administrator This is the administrator of the LS9 and can use all of its functionality Only one set of Administrator settings is internally maintained in the console The Administrator can create user authentication keys for other users e Guest A User can use only the range of functionality permitted by the Administrator Only one set of Guest settings is internally maintained in the console e User A User can use only the range of functionality permitted by the Administrator User settings are saved on USB memory as a user authentication key Multiple sets of User settings can be saved with different user names Custom fader layer user defined key and preference settings can be edited and these set tings stored in the user authentication key In addition a User who has Power User privileges can create or edit user authentication keys with a specified user level When a user logs on the user settings for that user are applied User settings include the following informa tion Password except for Guest User level except for Administrator Preferences User defined keys LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual User settings Security 187 User Level settings Privileges for each user are as follows Custom fader layer user User authentication key Logged in user defined keys preference User Level setting scm gonm
454. or to the PAN BAL knob and oper ating the dial or the DEC INC keys 8 To control another channel use the SEL keys to select another channel and make settings in the same way Setup required when starting up Controlling the signal sent to the STE REO bus eight channels at a time Here s how to access a popup window in which the level and pan balance of the signal sent to the STEREO bus can be adjusted for eight channels at a time 1 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section HOME key The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the display Connections and setup e DIRECT LOW L MID H MID 25 EMOTE i 7 0 70 0 70 0 70 0 70 125 1 00k 5 0 5 3 5 7 CD PAN popup button 2 PAN BAL knob 2 Use the keys of the LAYER section and the SEL keys of the channel module section to select the channel for the INPUT jack you want to control 3 Move the cursor to the PAN popup button or PAN BAL knob in the SELECTED CH VIEW screen and press the ENTER key The TO STEREO MONO popup window will appear allowing you to adjust the level and pan balance of the signal sent to the STEREO bus eight channels at a time This popup window shows the parameters for the eight channels that include the channel you selected in step 2 D ST button 2 PAN BAL knob LS9 16 32 Owners Manual 51 Setup required when starting up 52 e If you ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING KNOB
455. order in which the list is sorted ascending or descending scene number gt p 194 134 4 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual 2 Scene number This is the scene number 000 300 3 TITLE This is the name assigned to each scene maximum 16 characters You can move the cursor to this area and press the ENTER key to access the SCENE TITLE EDIT popup window where you can assign a title or comment to the scene 4 symbol READ ONLY Protect symbol A read only scene is indicated by the R symbol and a write protected scene is indicated by the protect lock symbol For scenes 001 300 you can move the cursor to this area and press the ENTER key to switch between protected and un protected settings 5 Store Recall buttons These buttons are used to store recall scenes You can also undo cancel or redo re execute store recall operations For details refer to Using scene memo ries p 129 6 Tool buttons Use these buttons to perform operations such as Copy and Paste on the scenes stored in scene memory For details refer to Scene memory editing p 136 7 STATUS field This field indicates the status of each scene For scenes for which something other than the ALL button is selected in the Focus function p 139 for scenes in which the Fade function is enabled gt p 143 and for scenes for which the link with an audio file is enabled p 113 the FOCUS FADING and PLAY indications wil
456. ording to the ratio and threshold values and can be increased by up to 18 dB The OUT GAIN parameter enables you to compensate for the overall level change caused by the compression and expan sion processes Parameter THRESHOLD dB RATIO Range 54 to 0 55 points 1 0 1 3 1 1 1 333 1521 1 7 1 2 07 2 5 1 3 0 1 3 5 1 4 0 1 5 0 1 6 0 1 8 0 1 10 1 20 1 15 points Description This determines the level at which compression is applied This determines the amount of compression ATTACK ms 0 120 121 points This determines how soon the signal is compressed or expanded once the com pander has been triggered RELEASE ms 44 1kHz 6 ms 46 0 sec 48 2 5 ms 42 3 sec 160 points This determines how soon the compressor or expander returns to the normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below or exceeds the threshold respectively The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB OUT GAIN dB WIDTH dB 18 0 to 0 0 181 points 1 90 90 points This sets the compander s output signal level This determines how far below the threshold expansion will be applied The expander is activated when the level drops below the threshold and width This detects and compresses only the sibilants and other high frequency consonants of the vocal Parameter THRESHOLD Range 54 to 0 55 points Description Thresh
457. ort select popup button and press the ENTER key the PATCH NAME popup window will appear allowing you to select the input port and specify the channel name and icon For details on the popup window gt p 55 gt If you want to make head amp settings for eight channels at a time use the HA popup button in the screen to access the HA PATCH popup window gt p 57 If you ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window gt p 194 you can also access the above popup window by pressing the SELECTED CHANNEL section HA GAIN encoder NOTE The PAD will be internally switched on or off when the HA gain is adjusted between 14 dB and 13 dB Keep in mind that noise may be generated if there is a difference between the Hot and Cold output impedance of the external device connected to the INPUT connector when using phantom power LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section 5 85 Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section Changing the output patching Output channels only To change the output patching of an output channel in the SELECTED CH VIEW screen use the PATCH popup but ton D PATCH popup button This button displays the HA PATCH popup window where you can make output port settings for eight chan nels at a time p 95 2 Output port select popup button This accesses the PATCH NAME popup window where you can select the o
458. orward At this time the scene that was cut will be stored in buffer memory NOTE Read only scenes or write protected scenes cannot be cut 5 If desired you can paste p 136 or insert the cut scene that was held in the buffer memory NOTE Be aware that if you copy or cut a different scene before you paste or insert the newly copied or cut scene will overwrite the scene in the buffer memory LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Here s how a scene held in the buffer memory can be inserted at the desired scene number location 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section press the SCENE MEMORY key to access any one of the SCENE MEMORY screens 2 Perform the Copy operation gt p 136 or Cut operation so that the scene you want to insert is placed in the buffer memory 3 Make sure that the cursor is located some where other than the constant display area and use the dial or the DECT INC keys to select the insert destination scene number 4 Move the cursor to the INSERT button and press the ENTER key A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Insert opera tion CONF IRMAT I ON Insert Scene CANCEL The INSERT button cannot be used if the scene list is sorted in any other way than by the NO column e If nothing has been stored in the buffer memory the INSERT button is not available The INSERT button cannot be used if the Insert operation would cause the number of stored scenes to exceed
459. ory can be connected here and used to save or load internal data User authentication key data to define the user level can also be saved on USB memory and used to restrict the functionality that is available to each user NOTE Operation is guaranteed only for USB flash memory USB memory format Only USB memory that is 2 GB or less in capacity and is formatted in FAT12 FAT16 or FAT32 is sup ported If the USB memory is formatted in any other way you must reformat it in the USER SETUP screen E Write protection Some USB memory has write protection that prevents data from being erased inadvertently If your USB memory contains important data we suggest that you use its write protect feature to prevent accidental erasure Conversely you must make sure that your USB memory s write protect feature is disabled before you attempt to save data to it CAUTION The ACCESS indicator will appear in the upper part of the screen while data is being accessed such as during saving loading or deleting During this time you must not discon nect the USB memory from the USB connector or power off the LS9 Doing so may damage your USB memory or damage the data in the LS9 or in the USB memory Rear panel Rear panel 188 16 Parts and their function ald 6 90 So gt GE D R ERN oy YAM
460. out the internal effects 170 Editing the internal effect parame ters This section explains how to change the effect type and edit the parameters 1 As described in Mounting a GEQ or effect in the virtual rack p 158 steps 1 3 mount an effect in a rack A rack in which an effect is mounted will indicate the effect type used by that effect and the bypass on off status CH 1 Initial Data ch 1 00 R ADMIN UIRTURL RACK INSCH d aud INS CH 1 INS CH 2 INS CH 3 gt a INSCH3 E INS CH 4 gt AA E lt E gt Reverb Hall gt INS CH9 REVERB HALL gt INS CH10 F Reverb Room L REVERS ROOM F INS CH10 gt R L7 5 Reverb Plate L T REUERB PLRTE R 8 2727 L R RO Mono Delay MONO DELAY D Effect title type Bypass on off status 2 Move the cursor to the rack in which the effect you want to edit is mounted and press the ENTER key The RACK screen will appear allowing you to edit the parameters of the effect You can also access the RACK 5 8 screens by repeat edly pressing the RACK 5 8 key The EXTERNAL HA screen that appears when you operate the RACK 5 8 key is used when you re using an external head amp gt p 175 n 00 tia ul MIX BAL 100 OUTPUT STINSL STINSR REUERB PLRTE E 1IN ZOUT 3 INPUT MI LS9 16 32 Owner s
461. outputting an INPUT channel 4 Move the cursor to the port select popup button and press the ENTER key The OUTPUT PORT SELECT popup window will appear allowing you to select the output port that will be patched to direct output OUTPUT PORT SELECT DIRECT OUT OMNI1 LS9 16 D Category tab These tabs select the output ports that are shown in the popup window Each tab corresponds to the following output ports OMNI 2TR OUT Shows OMNI OUT jacks 1 8 1 16 and 2TR OUT DIGITAL jack e SLOT 1 2 Shows output channels 1 16 of the slot s 1 2 REC IN Shows USB memory recorder input channels 2 Port select button This selects the output port that is assigned to direct output 5 Use the category tabs and the port select buttons to select the port that will be the direct output 6 Move the cursor to the CLOSE button and press the ENTER key to return to the pre vious screen 7 Move the cursor to the direct out point select box and use the dial or the DEC INC keys to select the direct out point You can choose PRE HPF immediately before the high pass filter PRE EQ immediately before the EQ or PRE FADER immediately before the fader 104 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual 8 Move the cursor to the DIRECT OUT ON OFF button and press the DEC INC keys or the ENTER key to turn it ON This enables the direct output you specified 9 As necessary move the cursor to the
462. ove knobs and buttons will be shown even if an is not connected you can use them to make settings even without the AD8HR and store these settings in a scene LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual 7 To remotely control the external HA in an LS9 input channel press the HOME key to access the SELECTED CH VIEW screen and access the channel that you want to control KNEE X DIRECT OM et HIGH MU 4 SHELF 0 0 70 SHELF UE 00k 4 00k 10 0 D HA popup button 8 Move the cursor to the HA popup button and press the ENTER key to access the HA PATCH popup window CD Input port popup button 9 Press the input port popup button and select the input port assigned to the exter nal HA With these settings the external HA can be used in the same way as the LS9 s own HA For details on the HA PATCH popup window refer to HA head amp settings p 57 Settings for the external HA are saved as part of the scene However master phantom on off HPF on off and cutoff fre quency settings are excepted When you adjust the brightness of the LS9 s panel LEDs this will also affect the LEDs of the external HA Chapter 18 MIDI This chapter explains how MIDI messages can be transmitted from an exter nal device to control the LS9 s parameters and conversely how operations on the LS9 can be transmitted as MIDI messages MIDI functionality on the 159 The LS9 can use MIDI to perform
463. p 163 When this button is turned on the faders in the screen will turn white and you will be able to use the top panel faders to adjust the GEQ bands 2 Operate the faders The corresponding frequency region will be boosted or cut A maximum of 15 bands can be controlled e The ON key will light if you raise or lower a fader even the slightest amount This indicates that the corresponding band is being modified To quickly return a boosted or cut band to the flat position press the corresponding ON key to make it go dark 3 When you ve finished making settings turn off the button s of the FADER ASSIGN field The top panel faders and ON keys will return to their previous function If a button in the FADER ASSIGN field is on switching the display to another screen or rack will forcibly defeat the top panel fader assignments However if you once again display the same rack the group of bands you had previously been controlling will automatically be assigned to the faders If you want to copy the currently displayed Flex15GEQ settings to the GEQ of another rack or to initialize the settings you can do so using the tool buttons at the top of the screen For details on how to use these buttons refer to Using the tool buttons p 35 GEQ settings can be saved loaded at any time using the ded icated library gt p 174 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Graphic EQ and effects 4
464. p HA assigned to an INPUT ST IN channel you will use the HA GAIN encoder of the SELECTED CHANNEL section and the HA field of the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen The HA field includes the following items Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section CD HA popup button This button displays the HA PATCH popup window where you can make head amp settings for eight channels at a time gt p 57 2 Input port select popup button This accesses the PATCH NAME popup window where you can select the input port and specify the channel name and icon The input port assigned to that channel is shown inside this button 8 48V button This button switches the phantom power on off for the head amp assigned to that channel phase button This button switches the input assigned to that channel between normal phase and reverse phase The phase is reversed when the button is on and normal when the but ton is off 5 OVER indicator This will light when the input signal from the HA reaches the overload point 6 GAIN knob This indicates the amount of gain for the head amp assigned to that channel To adjust the gain value use the SELECTED CHANNEL section HA GAIN encoder Alternatively move the cur sor to the GAIN knob and operate the dial or the DEC INC keys The indicator above the GAIN knob in the screen shows whether the signal of the patched input port has overloaded When you move the cursor to the input p
465. pera tion CONF IRMAT I ON Clear Selected Scene CANCEL 4 To execute the Clear operation move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The scene number you selected in step 2 will be cleared If you decide to cancel the Clear operation use the CANCEL button instead of the OK button NOTE Read only scenes or write protected scenes cannot be cleared LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Scene memory lt 6 137 Editing scene memories Here s how to cut a scene When you cut a scene the scenes of subsequent numbers will move forward After you cut a scene you ll be able to paste or insert it at the desired location 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section press the SCENE MEMORY key to access any one of the SCENE MEMORY screens 2 Make sure that the cursor is located some where other than the constant display area and use the dial or the DEC INC keys to select the scene number that you want to cut 3 Move the cursor to the CUT button and press the ENTER key A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Cut opera tion CONF IRMAT I ON Cut Selected Scene CRNCEL NOTE CUT button cannot be used if the scene list is sorted in any other way than by the NO column 4 To execute the Cut operation move the cur sor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The scene you selected in step 2 will be cut and the scenes of subsequent numbers will be moved f
466. ponding fader the value will change in realtime Initial Data 000 R ADMIN The segment will light if even one of the level detec tion points within each channel is overloaded The segment level detection points are as follows Input channels T PRE HPF PRE FADER POST ON NW PPP eT Tare sae Output channels neris 0 1 PRE EQ PRE FADER POST ON 3 PEAK HOLD button If you turn this button on the peak levels of the meters go will be held When you turn this button off the peak level indications that had been held will be cleared ones i 5 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual 155 Using the METER screen Metering point select box Use the dial or the DEC INC keys to select the metering point for the input output channels 5 Channel name This shows the first four characters of the channel name for the channels assigned to the CUSTOM FADER layer Channels that are not assigned are shown as 2 If desired you can move the cursor to the metering point select buttons and press the ENTER key to switch the metering point In the CUSTOM FADER screen move the cursor to the metering point select box use the dial or the DEC INC keys to make your selection and then press the ENTER key The metering point for the level meters can be set independently for input channels and output channels You can choose from
467. popup button This button displays a popup window where you can make send level settings for eight channels at a time 2 TO MATRIX LEVEL knobs These adjust the send level of the signal sent from each MIX channel to the currently selected MATRIX bus To adjust the send level to MATRIX bus use the keys of the MIX MATRIX SELECT section to select the MIX channel you want to operate and then operate the SELECTED CHANNEL section SELECTED SEND encoder Alternatively move the cursor to the TO MATRIX LEVEL knob in the screen and operate the dial or the DEC INC keys At the left side of each of these knobs is shown the posi tion from which the signal is sent from the MIX channel For details on changing the send position p 213 a gt If you want to make send level settings for eight channels at a time use the SEND popup button in the screen to access the popup window gt p 77 If you ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window gt p 194 you also access the above popup window by pressing the SELECTED CHANNEL section SELECTED SEND encoder You can access the SEND popup window by moving the cursor to the To MATRIX SEND knob and pressing the ENTER key For MATRIX buses that are set to STEREO the left knob indicates the PAN of the MATRIX SEND and the right knob indicates the SEND LEVEL e Making HA settings input channels only To control the head am
468. ppear VOLUME NAME 1 59 PATH 5 FILE NRHE M COMMENT LS9_EN XML p LOAD FORMAT STAM J 4 Move the cursor to the file list and use the dial on the panel to select the help file you want to load 5 Move the cursor to the LOAD button and press the ENTER key and a confirmation dialog box will appear 6 Move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key to begin loading the file Loading a text file from a USB mem ory 1 Using a commercially available text editor or the Notepad included with the Microsoft Windows series create a text file extension txt and save it on your USB memory By default the character code set of the text file will be detected as UTF 8 However by adding a line con sisting of ISO 8859 1 or Shift JIS at the beginning of the file you can force recognition of the file using that character code set You can specify the desired character code set when using your text editor to save the text file The Help function is able to display the following text files character code sets languages Text files written in the ISO 8859 1 character code set English German French Spanish etc Text files written in the Shift JIS character code set Japanese Text files of the above languages written in the UTF 8 character code set 2 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section press the SETUP key repeatedly to access the USER
469. ppear LOGIN Select User to Losin LOGIN GUEST LOGIN ADMINISTRATOR LOAD CANCEL 4 Move the cursor to the LOAD USER KEY button and press the ENTER key The SAVE LOAD popup window will appear and the files and folders saved on the USB memory will be displayed User authentication keys have a file name of User name L9U DELETE MAKE DIR VOLUME NAME LS9_MEMORY SIZE 234 9MB lt 96 gt PATH M FILE NAME TYP COMMENT 0 MICK L9U FoH ensineer CREATE COMMENT LOAD FORMAT COMMENT USER KEY 5 bol File list LOAD button 5 Move the cursor to the file list and turn the dial to select the user authentication key of the user as whom you want to log in The highlighted line in the file list indicates the file that is selected for operations For details on loading from USB memory refer to Loading a file from USB memory gt p 200 6 Move the cursor to the LOAD button and press the ENTER key If no password has been set you will simply be logged in If a password has been set a keyboard win dow will appear allowing you to enter the password If you select a user authentication key that was created on a different LS9 console a keyboard window will appear allow ing you to enter the Administrator password of the LS9 con sole that you will be using If the Administrator passwords are identical this window will not appear When you ente
470. press the ENTER key The USER DEFINED KEYS popup window will appear SENDS ON FADER SENDS ON FADER MIX 1 MIX 2 SENDS ON FADER SENDS DN FADER 3 MIX 4 SENDS FADER MIX 6 SEULE FADER SEUD sH FADER MIX 7 MIX 8 MUTE MASTER MUTE MASTER MUTE GROUP 1 MUTE GROUP 2 HELP TEMPO CURRENT PRGE The twelve buttons in the screen correspond to user defined keys 1 12 on the panel and the function or parameter assigned to each one is shown at the right of the corresponding button If nothing is assigned to the button an indication of is shown 196 LS9 16 32 Owners Manual 3 Move the cursor to the button for the user defined key whose function you want to assign and press the ENTER key The USER DEFINED KEY SETUP popup window will appear In this window you can select a function to assign to the user defined key and select option parameters F USER DEFINED KEY SETUP Select Parameters for USER DEFINED KEY 1 FUNCT I ON PARAMETER 1 SENDS ON FADER MIX 1 CANCEL Make sure that the FUNCTION field is enclosed by a yellow frame and then use the dial or the DEC INC keys of the panel to select the function you want to assign If the selected function has additional parameters the parameters are shown in the PARAMETER 1 2 fields For details on the assignable functions and their parameters refer to Functions that can be assigned to user defined keys
471. purposes only and may be different from the ones on your device The bitmap fonts used in this device have been provided by and are the property of Ricoh Co Ltd The company names and product names in this Owner s Manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies MPEG Layer 3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Chapter 1 Introduction Thank you for purchasing the Yamaha LS9 digital mixing console In order to take full advantage of the LS9 s superior functionality and enjoy years of trouble free use please read this manual before you begin using the product After you have read the manual keep it in a safe place An overview of the The LS9 is a digital mixing console with the following features E Mixing system that packs top class functionality into a compact size o The LS9 is a full digital mixing console designed for installed systems or SR applications and in spite of its compact size provides functionality and a channel count comparable to large format consoles 24 bit linear AD DA converters are used to deliver up to 108 dB of dynamic range and amazing sound quality As input channels it provides 32 LS9 16 model or 64 LS9 32 model monaural INPUT channels and four ste reo ST IN channels As output channels it provides 16 MIX channels eight MATRIX channels a STEREO channel and a MONO channel L
472. puts 5 8 L R However the above patching can be modified as needed Here s how to change the patching of each input channel 1 Press the HOME key to access the SELECTED CH VIEW screen and use the SEL keys to select an input channel nitial Data ADMIN DYNAT THRESH t RANGE ATK HOLD DECAY H RATIO ATK REL GAIN KNEE LOW L MID H MID SHELF 0 70 F 125 1 00k 4 00k 10 0k D Channel number Channel name 2 HA popup button 3 Port select popup button As an alternative to using the HA popup button you can also select the input port in the PATCH NAME popup window that appears when you move the cursor to the port select popup button and press the ENTER key p 55 2 Move the cursor to the HA popup button in the screen and press the ENTER key The HA PATCH popup window will appear In this popup window you can view the input port and name selected for each input channel turn the phantom power on off adjust the gain and switch between nor mal reversed phase in groups of eight channels cH 4 T CH 5 CD Channel number This is the number of the input channel 2 Channel name This is the name of the input channel 3 Port select popup button This button selects the input port assigned to the chan nel The currently selected input port is shown 4 48V button This button switches the phantom power on red or off black for the head amp assigned t
473. r 2 Cine Mode Parameter 1 Parameter 2 1 CH 1 64 CH 1 2 CH2 65 CH 2 3 CH 3 66 CH3 4 CH4 67 CH 4 5 CH 5 68 CH 5 6 CH 6 69 CH 6 7 CH7 70 CH 7 8 CH8 71 CH 8 9 CH9 72 CH 9 10 CH10 73 CH10 11 CH11 74 CH11 12 CH12 75 CH12 a FADER H INPUT T CH ON INPUT Faia 14 CH14 77 CH14 15 CH15 78 CH15 16 CH16 79 CH16 17 17 80 17 18 CH18 81 CH18 19 CH19 82 CH19 20 CH20 83 CH20 21 CH21 84 CH21 22 CH22 85 CH22 23 CH23 86 CH23 24 CH24 87 CH24 25 88 NO ASSIGN 26 89 CH 1 27 90 CH 2 28 NO ASSIGN 91 CH 3 29 92 CH 4 30 93 CH 5 31 94 CH6 33 CH1 95 CH7 34 CH2 102 CH 8 35 CH 3 103 CH 9 36 CH4 104 CH10 37 CH5 105 CH11 38 CH 6 106 CH12 39 cH 107 PAN BALANCE INPUT HIS 40 CH8 108 CH14 41 CH9 109 CH15 42 CH10 110 CH16 43 CH11 111 CH17 44 CH12 112 CH18 FADER L INPUT HIS ns CH19 46 CH14 114 CH20 47 15 115 CH21 48 CH16 116 CH22 49 CH17 117 CH23 50 CH18 118 CH24 51 CH19 119 NO ASSIGN 52 CH20 53 CH21 54 CH22 55 CH23 56 CH24 57 58 59 60 NO ASSIGN 61 62 63 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Appendices 251 Control change parameter assignments 252 Control Changes 1 Mode Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Control Change 66 Mode Parameter 1 Parameter 2 67 68 69 70 71 72 I AD Hm BR nm 73 74 75 11 76 12 77 13 78 14 79
474. r the correct Administrator password another keyboard window will appear allowing you to enter the password for the selected user f you re save the user authentication key you will not be asked for the Administrator password the next time gt p 192 Editing a user authentication key ASSWORD L4 2 Sp E 8 191 10 iw s n gdi 552 090 ER Ey 2 SHIFT LOCK CANCEL 7 Enter the password move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key For details on entering a password refer to Assigning a name p 34 If the password was incorrect a message of WRONG PASSWORD will appear in the bottom of the screen User Level settings Changing the password Here s how to change the password of the logged in user A change in the Administrator password is updated imme diately A change in a User password will be discarded if the user simply logs out it must be applied to the user authentication key before the user logs out The Guest account does not have a password 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section press the SETUP key repeatedly to access the USER SETUP screen PASSWORD CHANGE popup button Iniltial Data 000 ADMIN SETUP CURRENT USER Administrator 522 PREFERENCE PREFERENCE USER DEFINED USER DEFINED KEYS KEYS SRUE LORD CUSTOM FADER CUSTOM FADER n LAYER H LAYER O USER LEVEL USER
475. r to the TITLE field of the selected scene and press the ENTER key to access the SCENE TITLE EDIT popup win dow For details on entering text refer to Assigning a p 34 SCENE TITLE EDIT COPY PASTE CLEAR bd INS DEL GS A 50 es 87 93 oo ppp al Ss a E S 2 0 SHIFT LOCK SPACE CANCEL D TITLE field This field lets you enter a title for the scene The max imum is 16 characters You cannot edit the title of a read only scene or a write pro tected scene e If you want to edit the comment of a scene use the COM MENT TIME STAMP tabs to display the comments in the scene list move the cursor to the SCENE COMMENT field of the selected scene and press the ENTER key to access the COMMENT EDIT popup window Editing scene memories 5 To turn the protect setting on off for a scene move the cursor to the R symbol protect symbol of the selected scene and press the ENTER key Each time you press the ENTER key the indication will alternate between the protect lock symbol read only symbol and no symbol Protect lock symbol The scene cannot be overwritten R read only symbol In addition to the protection described above it will also be impossible to overwrite the scene by loading a file from USB memory etc This setting can be selected only for consecutive scene numbers from scene number 000 No
476. rack you inserted into the channel In this screen you can edit the parameters of the effect The screen contains the following items 9 000 Inl tial Dat MIX BAL 100 DISTORTION L INS CHS E1IN ZOUT 3 INS 9 INS CH10 INPUT OUTPUT 2 CD Input output meters These indicate the level of the signals before and after the effect 2 INPUT L R buttons These buttons display the OUTPUT CH SELECT popup window The operating procedure is the same as for the INPUT button in the GEQ EFFECT field 3 OUTPUT buttons These buttons display the INPUT CH SELECT popup window The operating procedure is the same as for the OUTPUT button in the GEQ EFFECT field 8 Select the effect type and edit the effect parameters For details on editing the effect parameters refer to Editing the internal effect parameters a The levels before and after the effect are shown by the input output meters at the upper right of the RACK screen g OTE Adjust the insert out signal level and the effect parameters so that the signal does not reach the overload point at the input or output stage of the effect 9 Select the fader layer that includes the channel you selected in step 3 as the out put destination of the rack and operate the corresponding fader to adjust the level appropriately LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Graphic EQ and effects 4 169 Ab
477. rating the TO ST BALANCE knob will change the signal levels sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO L R bus and MONO C bus as shown in the following illustration Signal sent from the odd numbered MIX N channel to the STE REO L bus Signal sent from the odd numbered MIX channel to the MONO C bus Signal level 2 N Signal sent from the even numbered MIX N channel to the y MONO C bus Signal level Signal sent from the even numbered MIX channel to the STE REO R bus TO ST BALANCE knob LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual 14 If you want to operate a channel that is not currently shown in the popup window use the SEL key to select that channel and then make settings for it For example if MIX channels 1 8 are shown in the popup window pressing the MIX channel 9 SEL key will change the popup window to MIX channels 9 16 15 When you ve finished making settings move the cursor to the CLOSE button or the x symbol in the upper right of the win dow and press the ENTER key Sending signals from MIX channels and STEREO MONO channels to MATRIX buses Sending signals from MIX channels and STEREO MONO channels to MATRIX buses This section explains how to send the signal from a MIX channel or STEREO MONO channel to MATRIX buses 1 8 You can do this in any of the following three ways Using the SELECTED CHANNEL S CT
478. rder Each button has the following function D REW M4 button When you move the cursor to this button and press and immediately release the ENTER key You will return to the beginning of the song If you were already at the beginning you will return to the beginning of the preceding song in the title list p 110 When you move the cursor to this button and press and hold the ENTER key for two seconds or longer The song will rewind In either of the above cases operating this button dur ing playback will cause playback to resume from the current location when you release the ENTER key 2 STOP button When you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key during playback Playback will stop When you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key during recording Recording will stop and the recorded content will be saved in a file the file name and title will be assigned a default name When you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key in record ready mode Record ready mode will be defeated 3 PLAY PAUSE gt II button When you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key while stopped Playback will start When you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key during playback Playback will pause When you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key in record ready mode Record
479. recall scenes and library items 180 Using control changes to control parameters 183 Using parameter changes to control parameters 185 Using MMC MIDI Machine Control to operate the USB memory recorder 186 19 User settings Security 187 User Level settings eere 187 User types and user authentication keys 187 Setting the Administrator password 188 Creating a user authentication key 188 Eoggingslli eiecit 189 Changing the password 191 Editing a user authentication key 192 Changing the user 192 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual 8 ipe m M 194 User defined keys eere 196 Console ue seas 197 Locking the console rte 197 Unlocking the console 198 Specifying the CONSOLE LOCK screen 1221 198 Using USB memory to save load data 199 Saving the LS9 s internal data on USB 199 Loading a file from USB 200 Editing the files saved on USB memory 201 Formatting USB memory media 204 20 Other functions 205 Abou
480. ress the ENTER key display The PATCH NAME popup window will appear allowing you to select an input port and icon for the 2 Use the LAYER section to select the desired input channel and to assign a name fader layer 3 Press a SEL key in the channel module section or ST IN section to select the input channel that you want to operate mee 8 TCH CH 1 ch PORT SELECT CIN CH13 IN 1 BBR eee Initial Data ADMIN Y THRESH E S RANGE ATK HOLD DECAY Input channel operations em ESESESESEESEBNES CLOSE LS9 32 TDIRECT MUTE This popup window contains the following items CD Input port button This indicates the currently selected input port When you re selecting the icon or editing the channel name moving the cursor to this button and pressing the D Input port select popup button ENTER key will take you back to the input port selection screen 2 Icon button This indicates the icon selected for that channel When you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER Key a screen where you can select an icon and a sample name will appear 3 Channel name input box This indicates the name assigned to that channel When you move the cursor to this field and press the ENTER key a keyboard window will appear allow ing yo
481. ro gram changes to recall scenes and library items below For details on using control changes refer to Using control changes to control parameters p 183 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual MIDI 179 Using program changes to recall scenes and library items Using program changes to recall scenes and library items The LS9 lets you assign a specific event scene recall or effect library recall to each program change number so that when this event is executed on the LS9 a program change message of the corresponding number will be transmitted to an external device Conversely the correspond ing event can be executed when a program change message is received from an external device 1 Connect the LS9 to your external device The following illustration shows an example of using the MIDI IN OUT connectors to transmit and receive MIDI messages MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI IN MIDI OUT external device 2 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section press the SETUP key repeatedly to access the MISC SETUP screen Initial Data 000 R ADMIN SC SETUP MIDI DATE TIME DRTE 07 31 2006 24H 16 10 30 RROSRRH NETWORK LINK MDDE IP RDDRESS GRTEMRY RDDRESS SUBNET MASK CONTROL CHANGE MAC ADDRESS oo oo oo oo BRIGHTNESS SCREEN SCREEN PANEL LAMP CONSOLE CONTRAST LOCK CPU 1 00 3 Move the cursor to the MIDI SETUP popup button and press the ENTER key to access the M
482. roaudio com To install an option I O card proceed as follows 4 Fasten the card using the screws attached to the card Be aware that damage or malfunctions may occur if the card is not fastened 1 Make sure that the power is turned off 2 Loosen the screws that fasten the slot and remove the slot cover Keep the removed slot cover in a safe place N CAUTION Before installing separately sold I O cards into the console you must make sure that the console s power switch is turned off Otherwise malfunctions or electrical shock may occur Slot cover 3 Align both edges of the card with the guide rails inside the slot and insert the card into the slot Push the card all the way into the slot to ensure that the contacts of the card are correctly inserted into the con nector inside the slot 44 LS9 16 32 Owners Manual Setup required when starting up Setup required when starting up Here we explain the setup that is required when starting the LS9 for the first time So that you can check whether the connections are correct we also describe the basic procedure for getting the input signal from an INPUT channel to be output from the STEREO bus Returning the current scene to the initial state We will power on the LS9 and recall load the initial set ting scene scene number 000 We are recalling the default setting scene here so that the remain ing operations in this chapter can be perform
483. rsor to the file list use the panel dial to select the file that you want to copy move the cursor to the COPY button and press the ENTER key The highlighted line in the file list indicates the file that is selected for operations 4 If you want to move to a different directory move the cursor to the icon of the column of the desired directory and press the ENTER key To move to the next higher level move the cursor to the arrow button in the PATH field and press the ENTER key 5 Move the cursor to the PASTE button and press the ENTER key A keyboard window will appear allowing you to enter the paste destination file name For details on entering text refer to Assigning a gt p 34 F FILE COPY FILE CLEAR Ip ppp psp ie a SHIFT LOCK CANCEL 6 Enter the paste destination file name move the cursor to the PASTE button and press the ENTER key If you specified an existing file name a confirmation message will appear NOTE e If you attempt to paste using the file name of an existing copy protected file the Paste operation will not be executed Using USB memory to save load data Deleting a file 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section press the SETUP key repeatedly to access the USER SETUP screen 2 Move the cursor to the SAVE LOAD button and press the ENTER key to
484. ructure YPE folder Root directory SONGS folder Songs Audio files n 3 Assign the desired channels to the input and output of the USB memory recorder p 106 4 So that you can monitor the signal being recorded on the recorder raise the fader of the channel s that are patched to the input output of the recorder The level meter in the RECORDER screen shows the signal level before and after the recorder If necessary use the ATT knob in the RECORDER INPUT field to adjust the input level to the recorder wj The signal being recorded will not be output from the recorder output jacks PLAYBACK OUT wr gt Operating the ATT knob will not affect the level of the signal being output to other ports from the corresponding output channel 5 Move the cursor to the REC RATE field in the lower right of the screen and use the dial or the DEC INC keys to select the bit depth of the audio file that will be recorded You can choose 96 kbps 128 kbps or 192 kbps Higher bit rates will improve the audio quality but will increase the size of the data The word clock rate at which the LS9 is currently operating 44 1 kHz or 48 kHz will automatically be selected as the sampling rate of the audio file 6 Move the cursor to the REC button 0 at the bottom of the screen and press the ENTER key You will use the transport at the bottom of the screen to perform record play stop operations for the reco
485. ry recorder was operating USB over current Error Disconnect USB device Excessive current has occurred at the USB connector Disconnect the USB memory that is connected to the USB connector Word Clock Error Recorder Stopped Recorder was halted because synchronization with the word clock was lost Wrong Audio File Format Wrong Password The format of the audio file is invalid The password you input was incorrect Wrong Word Clock The LS9 cannot synchronize because the source selected by MASTER CLOCK SELECT in the WORD CLOCK screen is not appropriate You Cannot Create User Key The current user does not have permission to create a user key Appendices LS9 16 32 Owners Manual J 269 Troubleshooting 270 Troubleshooting Power does not turn on panel LEDs and the LCD display do not light O Are the LCD contrast and panel brightness adjusted appropriately You can adjust the LCD contrast by holding down the HOME key and turning the dial O Is the LS9 s POWER switch turned on O If the power still does not turn on contact your Yamaha dealer Sound is not input Is the optional I O card installed correctly gt p 44 O Is a signal being input from the external device Is the input port patched to an input channel gt p 99 O Is the GAIN of the internal head amp or external head amp set to an appropriate level p 47 57 Is the EQ attenuator raise
486. s 5 If you want to use the top panel faders to adjust the boost cut of each band proceed as follows CD Move the cursor to the button in the FADER ASSIGN field and press the ENTER key When this button is turned on the faders in the screen will turn white and you will be able to use the top panel faders to adjust the GEQ bands LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Graphic EQ and effects 4 163 Graphic EQ operations 164 For the LS9 16 On the LS9 16 the bands that can be controlled will depend on the button you selected In order to adjust all of the bands you ll need to switch these buttons as you work Button name Bands 20 630 button 16 bands from 20 Hz 630 Hz 125 4k button 16 bands from 125 Hz 4 KHz 630 20k button 16 bands from 630 Hz 20 KHz 00 Initial Data pui R RDMIN LIB cory INPUT OUTPUT RACK 1 1 L I 315 63 125 250 500 1k 2K 4 8 0k 16 0 5 50 100 200 400 800 16 315 63 125 4 0 160 315 630 125 12 5 5 10 For the LS9 32 Only the 20 20k button can be selected When this button is on you can use the top panel faders 1 31 to operate all 31 bands 2 Operate the faders The corresponding frequency region will be boosted or cut When a top panel fader is in the center flat position the cor responding ON key will go dark This indicates that the cor responding band is not being modified If you raise or lower the fader even
487. s available in two models the LS9 16 and the LS9 32 These models differ as follows Number of INPUT channels The LS9 16 has up to 32 operable INPUT channels while the LS9 32 has up to 64 The number and structure of other chan nels ST IN channels MIX channels MATRIX channels STEREO MONO channels are identical Rear panel The LS9 16 and LS9 32 differ in the number of rear panel INPUT jacks OMNI OUT jacks and slots they provide The rear panel of the LS9 16 provides sixteen INPUT jacks eight OMNI OUT jacks and one slot OMNI OUT jacks INPUT jacks Slot lola ol i o OMG 5 e e e eae In contrast the rear panel of the LS9 32 provides thirty two INPUT jacks sixteen OMNI OUT jacks two slots and one LAMP connector OMNI OUT jacks LAMP connector INPUT jacks SF a Nero Moe 9 fale amp OOOO FRO 02 9 g 9 9 Ol e e e gt Slots LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Introduction Differences between the LS9 16 and LS9 32 Top panel The LS9 16 and LS9 32 differ in the number of top panel channel modules and ST IN channels they provide The LS9 16 provides sixteen channel modules and two ST IN channels and by switching fader layers you can operate up to 32 INPUT channels m
488. s connected to the corresponding output port 2 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section HOME key The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the display Initial Data 000 RDH IN v HR DIRECT MUTE LOW L MID H MID 0 70 0 70 0 70 0 70 125 1 00k 4 00k 10 0k WW g 5 0 1 5 3 5 7 D SEND popup button LS9 16 32 Owners Manual 65 Sending the signal from an input channel to a MIX bus 66 3 Use the MIX MATRIX SELECT section keys to select the send destination MIX bus The LED of the corresponding key will light indicat ing that it is selected as the send destination Press the same key of the MIX MATRIX SELECT section once again The key will change from lit to blinking and the LEDs of the remaining keys in the MIX MATRIX SELECT section will light This indicates that the LS9 is now in SENDS ON FADER mode in which you can use the faders to control the send levels to the MIX bus MATRIX bus In SENDS ON FADER mode the function of the channel module section s faders and ON keys the ST IN section s encoders and ON keys will change as follows Faders Encoders These will adjust the send level of the signal sent from the input channels to the currently selected MIX bus When you switch from normal mode to SENDS ON FADER mode the fader positions will move to the value of the send levels to the currently selected MIX bus ON keys These will operate as on off
489. s on a MIDI sequencer or other external device and play back this data later You can use control changes to control events in either of the following two ways Using control changes This method uses typical control changes control numbers 1 31 33 95 102 119 You can freely assign an event to each control number Using NRPN Non Registered Parameter Number This method uses a special type of control change messages called NRPN NRPN uses control change numbers 62 and 63 to specify the MSB Most Significant Byte and LSB Least Sig nificant Byte of the parameter number and subsequently transmitted control change messages of control change number 6 or 6 and 26 to specify the value of that parameter The event assigned to each combination of MSB and LSB is pre defined and cannot be changed e For details on the events assigned to NRPN messages refer to the appendix gt p 253 1 Connect the LS9 to your external device 6 Move the cursor to the CONTROL CHANGE popup button and press the ENTER key 2 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section press the to access the CONTROL CHANGE popup SETUP key repeatedly to access the MISC window SETUP screen In the CONTROL CHANGE popup window you can specify how control changes will be transmitted and received and assign the event fader encoder opera tion ON key on off operation etc assigned to each control number This page includes the following items 3 Move the cursor to the MIDI
490. s once the PLAY button has been pressed The number of times the sample plays is set using the LOOP NUM param eter In INPUT mode playback is triggered by the input signal 60 to 0 dB Input trigger level i e the signal level required to trigger recording or playback TRG MASK 0 1000 ms Once playback has been triggered subsequent triggers are ignored for the duration of the TRG MASK time START Playback start point in milliseconds END Playback end point in milliseconds LOOP Loop start point in milliseconds LOOP NUM 0 100 Number of times the sample plays 12 to 12 semi PITCH tones Playback pitch shift FINE 50 to 50 cents Playback pitch shift fine MIDI TRG OFF C1 C6 ALL PLAY button can be triggered by using MIDI Note on off messages START SAMPLE 0 131000 Playback start point in samples END SAMPLE 0 131000 Playback end point in samples LOOP SAMPLE 0 131000 Loop start point in samples 1 0 0 5941 0 ms fs 44 1 kHz 0 0 ms 5458 3 ms fs 48 kHz LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual STEREO REVERB Two input two output stereo reverb Parameter Range Description REV TIME 0 3 99 05 Reverb time Hall Room Stage REV TYPE Plate Reverb type INI DLY 0 0 100 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio LO RA
491. s set correctly gt p 95 Turning a SELECTED SEND encoder does not change the send level to the MIX MATRIX bus O Is the MIX MATRIX turned on O Is the MIX MATRIX ON turned on Is the MIX bus set to VARI type gt p 213 If the send point is set to POST could the fader have been lowered Can t save scene memory or library data Are you attempting to save the data to a read only scene library or a protected scene gt p 129 Can t save to USB memory O Is the USB memory protected O Does the USB memory have enough free capacity to save the data O When formatting the USB memory format it in FAT32 or FAT16 format O Could the recorder be playing back Can t transmit receive MIDI data Is the MIDI PORT selected correctly gt p 178 O Are the mode and channel selected correctly on the transmitting and receiving devices p 178 Has an event been assigned for the program change gt p 180 When you recall a scene some channels parameters are not updated O Could that channel or parameter be set to Recall Safe Could Focus be turned off in the scene you recalled Could user level restrictions have been specified gt p 139 140 192 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Troubleshooting You turn on a CUE button in the EFFECT PARAM screen but it is automatically defeated This is defeated automatically when you switch screens in the display gt p 170 When yo
492. s the artist of the song If the artist name is too long to be displayed a character is shown at the end 7 TIME This field shows the length of the song in hours min utes seconds MODE button This button switches the playback mode You can play back one song or all songs and play them only once or repeatedly 9 Change directory button When you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key the list will show the contents of the directory at the next higher level PATH current path field This shows the full pathname of the folder directory that is currently selected as the recording destination and playback source 17 JPN button If this button is on the titles or artist names in the list or of the currently playing song will be displayed in Japanese characters compatible with Shift JIS charac ter encoding double byte code This setting will also be reflected in the RECORDER screen and in the TITLE ARTIST EDIT popup win dow 3 You can use the change directory button in the screen and the folder icon in the No field to view a content list of the folder that includes the desired file To move to a folder below Move the cursor to a folder icon shown in the No field of the list and press the ENTER key 000 Initial Data R ADMIN ul MNEE OnG TITLE ME PH t t 5 NO SONG TITLE M ARTIST 0 04 54 REMAIN To move to the folder above Move the cursor
493. sed in conjunction with TEMPO NOTE 1 to determine DELAY Parameter Range Description TYPE S Hall L Hall Random Type of early reflection sim HS GE F B ddd dedi ded des Revers Plate Spring ulation Max value depends on tempo setting ROOMSIZE 0 1 20 0 Reflection spacing Early reflections decay char STEREO DELAY LIVENESS 0 10 acteristics 0 dead 10 live Two input two output basic stereo delay INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms before reverb Parameter Range Description Reflection diffusion left DELAY L 0 0 1350 0 ms Left channel delay time right reflection spread DELAY R 0 0 1350 0 ms Right channel delay time DENSITY 0 100 Reflection density Left channe E er values 99 to 99 for normal phase feedback minus ER NUM 1 19 Number of early reflections values for reverse phase feedback FB GAU 99 to 49996 Fesdback gain Right channel feedback plus val RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback FB GR 299 to 99 ues for normal phase feedback ratio minus values for reverse phase High pass filter cutoff fre feedback add ERO PERRO khz quency RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio Low pass filter cutoff fre THRU 21 2 Hz LPF 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU quency HPF 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off x Used in conjunction with TEMPO
494. sic Europe BP 70 77312 Marne la Vall e Cedex 2 France Tel 01 64 61 4000 ITALY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Italy Viale Italia 88 20020 Lainate Milano Italy Tel 02 935 771 SPAIN PORTUGAL Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Ib rica Sucursal en Espana Ctra de la Coruna km 17 200 28230 Las Rozas Madrid Spain Tel 34 902 39 8888 GREECE Philippos Nakas S A The Music House 147 Skiathou Street 112 55 Athens Greece Tel 01 228 2160 SWEDEN FINLAND ICELAND Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany filial Scandinavia J A Wettergrens Gata 1 Box 30053 S 400 43 G teborg Sweden Tel 031 89 34 00 DENMARK Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Tyskland filial Denmark Generatorvej 6A DK 2730 Herlev Denmark Tel 44 92 49 00 NORWAY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany Norwegian Branch Grini N ringspark 1 N 1345 ster s Norway Tel 67 16 77 70 RUSSIA Yamaha Music Russia Room 37 bld 7 Kievskaya street Moscow 121059 Russia Tel 495 626 5005 OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Europe GmbH SiemensstraBe 22 34 25462 Rellingen Germany Tel 49 4101 3030 AFRICA Yamaha Corporation Asia Pacific Sales amp Marketing Group Nakazawa cho 10 1 Naka ku Hamamatsu Japan 430 8650 Tel 8 1 53 460 2303 MIDDLE EAST TURKEY CYPRUS Yamaha Music Europe GmbH SiemensstraBe 22 34 25462 Rellingen Germany Tel 04101 3030 OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LOB 16 513 1732
495. sig nal For an input channel SELF PRE EQ The signal immediately before the EQ attenuator of the currently selected input channel SELF POST EQ The signal immediately after the EQ of the currently selected input chan nel CH 1 32 64 POST EQ STIN1L 1R 4L 4R POST EQ The signal immediately after the EQ of the corresponding input channel 1 MIX OUT 13 16 The signal immediately after the ON of the corresponding MIX channel 1 The signals that you can select are limited to the group to which that channel belongs from the following five nine groups CH 1 8 CH 9 16 17 24 CH25 32 CH33 40 CH41 48 49 56 57 64 and STIN1L1R 4L4R For an output channel SELF PRE EQ The signal immediately before the EQ attenuator of the currently selected output channel SELF POST EQ The signal immediately after the EQ of the currently selected output chan nel MIX 1 16 POST EQ MTRX1 8 POST EG ST L R MONO POST EQ The signal immediately after the EQ of the corresponding output channel 1 MIX OUT 13 16 The signal immediately after the ON of the corresponding MIX channel 1 The signals that you can select are limited to the group to which that channel belongs from the following four groups MIX 1 8 MIX 9 16 MATRIX 1 8 and ST MONO e If the dynamics type of DE ESSER the key in signal is fixed at SELF POST EQ and cannot be chan
496. sing USB memory to save load data Using USB memory to save load data This section explains how you can connect commercially available USB memory to the USB con nector located at the right side of the display and use it to save or load data such as internal set tings for the L S9 Operation is guaranteed only with USB flash memory The operation of storage media with capacities of up to 16GB has been verified However this does not necessarily guarantee the operation of all USB storage media The FAT12 FAT16 and FAT32 formats are supported On the LS9 V1 10 or higher storage media with a capacity of 4GB or larger will be formatted in FAT32 and storage media with capacity of 2GB or smaller will be formatted in FAT16 Long file names are not supported N CAUTION The ACCESS indicator will appear in the constant display area of the screen while data is being accessed such as during saving loading or deleting Do not disconnect the USB memory or power off the LS9 while this indicator is shown Doing so may damage the data in USB memory Saving the 1595 internal data USB memory Here s how all of the LS9 s internal data except for the data included in a user authentication key can be saved on USB memory as a file The saved file will have an exten sion of L9A 1 Inthe DISPLAY ACCESS section press the SETUP key repeatedly to access the USER SETUP screen SAVE LOAD button Initial Data R
497. sing a stereo source you can mount a Flex15GEQ in one rack or mount two 31 Band GEQ units in adjacent odd numbered even numbered racks This will let you link the two GEQ units later 2 Use the INPUT button to open the OUTPUT CH SELECT popup window where you can select the input source for the rack and choose the insert out of the desired chan nel The insert out will be assigned to the input of the GEQ For details on the OUTPUT CH SELECT popup window gt p 159 Graphic EQ and effects 4 e If you select the Insert Out of a certain channel as the input source the Insert In of that same channel will automatically be selected as the output destination for that rack For details on Insert Out In refer to Inserting an external device into channel gt p 101 LS9 16 32 Owners Manual 161 Graphic EQ operations 3 Use the OUTPUT button to open the INPUT CH SELECT popup window where you can select the output destination for the rack and choose the insert in to which you want to assign the output of the GEQ multiple selections are allowed The insert in will be assigned to the output of the GEQ For details on the INPUT CH SELECT popup window gt p 160 e If you select the Insert In of a certain channel as the output source the Insert Out of that same channel will automatically be selected as the input source for that rack 4 In the GEQ EFFECT field move the cursor to the rack in which you mount
498. specifies the monitor setup operations that can be performed OSCILLATOR TALKBACK SYSTEM SETUP field This specifies the system setup operations that can be performed MIXER SETUP OUTPUT SETUP MIDI SET ALL CLEAR ALL buttons These buttons set or clear all items in the window 3 Specify the user level by turning on the but ton for each item that will be permitted 4 When you ve finished making settings move the cursor to the CLOSE button and press the ENTER key to close the popup window LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual User settings Security 193 Preferences Preferences Settings related to the operating environment such as whether or not certain messages are dis played or whether key operations are linked can be made according to the preferences of each user These settings are changed for the user who is logged in but if you are logged in as the Administrator you will also be able to change the Guest settings 1 Inthe DISPLAY ACCESS section press the SETUP key repeatedly to access the USER SETUP screen PREFERENCE popup button Initial Data 000 R ADMIN STORAGE USER Kev dit E CUSTOM ERDER im USER LEVEL 2 Move the cursor to the PREFERENCE popup button and press the ENTER key to access the PREFERENCE popup win dow If you are logged in as Administrator you can move the cursor to the for Guest PREFERENCE popup button and press
499. ss filter cutoff frequency 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz LPF THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 10096 Modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time Feedback gain plus values for FB GAIN 99 to 99 normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off NOTE 4 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ HRP RF Bett te 4 4 0 d d REV FLANGE One input two output reverb and flanger effects in series REV SYMPHO Effects Parameters One input two output reverb and symphonic effects in HP BOHJT Bob 444 d 4 4 0 d d E REV SYMPHO One input two output reverb and symphonic effects in parallel Parameter Range Description REV TIME 0 3 99 0 s Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Spread DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density Reverb and symphonic balance REV SYM 0 100 0 all reverb 100 all sym phonic HPF a Ee High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 6 0 kHz Low pass filter cutoff frequency FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 10096 Modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulati
500. sult by moving the cursor to the GAIN knob in the SELECTED CH VIEW screen and operating the dial or the DEC INC keys 5 If you want to edit detailed parameters such as phantom power on off and phase move the cursor to the HA popup button or GAIN knob in the HA field of the SELECTED CH VIEW screen and press the ENTER key to access the HA PATCH popup window In the HA PATCH popup window you can adjust the HA gain switch phantom power on off and switch the phase for sets of eight channels This popup window shows the parameters for the eight channels that include the channel you selected in step 3 D 48V button 2 GAIN knob 3 phase button e If you ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window gt p 194 you can also access the above popup window by pressing the SELECTED CHANNEL section HA GAIN encoder cAUTION If you don t need phantom power be sure to turn this but ton off Before you turn phantom power on make sure that no devices other than phantom powered devices such as a condenser microphone are connected Otherwise you risk damaging the devices Do not connect or disconnect a device while phantom power is applied Doing so can damage the connected device and or the unit itself To protect your speaker system leave the power amps powered speakers turned off when switching the phan tom power on off We also recommend that you set all
501. symbol The scene is not protected NOTE The symbol for scene number 000 cannot be disabled Use the tool buttons to edit the scene mem ory For details refer to the section Scene memory edit ing that follows Scene memory lt 6 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual J 135 Editing scene memories Scene memory editing The scenes stored in scene memory can be copied pasted to other scene numbers or cleared erased 1 Inthe DISPLAY ACCESS section press the SCENE MEMORY key to access any one of the SCENE MEMORY screens Scene memories are edited using the buttons shown in the upper part of the SCENE MEMORY screen Each button has the following function TIME STAMP TITLE all D COPY button Copies a scene into a memory buffer a temporary storage area For details on how to use this refer to Copying pasting a scene below 2 PASTE button This button pastes a scene previously copied into the memory buffer into another scene number For details on how to use this refer to Copying pasting a scene below 3 CLEAR button This button clears erases the selected scene For details on how to use this refer to Clearing a scene p 137 CUT button Cuts a scene and places it in the memory buffer Scenes following the scene number you cut will be moved forward For details on how to use this refer to Cutting a scene p 138 5 INSERT button Inserts a scene from the memory b
502. t calculated as the speed of sound at an air tempera ture of 20 C 68 F 1127 26 feet s x delay time seconds SAMPLE The delay time is displayed in units of samples If you change the sampling frequency on which the LS9 operates the number of samples will change accordingly Input output patching EA msec The delay time is displayed in units of millisec onds 4 Output port This is the type and number of the output port to which the channel is assigned 5 Channel select button This button selects the channel assigned to the output port The number of the currently selected channel is shown LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual J 97 Changing the output patching 6 Delay time setting knob This knob sets the delay time of the output port Move the cursor to this knob and use the dial or the DEC 4 Use the category tabs and the channel select buttons to select the send source channel INC keys to adjust the setting The delay time value is shown below the knob using the units selected in 5 Move the cursor to the CLOSE button and the DELAY SCALE field press the ENTER key to return to the pre 7 DELAY button vious screen Switches the delay on off for the output port If PATCH is turned on in the CONFIRMATION field of the PREFERENCE popup window a confirmation phase button dialog box will appear when you attempt to modify the Switches the phase of the signal assigned to the output pat
503. t tons in the LINK PARAMETER field use the buttons of this field to specify the send destination bus es Use the buttons of the LINK PARAMETER field to select the parameter s that will be linked multiple selections are allowed The table below lists the parameters you can select in the LINK PARAMETER field HA button Head amp settings EQ button EQ settings including ATT HPF DYNA 1 2 buttons Dynamics 1 and 2 settings On off status of signals sent to MIX MIX ON button buses MIX SEND button Send levels of signals sent to MIX buses FADER button Fader operations CH ON button ON key operations e f you link Dynamics 1 or 2 for two or more input channels the parameter values will be linked but the key in signals are not linked For more about dynamics refer to EQ and Dynamics gt p 115 If you turn on the EQ button or DYNA 1 2 buttons library recall operations will also be linked 3 If you turned on the MIX ON or MIX SEND buttons in step 2 use the buttons of the SEND PARAMETER field to specify the bus es for which you want operations to be linked multiple selections are allowed The table below lists the parameters you can select in the SEND PARAMETER field TO MIX 1 16 buttons MIX buses 1 16 NOTE If nothing is selected in the SEND PARAMETER field send on off and send level will not be linked 4 To link channels proc
504. t the SETUP screen 205 Word clock settings Switching a digital I O card s SRC on off 208 Using cascade connections 209 Operations on the cascade slave LS9 210 Operations on the cascade master L S9 212 Basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX DbUSGS occae nca cin 213 Setting the date and time of the internal clock 215 Setting the network address 216 Specifying the brightness or contrast of the display LEDs and lamps 217 Using the Help function eee 218 Loading a Help file from USB memory 218 Loading a text file from a USB memory 219 Assigning the Help function to a user defined 219 Viewing Help iicet trees 220 Initializing the LS9 s internal memory 222 Adjusting the faders Calibration function 223 Adjusting the input output gain Calibration function eese 224 Appendices 225 EQ Library List 225 DYNAMICS Library List sees 227 Dynamics Parameters 1 4 229 Effect Type List essere 232 Effects Parameters esee 233 Effects and tempo syn
505. t to block this vent LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Parts and their function 25 Front panel Front panel D PHONES LEVEL control This adjusts the level of the signal that is output from the PHONES OUT jack 2 2 PHONES OUT headphone output jack This is a headphone jack for monitoring the MONITOR OUT or CUE signal 26 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Basic operations on the 189 This chapter explains the various user interfaces you ll use to operate the LS9 and basic operations G Basic operations in the top panel Here we explain basic operations you ll perform in the LS9 s top panel About the HOME key The HOME key in the SELECTED CHANNEL section restores the LS9 s panel to its basic state home position Selecting the fader layer The channel module section of the top panel lets you switch between combinations of channels to be controlled fader layers so that you can control input channels output channels or monitor levels Press the keys of the LAYER section to switch the combi nation of channels you want to control When you press the HOME key the panel will change as LAYER LAYER os EI qm The display will show the SELECTED CH VIEW 7196 09304 screen where you can view all parameters of the selected channel Tr DvHa1t gt Initial Data 000 R ADMIN The channel level function will be assigned to the fad ers SENDS ON FADER mode w
506. t to the STEREO bus you can either use the SELECTED CHANNEL section or the SELECTED CH VIEW screen in the display to make settings for a single channel at a time or use the popup window to make set tings for eight channels at a time Controlling the signal sent to the STE REO bus one channel at a time Here s how to select the input channel that you want to control and use the top panel faders encoders the SELECTED CHANNEL section and the SELECTED CH VIEW screen of the display to control the level and pan balance 1 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section HOME key The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the display ihl Data ADMIN MU THRESH p TSEND To MIX ON MUTE D ST button 2 PAN BAL knob 2 Use the keys of the LAYER section and the SEL keys of the channel module section to select the channel for the INPUT jack you want to control 50 f LS9 16 32 Owners Manual 3 Make sure that the ST button in the screen is on white characters on a pink back ground The ST button is an on off switch for the signal sent from that channel to the STEREO bus If this is off gray characters on a black background move the cursor to ST button and press the ENTER key 4 In the STEREO MASTER section of the top panel make sure that the STEREO channel ON key is on and raise the STEREO chan nel fader to 0 dB STEREO SEL CUE D STEREO cha
507. t will be the output destination for each channel or you can select the channel that will be the output source for each output port Selecting the output port for each out put channel Here s how to select the output port that will be the output destination for each output channel 1 Press the HOME key to access the SELECTED CH VIEW screen and use the SEL keys to select an output channel Input output patching 9 ADMIN Tr DYNAT THRESH RATIO ATK REL GAIN KNEE Y INSERT SAFE 0 70 0 70 0 70 0 70 F G 0 0 0 0 00 D Channel number Channel name 2 PATCH popup button 3 Port select popup button As an alternative to using the PATCH popup button you can also select the output port in the PATCH NAME popup win dow that appears when you move the cursor to the port select popup button and press the ENTER key p 69 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual 95 Changing the output patching 96 2 Move the cursor to the PATCH popup button in the screen and press the ENTER key The HA PATCH popup window will appear This popup window shows the output port assigned to the output channels in groups of eight channels D Channel number This is the number of the output channel 2 Channel name These are the names of each channel 8 Port select popup button This button selects the output port assigned to the channel The currently selected output port is shown
508. tch for the Low Pass Filter Making insert settings INPUT channels 1 32 and MIX MATRIX STEREO MONO channels only Use the INSERT field to make insert related settings in the SELECTED CH VIEW screen This field includes the fol lowing items ON 2 3 D INSERT popup button This accesses the INSERT popup window where you can assign input output ports to insert in insert out and specify the signal insertion points for eight channels at a time IN indicator This indicates the signal level of the input port that is patched to insert in 8 INSERT ON OFF button Switches the insert on off To make insert settings move the cursor to the INSERT popup button and press the ENTER key to access the INSERT popup window For details on the popup win dow gt 101 When you ve assigned input output ports to insert in out in the popup window turn on the INSERT ON OFF but ton LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Making direct output settings INPUT channels only Use the DIRECT field to make direct output related set tings for an INPUT channel in the SELECTED CH VIEW screen This field includes the following items r D DIRECT popup button This button accesses the DIRECT OUT popup window where you can assign an output port to the direct output and adjust the output level for eight channels at a time DIRECT OUT ON OFF button Turns the direct output on off To make direct output settings move the
509. tches control change reception on off ECHO button This selects whether incoming control changes are echoed out from the transmission port LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual 9 To change the event assignment for each control number move the cursor to the popup button for the corresponding event in the list and press the ENTER key The CONTROL CHANGE EVENT popup window will appear In this window you can specify the event assigned to each control number The window contains the following items MIDI CONTROL CHANGE 1 Sel4ct Control Chanse Paramejers MODE PRRRMETER1 PRRRMETER2 FRDER H INPUT CANCEL D MODE field Select the type of event 2 PARAMETER 1 2 field In conjunction with the MODE field this specifies the type of event NOTE If NRPN mode is selected as the control change transmis sion reception mode the settings in this window are ignored For details on the events that can be assigned to control changes refer to the appendix gt p 249 10 In the order of the MODE field PARAME TER 1 field PARAMETER 2 field specify the type of event you want to assign To select an item use the dial or the DEC INC keys Move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key to finalize the changes and close the CONTROL CHANGE EVENT popup window 11 Assign events to other control numbers in the same way When you operate the parameters you assigned on the 1 59 control chan
510. ted with it the HELP popup window will appear and you will automatically scroll to the corresponding item If there are multiple explanations for the same control ler you can repeat step to successively display these explanations 3 To close the window once again press the user defined key to which the Help function is assigned Using the Help function Directly recalling the Help for a specific controller in the LCD screen o o o o 1 While holding down the user defined key to which you ve assigned the Help function move the cursor to the on screen controller whose function you want to read and press the ENTER key The on screen buttons and tabs will not function as long as you continue holding down the user defined key to which the Help function is assigned 2 If there is a corresponding Help item the HELP popup window will appear and you will automatically scroll to the correspond ing item If there are multiple explanations for the same control ler close the HELP popup window and then repeat step 1 to successively view these explanations 3 To close the window once again press the user defined key to which the Help function is assigned LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Other functions di 221 Initializing the LS9 s internal memory Initializing the LS9 s internal memory If an error occurs in the LS9 s internal memory or if you have forgotten the password you can use the following pr
511. ter Parameter Range Description PITCH 12 to 12 semitones Pitch shift FINE 50 to 50 cents Pitch shift fine DELAY 0 0 1000 0 ms Delay time Feedback gain plus values for 991039900 feedback minus back MODE 1 10 Pitch shift precision SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off ww UN AAP HG BT Bob 440 4 4 ded d Maximum value depends on the tempo setting Parameter Range Description PITCH 1 24 to 24 semitones Channel 1 pitch shift FINE 1 50 to 50 cents Channel 1 pitch shift fine Channel 1 level plus values LEVEL 1 100 to 100 for normal phase minus values for reverse phase PAN 1 L63 to R63 Channel 1 pan DELAY 1 0 0 1000 0 ms Channel 1 delay time Channel 1 feedback gain plus FB G1 99 to 49996 values for normal phase feed back minus values for reverse phase feedback MODE 1 10 Pitch shift precision PITCH 2 24 to 24 semitones Channel 2 pitch shift FINE 2 50 to 50 cents Channel 2 pitch shift fine Channel 2 level plus values LEVEL 2 100 to 100 for normal phase minus values for reverse phase PAN 2 L63 to R63 Channel 2 pan DELAY 2 0 0 1000 0 ms Channel 2 delay time Channel 2 feedback gain plus FB G2 299 to 19996 values for normal phase feed back minus values for reverse phase feedback SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off Used in conjunction with NOTE 1 1 TEMPO to
512. tes the move source channel CLEAR SOURCE button This button clears the channels shown in the SOURCE CH field and DESTINATION CH field 3 DESTINATION CH field This indicates the move destination channel CLEAR DEST button This button clears all channels shown in the DESTI NATION CH field 5 MOVE button Executes the move Copying moving or initializing a channel 2 To select the move source channel press the corresponding SEL key to make it light The corresponding channel is highlighted in the SOURCE CH field of the window When you select the move source channel the DES TINATION CH field will automatically be embold ened allowing you to select the move destination If you want to re select the move source channel move the cursor to the CLEAR SOURCE button and press the ENTER key NOTE e Settings for the Move operation can be made only in the order of move source gt move destination 3 To select the move destination channel press the corresponding SEL key to make it light The corresponding channel is highlighted in the DES TINATION CH field of the window The channels that can be selected will depend on the channel you selected in step 2 If you want to re select the move destination channel move the cursor to the CLEAR DEST button and press the ENTER key 4 To execute the Move operation move the cursor to the MOVE button and press the ENTER key The settings
513. th Recall Safe el Element no Low Data is lost when you write to the preset library Oiiiiiii ih Index High The unique header Model ID identifies whether the device is a LS9 01111111 il Index Low To calculate the check sum add the bytes starting with the byte after BYTE ch Channel High COUNT LOW and ending with the byte before CHECK SUM take the binary cl Channel Low complement and set bit 7 to 0 Oddddddd dd Data CHECK SUM sum amp Ox7F Bulk Dumps can be received at any time and can be transmitted at any time EOX 11110111 7 End of exclusive when a Bulk Dump Request is received A Bulk Dump is transmitted on the Rx CH channel in response to a Bulk Dump Request In the data portion seven words of 8 bit data are converted into eight words of 7 bit data Conversion from actual data to bulk data d 0 6 actual data b 0 7 bulk data b 0 0 for I 0 1 lt 7 1 if d I amp 0x80 b 0 1 6 D b I 1 d I amp 0x7F Recovery from bulk data to actual data d 0 6 actual data b 0 7 bulk data for 1 0 I7 I b 0 lt lt 1 d I b I 1 0x80 amp b 0 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual 4 1 2 Format PARAMETER REQUEST 4 2 2 Function Name MIDI Data Format Receive FUNCTION NAME Data will be received when PARAMETER CHANGE Rx is on and the Device Store libStr number of both R
514. the ENTER key to access the PREFERENCE popup window where you can view or change the guest s preference set tings PANEL OPERATION AUTO CHANNEL OUTPUT RECRLL zd CUE gt SEL LINK PATCH LAYER SEL LINK STEAL PATCH POPUP WHEN LIST ORDER DIGTRL 1 0 MIDI 170 194 LS9 16 32 Owners Manual This page includes the following items CONFIRMATION field Here you can select whether confirmation messages will appear when you perform scene or patch opera tions e STORE RECALL If these buttons are on a confirmation message will appear when you perform a scene Store or Recall operation respectively PATCH If this button is on a confirmation message will appear when you edit an input patch or output patch STEAL PATCH If this button is on a confirmation message will appear when you edit an input patch or output patch item that is already patched 2 ERROR MESSAGE field Here you can select whether an error message will be displayed when the following problems occur DIGITAL I O When an error is detected in the digital input out put MIDI I O When an error is detected in MIDI transmission reception 3 PANEL OPERATION field Here you can make settings for options related to panel operation AUTO CHANNEL SELECT INPUT AUTO CHANNEL SELECT OUTPUT These specify whether the corresponding channel will be selected when you oper
515. the channel whose balance you want to adjust and edit the desired parameter HA GAIN and fader will not be linked while you are holding down the SEL key However this func tion will not work during the fade of a scene memory recall operation LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Grouping and linking M 125 Copying moving or initializing a channel Copying moving or initializing a channel This section explains how you can copy or move mix parameters between channels or restore the parameters of a specific channel to their default settings Copying the parameters of a chan nel You can copy the mix parameter settings of a channel to another channel When you execute the copy operation the settings will overwrite the parameters of the copy des tination You can copy between the following combinations of channels Between input channels Between the STEREO L R channel and MONO chan nel Between MIX channels Between MATRIX channels 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section press the CHANNEL JOB key repeatedly to access the CH COPY screen of the CHANNEL JOB Screens Initial Data 000 R ADMIN CH and DESTINATION CHs button TARGET MODULE PARAM WITH gt SEND DESTINATION CHs Multipl D SOURCE CH field Indicates the channel that is selected as the copy source 2 CLEAR SOURCE button This button clears the channels shown in the SOURCE CH field and DESTINATION CHs field
516. the cur sor to the CLOSE button and press the ENTER key to close the popup window If an external HA is connected to one of the LS9 s slots you must specify the appropriate input port manually If this is set incorrectly the external HA will not be detected correctly when you patch input ports to input channels 6 To remotely control an external HA move the cursor to the rack in which the external HA you want to control is mounted and press the ENTER key The EXTERNAL HA popup window will appear Here you can remotely control the external HA by using the knobs and buttons in the LS9 s display or the dial etc of the top panel 1 Rack select buttons These switch the rack that is displayed in the EXTER NAL HA popup window 2 48V MASTER If an external HA is connected to the REMOTE con nector the on off status of the master phantom power is shown here Switching this on off is performed on the external HA itself 3 48V buttons These switch phantom power on off for each channel 2 GAIN knobs These indicate the gain of the external HA Move the cursor to the knob and use the dial or the DEC INC keys to adjust the setting 5 HPF knobs ON buttons These controls switch the external HA s built in high pass filter on off and adjust its cutoff frequency e When you newly connect an AD8HR the above screen will reflect the state of the AD8HR s settings Since the ab
517. the following metering points Input channels PRE Immediately before the high pass filter PRE FADER Immediately before the fader POST ON Immediately after the channel on off Output channels PRE EQ Immediately before the attenuator e PRE FADER Immediately before the fader e POST ON Immediately after the channel on off For details on the metering points refer to the block diagram at the end of this manual 3 If you want to hold the peak levels of the level meters move the cursor to the PEAK HOLD button and press the ENTER key to turn it on On off operations of the PEAK HOLD button will apply to both input channels and output channels When you turn this button off the peak level indica tions that had been held will be cleared e You can also assign the PEAK HOLD button on off function to a user defined key gt p 196 e Ifyou turn on METER FOLLOW LAYER in the PREFERENCE screen the same meter screen as the selected layer will be displayed when you press a LAYER key 156 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Chapter 17 Graphic EQ and effects This chapter explains how to use the built in graphic EQ and effects and how to perform remote control operations via the dedicated protocol to control an external head amp Yamaha AD8HR from the L S9 About the virtual rack LS9 lets you insert the built in graphic EQ subsequ
518. the key corresponding to the currently selected bus will blink and the LED of keys corresponding to selectable buses will light For MATRIX buses the 9 16 keys will be dark and cannot be selected 20 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Display In this display you can view and edit all mix parameters as well as various settings Initial Data 000 R ADMIN HOLD DECAY 504m GAIN X 4 0 0 0 2 TIHSERTJ SAF JL ONJ TDIRECT Y MUTE Use the DISPLAY ACCESS section p 19 to select the screen that you want to view Then use the cursor keys of the data entry section gt p 22 to move the cursor to the desired parameter and use the dial or the INC DEC keys to edit the value E Stereo meter Cue section In this section you can view the level of STEREO channel or cue monitor o lt m 2 OVER 0 10000000000000000000000000000010 gt 2 D Stereo meter This is a 32 segment LED meter that indicates the L R channel levels of the STEREO channel While the CUE key of any channel is on this meter will indicate the cue monitor level 2 CUE LED This LED will blink while the CUE key of any channel is on 8 CUE CLEAR key This key clears all cue monitoring that is currently active Top panel 3 SELECTED SEND encoder When an INPUT ST IN
519. the signals sent from input channels to MIX buses and output them to the corresponding output port MATRIX bus STEREO bus or MONO C bus When the LS9 is in the initial state these are assigned to the OMNI OUT jacks or the output channels of the slot s Output channel operations M 0 MIx STI MATRIX CUE 12 1516 LR O 12 78 LR SS rid SS SS SSS SS SS SSS SS SSS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS aak 1 16 INSERT POINT To RACKIN PATCH PRE FADER INSERT OUT To OUTPUT PATCH MIX iL S PRE EQ INSERT OUT INSERT OUT 1 16 YBIPOSTON _ INSERT OUT MIX 101 INSERT IN 1 16 V EQOUT DYNAOUT PRE FADER POST ON METER METER METER METER METER GRMETER LEVEL INSERT INSERT ON INSERT PANONA arr 4BAND COMPAND MIX OUTI 16_ To gt To OUTPUT PATCH EQ EXPAND POST ON To MONITOR SELECT PREEQ POSTEQM ARE FADER m PRE FADER INSERT OUT POST ON TORECORDER IN PATCH Self PRE EQ Self POST EQ MIX13 16 OUT MIX 1 8 9 16 POST EQ M9 CUE ON i 078g PRE FADER PFL POST ON AFL ume ec ME EE ee 3 t LEVEL S E fae PRE FADER on 19 MATRIX MATRIX2 4 8 LEVEL VARI LEVEL CONS 1 To MATAR 0 PRE FADER POST ON
520. tial Data ch 1 000 OSCILLRTOR 7 8 OUTPUT ___ HODE e E e SINE BEREICH 714 80 0 10 0k 0 1 1 ON J 6 10 MATRIX 1 2 STEREO MONO STE D OUTPUT button This switches the oscillator on off 2 MODE field Move the cursor to a button in this field to select the desired type of oscillator 3 Parameter field Here you can adjust the parameters of the oscillator you selected in the MODE field Use the dial or the DEC INC keys to operate the knobs shown in the field 4 Oscillator level This indicates the output level of the oscillator 5 ASSIGN field This selects the buses to which the oscillator signal will be sent If you want to clear all selections move the cursor to the CLEAR ALL button and press the ENTER Key 2 Use the buttons in the MODE field to select the type of signal you want to output You can choose from the following signals SINE WAVE 1CH Sine wave one channel PINK NOISE Pink noise Burst noise intermittently output pink noise BURST NOISE 3 If you want to adjust the oscillator parame ters use the dial or the DEC INC keys to operate the knobs shown in the field The parameters shown in the parameter field will depend on the type of oscillator selected in the MODE field The following table lists the oscillator types and the parameters displayed for each type Parameters LEVEL FREQ LEVEL HPF LPF
521. ting a more natural sound I O Characteristics KNEE hard OUT GAIN 0 0dB Output Level THRESHOLD emo 1 i THRESHOLD 1 1 gt Input Level Input Level gt Time Series Analysis RATIO ce 1 Input signal Output Signal ATTACK RELEASE k l Output Level gt gt Time Time E EXPANDER 9 9 9 An expander attenuates signals below a specified THRESHOLD by a specified RATIO Parameter THRESHOLD dB Range 54 to 0 55 points Description This determines the level of input signal required to trigger the expander 1 0 1 1 121 1 3 1 1 5 1 1 7 1 2 0 1 RATIO 2 5 1 3 0 1 3 5 1 4 0 1 5 0 1 6 0 1 This determines the amount of expansion 8 0 1 10 1 20 1 1 16 points ATTACK ms 0 120 121 points This determines how soon the expander returns to its normal gain once the trigger signal level exceeds the threshold RELEASE ms 44 1kHz 6 ms 46 0 sec 48 2 5 ms 42 3 sec 160 points This determines how soon the signal is expanded once the signal level drops below the threshold The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB OUT GAIN dB 0 0 to 18 0 181 points This sets the expander s output signal level KNEE Hard 1 5
522. tions will be linked Faders will be linked while preserving the difference in level METER FOLLOW LAYER Specifies whether the meter screen will be linked with fader layer selection If this button is on switching the fader layer will cause the meter screen to switch to the corresponding fader layer regardless of which screen had been displayed 3 Turn each button on or off to make the desired preference settings 4 When you ve finished making settings move the cursor to the CLOSE button and press the ENTER key to close the popup window User settings Security LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual J 195 User defined keys User defined keys Here s how you can assign the desired functions to the user defined keys in the USER DEFINED section of the top panel and press these keys to execute the defined function This assignment procedure will define the user defined keys for the user who is currently logged in but if you are logged in as the Administrator you can also make user defined key settings for the Guest account 1 Inthe DISPLAY ACCESS section press the SETUP key repeatedly to access the USER SETUP screen USER DEFINED KEYS popup button Initial Data 000 R ADMIN 5 STORRGE USER Kev PREFERENCE USER DEFINED USER DEFINED n KEYS CUSTOM ERDER LEADER C3 USER LEVEL USER LEVEL 2 Move the cursor to the USER DEFINED KEYS popup buiton and
523. to adjust the proportion between the signal level sent from that channel to the STEREO L R bus and the signal level sent to the MONO C bus 14 Use the TO ST PAN knob in the TO STEREO MONO popup window to set the panning of the signal sent from the input channel to the STEREO L R bus and the MONO C bus If the CSR knob is set to 0 operating the TO ST PAN knob of an INPUT channel will change the signal levels sent to the STEREO L R bus and MONO C bus as shown in the following illustration In this case the TO ST PAN knob will operate as a conventional PAN knob and no signal is sent to the MONO C bus Signal level Signal level Signal level Signal level Sending the signal from an input channel to the STEREO MONO bus Signal sent to the STEREO L bus Signal sent to the STEREO R bus TO ST PAN knob Ifa ST IN channel is selected operating the TO ST BALANCE knob will change the signal levels sent from the ST IN L R channels to the STEREO L R bus and MONO C bus as shown in the following illustration In this case the PAN encoder will oper ate as a conventional BALANCE knob and no signal is sent to the MONO C bus N Signal sent from the N ST IN L channel to the STEREO L bus TO ST BALANCE knob Signal sent from the ST IN R channel to the STEREO R bus L C R TO ST BALANCE knob If the CSR knob is set to 100 operat
524. to the change directory button and press the ENTER key Initial Data 000 R ADMIN A SONG TITLE TITLE hd RRTIST 001 enc REHRIN 00 04 36 gt il 01 YAMAHA When you move to a different folder in this way that folder will automatically be selected as the recording destination NOTE The folders that can be selected are restricted to the SONGS folder inside the YPE folder and folders located below the SONGS folder The LS9 can recognize a file name that is a maximum of 64 characters If the file name is longer than this the desired file may not play correctly A maximum of 300 songs can be managed in a single direc tory A maximum of 64 songs can be managed in a subdirec tory Playing back audio files from USB memory 4 Operate the dial or the DEC INC keys so that the desired file is shown in the center of the list 5 Move the cursor to the MODE button and press the ENTER key to select the play back mode The setting will alternate between the following four modes each time you press the ENTER key o Starting with the currently selected song in the title list songs will play back consecutively and playback will stop at the last song in the list e EL Starting with the currently selected song in the title list songs will play back consecutively until the last song then playback will return to the first song and will continue until you stop playback
525. ton Appendices EQ Library List Parameter Title LOW L MID H MID HIGH PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 3 5 dB 3 5 dB 0 0 dB 4 0 dB 01 Bass Drum 1 100Hz 265 Hz 1 06 kHz 5 30 kHz Q 1 25 10 0 0 90 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING LPF 8 0dB 7 0 dB 6 0 ON 02 Bass Drum 2 800Hz 400Hz 2 50 kHz 12 5 kHz Q 1 4 4 5 22 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 0 5dB 0 0 3 0 dB 4 5 dB 03 Snare Drum 1 132 Hz 1 00 kHz 3 15 kHz 5 00 kHz Q 1 25 4 5 0 11 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING 1 5 8 5dB 2 5dB 4 0 dB 04 Snare Drum 2 180Hz 335Hz 2 36 kHz 4 00 kHz Q 10 0 0 70 0 10 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING 2 0dB 7 5 2 0dB 1 0 dB 05 Tom tom 1 F 212 Hz 670 Hz 4 50 kHz 6 30 kHz 1 4 10 0 1 25 0 28 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 2 0 0 0 dB 0 0 dB 3 0 dB 06 Cymbal F 106 Hz 425 Hz 1 06 kHz 13 2 kHz Q 8 0 0 90 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF G 4 0dB 2 5dB 1 0dB 0 5 dB 07 High Hat 95 0 Hz 425 Hz 2 80 kHz 7 50 kHz Q 0 50 1 0 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 4 5 0 0 dB 2 0 dB 0 0 dB 08 Percussion F 100 Hz 400 Hz 2 80 kHz 17 0 kHz Q 4
526. tor to connect it to a Windows computer NOTE The network address can be changed only by users who have administrative privileges For details on network settings refer to the LS9 Editor installation guide which can be downloaded from the following Yamaha website http www yamahaproaudio com 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section press the SETUP key repeatedly to access the MISC SETUP screen DRTE TIME DRTE 07 31 2006 16 10 30 LINK MODE CONSOLE CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS LOCK CPU V1 00 SCREEN SCREEN PANEL LAMP BATTERY LS9 32 7 NETWORK field This shows the values of network related parameters 2 NETWORK SET button This accesses the NETWORK popup window where you can make network related settings 3 MAC ADDRESS field This is the MAC Machine Access Control address specified for identifying a host within a network This field is only for display and cannot be edited 2 Move the cursor to the NETWORK SET but ton in the NETWORK field and press the ENTER key to access the NETWORK popup window VERE IP RESS NET K LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual D IP ADDRESS field This is a number IP address assigned to identify each device on the Internet or within an LAN Local Area Network 2 GATEWAY ADDRESS field This specifies the number gateway address that iden tifies a device gateway that allows data of
527. ttons refer to Using the tool buttons p 35 Graphic EQ and effects 4 Effect settings can be stored and recalled at any time using the effect library gt p 174 LS9 16 32 Owners Manual 171 About the internal effects 172 Using the Tap Tempo function tempo is a function that lets you specify the delay time of a delay effect or the modulation speed of a modu lation effect by striking a key at the desired interval To use the Tap function you must first assign Tap Tempo to a user defined key and then operate that user defined key 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section press the SETUP key repeatedly to access the USER SETUP screen within the SETUP screens Initial Data 000 R ADMIN SURI 4T USER Administrator o PREFERENCE USER DETI NED USER CUSTOM FADER CUSTOM FADER LAYER LAYER USER LEVEL v USER LEVEL USER DEFINED KEYS popup button 2 Move the cursor to the USER DEFINED KEYS popup button and press the ENTER key to access the USER DEFINED KEYS popup window The USER DEFINED KEYS popup window lets you assign functions to user defined keys 1 12 SENDS ON FADER MUTE MASTER MUTE GROUP 2 TAP TEMPO CURRENT PAGE D User defined keys popup buttons 3 Move the cursor to the popup button for the user defined key to which you want to assign the Tap Tempo function and press the ENTER key The USER DEF
528. u recall a scene it takes a certain amount of time for the faders to stop Could you have specified a fade time gt p 143 The panel LEDs or LCD display are too dark too bright O This can be adjusted the MISC SETUP screen gt p 217 Signal level of a specific frequency is low O Could the EQ gain be turned down excessively O Routing a signal through a GEQ or effect will delay it relative to other signals If this signal is mixed with the signal via a different signal path a comb filtering effect will cause the level of a specific frequency to be decreased Can t control an external head amp AD8HR O Is the external head amp connected to the specified port O Is the audio output signal of the external head amp being input via an I O card to SLOT 1 3 O Is the input port of the external head amp set correctly O Could there be a problem with the cable that connects the LS9 and external head amp Are you using a D sub 9 pin cross cable Can t control the LS9 by LS9 Editor In the LCD display there are some black points unlit or white points always lit O Refer to LS9 Editor installation guide on our web site http www yamahaproaudio com O Unfortunately this is a common characteristic of TFT LCDs and not a malfunction Appendices LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual 271 General Specifications General Specifications Sig
529. u switch between MIX CUE mode and LAST CUE mode in the CUE MODE section You can also assign the same function as the CLEAR CUE button to a user defined key 196 150 f LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Chapter 15 Talkback Oscillator This chapter explains how to use the talkback and oscillator functions About talkback and oscillator Talkback is a function that sends the signal of the selected INPUT jack to the desired bus This is used mainly to convey directions from the operator to the performers and staff The LS9 also con tains an oscillator that allows a sine wave or pink noise to the desired bus and this can be used to check external equipment or to test the response of the room The diagram below shows the signal flow of the talkback and oscillator Go ee TALKBACK INPUT1 1602 INPUT M 0 MX ST MATRIX CUE 12 1516 LR C 12 78 LR 48V MASTER 48V 2 90 SELEECT on 48V METER INPUT m 1 1 6 32 r22 OSCILLATOR osc LEVEL METER ny Sine Wave 9v Pink Noise Burst Noise Bh HPF LPF ee Using talkback Here s how a signal received at an INPUT jack 1 16 1 32 can be output to the desired bus 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section press the MONITOR button repeatedly to access the TALKBACK screen In the TALKBAC
530. u to enter a name Tabs These tabs switch the items that are shown in the win dow LS9 16 32 Owners Manual J 55 Specifying the channel name icon 5 To select an icon for this channel move the 9 Use the SEL keys to select another input cursor to the icon button and press the channel and specify its icon and channel ENTER key name in the same way The window display will change as follows While the PATCH NAME popup window is displayed you can use the SEL keys to switch the channel that you re operating 10 When you ve finished entering information move the cursor to the CLOSE button or the x symbol in the upper right of the win dow and press the ENTER key You will return to the SELECTED CH VIEW screen D Icon select buttons These buttons select the icon that is used for this chan nel 2 Sample name select buttons These buttons select sample names that are related to the currently selected icon When you press a button its sample name will be entered in the channel name field 3 Icon background color select buttons These buttons let you choose one of eight colors as the background color for the icon 6 Use the icon select buttons and the icon background color select buttons to select the icon and icon color you want to use for that channel The selected icon is shown in the icon button in the upper part of the window 7 If desired use the sample name select but t
531. uced This means that if Recall Safe is enabled for one of several channels included in a link group or one of two MIX MATRIX channels set to stereo the parameter settings of that channel may differ from those of the other channel s when you recall a scene In such cases the applicable parameter will be automatically re linked the next time it is operated gt Recall Safe function can be used conjunction with the Focus function gt p 139 Channels or parameters that excluded from Recall operations by either Focus or Recall Safe will not be recalled By performing the Recall operation while holding down the SEL key of a channel for which Recall Safe is disabled you can temporarily enable the Recall Safe settings for that chan nel Using the Fade function Fade is a function that smoothly changes the faders of specified channels to their new values over a specified duration when you recall a scene This is convenient when you want to obtain a fade in out effect or when you want the levels to transition smoothly between two scenes The settings of the Fade function are made independently for each scene 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section press the SCENE MEMORY key repeatedly to access the SCENE FADE screen In this screen you can make various settings for the Fade function The screen contains the following items XE 003 SCENE TE FADE TIME SCENE 005 STORE RECALL UNDO
532. uffer at the location of a different scene number Scene numbers following the inserted position will be moved backward For details on how to use this refer to Inserting a scene gt p 138 6 UNDO button This button cancels the most recently executed scene editing operation If you ve accidentally cleared an important scene you can press this key to return to the state prior to editing the scene 2 Perform the desired editing operations For details on the procedure refer to the explanations that follow 136 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Copying pasting a scene Here s how to copy a scene into buffer memory and then paste it to a different scene number 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section press the SCENE MEMORY key to access any one of the SCENE MEMORY screens 2 Make sure that the cursor is located some where other than the constant display area and use the dial or the DEC INC keys to select the copy source scene number 3 Move the cursor to the COPY button and press the ENTER key A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Copy opera tion CONF IRMAT I ON 2 Selected Scene CRNCEL 4 To execute the Copy operation move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The scene you selected in step 2 will be saved in the buffer memory Be aware that if you copy cut another scene before you paste the other scene will be overwritten to the buffer memory 5 Make s
533. ur bands HIGH HIGH MID LOW MID and LOW DYNAMICS 1 This is a dynamics processor that can be used as a gating ducking expander or compressor DYNAMICS 2 This is a dynamics processor that can be used as a com pressor compander or de esser LEVEL Adjusts the input level of the input channel ON on off Turns the input channel on off If this is off the corre sponding channel is muted PAN This adjusts the panning of the signal sent from the INPUT channel to the STEREO bus If necessary this pan setting can also be applied to signals sent to two MIX buses that are assigned as stereo BALANCE On ST IN channels the BALANCE is used instead of PAN The BALANCE adjusts the volume balance of the left right signals sent from the ST IN channel to the STE REO bus If necessary you can also apply this balance set ting to the signal sent to two MIX buses that are assigned as stereo LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual LCR Left Center Right This sends the signal of the input channel to the STEREO bus MONO bus as a three channel signal that adds a C Center channel to the L R channels TO MIX ON OFF MIX MIX send on off This is an on off switch for the signal sent from the input channel to MIX buses 1 16 There are two types of MIX buses FIXED types whose send level is fixed and VARI types whose send level can be adjusted You can switch between FIXED type and VARI type in sets of two adjacent odd
534. ure that the cursor is located some where other than the constant display area and use the dial or the DEC INC keys to select the paste destination scene number 6 Move the cursor to the PASTE button and press the ENTER key A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Paste opera tion CONF IRMAT I ON Paste Scene CRNCEL A copied scene can also be inserted p 138 NOTE If nothing has been stored in the buffer memory the PASTE button is not available 7 To execute the Paste operation move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The scene stored in the buffer memory will be pasted to the scene number you selected in step 5 If you decide to cancel the Paste operation use the CANCEL button instead of the OK button Be aware that when you paste to a scene number in which a scene has already been stored the existing scene will be overwritten Read only scenes or write protected scenes cannot be pasted Editing scene memories Here s how to clear a specified scene 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section press the SCENE MEMORY key to access any one of the SCENE MEMORY screens 2 Make sure that the cursor is located some where other than the constant display area and use the dial or the DEC INC keys to select the scene number that you want to clear 3 Move the cursor to the CLEAR button and press the ENTER key A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Clear o
535. ursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section press the The CONSOLE LOCK screen will appear the Con SETUP key repeatedly to access the MISC sole Lock function will be enabled and all controls SETUP screen will become inoperable Initial Data 000 R ADMIN e If an image file is loaded from USB memory the CONSOLE SC SETUP LOCK screen will show that image MIDI DRTE TIME SET aa 07 31 2006 TIME 16 10 30 NETHORK LINK MDDE IP RDDRESS GATEWAY RDDRI CONSOLE CONTRRST BRIGHTNESS LOCK CPU U1 00 T SCREEN SCREEN PRNEL LRMP Je lejeee All console operations have been suspended You may 05 t this time CONSOLE LOCK button 2 Move the cursor to the CONSOLE LOCK button and press the ENTER key If you are logged in as a user for whom a password is set a keyboard window will appear allowing you to enter the password For details on entering a password refer to Assigning name gt p 34 CONSOLE LOCK Press key to cancel AUTHOR ZR 033 003 3 163 7 060 87 10 a pe e uy RES HI User settings Security m SHIFT LOCK LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual J 197 Console lock 198 Unlocking the console 1 When the CONSOLE LOCK screen is dis played press the ENTER key If you are logg
536. us values for FB GAIN 99 to 99 normal phase feedback minus AMP SIMULATE values for reverse phase feedback LSH F 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency One input two output guitar amp simulator LSH G 12 0 to 12 0 dB Low shelving filter gain po Range Description EQF 100 Hz 8 00 kHz EQ peaking type frequency TYPE Guitar amp simulation type EQG 12 0 to 12 0 EQ peaking type gain pst DSTI DST2 OVDI Distortion type DST distortion Fa d 10 070 10 EQ pe king type bandwidth OVD2 CRUNCH OVD overdrive HSH F 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz High shelving filter frequency DRIVE 0 100 Distortion drive HSH G 12 0to 12 0 dB High shelving filter gain MASTER 0 100 Master volume 1 6 0 ms 46 0 s fs 44 1 kHz 5 0 ms 42 3 s fs 48 kHz BASS 0 100 Bass tone control MIDDLE 0 100 Middle tone control TREBLE 0 100 High tone control N GATE 0 20 Noise reduction CABDEP 0 100 Speaker cabinet simulation depth EQF 100 Hz 8 00 kHz EQ peaking type frequency EQG 12 0to 12 0 dB EQ peaking type gain EQQ 10 0 0 10 EQ peaking type bandwidth 1 STK M1 STK M2 THRASH MIDBST CMB PG CMB VR CMB DX CMB TW MINI FLAT LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Appendices 237 Effects Parameters 238 E DYNA PHASER Two input two output dynamically controlled phaser Parameter Range Description Control source input signal or SOURCE INPUTAMIDI MIDI
537. utput port and specify the channel name and icon The output port assigned to that channel is shown inside the button For channels to which two or more output ports are patched only one will be shown as a representative To select the output port and specify the channel name or icon move the cursor to the output port select popup but ton and press the ENTER key to access the PATCH NAME popup window gt p 69 gt If you want to make output port settings for eight channels at time use the PATCH popup button in the screen to access the HA PATCH popup window gt p 95 If you ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window gt p 194 you also access the above popup window by pressing the SELECTED CHANNEL section HA GAIN encoder Setting the pan balance To adjust the pan balance of the signal sent from that channel to the STEREO bus use the PAN encoder of the SELECTED CHANNEL section and the PAN field of the SELECTED CH VIEW screen The PAN field includes the following items D PAN popup button This button displays the TO STEREO MONO popup win dow where you can make pan balance settings for eight channels at a time LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual PAN BAL knob The following parameter will change according to the channel that is selected INPUT channel TO STEREO PAN ST IN channel TO STEREO BALANCE MIX MONO x
538. utton and press the ENTER key The parameters of the selected channel s will be ini tialized After initialization the TARGET CHs field will return to a state in which nothing is selected LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Chapter 13 Scene memory This chapter explains how to perform scene memory operations On the 159 settings such as the mix parameters and input output port patching can be assigned a name and stored into memory and later recalled from memory as a scene Scenes are numbered with a scene number in the range of 000 300 Of these scenes scene 000 is a read only scene that restores the mix parameters to their default state and scenes 001 300 are rewritable Each scene contains the position of the top panel faders and ON keys as well as the following parameters Input output port patching Pan balance settings Bus settings Insert direct out settings Head amp settings On off status and send level of signals sent to MIX buses EQ settings On off status and send level of signals sent to MATRIX buses Dynamics 1 and 2 settings Mute group settings Rack GEQ effect settings Channel link settings Using scene memories This section explains how to store and recall the LS9 s mix parameters as scenes Scene memory 6 Scene number and title Storing a scene To store the current mix settings as a scene memory use the SCENE MEMORY screen
539. utton in the HA field of the screen and press the ENTER key The 48V button will turn on red and phantom power will be supplied to the corresponding INPUT jack NOTE e If you want to use phantom power you must first turn ON the 48V MASTER ON OFF button located in the SYSTEM SETUP screen 7 To switch the phase of each channel between normal and reverse phase move the cursor to the button in the HA field and press the ENTER key The button will change from black to red and the phase of the corresponding channel will be reversed 8 If you want to operate the HA of a channel that is not currently shown in the popup window use the SEL key to select that channel and then make settings for it For example if INPUT channels 1 8 are shown in the popup window pressing the INPUT channel 9 SEL key will change the popup window to INPUT channels 9 16 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Connections and setup e 49 Setup required when starting up Sending an input channel signal to the STEREO bus Here we explain how to adjust the level of a signal sent from a gain adjusted input channel to the STEREO bus adjust its pan INPUT channel or balance ST IN chan nel and monitor it from external speakers connected to the STEREO channel The following procedure will let you check whether the mic instrument and main speakers are connected appropriately When setting the level or pan balance of a signal being sen
540. ve load data 200 Loading a file from USB memory Here s how to load an LS9 settings file extension L9A from USB memory into the LS9 You can use the same procedure to load the following files other than the settings files Extension Type Contents of file L9A ALL LS9 internal settings file L9U KEY LS9 user authentication key XML XML XML file for displaying help TXT TXT Text file for displaying help Image file for display in the CONSOLE BME LOCK screen N CAUTION Press the HOME key to access the SELECTED CH VIEW screen and use the SEL keys to select the INPUT channel from which you want to take a direct output Before you load turn off the power of the equipment connected to the LS9 and or lower the volume so that there will not be a problem even if a signal is output from the LS9 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section press the SETUP key repeatedly to access the USER SETUP screen SAVE LOAD button Initial Data 000 RI ADMIN CURRENT USER Administrator 52 STORAGE PREFERENCE USER DEFINED M KEYS weston VERDER USER LEVEL USER LEVEL LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual 2 Move the cursor to the SAVE LOAD button and press the ENTER key The SAVE LOAD popup window will appear If an image file is saved in USB memory the CON SOLE LOCK screen can display that image gt p 198 DELETE MAKE DIR FREE 512 234 5 lt 96 gt Ga SE
541. ve to a level higher than YPE SONGS No Controllable Knob Your operation has been ignored because there is no parameter that corresponds to the knob you operated No Corresponding Help Items A section in the HELP data cannot be found No Response from External HA No response from an external AD8HR Page Bookmarked The current screen or popup has been bookmarked Password Changed The password has been changed PlayBack Failed Recorder is Busy Power Supply Fan has Malfunctioned Audio file link playback is not possible because recording is in progress The cooling fan of the internal power supply has stopped If a malfunction has occurred please con tact your Yamaha dealer Processing Aborted Processing was interrupted Recorder Busy Operation Aborted Operation of the JPN button was cancelled because time is required for recorder processing Saving Aborted Scene xxx is Empty Saving to the USB memory has been interrupted No data has been stored in the scene you attempted to recall or the data has been damaged so that it cannot be recalled Scene xxx is Protected You attempted to overwrite store a protected scene Scene xxx is Read Only You attempted to overwrite store a read only scene LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual Warning Error Messages Message Meaning SLOT x Data Framing Error SLOT x Data Overrun Invalid
542. will return to the SCENE PLAYBACK LINK screen The title or file name of the file you selected will be displayed in the center of the song list Alternatively if you select the CANCEL button instead of the OK button the settings will be discarded and you will return to the SCENE PLAYBACK LINK screen 8 Move the cursor to the LINK field and press the ENTER key to turn on the link to the audio file The PLAY indicator will appear in the LINK field The PLAY indicator will also appear in the STATUS field of the SCENE LIST screen 002 Scene 02 ADMIN SCENE PLAYBACK LINK copy Initial Data Chec STORE RECALL SONG TITLE JPN 9 Repeat steps 3 8 to assign audio files to other scenes in the same way As other ways to control audio file playback you can use MIDI MMC commands for remote control from an external device gt p 186 or assign the DIRECT PLAY function to a user defined key and play back the audio file directly gt p 196 1 Recall a scene to which you ve linked an audio file After the offset time has elapsed the audio file will play only once wj When you recall the scene the constant display area will show a count down until the offset time has elapsed You cannot play back during recording or in record ready mode f another song is playing when scene recall occurs the cur rently playing song will stop when recall occurs regardless of the offset time setting The linke
543. window will show the value Using the SELECTED CH VIEW screen Use the cursor keys of the DATA ENTRY section to move the cursor to the GAIN knob in the screen and use the dial or the DEC INC keys to adjust the HA gain In either case the level of that channel is shown by the meter LEDs in the channel module section If the meter does not move even though a signal is being input check whether the INPUT jack is con nected appropriately and whether the meter detection point might have been set to POST ON immediately after the channel on off p 155 The PAD will be internally switched on or off when the HA gain is adjusted between 14 dB and 13 dB Keep in mind that noise may be generated if there is a difference between the Hot and Cold output impedance of the external device connected to the INPUT connector when using phantom power 6 To make HA settings for another channel use the SEL keys to select another chan nel and make settings in the same way Making HA settings for a group of eight channels Here s how to access a popup window where you can make HA settings for a group of eight channels 1 Make sure that a mic or instrument is con nected to the INPUT jack p 41 2 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section HOME key The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the display REL GAIN KNEE TINSERT SAFE LUN vDIRECT MUTE D HA popup button 2 GAIN knob 3 Use the keys o
544. wner s Manual J 91 About the custom fader layer Assigning channels to the custom fader layer Of the above fader layers channels are pre assigned to 1 2 3 4 fader layer 1 16 1 32 fader layer 17 32 33 64 and the master fader layer gt p 28 SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL However you are free to assign desired channels to the custom fader layer that is recalled when you press the E 2 2 E LAYER CUSTOM FADER key ee EIS ese ee see oe For example INPUT channels belonging to different fader layers could be assigned to consecutive modules so that cas c2 2 2 Co C3 30 C3 30 C3 60 C60 they can be operated together Alternatively input chan un c3 cae C18 8 mJ C330 C330 C330 C330 C3 60 C3 60 C3 60 C3 60 nels and output channels can both be assigned so that you ON ON ON ON ON ON could simultaneously operate the send level from an INPUT channel to a specific MIX bus at the same time that you adjust the master level of that MIX bus itself n n n n n n 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 mm pus 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 20 20
545. x CH and SUB STATUS are matched The data will be Recall LibRcl echoed when PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO is on The corresponding Unknown Factor Store libUnStr parameter will be changed via PARAMETER CHANGE immediately the data is Unknown Factor Recall LibUnRcl received Store Undo only Scene LibStrUd STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message Recall Undo only Scene LibRclUd ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 3n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel 4 2 3 Module Name GROUP ID 00111110 3E Digital mixer MODEL ID 00010010 12 LS9 MODULE NAME Scene SCENE DATA Category Input EQ INEQ DATA eh Element no High Output EQ QUTEQ el Element no Low Dynamics DYNA Oiiiiiii ih Index no High GEQ CEQ 01111111 il Index Low Effect EFFECT ch Channel High cl Channel Low Function Number channel 1 tx rx EOX 11110111 r7 End ofexclusive LibStr SCENE 1 300 5 tx rx INPUT EQ LIB 41 199 1 tx rx 4 1 3 Data category EQ LIB 4 199 2 3 4 tx rx Dynamics LIB 42 199 1 2 3 4 8 tx rx DATA CATEGORY NAME GEQ LIB 1 199 6 tx rx 0x01 00000001 im TM Backup EFFECT LIB 58 199 7 tx rx LibUnStr SCENE 1 300 0 tx INPUT EQ LIB 41 199 0 tx OUTPUT EQ LIB 4 199 0 tx 4 2 FUNCTION CALL LIBRARY STORE RECALL Dynamics LIB 42 199 6 is 4 2 1 Format PARAMETER CHAN
546. xclude a specific channel from all mute groups The channel display field shows the channels that are temporarily excluded from the mute groups For more about mute safe refer to Using the Mute Safe function gt p 123 5 MUTE GROUP MASTER buttons 1 8 These buttons switch muting on off for mute groups 1 8 2 To select the mute group to which you want to assign channels move the cursor to one of the 1 8 buttons and press the ENTER key 3 Press the SEL key of the input channels output channels you may select more than one that you want to assign The SEL keys of the assigned channels will light In the channel display field in the screen the correspond ing channels will also be highlighted in red To cancel an assignment press a lit SEL key once again to make it go dark LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual 4 Assign channels to other mute groups in the same way You are free to assign the same channel to more than one mute group 5 To mute the channels assigned to a mute group move the cursor to the MUTE GROUP MASTER 1 8 button for the desired mute group and press the ENTER key multiple selections are allowed The selected MUTE GROUP MASTER button will light and all channels belonging to that mute group will be muted At this time the ON key of the muted channels will blink 6 To defeat muting for a mute group move the cursor to the MUTE GROUP MASTER button that you turned on in step 5
547. y and G amount of boost cut settings for each band LOW L MID H MID and HIGH Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section 5 To operate the EQ switch the EQ ON OFF button on and use the EQ Q EQ FREQUENCY and EQ GAIN knobs of the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the center frequency and the amount of boost cut Use the EQ HIGH EQ HIGH MID EQ LOW MID and EQ LOW keys to select the band you want to operate Alternatively move the cursor to the knobs of the EQ field in the screen and use the dial or the DEC INC keys To make detailed EQ settings move the cursor to the EQ popup button or the knobs of the EQ field and press the ENTER key to access the ATT HPF EQ popup window For details on the popup window gt p 115 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual J 87 Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section 88 wr gt You can also use the cursor keys to switch bands e If you ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window gt p 194 you also access the above popup window by pressing an EQ encoder in the SELECTED CHANNEL section e The type of the LOW band EQ or HIGH band EQ cannot be switched in the SELECTED CH VIEW screen If necessary you can access the ATT HPF EQ popup window and switch the EQ type e If the HIGH band EQ type is set to Low Pass Filter the HIGH band Q knob will not be displayed and the GAIN knob will function as an on off swi
548. y items 9 To change the event assignment for each program number move the cursor to the popup button for the corresponding event in the list and press the ENTER key The PROGRAM CHANGE EVENT popup window will appear In this window you can specify the event assigned to each program number This popup window contains the following items MIDI PROGRAM CHANGE CHRANK1 12 Select Prosram Chanse Parameters LIBRARY NAME CANCEL D TYPE field Select the type of event The following table lists the events you can select Item Content NO ASSIGN No assignment SCENE Scene memory recall operations T Effect library recall operations for racks 5 8 5 8 only if an effect is mounted 2 LIBRARY NAME field Select the number and title of the scene or library item to recall If you selected SCENE in the TYPE field this shows the scene number and its title If you selected RACK 5 8 this shows the library number and its title 10 Use the TYPE field to select the type of event you want to assign and use the LIBRARY NAME field to select the scene library number that will be recalled To select an item use the dial or the DEC INC keys Move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key to finalize the changes and close the PROGRAM CHANGE EVENT popup window 182 LS9 16 32 Owner s Manual 11 Assign events to other program numbers in the same way With these s
549. y outputting an INPUT channel 103 10 USB memory recorder 105 About the USB memory recorder 105 Assigning channels to the input output of the recorder 106 Recording to USB 108 Playing back audio files from USB memory 110 Editing the title list 112 Linking scene recall with audio file playback 113 11 EQ and Dynamics 115 About EQ and 115 Using EQ 115 Using dynamics eese 117 Using the EQ Dynamics libraries 120 EQ UDAY ete 120 Dynamics liDrary enit tei 120 12 Grouping and linking 121 About mute groups 121 Using mute groups eere 121 Using the MUTE GROUP screen to operate mute 121 Using the SELECTED CH VIEW screen to specify mute 122 Using the Mute Safe function 123 The Channel Link function 124 Linking the desired input channels 124 Copying moving or initializing a channel 126 Copying the parameters of a channel 126 Moving the parameters
550. y switch to SENDS ON FADER mode for a specific MIX bus or quickly return to the previous state You can also use the HOME key to cancel SENDS ON FADER mode In SENDS ON FADER mode when the send destina tion is a MIX bus the STEREO MASTER module will operate differently depending on the selected fader layer Fader layer Function 1 16 1 32 17 32 Tm 33 64 Send destination MIX channel module MASTER CUS STEREO channel however the fader TOM FADER and ON key will do nothing NOTE If you switch the fader layer from 1 16 1 32 17 32 33 64 or CUSTOM FADER to MASTER while in SENDS ON FADER mode when the send destination is a MIX bus SENDS ON FADER mode will be cancelled You cannot operate the fader or ON key of a channel that is not a send source a channel that does not have a MIX SEND parameter or of a channel that is not a send destination bus master Chapter 6 Output channel operations This chapter explains operations for output channels MIX channels MATRIX channels STEREO channels MONO channels Signal flow for output channels The output channel section takes the signals sent from the input channels to the various buses processes them with EQ and dynamics and sends them to output ports or other buses The fol lowing types of output channel are provided channels 1 1Gc c scoccoccc000000000000000000000000000000000000000 These channels process
551. you turn on the ALL button all other buttons of the SAFE PARAMETER field will be turned off Using the Recall Safe function If a STEREO MONO channel is selected With the exception of the types of button that are dis played this is the same as for an input channel BTE Initial Data STL 000 R ADMIN RECALL SAFE SEL to se TRRGET CH and choose Parame for RECALL SAFE GLOBAL CH1 8 CH9 16 17 24 2 5 CH33 40 CH4 1 45 CH49 56 57 64 5 EXT YES Rn RACK MIX1 8 MIX9 16 MTRX1 8 ST MONO i Sats These buttons correspond to the following parameters Button name Corresponding parameters ALL All parameters EQ EQ settings including ATT DYNA 1 Dynamics 1 settings MTRX ON On off status of signals sent to MATRIX buses MTRX SEND Send levels of signals sent to MATRIX buses FADER Fader positions CH ON On off status of ON keys If a MIX channel is selected Use the buttons in the lower part of the SAFE PARAMETER field except for the ALL button to select the parameters that will be subject to Recall Safe multiple selections are allowed In addition you can use the WITH MIX SEND button to enable Recall Safe for the on off status and send level of the signals sent from input channels to MIX buses If you want all parameters shown in the lower part of the field to be subject to Recall Safe turn on the ALL button this is the de

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

RP-ADAC1 ユーザーズマニュアル 第1.0版  HILL-ROM Basic Care Electric Bed Service Manual  SE FORMER EN ODONTO-STOMATOLOGIE  Instruction Manual  IS4K User Manual  Owner`s Installation & Operation Manual  Numark Industries KMX02 Karaoke Machine User Manual  EEE 101 SPEEDY-33 EXPERIMENTS  Rinnai EX08C (RHFE-202FTA) User's Manual  Fujitsu LIFEBOOK A512  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file